Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
2020-03-16 (Regular) Meeting Agenda Packet
Please note: If you have a disability and need auxiliary aids or services, please notify the City of Englewood (303- 762-2405) at least 48 hours in advance of when services are needed. 1000 Englewood Pkwy – Community Room Englewood, CO 80110 AGENDA City Council Regular Meeting Monday, March 16, 2020 ♦ 7:00 PM The Regular City Council meeting of March 16th will be held in the Community Room. For safety reasons, there will be no public comment during the Regular Meeting. However, if you submit your comments in writing to the City Clerk's Office by 5:00 p.m. Tuesday, March 17, they will be entered into the meeting record. For those planning to attend the meeting, please follow health experts’ guidelines and maintain a six- foot distance between yourself and others. To the best extent possible, avoid touching surfaces in public places, including elevator buttons, door handles, handrails, etc. Refrain from shaking hands with others. Use a tissue or your sleeve to cover your hand or finger if you must touch something. Wash your hands frequently and avoid touching your face. Remember to cough or sneeze into your arm sleeves. Your safety is our utmost concern. For more information on how to protect yourself and for more information about the city’s response, please visit our resource center at englewoodco.gov/coronavirus. #COVID19Colorado #CoronaVirusUpdates #CityofEnglewood 1.Call to Order 2.Invocation 3.Pledge of Allegiance 4.Roll Call 5.Consideration of Minutes of Previous Session a.Minutes of the Regular City Council Meeting of March 2, 2020. City Council Regular - 02 Mar 2020 - Minutes - Pdf 6.Appointments, Communications, Proclamations, and Recognition a.Human Resources Best In Class Award Recognition b.Emerging Leaders Program by the Small Business Administration Recognition c.Resolution appointing members to Public Library Board Pdf d.Resolution appointing members to Code Enforcement Advisory Committee Pdf 7.Recognition of Scheduled Public Comment For safety reasons, there will be no public comment during the Regular Meeting. However, if you submit your comments in writing to the City Clerk's Office by 5:00 p.m. Englewood City Council Regular Agenda March 16, 2020 Please note: If you have a disability and need auxiliary aids or services, please notify the City of Englewood (303- 762-2405) at least 48 hours in advance of when services are needed. Tuesday, March 17, they will be entered into the meeting record. a.Benjamin Ben-David, an Englewood resident, will address Council regarding community safety. b.Jerry Walker, an Englewood resident, will address Council regarding accountability. c.Ida May Nicholl, an Englewood resident, will address Council regarding history. d.Kathleen Bailey, an Englewood resident, will address Council. e.Doug Cohn, an Englewood resident, will address Council regarding Englewood history. 8.Recognition of Unscheduled Public Comment For safety reasons, there will be no public comment during the Regular Meeting. However, if you submit your comments in writing to the City Clerk's Office by 5:00 p.m. Tuesday, March 17, they will be entered into the meeting record. 9.Consent Agenda Items a.Approval of Ordinances on First Reading b.Approval of Ordinances on Second Reading. i.CB 8 - An Ordinance adopting the updated Storm Drainage Criteria Manual Pdf Staff recommends City Council approve, by Ordinance, the 2020 Englewood Storm Drainage Criteria Manual. Staff: Capital Projects and Engineering Manager Tim Hoos ii.CB 5 - An Ordinance adopting the updated Engineering Design and Construction Standards. Staff: Capital Projects and Engineering Manager Tim Hoos Pdf Staff recommends City Council approve, by Ordinance, the updated Engineering Design and Construction Standards. c.Resolutions and Motions i.Motion to Approve Findings of Fact in Case 2019-12, 3146 South Pennsylvania Street Pdf Staff recommends City Council approve, by Motion, the basis for their decision in the Findings of Fact in Case 2019-12 regarding urban lot development. Staff: Planner I Will Charles 10.Public Hearing Items 11.Ordinances, Resolutions and Motions a.Approval of Ordinances on First Reading Englewood City Council Regular Agenda March 16, 2020 Please note: If you have a disability and need auxiliary aids or services, please notify the City of Englewood (303- 762-2405) at least 48 hours in advance of when services are needed. i.CB 11 - 2nd IGA amendment between Arapahoe County 911 Authority and COE Pdf Staff recommends City Council approve a Bill for an Ordinance authorizing a second amendment to an Intergovernmental Agreement between the Arapahoe County 911 Authority and the City of Englewood. Staff: Police Commander Vance Fender b.Approval of Ordinances on Second Reading c.Resolutions and Motions i.Resolution to Establish Short Term Rental Fees Pdf Staff recommends City Council approve, by Resolution, the proposed short term rental fees. Staff: Planning Manager Wade Burkholder ii.2020 Storm Water Drainage Utility Fund Budget Supplemental Appropriation Pdf Staff recommends City Council approve, by Resolution, a 2020 budget supplemental appropriation in the amount of $77,831.00 for operational staffing needs within the Storm Water Drainage Utility Fund. Staff: Public Works Director Maria D'Andrea 12.General Discussion a.Mayor's Choice i.Formation of a Citizen Advisory Committee related to the Organized Garbage Collection Initiative discussion. Staff: Public Works Director Maria D'Andrea Pdf b.Council Members' Choice 13.City Manager’s Report 14.City Attorney’s Report a.Emergency Preparedness/City Council Meeting Participation Policy Pdf 15.Adjournment MINUTES City Council Regular Meeting Monday, March 2, 2020 1000 Englewood Pkwy – Council Chambers 7:00 PM 1 Call to Order The regular meeting of the Englewood City Council was called to order by Mayor Olson at 7:01 p.m. 2 Invocation The invocation was given by Council Member Stone. 3 Pledge of Allegiance The Pledge of Allegiance was led by Council Member Stone. 4 Roll Call COUNCIL PRESENT: Mayor Linda Olson Mayor Pro Tem Othoniel Sierra Council Member Joe Anderson Council Member Dave Cuesta Council Member Rita Russell Council Member Cheryl Wink Council Member John Stone COUNCIL ABSENT: None STAFF PRESENT: City Manager Lewis City Attorney McKenney Brown City Clerk Carlile Deputy City Clerk McKinnon Director Sobota, Finance and Administrative Services Director D'Andrea, Public Works Director Brocklander, Information Technology Director Power, Community Development Director Underhill, Parks, Recreation and Library Planning Manager Burkholder, Community Development Capital Projects and Engineering Manager Hoos, Public Works Open Spaces Manager Lee, Parks, Recreation and Library Page 1 of 8 Draft City Council Regular March 2, 2020 Parks Supervisor Torres, Parks, Recreation and Library Parks Supervisor Holt, Parks, Recreation and Library Systems Engineer Creager, Information Technology Officer Douglas, Police Department 5 Consideration of Minutes of Previous Session a) Minutes of the Regular City Council Meeting of February 18, 2020. Moved by Council Member Othoniel Sierra Seconded by Council Member Cheryl Wink APPROVAL OF THE MINUTES OF THE REGULAR CITY COUNCIL MEETING OF FEBRUARY 18, 2020. For Against Abstained Linda Olson x Othoniel Sierra (Moved By) x Joe Anderson x Dave Cuesta x Rita Russell x Cheryl Wink (Seconded By) x John Stone x 7 0 0 Motion CARRIED. 6 Appointments, Communications, Proclamations, and Recognition a) Arbor Day Proclamation Moved by Council Member Othoniel Sierra Seconded by Council Member Joe Anderson TO APPROVE A PROCLAMATION DECLARING APRIL 17, 2020 AS ARBOR DAY. For Against Abstained Linda Olson x Othoniel Sierra (Moved By) x Joe Anderson (Seconded By) x Dave Cuesta x Rita Russell x Cheryl Wink x John Stone x 7 0 0 Page 2 of 8 Draft City Council Regular March 2, 2020 Motion CARRIED. 7 Recognition of Scheduled Public Comment a) Kathleen Bailey, an Englewood resident, addressed Council regarding the infrastructure and flooding. b) Elaine Hults, an Englewood resident, was scheduled to speak but was not present. c) Doug Cohn, an Englewood resident, addressed Council regarding Englewood history. 8 Recognition of Unscheduled Public Comment a) Jerry Walker, an Englewood resident, addressed Council regarding the Police. b) Brad Paterson, an Englewood resident, addressed Council regarding off leash laws. c) Jessica Semones, an Englewood resident, addressed Council regarding off leash laws. d) Lindsey Fleming, an Englewood resident, addressed Council regarding off leash laws. e) Jill Coydan, an Englewood resident, addressed Council regarding off leash laws. f) Shelly Cockrell, an Englewood resident, addressed Council regarding off leash laws. g) Ida May Nicholl, an Englewood resident, addressed Council regarding Englewood history. h) Marcy Brown, an Englewood resident, addressed Council regarding density issues and sewer fees. i) Graydon Washington, with BGOOD, introduced himself to Council. Mayor Olson responded to Public Comment. 9 Consent Agenda Items Agenda Item 9 (c)(ii) was removed from Consent Agenda. Moved by Mayor Pro Tem Sierra seconded by Council Member Wink to approve Consent Agenda Items 9 (b)(i-iv) and 9(c)(i). a) Approval of Ordinances on First Reading There were no additional Ordinances on First Reading (See Agenda Item Page 3 of 8 Draft City Council Regular March 2, 2020 11 (a)(i-ii).) b) Approval of Ordinances on Second Reading. i) CB 6 - 2020 Storm Water Utility Rate Increase Ordinance ORDINANCE NO. 6, SERIES OF 2020 (COUNCIL BILL NO. 6, INTRODUCED BY COUNCIL MEMBER WINK) AN ORDINANCE ESTABLISHING STORM WATER UTILITY AND ENTERPRISE FUND USER FEES IN ACCORDANCE WITH TITLE 12, CHAPTER 5, SECTION 4, SUBSECTION E, OF THE ENGLEWOOD MUNICIPAL CODE 2000. ii) CB 7 - Approval of Intergovernmental Agreement with CDOT for US 85 (Santa Fe Drive) Planning and Environmental Linkage Study ORDINANCE NO. 7, SERIES OF 2020 (COUNCIL BILL NO. 7, INTRODUCED BY COUNCIL MEMBER WINK) AN ORDINANCE AUTHORIZING AN AGREEMENT BETWEEN THE COLORADO DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION AND THE CITY OF ENGLEWOOD REGARDING A US-85 PLANNING AND ENVIRONMENTAL LINKAGE STUDY ON US-85, BETWEEN C-470 AND I-25/ALAMEDA, AND PROVIDING FOR LOCAL FUNDING TOWARD THE PROJECT. iii) CB 9 - Mutual Aid Agreement with the City and County of Denver ORDINANCE NO. 8, SERIES OF 2020 (COUNCIL BILL NO. 9, INTRODUCED BY COUNCIL MEMBER SIERRA) AN ORDINANCE AUTHORIZING A MUTUAL AID AGREEMENT BETWEEN THE CITY AND COUNTY OF DENVER, COLORADO AND THE CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO. iv) CB 10 - Title 16 Housekeeping Amendments ORDINANCE NO. 9, SERIES OF 2020 (COUNCIL BILL NO.10, INTRODUCED BY COUNCIL MEMBER SIERRA) AN ORDINANCE AMENDING TITLE 16, CHAPTER 2, SECTIONS 2, 3(G)(2), 8(E)(G)(H), 16(G) AND 17(C), TITLE 16, CHAPTER 5, SECTIONS 1(C), TITLE 16, CHAPTER 6, SECTIONS 1(A), 1(B) AND 1(C), TITLE 16, CHAPTER 8, SECTION 1(D), TITLE 16, CHAPTER 10, SECTIONS 1 AND 2, AND TITLE 16, CHAPTER 11, SECTION 2(B), ALL OF THE ENGLEWOOD MUNICIPAL CODE 2000, REGARDING UPDATES TO THE UNIFIED DEVELOPMENT CODE OF THE CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO. Page 4 of 8 Draft City Council Regular March 2, 2020 c) Resolutions and Motions i) Romans Park Tennis and Playground Construction Approval of a contract for construction of Romans Park Tennis and Playgrounds to Singing Hills Landscape, Inc. in the amount of $824,800.00. Moved by Council Member Othoniel Sierra Seconded by Council Member Cheryl Wink Motion to approve Consent Agenda Items 9(b)(i-iv) and 9(c)(i). For Against Abstained Linda Olson x Othoniel Sierra (Moved By) x Joe Anderson x Dave Cuesta x Rita Russell x Cheryl Wink (Seconded By) x John Stone x 7 0 0 Motion CARRIED. ii) Romans Park Phase 2 Grant Application [Clerks Note: This agenda item was removed from the Consent Agenda Motion and considered independently.] Moved by Council Member Rita Russell Seconded by Council Member John Stone RESOLUTION NO. 11, SERIES OF 2020 A RESOLUTION SUPPORTING THE CITY OF ENGLEWOOD’S ARAPAHOE COUNTY OPEN SPACE (ACOS) GRANT APPLICATION FOR ROMANS PARK IMPROVEMENTS PHASE 2. For Against Abstained Linda Olson x Othoniel Sierra x Joe Anderson x Dave Cuesta x Rita Russell (Moved By) x Cheryl Wink x John Stone (Seconded By) x Page 5 of 8 Draft City Council Regular March 2, 2020 7 0 0 Motion CARRIED. 10 Public Hearing Items No public hearing was scheduled before Council. 11 Ordinances, Resolutions and Motions a) Approval of Ordinances on First Reading i) CB 5 - An Ordinance adopting the updated Engineering Design and Construction Standards Moved by Council Member Othoniel Sierra Seconded by Council Member John Stone COUNCIL BILL NO. 5, INTRODUCED BY COUNCIL MEMBER SIERRA A BILL FOR AN ORDINANCE AMENDING TITLE 11-7-25 OF THE ENGLEWOOD MUNICIPAL CODE TO ADOPT THE “ENGLEWOOD DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL” FOR THE REGULATION OF PUBLIC IMPROVEMENT DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OCCURRING WITHIN RIGHTS-OF- WAY LOCATED WITHIN THE CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO. For Against Abstained Linda Olson x Othoniel Sierra (Moved By) x Joe Anderson x Dave Cuesta x Rita Russell x Cheryl Wink x John Stone (Seconded By) x 7 0 0 Motion CARRIED. ii) CB 8 - An Ordinance adopting the updated Storm Drainage Criteria Manual Moved by Council Member Joe Anderson Seconded by Council Member Cheryl Wink COUNCIL BILL NO. 8, INTRODUCED BY COUNCIL MEMBER ANDERSON Page 6 of 8 Draft City Council Regular March 2, 2020 A BILL FOR AN ORDINANCE ADOPTING TITLE 12, CHAPTER 5, SECTION 10 TO THE ENGLEWOOD MUNICIPAL CODE 2000, REGARDING ADOPTION OF THE “STORM DRAINAGE CRITERIA MANUAL” FOR THE REGULATION OF STORMWATER WITHIN THE CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO. For Against Abstained Linda Olson x Othoniel Sierra x Joe Anderson (Moved By) x Dave Cuesta x Rita Russell x Cheryl Wink (Seconded By) x John Stone x 7 0 0 Motion CARRIED. b) Approval of Ordinances on Second Reading There were no additional Ordinances on Second Reading (See Agenda Items 9(b)(i-iv). c) Resolutions and Motions i) Removal of alternate member from the Code Enforcement Advisory Committee Moved by Council Member Othoniel Sierra Seconded by Council Member Cheryl Wink Approval to remove Mr. Margiotta from the Code Enforcement Advisory Committee (CEAC) as an alternate member due to non-attendance. For Against Abstained Linda Olson x Othoniel Sierra (Moved By) x Joe Anderson x Dave Cuesta x Rita Russell x Cheryl Wink (Seconded By) x John Stone x 6 1 0 Motion CARRIED. Page 7 of 8 Draft City Council Regular March 2, 2020 ii) Request for Donation to the Metro Denver Housing Initiative Flex Fund Moved by Council Member Cheryl Wink Seconded by Council Member John Stone Approval of a donation on behalf of the City to the Metro Denver Homeless Initiative Flex Fund as recommended by the Metro Mayors Caucus in the amount of $1,500. For Against Abstained Cheryl Wink (Moved By) x Linda Olson x Othoniel Sierra x Joe Anderson x Dave Cuesta x Rita Russell x John Stone (Seconded By) x 5 2 0 Motion CARRIED. 12 General Discussion a) Mayor's Choice b) Council Members' Choice 13 City Manager’s Report 14 City Attorney’s Report 15 Adjournment MAYOR OLSON MOVED TO ADJOURN. The meeting adjourned at 8:28 p.m. City Clerk Page 8 of 8 Draft COUNCIL COMMUNICATION TO: Mayor and Council FROM: Jackie McKinnon DEPARTMENT: City Clerk's Office DATE: March 16, 2020 SUBJECT: Resolutions appointing members to Public Library Board DESCRIPTION: Resolutions appointing members to Public Library Board RECOMMENDATION: Approve the resolutions appointing members to Public Library Board. ATTACHMENTS: Resolution Appointing 3 Regular Members 1 RESOLUTION NO. ____ SERIES OF 2020 A RESOLUTION APPOINTING MEMBERS TO BOARDS, COMMISSIONS AND COMMITTEES FOR THE CITY OF ENGLEWOOD. WHEREAS, City Council wishes to appoint members to boards, commissions and committees for the City of Englewood; WHEREAS, the names of members and the boards, commissions and committees they will be representing, with term expiration dates are below; and WHEREAS, the City Council wishes to express its gratitude for the volunteerism and service these individuals have agreed to provide to the City. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO, THAT: Section 1. The City Council of the City of Englewood, Colorado, hereby approves the following persons for appointment to boards, commissions and committees to serve at the request of the City Council effective March 16, 2020: 11. Public Library Board a. ______________________ – Regular Feb 1, 2024 b. ______________________ – Regular Feb 1, 2024 c. ______________________ – Regular Feb 1, 2021 ADOPTED AND APPROVED this 16th day of March, 2020. Linda Olson, Mayor ATTEST: Stephanie Carlile, City Clerk I, Stephanie Carlile, City Clerk, for the City of Englewood, Colorado, hereby certify the above is a true copy of Resolution No. ____, Series of 2020. Stephanie Carlile, City Clerk COUNCIL COMMUNICATION TO: Mayor and Council FROM: Jackie McKinnon DEPARTMENT: City Clerk's Office DATE: March 16, 2020 SUBJECT: Resolutions appointing members to Code Enforcement Advisory Committee DESCRIPTION: Resolutions appointing members to Code Enforcement Advisory Committee RECOMMENDATION: Approve the resolutions appointing members to Code Enforcement Advisory Committee ATTACHMENTS: Resolution Appointing 2 Regular Members and 1 Alternate Member 1 RESOLUTION NO. ____ SERIES OF 2020 A RESOLUTION APPOINTING MEMBERS TO BOARDS, COMMISSIONS AND COMMITTEES FOR THE CITY OF ENGLEWOOD. WHEREAS, City Council wishes to appoint members to boards, commissions and committees for the City of Englewood; WHEREAS, the names of members and the boards, commissions and committees they will be representing, with term expiration dates are below; and WHEREAS, the City Council wishes to express its gratitude for the volunteerism and service these individuals have agreed to provide to the City. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO, THAT: Section 1. The City Council of the City of Englewood, Colorado, hereby approves the following persons for appointment to boards, commissions and committees to serve at the request of the City Council effective March 16, 2020. 1. Code Enforcement Advisory Committee a. ______________________ - Regular July 1, 2020 b. ______________________ - Regular July 1, 2021 c. ______________________ - Alternate ADOPTED AND APPROVED this 16th day of March, 2020. Linda Olson, Mayor ATTEST: Stephanie Carlile, City Clerk I, Stephanie Carlile, City Clerk, for the City of Englewood, Colorado, hereby certify the above is a true copy of Resolution No. ____, Series of 2020. Stephanie Carlile, City Clerk COUNCIL COMMUNICATION TO: Mayor and Council FROM: Tim Hoos DEPARTMENT: Public Works DATE: March 23, 2020 SUBJECT: CB #8 - An Ordinance adopting the updated Storm Drainage Criteria Manual DESCRIPTION: CB #8 - An Ordinance adopting the updated Storm Drainage Criteria Manual RECOMMENDATION: Staff recommends that the City Council adopt an ordinance approving and adopting the 2020 Englewood Storm Drainage Criteria Manual. PREVIOUS COUNCIL ACTION: The City Council Approved Ordinance No. 28, Series of 2005 on July 11th, 2011, authorizing the adoption of the Englewood Storm Drainage Criteria Manual as a requirement and regulation for the City of Englewood. Study sessions were held on September 23, 2019 and January 27, 2020 to allow professional staff to review the proposed updated document with the City Council. SUMMARY: Public Works staff has revised the Englewood Storm Drainage Criteria Manual to address stormwater runoff from new developments. The updated stormwater drainage criteria will provide the City with greater tools to manage and protect the existing storm sewer facilities and to bring the criteria into better alignment with the City's MS-4 Discharge Permit with the State of Colorado. ANALYSIS: as Englewood, of City the in thresholds for stormwater requiring current The detention established in 2005, are generally less restrictive than surrounding communities. Currently, the criteria requires full stormwater detention only for commercial, industr ial and mixed-use projects that are larger than one acre and residential projects larger than two acres. Over the past fifteen years many surrounding communities have reduced their detention threshold to include sites smaller than one acre. The detention threshold in the revised manual adjusts the criteria as follows in order to more accurately reflect the types of developments that are occurring in Englewood and in order to reduce the impact that additional stormwater runoff has on the City's existing infrastructure. • Parcels 0.5 acre in size, or more, and disturbing more than 10,000 SF will be required to provide full spectrum detention and provide permanent water quality. • Parcels between 0.5 acre and 1.0 acre in size with disturbance less than 10,000 sf will be required to reduce the site runoff rate to be equal to or less than the existing runoff rate for the site and provide permanent water quality. • with size, in acres 0.5 than less proposed SF 5,000 than greater Parcels but development or improvements which are likely to increase the imperviousness of the site by a factor greater than 1.5 from the existing condition, will be required to reduce the site runoff rate to be equal to or less than the existing runoff rate for the site and provide permanent water quality. FINANCIAL IMPLICATIONS: No direct financial implications are created for the City of Englewood by the adoption of the revised Storm Drainage Criteria Manual. ALTERNATIVES: If the proposed 2020 Storm Drainage Criteria Manual is not approved by the City Council, City staff will continue to regulate stormwater detention requirements using the criteria contained in the 2005 Storm Drainage Criteria Manual. As stated previously, the current criteria only requires detention on parcels larger than 1 acre in size. Roughly 75% of the development sites in Englewood are below 1 acre in size so the current criteria excludes most sites from providing any the increase that developments by of runoff increased the detention created imperviousness of a site. The adoption of the revised Storm Drainage Criteria Manual is critical to provide a document that can be used to regulate the impacts to the City's storm sewer system caused by development that significantly increases the imperviousness and subsequent stormwater runoff from an existing site. CONCLUSION: The Storm Drainage Criteria Manual is an important tool that the City uses to ensure that increased imperviousness caused by site development is properly mitigated so as not to create an increased burden on the City's existing storm sewer facilities. ATTACHMENTS: Council Bill #8 2020 Storm Drainage Criteria Manual 1 BY AUTHORITY ORDINANCE NO._____ COUNCIL BILL NO.8 SERIES OF 2020 INTRODUCED BY COUNCIL MEMBER ANDERSON AN ORDINANCE ADOPTING TITLE 12, CHAPTER 5, SECTION 10 TO THE ENGLEWOOD MUNICIPAL CODE 2000, REGARDING ADOPTION OF THE “STORM DRAINAGE CRITERIA MANUAL” FOR THE REGULATION OF STORMWATER WITHIN THE CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO. WHEREAS, the Federal Clean Water Act requires storm water discharges be authorized under storm water discharge permits; WHEREAS, a general permit issued to the City of Englewood by the Colorado Department of Health and Environment, Water Quality Control Division, mandates storm water runoff from construction sites be managed in conformance with the Colorado Discharge Permit System, or CDPS, under Regulation 61; WHEREAS, Ordinance No. 28, Series 2005 adopted the 2005 Storm Drainage Criteria Manual (“Manual”); WHEREAS, professional staff provided a 2020 Storm Drainage Criteria Manual for the purpose of informing developers, design engineers, property owners and contractors of the City’s storm water drainage management regulations; and WHEREAS, adoption updated storm water criteria will bring the City into conformance with communities throughout the region and into compliance with recently adopted federal and state laws and regulations, including the Colorado Discharge Permit System under Regulation 61. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT ORDAINED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO, AS FOLLOWS: Section 1. Adoption of Title 12, Chapter 5, Section 10. Title 12, Chapter 5 of the Englewood Municipal Code shall be amended by the addition of Section 10: 12-5-10: City of Englewood Storm Drainage Criteria Manual. A. There is hereby adopted, by reference thereto, the City of Englewood Storm Drainage Criteria Manual (Manual), it its entirety including any updates and amendment thereto, as developed by the City of Englewood. The City Clerk shall maintain a copy of the Manual and any updates and amendments which will be available for inspection during regular business hours. Additionally, a copy of the Manual shall be maintained on the website of the City of Englewood. 1. The purpose of the Manual is to provide minimum standards to safeguard the health, property and public welfare through the proper control and handling of storm drainage flows and discharge. 2 2. Failure to comply with any provision of the Manual shall be a nuisance, and may be abated and/or prosecuted in accordance with the provisions of Title 15 of the Englewood Municipal Code. 3. Any work performed in violation of any provision of the Manual may be ordered to stop by the Director of Public Works, or designee, when a stop work notice is served in writing on any person engaged in doing or causing such work, all in conformance with 11-7-23. It shall be a violation of this provision to perform any work in violation of any stop work order. In addition to any penalty assessed pursuant to 1-4-1, the administrative penalties provided within 11-7-24 shall be applicable. 4. The Manual shall provide for storm drainage planning, project review and stormwater management analysis. 5. The Manual shall provide for a drainage policy. 6. The Manual shall provide technical design criteria. 7. The Manual shall provide for management of open channels and hydraulic structures. 8. The Manual shall provide for stormwater storage and a drainage detention plan. B. The 2005 Storm Drainage Criteria Manual, adopted by and through Ordinance No. 28, Series 2005, is hereby repealed. Section 2. Notice of general provisions and findings applicable to interpretation and application of the Ordinance: Applicability of Title 1, Chapter 2, Savings Clause. The provisions of E.M.C. Title 1, Chapter 2, Savings Clause apply to interpretation and application of this Ordinance, unless otherwise set forth above, including, but not limited to, the provisions regarding severability, inconsistent ordinances or code provisions, effect or repeal or modification, and legislation not affected by repeal. Enforcement. Any person, corporation, partnership, or other entity violating any provision of the City of Englewood Storm Drainage Criteria Manual at Section 4.1(2) of the Manual shall be subject to E.M.C. Title 15, Chapter 2, “Nuisance Prohibited”. Any violation of Title 15, Chapter 2, Nuisance Prohibited subjects the violator to the provisions of E.M.C. Title 1, Chapter 4 “General Penalty” which mandate that except as otherwise provided within specific Titles, Chapters, or Sections of the Englewood Municipal Code, the violation of any provisions of the Code, or of any secondary code adopted therein, shall be punished by a fine not exceeding two thousand six hundred fifty dollars ($2,650.00) or imprisonment for a term not exceeding three hundred sixty (360) days or by both such fine and imprisonment. Safety Clauses. The City Council hereby finds, determines, and declares that this Ordinance is promulgated under the general police power of the City of Englewood, that it is promulgated for the health, safety, welfare of the public, and that this Ordinance is necessary for the preservation of health and safety 3 and for the protection of public convenience and welfare. The City Council further determines that the Ordinance bears a rational relation to the proper legislative object sought to be obtained. Introduced, read in full, and passed on first reading on the 2nd day of March, 2020. Published by Title as a Bill for an Ordinance in the City’s official newspaper on the 5th day of March, 2020. Published as a Bill for an Ordinance on the City’s official website beginning on the 4th day of March, 2020 for thirty (30) days. Read by Title and passed on final reading on the 23rd day of March, 2020. Published by Title in the City’s official newspaper as Ordinance No. ___, Series of 2020, on the 26th day of March, 2020 Published by title on the City’s official website beginning on the 25th day of March, 2020 for thirty (30) days. This Ordinance shall take effect thirty (30) days after publication following final passage. Linda Olson, Mayor ATTEST: Stephanie Carlile, City Clerk I, Stephanie Carlile, City Clerk of the City of Englewood, Colorado, hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true copy of the Ordinance passed on final reading and published by Title as Ordinance No. ___, Series of 2020. Stephanie Carlile Final Draft Febmary,2020. ENGLEWOOD STORM DRAINAGE CRITERIA MANUAL .lewood 1000 Englewood Parkway Englewood,CO 801 10 303.762.2500 www.ENGLEWOODCO.GOV February 6,2020 This Page Ie?blank intentionally FINAL DRAFT (FEBRUARY,2020) TABLE oF CONTENTS LIST SECTION 1.0 INTRODUCTION 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 TITLE ............. PURPOSE ...... AMENDMENTS AUTHORITY DRAINAGE LAW PERMITS .............. DEFINITIONS AND . REFERENCES ............................................... DRAINAGE PUBLICATIONS FOR ENGLEWOOD \O\OLA)I\)N)’—"—"—"-‘ SECTION 2.0 STORM DRAINAGE PLANNING 8:SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS 2.1. 2.2. 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 2.12 SECTION 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 GENERAL .................................................................... REVIEW PROCESS.. SUBMITTALS .......................... SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS 1)Format............................................ 2)Drainage Plan Sheets ...................................................... 3)Stormwater Management Plans (Construction BMPs) 4)Permanent Stonnwater Management Plan (Post-Construction BMPS). LETTER REPORT .................................................................................... ...... .. PRELIMINARYREPORT ............................................................................ . .. FINAL DRAINAGE REPORT. FLOOD HAZARD STUDY WETLANDS ................. STORMWATER MANAGEMENT PLAN (CONSTRUCTION)................... PERMANENT STORMWATER QUALITYPLAN (POST-CONSTRUCTION) Introduction .......................................................................... Water Quality ............. Designing for Maintenance .............. INSPECTION AND RECORD DRAWINGS 13.0 DRAINAGE POLICY GENERAL ............................................................................ .. .. JURISDICTION BOUNDARIES. BASIN TRANSFERS ....................... DRAINAGE IMPROVEMENT COSTS............................. DETENTION (STORAGE AND STORMWATER QUALITY).. ROOFTOP DETENTION .............................................................. IRRIGATION FACILITIES...... OFFSITE FLOWS ........................... EASEMENTS AND RIGHTS-OF-WAY ... OPERATIONS‘AND MAINTENANCE ............................................. 3 11 NN.—-.—-.-.-.-.-.-._..—-._.._-.--.-._.._.ooxoxp c\o\u-.J>-I=u:mu:NNNv—-»—- SECTION 4.0 TECHNICAL DESIGN CRITERIA 4.1 GENERAL .................26 4.2 RESPONSIBILTY.26 4.3 SOIL TYPES ......26 4.4 HYDROLOGY ............26 1)Storm Frcqucncy..26 2)Rainfall Intensity 27 3)Runoff Computations 27 a)Rational Method .................27 b)CUHP and SWMM 27 SECTION 5.0 OPEN CHANNELS AND HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES 5.1 GENERAL ........................................................ .................... ..29 5.2 OPEN CHANNELS .......................................29 5.3 STREETS,INLETS,AND STORM DRAINS ..29 5.4 CULVERTS AND BRIDGES.........................................................32 SECTION 6.0 STORAGE 6.1 GENERAL ........................................................ .................... ..33 6.2 DETENTION CRITERIA ...................................................... ........................ ..33 APP E N D I CES Appendix Appendix Name N 0. 7 V > A STORM DRAINAGE CRITERIAMANUAL ORDINANCE B PRELIMINARY REVIEW CHECKLIST C FINAL DRAINAGE REPORT REVIEW CHECKLIST D SMALL LOT DEVELOPMENT FORM E DRAINAGE CONSTRUCTION PLAN CHECKLIST F STORMWATER QUALITYMANAGEMENT PLAN REQUIREMENTS G FORM SF-1 TIIVIE OF CONCENTRATION H FORM SF-2 STANDARD STORM SYSTEM DESIGN LIST OF FIGURES Figure Figure Name‘ No. 1 ENGLEWOOD DRAINAGE BASIN MAP 2 RAINFALL INTENSITY ~DURATION CURVES 3 EN GLEWOOD SOILS CLASSIFICATIONS MAP 4 GROUND COVERVELOCITIES 5 CHANNEL OR CONDUIT FLOW TIME NOMOGRAPH 6 STREET FLOWS —ALLOWABLE CAPACITIES 7 REDUCTION FACTORS FOR ALLOWABLE GUTTER CAPACITY 8 E0 IN FHWA EQUATIONFOR COMPOSITE CROSS SLOPES 9 (1-Eo)VALUESFROM FHWA EQUATION DETAILS Detail No.Detail Name D-1 TYPE 16 INLET GRATE AND FRAME DETAILS D-2 SINGLE TYPE16 OPEN THROAT INLET ADJUSTABLE CURB BOX D-3 DOUBLE TYPE 16 OPEN THROAT INLET ADJUSTABLE CURB BOX D-4 TRIPLE TYPE 16 OPEN THROAT INLET ADJUSTABLE CURB Box D-5 TYPE 13 GRATE AND FRAME DETAILS D-6 SINGLE TYPE 13 INLET D—7 DOUBLE TYPE 13 INLET D-8 TRIPLE TYPE 13 INLET D-9 TYPE R CURB INLET D-10 TYPE C INLET D-11 T-BASE MANHOLES D-12 MANHOLES D-13 BOX BASE MANHOLES D-14 MANHOLE DETAILS D-15 INTERMEDIATE MANHOLE PLATFORM AND MANHOLE STEP DETAIL D-16 CONCRETE ENCASEMENT CLOSURE OF RIGII)CONDUITS D-17 CHASE SECTION All details are contained in the Design and Construction Standards and Specifications. SECTION 1.0 INTRODUCTION 1.1 TITLE This Manual together with all futmc amendments shall be known as the City of Englewood Storm Drainage Criteria Manual,hereinafter called the Manual. 1.2 PURPOSE The purpose of the Manual is to provide minimum standards to safeguard the health,property and public welfare through the proper control and handling of storm drainage ?ows and discharge. This Manual is intended to establish similarity and consistency for the design,presentation,and review of storm drainage improvements within the City of Englewood,Colorado.The design guidelines contained in this Manual are intended for use as engineering guides in the solution of drainage problems.Following the principles and practices,stated within,should facilitate the design, subrnittal,and review process.The standards and speci?cations contained within are intended to provide a consistent,adequate,and coordinated approach for dealing with drainage issues in order to serve and protect the people who bene?t from these facilities. The criteria contained in this document provide adopted standards for the more frequent construction and development issues.It is impossible to provide standards for every issue,so good engineering judgment will be required when issues arise that are not.addressed in this Manual. The questions to be considered by the designer and the reviewer when encountering these situations shall be: 13 Will the safety of the affected property owners adjacent to and downstream from the proposed facilities be enhanced or maintained? Will the intended purposes for the proposed improvements be met? Will the operating and maintenance costs be kept at reasonable levels? Will the installation costs be kept at reasonable levels? Will the proposed construction be compatible with surrounding existing and proposed improvements? DDEIEI 1.3 AMENDMENTS The policies and criteria presented herein are basic guidelines which may be amended in the future as new technology is developed,or as new regulations are adopted,and/or as experience gained in the use of this document indicate a need for revision.Amendments will be applicable to all drainage studies submitted after the effective date of amendment.However,?nal drainage reports which are submitted for approval within sixty days after the effective date of amendment and which have prior approval of a preliminary drainage report are exempt from the amendments. 1 .4 AUTHORITY 1)General A municipality’s inherent police powers enable it to enact ordinances that serve the public’s health safety,and general welfare.These regulations together with future amendments have been adopted as the Englewood Storm Drainage Criteria Manual pursuant to the City of Englewood Municipal Code,Title 12 —Chapter 5,titled “The Englewood Storm Water Utility and Enterprise Fund”. Failure to Comply FINAL DRAFT February 2020 ESDCM l It shall be deemed a nuisance to fail to comply with any provision of the Englewood Drainage Criteria Manual.Any person,corporation,partnership,or other entity violating any provision of the Manual shall be subject to Title 15 of theEnglewoodMunicipal Code. 3)Stop Work Orders Whenever any work is being performed contrary to any provision of the Manual,the Public Works Director or designee may order the work stoppedby notice in writing served on any person engaged in doing or causing such work.Any person shall forthwith stop such work until authorized by the Director of Public Works or designee in writing to proceed with the work.It is rmlaw?il to do or perform any work in violation of such stop order. 4)MHFD _ It is recognized that certain projects ?nanced wholly or in part with county,state,Mile High Flood District (MI-IFD),or federal funds may be subject to standards prescribed by those agencies.Such standards may be greater or less than the City of Englewood standards. 5)Variances Variances will be considered on a case-by-case basis.Whenever there are practical dif?culties involved in carrying out the provisions of the Manual,the Public Works Director may grant variances for individualcases,provided that the Public Works Director shall first ?nd that special circumstances make these procedures impractical and that the variance is in conformance with the intent and purpose of the Manual,and providing that such variance does not lessen the intent of the design requirement or the level of safety,service and quality intended by the Manual. The Public Works Director shall require that sufficient evidence or proof he submitted to substantiate any variance request. Ifupon review and denial of any variance request,the Developer or Design Engineer may appeal to City of Englewood Water and Sewer Board.‘ 1.5 DRAINAGE LAW Drainage engineering and design revolves around drainage law as well as the physical laws of gravity and nature.A summary of the general principles of Colorado drainage law made by the courts as well as the legislature have been summarized in the current UDSCM (Volume 1 —Drainage Law). 1.6 PERMITS Depending on the type of commotion,type of improvement,and location of work,different permits will be required to complete the project.The following is a list of possible (but not necessarily a complete list of)permits required by concerned organizations: City of Englewood: a Building and Safety Division 0 Building Pemrit 0 Demolition Permit D Department of Community Development 0 Floodplain Zoning Permit o Floodplain Development Permit E]Department of Public Works o Right-of-Way Permits I Public ROW Excavation Permit I Public ROW Concrete Permit 1 All appeals regarding ?oodplain or ?oodway issues must be made to the Planning and Zoning Commission. FINAL DRAFT February 2020 ESDCM 2 o Grading,Erosion,Sediment Control Permit State of Colorado: In ColoradoDepartment of Transportation 0 Utility Permit E!Colorado Department of Health and Environment 0 Storrnwater Discharge Permit United States: El Army Corp of Engineers 0 404 Permit to Disturb Wetlands 1.7 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS The following list contains some of the technical terms and abbreviations used in this Manual: 404 Permit —A permit under Section 404 of the Federal Clean Water Act that is required for any activities impacting “waters of the United States and jurisdictional wetlands”?'om the U.S.Army Corps of Engineers. A —Area Ac —Acres Base Flood —The ?ood caused by a 100-year storm event. BFE -Base Flood E1evation—thewater surface elevation for the 100-year ?ood. BMPS —Best Management Practices —physical,structural,nonstructural,and/or managerial practices that are intended to prevent,mitigate,or reduce pollution of stormwater. C —Coefficient of runoff that is a factor of the percentage of the impervious area and antecedent moisture conditions as used in the rational equation. CCR—Colorado Code of Regulations CRS —Colorado Revised Statues cfs —Flow rate of water measured in cubic feet per second. Ci -Percent of impervious area City —City of Englewood,Colorado,and its agents,representatives,and employees acting on its behalf. CDOT —Colorado Department of Transportation CDPS —Colorado Discharge Permit System —Colorado’s version of the NPDES program. CLOMR —Conditional Letter of Map Revision COE —US Army Corp of Engineers Construction Activity-Applicable construction activities include the land disturbing activity and all activities and materials associated with construction site and located at,or contiguous to,the land disturbing activities.Refers to ground surface disturbing and associated activities (land disturbance),which include,but are not limited to,clearing,grading,excavation,demolition, installation of new or improved haul roads and access roads,staging areas,stockpiling of ?ll materials,and borrow areas.Construction does not include routine maintenance to maintain the original line and grade,hydraulic capacity,or original purpose of the facility.Repaving activities where underlying and/or surrounding soil is cleared,graded,or excavated as part of the repaving operation are considered construction activities,Construction activity is from initial ground breaking to ?nal stabilization regardless of ownership of the construction activities.The WQCD FINAL DRAFT February 2020 ESDCM 3 has determinedthat “contagious”means commotionactivities located in close proximity ot each other (within ‘Amile). Contractor —A person,partnership,corporation,or other legal entity who undertakes to construct, install,alter,move,remove,trim,demolish,repair,replace,excavate,or add to any improvements covered by this Manual,or any utility,or any other facility that requires work,workers,and/or equipment in theprocess of performing the above named operations. CMP —Corrugated Metal Pipe CMPA —Corrugated Metal Pipe Arch CUHP —Colorado Urban HydrographProcedure CWB —Constructed Wetlands Basin CWC ~Constructed Wetlands Channel CWCB —Colorado Water Conservation Board CWQCD-—Colorado Department of Health and Environment,Colorado Water Quality Control Division D —Depth (measured in feet) (1 —Diameter of pipe (measured in inches) dso —Mean particle or stone size (identi?ed by diameter or dimension),where the mean is determined by weight.' Design Engineer or Engineer —.The engineer or corporation developing the engineering studies and designs that are covered by this Manual for a proposed developmentor improvementof property. Developer —The person,partnership,corporation,or other legal entity who is proposing changes to a parcel of land within the City and who is legally responsible for the commotion of the improvements. Development —Any manmade change to an improved or unimproved parcel of land,including but not limited to buildings,other structures,dredging,?lling,grading,paving,or excavations. dh —Hydraulic Depth =(area/top width),as used in channel ?ow analysis DRCOG -Denver Regional Council of Governments EC —Elevation Certi?cate EDB —Extended Detention Basin EGL —Energy Grade Line—The total energy level of the water.It is the sum of the velocity head, pressure head and the elevation of the water surface. E.M.C.—City of Englewood Municipal Code Eo —Ratio of the ?ow in the depressed gutter section to the total ?ow. EPA —EnvironmentalProtection Agency Erodibility —The susceptibility of a particular soil type to erosion by water orwind. Erosion —The wearing away of soil or rock fragments by water,wind,or other geological agents. Erosion Control Measures -—Practices that slow or stop erosion. ET —Evapotranspiration FINALDRAFI‘February 2020 ESDCM 4 Excess Urban Runoff Volunie (EURV)—The difference between the developed condition and pre- development rtmoff volumes.The runoff volume that results from approximately a 10%chance rainfall event.This volume includes the WQCV. FEMA —Federal Emergency Management Agency F HBM —Flood Hazard Boundary Map FHAD —Flood Hazard Area Delineation Final Stabilization —Completion of all land disturbing activities,removal of all temporary sediment controls,establishment of vegetative cover on exposed soil areas,and installation of permanent improvements and stormwater BMPS. FIRM —Federal Insurance Rate Map —The official map on which FEMA delineates ?ood hazard areas and risk zones. Flood —A general and temporary condition of partial or complete inundation of normally dry land areas from the unusual and rapid accumulation of runoff of surfacewater from upstream areas. Floodplain —The lowland area which may be temporarily covered by ?oodwaters attributed to the accumulation of storm runoff from adjoining or upstream areas in major storm events where special regulations have been adopted in order to protect the public,minimize ?ood damage and the need for rescue and relief efforts. Floodplain Administrator —Director of Community Development or authorized representative Floodway —The charmel of a river or watercourse and the adjacent land area that must be reserved in order to discharge the Base Flood.Encroachments into the ?oodway area are prohibited. ft —Feet fps —Velocity measrnement (feet per second) Freeboard —A factor of safety usually expressed in feet above a certain water-surface elevation. Froude Number —A ratio used to determine whether the ?ow in an open charmel or covered conduit with a free water surface is at critical velocity or equal to 1.0.Flow at or near the critical state (1.0)is not stable and must be avoided. Full Spectrum Detention -A stormwater detention facility design that provides water quality and ?ood control benefits and reduces impacts on downstream charmels by detaining the Excess Urban Runoff Volume (EURV)and releasing it over a 72-hour period. g —Rate of gravitational acceleration (32.2 fps/s) GB —Grass Buffer General Permit —A permit issued by the State Department of Public Health and Environment,Water Quality Control Division that authorizes discharges in compliance with the Clean Water Act,and authorizes activities and programs designed to reduce or prevent pollution of State Waters. GIS —Geographical Information System GS —Grass Swale HERCP —Horizontal Elliptical Reinforced Concrete Pipe Historic —May mean “existing conditions”prior to redevelopment or change in use,when adequate capacity in the existing drainage stormwater system exists;otherwise it shall mean the conditions that existed prior to any development or improvements made to the property. FINAL DRAFT February 2020 ESDCM 5 HGL —Hydraulic Grade Line—The pro?le of the hydrostaticpressure of water as it ?ows through pipes; it represents the sum of the depth of ?ow and the pressure head. Hydraulic Radius —Flow in charmels are affected by the boundary roughness.To calculate -the actual perimeter of channelincontact with the ?uid is divided into the area of the ?owing ?uid gives the hydraulic radius which is a major component in using Manning’s Equations to solve for uniform ?ow in open channels. I ~Rainfall intensity expressed in inches per hour. in.—Inches Inspector —The authorized representative of the Public Works Director assigned to make detailed inspection of construction work to assure compliance with this Manual and the approved plans. approved by the City. iph —Soil in?ltration rate expressed in (inches per hour). Levee —A mamnade structure designed and constructed in accordance with sound engineeringpractices to contain,control,or divert the ?ow of water so as to provide protection from temporary ?ooding. Land Disturbing Activity —Any activity that results in a change in the existing land surface (both vegetative and non-vegetative).Land disturbing activities include,but are not limited to clearing, grading,excavation,demolition,installation of new or improved haul roads and access roads, staging areas,stockpiling of ?ll materials,and borrow areas.Compaction that is associated with stabilization of structures and road construction shall also be considered a land disturbing activity. Lowest Floor ~The lowest enclosed habitable area of a building. LOMA —Letter of Map Amendment LOMR —Letter of Map Revision Major Channel —Any channel or drainageway with 100 cfs or greater ?ow. Manual —City of Englewood Drainage Criteria Manual 1/’% Manning’s Equation —Q=l.49*a*Rh *S 11 may —To be interpreted as can or able,or more pennissive than the use of “shall”in this Manual. IVIBP—Modular Block Porous Pavement MDCIA —Minimizing Directly Connected Impervious Areas.The practice of routing concentrated ?ows from impervious areas over grassy areas to promote in?ltration and slow down runoff. MEP —Maximum Extent Practicable —the standard for evaluating permit compliance. Minor Development —Developments that involve little change to existing drainage patterns.By de?nition therefore they must exhibit the following properties: o Minor amount of grading work, Insigni?cant increase in runoff generated, Development actually improves drainage conditions, No additional runo?will be directed to adjacent private properties, Stormwater pollution is not currently a problem, 0000 FINAL DRAFT February 2020 ESDCM 6 0 And Development will not increase the potential for stormwater pollution. MH —Manhole MHFD —Mile High Flood District (formerly known as the Urban Drainage and Flood Control District) MS4 —Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System n —Manning’s n,which is a ?-lction factor,assigned to the surface that the liquid is traveling over or through. Nf—Froude Number =v/4W NFIP —National Flood Insurance Program NOAA —National Oceanic &Atmospheric Administration Nonstructural BMPs —Policies and practices and improvements designed to prevent or minimize the migration of pollutants into receiving waters. NPDES —National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System —Section 402 of the Federal Clean Water Act. NRCS —Natural Resource Conservation Service Owner or Property Owner ——Any individual,corporation,partnership,or other legal entity holding controlling title on property which is in some way impacted or involved by development or improving the property. P —wetted perimeter used in ?nding the hydraulic radius. PE —Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Colorado PLD —Porous Landscape Detention PLS —Professional Land Surveyor licensed in the State of Colorado PPD —Porous Pavement Detention Public Improvements —Improvements in the public way or in easements that are either in the control of (or ownership by)the City. Public Works Director ——The City of Englewood Public Works Director or authorized representative. Q —Flow in cfs Rh —Hydraulic Radius =a/P RCBC —Reinforced Concrete Box Culvert RCP —Reinforced Concrete Pipe Record Drawings —The as-constructed drawings for all drainage improvements certi?ed by a PE. Redevelopment—Includes a site that is already substantially developed and has 35%or more of existing hard surface coverage,the creation or addition of hard surfaces;the expansion of a building footprint or addition or replacement of a structure;structural development including construction, installation or expansion of a building or other structure,replacement of hard surface that is not part of a routine maintenance activity;and land disturbing activities. Regulation 61 —Colorado Discharge Permit System Regulations -—includes stormwater regulations, (5 CCR 1002-61). FINAL DRAFT February 2020 ESDCM 7 Responsible Party —Any individual,corporation,partnership,or other legal entity involved in developing improvements or maintaining BMPS-covered by this Manual.Includes subcontractors,contractors,developers,and owners,as applicable in the development process. ROW —Right-of-Way —The total surface area,and the area above and below the surface that is dedicated,deeded,reserved by,plat or otherwise owned or controlled by the City,for public use for:infrastructure improvements,pedestrians,vehicular movement,parks,utilities,or storm drainage and runoff. RP —Retention Pond S -—Slope of the ground or conveyance element in ft/it or percent. SCS —Soil Conservation Service,now it is an agency of the United States Department of Agriculture and called Natural Resources Conservation Service. SFB —Sand Filter ExtendedDetention Basin shall —An obligation or necessity to be interpretedas mandatory. should —Advisory or recommendation,but not mandatory. Speci?cations —Applicable specifications of agencies or organizations identi?ed and shall mean the latest edition or as revised. SPP -Structural Plate Pipe SPPA -Structural Plate Pipe Arch Standards and Speci?cations —The “Engineering and Construction Standards and Speci?cations”of the City of Englewood. State Waters —Any and all surface and subsurface waters which are contained in or ?ow through the state of Colorado,except for waters in sewage systems or waters in potable water distribution systems. Structural BMP —Facilities constructed to passively treat urban stormwater runoff before it enters the receiving waters.These facilities serve as stonnwater quality treatment devices. Substantial Conformance ~No variation from the approved plans,other than minor changes as determined by the City of Englewood. SWMP —Stormwater Management Plan,for the purposes of this Manual SWMPs are the Construction BMPS that deal with erosion control,sediment control,and drainageway protection. T —Total spread of the water in the gutter and street in feet. TMDL —Total Maximum Daily Load —theamount of a speci?c pollutant that a listed water body can assimilate without violating applicable water quality standards. UBC —Uniform Building Code UDFCD —Urban Drainage and Flood Control District,now Mile High Flood District USBR —United States Bureau of Reclamation USDA —United States Department of Agriculture USDCM —Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual USGS —United States Geological Survey v ~Average velocity of ?ow in fps FINAL DRAFT February 2020 ESDCM 8 Wetlands —Those areas that are inundated or saturated by surface or groundwater at a frequency and duration suf?cient to support vegetation typically adapted for life in saturated soil conditions. WIR —Watershed Inches of Runo?° WQCV—Water Quality Capture Volume 1 .8 REFERENCES The primary references for this document are the “Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual”(USDCM) by the Mile High Flood District,the City and County of Denver,“Storm Drainage Design &Technical Criteria Manual,the City of Lakewood,“Storm Drainage Criteria Manual”,and the Greenwood Village,“Drainage Criteria Manual.”Where speci?cally referenced,the guidelines and criteria of the referenced manuals shall become a part of this Manual.All manuals and criteria referenced in this Manual shall pertain to the most recent edition. The following references were used in developing this Manual: City of Englewood,“Construction Standards and Concrete Speci?cations”.Englewood, Colorado,revised April 1997. City of Englewood,“Wastewater Collection Systems,Design and Construction”.Englewood, Colorado. City of Greenwood Village,“Storm Drainage Criteria Manual”.Greenwood Village,Colorado, April 1999 and February 2019 City of Lakewood,“Storm Drainage Criteria Manual”.Lakewood,Colorado,August 1982. City of Littleton,“Storm Drainage Design and Technical Criteria”.Littleton,Colorado,July 2019. City and County of Denver,“Storm Drainage and Technical Criteria”.Denver,Colorado, November 2013. Code of Colorado Regulations,Colorado Discharge Permit System,(5 CCR 1002-61) Colorado Department of Transportation,“Drainage Design Manual”,Draft.July 1994. Sellards &Grigg,Inc.,“Storm Drainage Plan”.Englewood,Colorado,January 1971. Urban Drainage &Flood Control District,“Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual,Volumes 1,2,&3”.Denver,Colorado,Volume 1,August 2018;Volume 2,January 2017;Volume 3,October 2019. WRC Engineering and Urban Drainage &Flood Control District,“Storm Drainage Design and Technical Criteria”.Arapahoe County,Colorado,1987. 1.9 DRAINAGE PUBLICATIONS FOR ENGLEWOOD The following publications are documents that pertain to the City of Englewood’s drainage systems known at the time of publishing. FHAD Studies: Cl Big Dry Creek (Arapahoe County)and Tributaries,WRC Engineering,1 1-1996 C!Big Dry Creek,Downstream of County Line Road,RESPEC,Inc.,02-2018 CI Harvard Gulch and Dry Gulch,Matrix Design Group Inc.,02-2017 Harvard Gulch,West Harvard Gulch and Dry Gulch,Gingery Associates,12-1979 Master Plans: FINAL DRAFT February 2020 ESDCM 9 El Big Dry Creek (Arapahoe County)and TributariesMaster Drainage Planning,Phase B, Preliminary Design Report,WRC Engineering,4-1998 Big Dry Creek (Arapahoe County)and Tributaries Master Drainage Planning,Phase A, Evaluationof AlternativesReport,WRC Engineering,7-1996 Big Dry Creek,Volume 1,Major Drainageway Master Plan Report,VTN,Inc.,6-1975 Big Dry Creek Major Drainageway Master Plan,VTN,Ir1c.,12-1974 Big Dry Creek Major Drainageway Master Plan,Ayers Associates,6-2015 Harvard Gulch and Dry Gulch Major Drainageway Plan,Matrix Design Group Inc.,12-2016. Little Dry Creek,Volume I —Major Drainageway Planning Report,McCall-Ellingson and Morrill,Inc.,2-1974 Little Dry Creek Major Drainageway Planning,Volume 2 Drawing Report,McCall-Ellingson and Morrill,Inc.,2-1974 South Platte River —Chat?eld Darn to Baseline Road,Phase B,Volume 1 Major Drainageway Planning Report,Wright Water Engineers,Ir1c.,1 1-1985 South Platte River —Chat?eld Dam to Baseline Road,Phase B Volume H Recreation Plan,Major Drainageway Planning Report,Wright Water Engineers,Inc.,11-1985 Outfall Studies: B D D Englewood Outfall Systems Planning,Preliminary Design Report,Turner Collie and Braden, Inc.,9-99 Englewood Outfall Systems Planning Alternative Evaluation Report,Turner Collie and Braden, Inc.,2-98 Englewood Outfall Systems Plan update,Draft,Calibre Engineering Inc.,XX-2019 Special Reports: 0 D [II DDEI FINAL DRAFT February 2020 City of Englewood Probable Areas Affected by Flooding from the 100-Year Storm,Turner Collie and Braden,Inc.,3/98 Little Dry Creek,City of Englewood,Cherry Hills Village,Greenwood Village,Arapahoe County Hydrologic Evaluation,McLaughlin Water Engineers,7-86 South Platte River —A Plan For The Future —Chat?eld to Brighton,a Friend,A Foe,MHFD,12- 85 South Platte River —Chat?eld Reservoir to Brighton —Planning for the Future Brochure,11-83 South Platte River -Chat?eld Dam to Baseline Road Stream Stability Investigation Final Report, Michael A.Stevens,Consultant,l2-83 South Platte River Hydrologic Study —Chat?eld to Sand Creek,Merrick and Company,5-83 City of Englewood Storm Drainage Plan,Sellards &Grigg,Inc.1-71 Floodproo?ng Study and Outfall System Plan update,DRAFT,Calibre Engineering Ir1c.,XX- 2019 ESDCM 10 SECTION 2.0 STORM DRAINAGE PLANNING &SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS 2.1 GENERAL The Public Works Department has established and the City Council has adopted construction standards and engineering regulations for Development.All subdivision plats,planned unit developments,or any other proposed construction submitted for approval shall include an adequate drainage system analysis, BMP analysis,stormwater management analysis and appropriate storm drainage system design.Plans, engineering analysis and calculations,diagrams,drainage reports and other data shall be submitted,as required by the Public Works Director,with each developmentproposal or application for permit.The Developer is encouraged to have his Engineer meet with the Public Works Department so that the technical aspects of the project can be discussed prior to submittingplans and reports. The Public Works Department in conjunction with City staff in other departments review these submittals to insure conformance with City Standards.The City of Englewood is not responsible for the correctness of design,dimensions,details,or quantities.All subrnittals are to be prepared by a registered professional engineer licensed in the State of Colorado. 2.2 REVIEW PROCESS Adequate time must be allocated in developmentplanning to permit a complete review.The intent of this Manual is to more clearly define the City’s criteria and reduce the time and effort required to develop an acceptable drainage study.To improve the review process,all reports will receive an initial review using the checklist in Appendix B to determine if all essential informationis present.Engineering review of the drainage plan will not be started until all essential informationis present.Design Engineers are encouraged to refer to the Drainage Report Submittal Outline (Appendix C)and to substantiate that all the needed information has been provided or explain why items were not provided. 2.3 SUBMITTALS Two copies of plans and two copies of reports are required for each initial submittal.Ifadditional copies are required for agency referrals,the applicant will be noti?ed. Drainage reports are required and must be submitted in accordance with the requirements stated in this Manual.Any comments made by the Public Works Department must be addressed and the documents resubmitteduntil an approval is given. Checklists’have been developed in order to identify the information that needs to be provided in drainage report subrnittals.The checklists may be used to determine the adequacy of the submittal. Incomplete or key information omitted from the report may result in the report being rejected for review, which could result in a signi?cant delay in the development process. An important part of the design and analysis of any hydraulic facility is the documentation.Drainage reports are required and must be submitted in accordance with the requirements stated in this Manual. Drainage Reports and Plans shall include,as a minimum,the information in Appendix C —Drainage Report Subrnittal Outline.The required submittal items for the different types of development are shown in Table 1. 2 Appendix B —Preliminary Review Checklist,Appendix C —Final Drainage Report Review Checklist,Appendix E —DrainageConstruction Plan Checklist,and Appendix G —Form SF—lTime of Concentration. FINAL DRAFT February 2020 ESDCM ll Table 1 -Document Submittal Requirements PermanentDevelopmentPreliminaryFinalReport7Stormwater Size Report ‘Requirements t Management Stormwater Requirements Plan’Quality‘Plan, Requirements (Post- ‘_, (Constmction) , Construction) 5,000 sf to Letter Report‘Final Report7 SWMP BMP Required 0.5 Ac Required 0.5 AC or ‘Preliminary Final Report ‘SWMP BMP Required Greater Report”Required 2.4 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS 1)Fnnat - Drainage reports shall be prepared on standard size paper (81/2X 11).The full reports shall be suitably bound including cover,tabs,etc.,but a letter report may be stapled if less than ten (10) pages.Every copyof the report shall include a “Drainage Plan Sheet”,which may be either folded and bound with the report,or folded and placed in a pocket,which has been bound withinthe report. 2)Drainage Plan Sheets The “Drainage Plan Sheets”shall consist of a 24-inch x 36-inchpaper copies that are included with the reports.Any revisions to the drainage plan sheets shall be noted on the plans together with revision dates.Once deemed acceptable,two copies of the drainageplan(s),signed and sealed‘by the PE,shall be submitted ' The approved Drainage Plan Sheet shall be a part of the construction documents,plans and speci?cationsfor the proposed development.No building permit will be issued unless the approved Drainage Plan Sheet is included among the commotion documents. 3 For the purposes of this Manual SWMPs are the Construction BMPS that deal with erosion control,sediment control, and drainageway protection.' ‘Stormwater Quality Management Practices —physical,structural,nonstructural,and/ormanagerial practices that are intended to prevent,mitigate,or reduce pollution of stormwater and improve water quality. 5 If Letter Report indicates that all ?ows are going to be directed to a Public ROW and no ?owsareexiting the site onto adjoining private properties and there are no ?oodplain or drainage problems associated with the site,then no additional reports will be required Imless a more detailed analysis is requested by the DirectorofPublic Works. 7 Only required in caseswhere nmoff must beidirected onto adjoining private properties or ?oodplain or drainage problems are associatedwith the developing the site or a more detailed analysis is requested by the Director of Public Works ' 9 Required if parcel in question must go through the preliminary platting process,otherwise at the PE’s discretion either a preliminaryreport can be submitted or PE may elect to proceed to ?nal. FINAL DRAFT February 2020 ESDCM 12 3)Stormwater Management Plans {Construction BMPs) The Stormwater Management Plan must be included with the ?nal report,but is not required for a preliminary report.USDCM (Volume 3 —Construction BMPs)shall be followed for developing construction BMP measures for the project site and the associated map symbols shall be used on SWMP submittals.SWMPs shall be 24-inch x 36-inch paper copies included with the report. Within reason,the SWMP may be included on the Drainage Plan Sheets.The details of both erosion control methods and drainage design must be legible and clear.Ifthey are not clear when drawn together,or if the Public Works Department requests it,the plans shall be drawn separately. No building permit will be issued unless the approved SWMP is included among the construction documents and is signed and sealed by a professional engineer. 4)Permanent Storrnwater Quality Management Plan (Post-Construction BMPs) All subrnittals shall include a section that describes the Post-Construction BMPs that prevent or minimize water quality impacts.See Section 2.1 l 5)MHFD Design Spreadsheets The MHFD maintains a library of Hydrologic and Hydraulic Software,Design Tools and BMP Sizing tools that maybe used as a part of the submittal.All calculations submitted shall be complete and presented in a logical format that is easily read.Time of Concentration calculations and Rational Method runoff calculations shall use forms SF -2 and SF-3 (or a reasonable facsimile). 2.5 LETTER REPORT 1)General Provisions A letter report replaces a preliminary report for development sites less than 0.5 acre;although,the Public Works Director has the right to require a drainage report,or any part of,if it is deemed necessary.The letterreport shall include a letter written to the Public Works Department brie?y summarizing the proposed development and include a completed “Small Lot Development Form”, found in the Appendix D of this Manual,and a site plan with the necessary information provided. The letter report will be submitted to the Public Works Department for review and comment or approval. A letter report may also be submitted for a development or redevelopment that will not increase the historic runoff from the site,or in certain cases where the increased nmoff will not exceed the allowable limits from the master plan studies as listed in Section 1.9,or when the increase in runoff is minor and it is obvious that the developed ?ows will not cause any hardship to downstream property owners,or overburden existing municipal systems.The letter report shall provide all necessary documentation in order to substantiate that the requirements for a letter report are met. The Public Works Department may approve the letter report if all the issues have been satisfactorily addressed.Letter report approvals are strictly at the discretion of the Public Works Director.Ifthe Public Works Director determines that the ?ows from a development do not meet the criteria established for a letter report,then the applicant must provide a ?nal drainage report that meets the criteria of the City. 2)Procedure Two (2)copies of the letter report will be submitted for preliminary review.The Public Works Department will review and make any comments deemed necessary on the submitted drainage report and may return an armotated review copy to the submitter in cases where it would help to clarify the City’s comments or concerns. If corrections are needed,the Public Works Department shall request the letter report be resubmitted with corrections.A resubmittal,if requested by the Public Works Department,must be accompanied with the annotated review copy containing the City’s comments.All resubrnittals shall include a cover letter summarizing how the City comments were addressed.Letter reports FINAL DRAFT February 2020 ESDCM 13 2.6 1) 2) 3) 2.7 1) 2) FINAL DRAFT‘February 2020 and the plan sheetsshall be signed and sealed by the professional engineer that provided guidance, supervision,and is responsible for the design. A?er the report is approved,then the construction plans submitted for building permit approval must contain suf?eient informationto documentthe assumptions and recommendations contained in the letter report. PRELIMINARY REPORT Pggqose The purpose of the preliminary report is to identify and de?ne drainage problems associated with the proposed development,and to de?ne conceptual solutions.For a detailed list of the submittal requirements,see Appendix C —Final Drainage Report Review Checklist. Rezoning Proposals When a rezoning application and approval is conditional upon site plan approval,a preliminary report is required. Procedure Two (2)copies of the preliminary drainage report will be submitted for review.The Public Works Department will review and make any comments deemed necessary on the submitted drainage report and may return an annotated review copy to the submitter in cases where it would help to clarify the City’s comments or concerns. Ifmaj or corrections are needed the Public Works Department may request the preliminary report be resubmitted with corrections.A resubmittal,if requested by the City,must be accompanied with the annotated review copy containing the City’s comments.All resubrnittals shall include a cover letter summarizing how the City comments were addressed. In most cases the Public Works Department will request that the City’s review comments or concerns he addressed with the ?nal drainage report.This can be accomplished by the City attaching a conditional approval letter to the preliminary report that will list the items that need to be addressed in the ?nal drainage report.Approved preliminary reports and the plan sheets shall be signed and sealed by the PE that provided guidance,supervision,and is responsible for the design. FINAL DRAINAGE REPORT Pgose The purpose of the ?nal report is to transform the preliminary plans or conceptual plans to commotion plans.Final drainage reports are normally prepared and submitted with any documents that will result in easements and rights-of-way to be recorded,or permanent structures being built, such as the ?nal plat,plarmeddevelopment,site plan,or building permit.The final drainage report shall contain all calculations and information identi?ed in Appendix C—Final Drainage Report Review Checklist . Procedure Three (3)copies of the ?nal report will be submitted for Public Works Department approval.The Public Works Department will review and make any comments deemed necessary on the submitted drainage report and may return an annotated review copy to the submitter in cases where it might help to clarify the City’s comments or concerns.All City review comments must be addressed. All resubmittals shall include a cover letter summarizing how the City comments were addressed, and in cases where annotated plans were provided,the annotated review copy containing the City review comments should be included with the resubrnittal.The ?nal report will be resubmitted until all comments and correction requests are satisfactorily addressed. ESDCM 14 2.8 1) 2) 3) 4) FINAL DRAFT February 2020 When the Public Works Department deems the ?nal drainage report acceptable,three (3)copies of the drainage report and the “Drainage Plan Sheet”must be submitted for approval.The reports and the plan sheets shall be signed and sealed by the professional engineer that provided guidance, supervision,and is responsible for the design. A?er the report is approved,then the construction plans are submitted for building permit approval and must contain suf?cient information to document the assumptions and recommendations contained in the ?nal drainage report and plan.The building permit submittal package must include the SWMP and the approved drainage report and plans. FLOOD HAZARD STUDY General Provisions Proposed development or improvements in the ?ood hazard zone shall meet the requirements of Title 16 of the Englewood Municipal Code —Uni?ed DevelopmentCode.EMC Title 16-4: Floodplain Overlay District can be found in Appendix H.The ?ood hazard study shall be in the form of a ?nal drainage report and shall include all such computations necessary to show that the requirements of Title 16 are met. Copies of the City of Englewood Flood Hazard Boundary Map or the Arapahoe County FIRM maps may be obtained through the City Floodplain Administrator. Floodplain Zoning Permit A Floodplain Zoning Permit and a Development Permit must be obtained from the Floodplain Administrator before any major drainageway can be altered or relocated.Whenever a Development proposes to alter a major drainageway,the Developer is responsible for submitting construction plans and calculations that meet MHFD criteria,and then to build the necessary improvements in accordance with MHFD requirements so that the improvements will be eligible for MHFD maintenance.In addition,the CLOMR,and LOMR,and all other costs related to revising Floodplain or Floodway locations and limits,shall be borne by the Developer and shall be done in accordance with FEMA criteria.A CLOMR must be issued by FEMA prior to the City issuing a building permit for any structure where Floodplain modi?cations are necessary,and when construction is completed the Developer is required to prepare and submit all required documents for FEMA approval and issuance of a LOMR. Floodplain Development Permits A Development Permit must be obtained from the Floodplain Administrator prior to the use of any ?ll,construction of structures,or storage of materials in any portion of a ?oodplain. F loodways Because Floodways are extremely hazardous due to the velocity of ?oodwaters,which carry debris, and because the drainage conveyance capacity of the drainageway must be protected and maintained,all encroachments,?ll,new construction,substantial improvements and all other development are prohibited in any area designated as a Floodway except for: a)New improvements that are intended to increase the capacity or the storage capability of the Floodway. New improvements that are intended to increase ?ood protection,decrease erosion,and improve channel hydraulics,or to provide stormwater quality bene?ts. c)Utilities that are designed,located,and installed such that: (i)They are anchored and armored to withstand hydrostatic and hydrodynamic forces, and the effects of buoyancy. (ii)Equipment and appurtenances installed are resistant to ?ood damage. (iii)The utilities will not permit in?ltration of ?oodwaters into the system and/or will not discharge from the system into the Floodway. b) ESDCM 15 \ 5)Disclaimer . The degree of ?ood protection required by Title 16 is considered reasonable for regulatory purposes and is based on scienti?c and engineering considerations.Larger ?oods than the 100-year design storm can occur.Conformance to the requirements in Title 16,or this Manual,does not imply that areas will be free from ?ooding or ?ood damage. 2.9 WETLANDS Wetlands provide multiple important functions in an urban drainage system.A wetland can reduce the peak ?ow discharge,provide park and aesthetic bene?ts,as well as improve the water quality of storm runoff. Existing Wetlands are protected by federal regulations.Disturbing or cutting wetland vegetation with designated wetland areas is prohibited except for the following: =Hand cutting or removal by hand of noxious weeds; -=Thinning wetland vegetation to minimize mosquito habitat in accordance with a plan prepared by an environmental specialist,and approved by the City. =Work performed to protect the public health,safety,and welfare. The applicant shall identify existing wetland areas that potentially could be impacted by the proposed Development.Care should be taken not to encroach into a wetland,and to avoid causing changes that will affect the water sources to a wetland. To the extent possible,no utility lines shall be located in wetlands.Prior to any disturbance to a wetland,the U.S.Anny Corps of Engineers shall be contacted to determine if there are any 404 Permit requirements. 2.10 STORMWATER MANAGEMENTPLAN(CONSTRUCTION) 1)General The Federal Clean Water Act requires that stormwater discharges be authorized under stormwater discharge permits.A General Permit issued by the Colorado Department of Health and Environment,Water Quality Control Division covers stormwater discharges ?om the City of Englewood.Construction site stormwater runoff control is one of the minimum measures that Englewood must address in order to be in conformance with the Colorado Discharge Permit System,or CDPS,under Regulation 61.Disturbed lands are subject to Erosion and can be a source of signi?cant discharges of sediment and other pollutants to receiving waters downstream. Disturbed lands include all property from which vegetation has been or is to be temporarily or permanently removed.A SWMP for thesite is required if the disturbed area is greater than 10,000 square feet,or if the soil area is to be exposed for more than sixty (60)days (Englewood Municipal Code 16-6-8.A SWMP for the site must be developed and submitted to the Department of Public Works to obtain a building,construction,or site-grading,paving,or development permit.This plan will identify the site speci?c control measures necessary to prevent and control soil erosion, sedimentation,and water pollution that may degrade receiving waters downstream. 2)Contractor Responsibility The contractor shall provide control measures to prevent or minimize the impact to receiving waters as required by the plans and/or as directed by the Engineer in writing.The Con?actorshall effectively prevent and control erosion and sedimentation on construction sites at the earliest practicable time.Ir1general control measures will be implemented prior to the commencement of each construction operation or immediately a?er the area has been disturbed. Construction staging areas and vehicle maintenance activities shall be managed and controlled so as to minimize the runoff of pollutants. FINAL DRAFT February 2020 ESDCM ~16 Disturbance of vegetation shall be minimized and limited to only what is shown on the construction plans or as directed by the Design Engineer in writing. All erosion,sediment and water pollution controls will be maintained in good working order.On all projects where the disturbed area is equal to or greater than an acre,a rain gauge shall be provided by the Contractor and located on the project site.Within 24 hours of a rainfall event of 0.2 inches or more as measured at the project rain gauge,the Contractor will inspect the entire project to determine the condition of the control measures.Sediment will be removed and devices repaired as soon as practicable but not later than 7 days alter the surrounding ground has dried sufficiently to prevent further damage from equipment needed for repair of control measures. 3)Owner Responsibility - All construction stormwater best management practices (BMPS)developed are the documents that permit approvals are conditioned upon.The Owners and Developers of the real property are ultimately responsible for the proper installation and maintenance of all construction stormwater BMPs.If the Contractor/Developer fails in this responsibility the City shall provide a verbal wanting to the Responsible Party,if the situation is not remedied,then a notice of violation shall be issued as well as a stop work order for any work at the site,except for work necessary for bringing the site into compliance with the SWMP.Failure to respond to the notice of violation will result in a municipal summons.If necessary,the City has the right to enter the property,perform maintenance on the BMPS,and require reimbursement for the costs that may be incurred. The control measures identi?ed on the plan shall be installed and maintained throughout construction and these efforts shall be coordinated with the permanent pollution control features speci?ed for the proj ect’s post construction period.The Owner’s Representative shall inspect the construction BMP control measures a?er each storm event in excess of 0.2 inches.All de?ciencies shall be noted and any necessary changes or maintenance will be completed within 24 hours. Modi?cations to the SWMP shall be submitted to the Public Works Department within seven days. FINAL DRAFT February 2020 ESDCM 17 4)Owner Acknowledgement All SWMPs and BMPs shall include an “Owner Acknowledgement”block for the Property Owner’s signature.The format for the Owner Acknowledgement shall be: All stormwater best management practices (BMPs)developed and included‘in the development approval process are legally binding documentswhereby the Owners of the real property associated with the BMPs are held ultimately responsible for the proper maintenance of all storrnwater BMPs.Ifthe Property Owner fails in this responsibility, the City has the right 1.To enter the property,perform maintenance on the BMPs,and require reimbursement for the costs that may be incurred,or . 2.To declare the existence of a nuisance and issue Nuisance AbatementNotice to the responsible party.Failure to comply with the Nuisance Abatement Notice shall cause the person,corporation,partnership,or other entity violating the storrnwater management provisions of the Manual to be subject to Title 15 of the Englewood Municipal Code. I have reviewed the stormwater best management practices that are proposed and I understand that theveffectiveperformance of BMP measures hinge upon proper maintenance of the BMPs used,and I will commit to provide the required maintenance and employee training program,in order to accomplish the goal of preventing or reducing pollutant runoff from this property. Owner Date 5)Project Management Principles Careful project management and adherence to the following principles can achieve erosion and sediment control: El E] E! El Fit the Development to the existing topography,soils,and vegetation as much as possible. Schedule construction operations in order to minimize soil exposure. Minimize disturbance and soil exposure by retaining natural vegetation,adopting phased construction techniques,and using temporary cover. Vegetate and mulch all denuded areas to protect the soil from precipitation in order to minimize the raindrop impact on bare soil. Minimize the steepness of slopes and control lengths of slopes by utilizing benches,terraces, contour furrows,or diversion ditches. Utilize riprap,channel linings,or temporary structures in channelsto slow runoff velocities and allow drainageways to handle increased runoff ?om developed areas. Keep sediment on-site by utilizing sediment basins,traps,or sediment barriers. Monitor and inspect sites frequently to assure the measures are ?rnctioning properly and correct problems promptly. The Construction BMP chapter in USDCM (Volume 3)shall be followed for implementing erosion control measures on the project site.The objectives and requirements for the Stormwater Management Plan are identi?ed in Appendix G —Stormwater Quality Best Management Practices Plan Submittal Requirements. FINAL DRAFT February 2020 ESDCM 18 2.11 PERMANENT STORMWATER QUALITY PLAN (POST-CONSTRUCTION) Introduction Englewood’s National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES)Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4)General Permit issued by the Colorado Department of Health and Environment mandates that adequate pollution control measures for both the construction and post construction periods are provided and maintained.All commercial and industrial developments,regardless of size and type,must provide an evaluation of the possible pollution sources that are common for the proposed uses and identify the Structural and Nonstructural controls that are going to be provided to mitigate adverse impacts to State Waters.The requirements for the Stormwater Quality Management Plan are outlined in Appendix G.BMP Owners are responsible for performing the required maintenance to ensure the long-term operation and viability of storrnwater quality facilities (structural and nonstructural). Water Qualig Water quality is an important part of site planning and design.A four-step process for stormwater quality management is described in the Storrnwater Management and Planning chapter in the USDCM (Volume 3)and should be employed on all sites during the planning and design process. The four steps are listed below. El Step 1.Employ Runoff Reduction Practices El Step 2.Implement BMPS that provide a Water Quality Capture Volume (WQCV)with slow release El Step 3.Stabilize drainageways El Step 4.Implement site speci?c and other Source Control BMPS With the NPDES regulations,it is essential that the City,the Design Engineer,the Property Owner, and Contractors work together to design and implement Best Management Practices (BMI’s)to clean and/or prevent the pollution of stormwater.Pollutants come from stormwater runoff (rain)or non- storrnwater runoff (such as sprinklers,hoses,or cleaning devices).Refer to the BMP Selection chapter in the USDCM (Volume 3)for guidance in selecting the appropriate structural BMPs for a project site.Water quality treatment can occur with a standalone facility,in combination with detention facilities or as part of a targeted source of pollution or planning effort. l)Water Qualig Control Measures When developing a site,water quality control measures,or BMPs,are designed to improve water quality and reduce hydromodi?cation and the associated impact on receiving waters as described in the UDSCM (Volume 3).Englewood has adopted the approach for calculating the WQCV found in the USCDM (Volume 3). Water quality facilities in Englewood shall be designed to capture and treat runoff from the 80”‘ percentile event which is equal to a rainfall depth of 0.6 inches.Calculation of the WQCVis dependent on proposed site imperviousness and the type of BMP selected.See the Calculating the WQCVand Volume Reduction chapter in the UDSCM (Volume 3)for equations and guidance in calculating the WQCV.The Treatment BMPs chapter in the USDCM (Volume 3) provides a listing of treatment BMPs and design criteria for post construction urban nmoff control measures.Alternate designs may be considered,but they must meet the functional requirements of the BMPs identi?ed by MHFD. 2)W CV and Full S ectrum Detention WQCVfunctions are incorporated into Full Spectrum Detention:Guidance for incorporating five types of WQCVtreatment BMPS into detention facilities is provided in the USDCM Volume 2 (Storage Chapter). FINAL DRAFT February 2020 ESDCM 19 3)Industrial and Commercial BMPs Special considerationshould be given to industrial and commercial impacts to a site.If ‘developingan industrial site the Source Control chapter USDCM (Volume 3 —Source Control BMPs)should be followed.- Desigr_1ir_1gforMaintenance During design,consideration must be given to the short and long-tenn maintenance of all BMPS. Long term success dictates that each BMP must perform its intended function.All storrnwater quality management plans developed and included in the development approval process are legally binding documentswhereby the Owners of the real property associated with the BMPS are held ultimately responsible for the proper maintenance of all stormwater BMPs,if the Property Owner fails in this responsibilitythe City has the right to enter the property,perform maintenance on the BMPS,and require reimbursement for the costs that may be incurred. Because the effective performance of BMP measures hinge upon proper maintenance of the BMPs used,signed acknowledgements by the Property Owner must be given to the Public Works Department that identify the Structural and Nonstructural controls,the required maintenance and employee training program,and their commitment to the goal of preventing or reducing pollutant runoff from their property. All Permanent Stormwater Quality Plans shall include the Owner’s Acknowledgement Statement in section 2.10 2.12 INSPECTION AND RECORD DRAWINGS A professional engineer retained by the Developer,preferably the Design Engineer,shall inspect the commotion of the improvements for the purpose of determining conformance with the approved drainage plan.This inspection shall include veri?cation that the following conform reasonably to the drainage plan: Finished ?oor elevations Sizes,grades,locations,and elevationsof drainage structures,channels,pipes,etc. Drainage facilities are located within the dedicated drainage easements. Location of basin boundaries Detention pond volumes Facilities appear to be constructed in a workmanlike manner Facilities and onsite grading function as intended in accordance with the approved drainage report and plans. Stormwater Management control measures implemented or constructed. Best Management Plan measures implemented or constructed. Wetland mitigation measures implemented Floodplain boundaries certi?ed Permanent ?eld benchmark verified and certi?ed Any signi?cant deviations ?om the approved drainage plan shall be annotated on the Record Drawings. Redline or cloud mark-ups of the approved construction drawings are the preferred method for indicating signi?cant deviations.Signi?cant deviations are those that exceed the following tolerances: I:|Elevations ..........:t:0.2 it. I:Slopes .................i 10.0%deviation from speci?ed slope or grade, (i.e.0.2%deviation for a 2%design grade) IJDEIEIU UUEIEIDIIICI I:I Distances ..................-J:1.0% D Volumes ...................:I:5.0% FINAL DRAFT February 2020 ESDCM 20 The Engineer will note any signi?cant deviations on the approved drainage plan sheet and place the certi?cation and notations required for the “as-built”drainage plan.When the Design Engineer is satis?ed with the work that was done,then the Engineer shall include the following statement on the Record Drawings: I hereby declare that:I have performed a ?eld review of the constructed drainage facilities on this plan.The facilities are in substantial conformance to the approved drainage plan,they appear to have been constructed in a workmanlike manner,and the as-built improvements will function and perform in accordance with the intended purposes of the approved drawings and speci?cations. (Seal and Date) Registered P.E.,State of Colorado No. The document will then be returned to the Public Works Department for ?ling as the Drainage Plan Record Drawing.The Record Drawings must be on ?le before a Certificate of Occupancy will be issued. FINAL DRAFT February 2020 ESDCM 21 SECTION 3.0 DRAINAGE POLICY 3.1 GENERAL Providing for adequate drainage in Englewood is necessary in order to preserve and promote the general health,welfare and economic well being of the city and the surrounding area.Drainage is a regional issue that affects all governmental jurisdictions.As a result any success?rl drainage system will require an integrated approach to drainage that involves public and private concerns working together. 3.2 JURISDICTION BOUNDARIES Since drainage considerations and problems do not respect jurisdictional boundaries,the policy of the City shall be to cooperate ?rlly with neighboringjurisdictions and make every effort to address their issues and concerns.Drainage referrals will be sent out to MHFD and neighboring jurisdictions when a Development is located in proximity to a major drainageway or a city boundary. 3.3 BASINTRANSFERS The diversionof storm runoff from one basin to another shall be avoided unless specific and prudent reasons justify and dictate such a transfer.In general inter-basin transfer must be prevented since it violates a basic principal of drainage law that upstream properties have a natural easement to discharge onto downstream properties so long as it is not sent down in a manner or quantity that causes more harm than formerly. 3.4 DRAINAGE IMPROVEMENT COSTS Where drainage improvements are identi?ed by site-speci?c drainage reports or by drainage master plans as needed in order to facilitate development or redevelopment then the costs to design and build the required drainage improvements shall be borne by the Developer.In other words,because the development is creating the need for the drainage improvements in order to facilitate development,then the costs for the improvements should be borne by the Development and not the citizens of the City of Englewood.Examples where developments should bear all the costs of drainage improvements are: D All curbs,gutters,channels,detention areas,inlets,storm sewers,culverts,bridges,swales and other drainage facilities that are required to facilitate development of the site. D All minor channel improvements required that must be built in order to maximize the use of the site. El All major channel improvements in cases where theVDeveloperchooses to maximize the use of the site and/or encroach into an of?cial Floodplain as identified in Title 16 of the EMC.The Developer is creating the need for these improvements since ?lling in the Floodplain reduces valuable channel storage capacity and therefore increases downstream ?ow peaks. I:All extensions of the existing storm drainage system through or around the Development where pipe size is 24-inch diameter or smaller. CI Any changes or modi?cations to the existing storm drainage system that must be done to facilitate development. The exceptions to this general policy are when the City requires that the new Development or redevelopment to install larger or additional drainage improvements than what is necessary to facilitate development.Examples where City participation should be provided are: E]Where detention areas are increased in order to require the Development to provide regional detention for offsite areas. FINAL DRAFT February 2020 ESDCM 22 [1 Where pipe sizes are greater than 24-inch diameter in order to accommodate offsite drainage. El Where pipe or channel sizes are increased to handle future developed ?ows ?'om upstream areas,then the differential costs for increasing the pipe or channel size should be subject to City participation. D In cases where City exactions of drainage improvements are not proportional to the impacts caused by the Development. 3.5 DETENTION (STORAGE)AND STORMWATER QUALITY Development along with the increase in impervious area increases peak ?ows and stormwater runoff from a site and can alter the duration of storm runoff.Temporarily detaining stormwater nmoff can signi?cantly reduce downstream ?ood hazards as well as reduce pipe and channel improvement requirements and provide water quality treatment.Full spectrum detention facilities are required as described in the USDCM because they provide stormwater peak ?ow control for a range of ?ow events and reduce ?ooding,stream degradation a.ndwater quality impacts related increased peak, duration and frequency the additional stormwater runoff originating from increased impervious surface.However,the bene?ts can only occur with consistent administrationof detention requirements and proper maintenance of the facilities. All New Developments and Redevelopments and meet the following detentionand stormwater quality requirements; Development/Redevelopment Detention Criteria Characteristics Sites 0.5 acres or greater with disturbance of 10,000 sf or greater All Planned Unit Developments Permanent Stormwater Quality (Post Construction) Full Spectrum Detention Sites 0.5 acres or greater,but less than 1.0 acre with disturbance less than 10,000 sf Permanent Stormwater Quality (Post Construction)for disturbed area Provide stormwater detentionto reduce the peak ?ow to pre-developed rates. Sites from 5,000 s.f.to 0.5 acre where the weighted imperviousness is increased by a factor of 1.5 or more Pennanent Storrnwater Quality (Post Construction)for disturbed area Provide stormwater detention to reduce the peak ?ow to pre-developed rates. on a minimum lot size of 6,000 s.f. Building or parking/drive expansion Exempt of500 s.f.or less Detached Single Family Residence Exempt The maximum allowable 100-year release rate for a full spectrum detention facility for new development is equal to 90 percent of the predevelopment discharge for the upstream watershed as described in the Storage chapter of the USDCM (Volume 2). FINAL DRAFT February 2020 ESDCM 23 3.6 ROOFTOP DETENTION Roo?op detention is prohibited.Roo?op detention does not provide the water quality bene?ts; ponding water on roofs lead to premature failure of roofing systems;and the City cannot readily monitor changes and alterations to roof detention facilities. 3.7 IRRIGATION FACILITIES Irrigation ditches are designed with ?at slopes and limited carrying capacity,which decreasesin the downstream direction.As urbanizationoccurs,ditch rights are sold and irrigation ditches are abandoned.Developed stormwater runoff ?ows must be directed away from irrigation ditches.Ifthe developed ?ows cannot be directed away from the ditch,then the ditch will either need to be piped or diversion structures installed downstream to remove excess storm ?ows from the ditch once the design capacity of the ditch is exceeded. 3.8 OFFSITE FLOWS One of the precepts of drainage law is that upstream properties own a natural easement on downstream properties for surface waters ?owing in its natural course.Therefore it is incumbent on downstream properties to analyze offsite areas that may contribute ?ows onto their property and mitigate the impacts of those ?ows.The offsite storm runoff shall be determined and included in the drainage system design.Available drainage reports for developed offsite areas affecting the property shall be reviewed and considered in the drainage system planning and design. Runoff entering the site from offsite areas shall be computed using nmoff coef?cients found in the Runoff chapter of USDCM (Volume 1). 3.9 EASEMENTS AND RIGHTS-OF-WAY In the event that any watercourse,channel,stream,creek,or other natural drainage charmel traverses part or all of a proposed development,the subdivider shall dedicate adequate easements for storm drainage and maintenance access purposes. 1)Public Drainage Easements There are Public Drainage Easements that are provided to convey public drainage that are deeded for the purposes of operation,repair,alteration,and maintenance of the storm water management system where the City has accepted maintenance and operation responsibilities.These easements shall be adequate in order to provide access for construction and maintenance and shall also cover the outlet structure,storm water pipes,detention area berms,and other parts of the storm water management system that the City deems necessary to be granted to the City.Public Drainage Easements shall provide covenants running with the land stating that no buildings,?lls, excavations,structures,fences,or other alterations shall be constructed within the easement without the express written consent of the Public Works Department. 2)Drainage Conveyance Easements There are also Drainage Conveyance Easements that are provided for storm drainage ?ows from. upstream lots onto downstream lots in order for the ?ows to be conveyed to the public drainage system.Drainage Conveyance Easements are also provided to cover permanent drainage improvements that are a condition of development such as the detention pond,outlet structure, storm water pipes,charmels,pipes,inlets,detention area berrns,and other parts of the storm water management system built to bene?t the site,or upstream or downstream properties.The maintenance and operation of these drainage improvements are the responsibility of the Property Owner.Drainage Conveyance Easements shall provide covenants running with the land stating that no buildings,?lls,excavations,structures,fences,or other alterations shall be constructed within the easement without the expresswritten consent of the Public Works Department. FINAL DRAFT February 2020 ESDCM 24 Iffor some reason the property owner fails to provide adequate maintenance or impedes storm drainage ?ows,the City may enter the property in order to maintain and or re-establish the drainage capacity,and perform any necessary work,the cost of which shall be the responsibility of the property owner. 3.10 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE An important part of all storm drainage facilities is continued maintenance so that the system will continue to ?mction as designed.Maintenance and access requirements shall be considered during the planning and design of all stormwater and detention facilities.Sediment and debris must be periodically removed from detention basins,channels and storm sewers.Trash racks,sidewalk chase drains,and inlets must be regularly clearedof debris to maintain system capacity.Channel bank erosion damage must be repaired to avoid progressive deterioration,reduced conveyance capacity, unsightliness,and structural failure.All sites will be designed to provide access for vehicles and the commotion equipment necessary to provide continued minor and major maintenance. FINAL DRAFT February 2020 ESDCM 25 SECTION 4.0 TECHNICAL DESIGN CRITERIA 4.1 GENERAL The City of Englewood was incorporated in 1903.Englewood is a southern suburb of Denver and is surrounded by the cities of Denver,Littleton,Cherry Hills Village and Sheridan.The City of Englewood encompasses approximately 7 square miles.The City lies within the South Platte River watershed at the eastern foot of the Rocky Mountains and is exposed to the sudden,high intensity rainstorrns typical of this region.A number of large drainage basins tributary to the South Platte River cut through the City (see Figure 1 —Englewood Drainage Basin Map).Because the City is mostly developed,there are existing storm drainage systems that are being used.There are also master plan studies that have been completed that evaluate the existing storm drainage systems and identify areas of need and recommended improvements.A list of the available master plans and studies can be found in Section l.9—Drainage Publications for Englewood,of this Manual. 4.2 RESPONSIBLITY The Design Engineer is responsible for the design produced.The calculations must follow the guidelines in the Manual,but the accuracy and applicability of the calculations are the responsibility of the Design Engineer. 4.3 SOIL TYPES The predominant soil types in the City of Englewood fall into NCRS Hydrologic Soil Groups B and C. These primarily consist of sands,loams,and clays.Large portions of the city have loamy foothill material in the Nunn association in the “C”hydrologic soil group.The Floodplain areas for the South Platte River,Little Dry Creek and Big Dry Creek are alluvial lands also of the Nunn association.There are also large portions of the city that consist ofwell-drained soils of the Bresser association that are in the “B”hydrologic soil group.There are also pockets of gravelly areas along the Platte River.For “B” hydrologic soil groups,an initial in?ltration rate of 4.5 inches per hour (iph)and the ?nal in?ltration rate of 0.6 iph can be used.For “C”hydrologic soil groups,the initial in?ltration rate is 3.0 iph and the final rate is 0.5 iph.Figure 3 —Englewood Soils ClassificationMap identi?es locations and soil classi?cations for the Englewood area.If the Design Engineer has site-speci?c soil test data available, then the site-speci?c data should be used. 4.4 HYDROLOGY The MHFD has concluded that NOAA Atlas rainfall information provides reasonable rainfall information that should be used to develop design rainstorms.Rainfall depths for Englewood are listed in Table 5.The Intensity-Duration Curves found in Figure 2 are derived from the Rainfall chapter of USDCM (Volume 1)The preliminary and ?nal drainage reports shall take into considerationthree separate storms events:water quality,the initial storm,and the major stonn.Historic and developed runoff shall be determined for both storms for the site,including the entire basin tributary to the site. 1)Storm Freguency The storm frequency to be used in drainage system design will be the storm ?equency applicable for the facility being designed as describedin a),b),and c)of this section. a.Water Quality:Refer to the Calculating the WQCVand Volume Reduction chapter of USCDM (Volume 3)for guidance in sizing WQCVfacilities. b.Initial Storm:The initial storm occurs at frequent intervals.Drainage systems for the initial stormare to be designed to minimize inconvenience,protect against minor damage,and reduce maintenance costs. FINAL DRAFT February 2020 ESDCM 26 The design frequency intervalfor the initial storm is the two (2)year storm for analyzing storm nmoff in streets,private driveway culverts,and for self-cleaning velocity checks in storm sewer designs and culvert designs. c.Major Storm:The design frequency interval for the major storm is the 100-year storm.The drainage system for the major storm is to be designed to protect against loss of life, substantial property damage,and maintain critical or emergency services. 2)Rainfall Intensity Runoff for both the initial and major storm shall be based on the Rainfall Intensity —Duration Curves for Englewood,Colorado shown in Figure 2. Table 5 —Englewood Rainfall Depths for 1 and 6-Hour Storms (N OAA Atlas 14,Volume 8, Version 2) Storm Event Rainfall De th in Inches 1-Hour Storm 6-Hour Storm 2-Year 0.82 1.27 5-Year 1.08 1.65 10-Year 1.31 1.99 25-Year 1.66 2.51 50-Year 1.95 2.94 100-Year 2.25 3.41 According to MHFD analysis,the most intense rainstorms in the Denver area typically begin and end in the first hour of the storm.It is these short-duration,intense rainstorrns that appear to cause the most ?ooding problems.Therefore,it is the short duration,convective type storm,which is used to provide the design storms used in this manual. 3)Runoff Computations Five methods of hydrologic analysis are described in the Runoff chapter of USDCM (Volume 1) and listed below 0 The Rational Method;based on the Rational Formula:Q=CIA.Refer to the Runoff chapter of UDSCM (Volume 1)for the general procedure for Rational Method calculations, assumptions,limitations,time of concentration calculations,and runoffcoef?cient selection guidance. 0 The Colorado Urban Hydrograph Procedure (CUHP)for generating hydrogtaphs from watersheds,and o The EPA’s Storm Water Management Model (SWMM),primarily for combining and routing the hydrographs generated from CUHP. 0 Use of published runoff information,and -Statistical analyses. Watershed size dictates whether the Rational Method or CUHP is applicable.TheRational Method may be used for watersheds that are less than 90 acres.CUHP is applicable for watershed sizes from 0 to greater than 3,000 acres with basins above 160 acres requiring further subcatchment division. Please refer to the Runoff chapter of USDCM (Volume 1)for additional information on the applicability of hydrologic methods by watershed size. CUHP and SWMM:CUHP is a method of hydrologic analysis based upon the unit hydrograph principle.Refer to the Runoff chapter of UDSCM (Volume 1)for background and guidance in using CUHP.The Environmental Protection Agency’s (EPA’s)Storrnwater Management Model FINAL DRAFT February 2020 ESDCM 27 (SWMM)5 is a computer model that is used to generate surface runoff hydrographs ?om subcatchments and then route and combine these hydrographs.The procedure described in the Runoff chapter of UDSCM (Volume 1)is limited to the routing of hydrographs generated using CUHP software in SWMM. IVIHFDhas published macro-enabled Microso?Excel spreadsheets to assist with Rational Method (UD-Rational)and CUHP calculations.The spreadsheets are available at the MHFD website (www.udfcd.org). FINAL DRAFT February 2020 ESDCM 28 SECTION 5.0 OPEN CHANNELS AND HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES 5.1 GENERAL The preliminary and ?nal designs of open channels and hydraulic structures shall be as speci?ed in this section and in accordance with USDCM (Volumes 1 and 2). 5.2 OPEN CHANNELS The preservation,enhancement,and restoration of stream corridors in the City as well as the design of constructed channels and swales using natural concepts shall be in accordance with the Open Channels chapter of USDCM (Volume 1).The USDCM guidance on open channel design is based on the systematic application of key geomorplricand hydraulic principles and is encouraged to be undertaken by a quali?ed design team representing a broad range of expertise such as engineering,geomorphology, ecology,and landscape architecture. Criteria referred to in this section appears in a number of chapters in USDCM (Volumes 1 and 2).Open channel design,the use of riprap and boulders,methods of hydraulic analyses,and design parameters for grass or rock-lined swales are all covered in the Open Channel chapter of USDCM (Volume 1). The hydraulic analysis and design of grade controls structures are covered in the Hydraulic Structures chapter of USDCM (Volume 2).Planning and design criteria for trails and access along channels are covered in the Stream Access and Recreational Channels chapter of USDCM (Volume 2). Revegetation along open channels is covered in the Revegetation chapter of USDCM (Volume 2). Major channels include all streams,drainageways and channels that convey major storm discharges greater than 100 cfs,or any channel that has a designated ?oodplain on the City’s Of?cial Flood Hazard Map.Any major channel constructed must meet the “Maintenance Eligibility Guidelines”established by the MI-IFD. 5.3 STREETS,INLETS,AND STORM DRAINS Design of streets,inlets,and storm drains for the purpose of conveying runoff shall be in accordance with the Streets,Inlets,and Storm Drains chapter of USDCM (Volume 1)except as speci?ed in this section.In addition to design guidance in USDCM (Volume 1),MHFD has computer so?ware design aids related to streets,inlets,and storm drains on their web site at http://www.udfcd.org[ 1)Streets The allowable gutter ?ow in streets shall not exceed the values given in Figure 6 —Street Flows — Allowable Capacities. The allowable ?ows shown in Figure 6 were obtained using the Modi?ed Manning’s Formula, limiting the depth of ?ow for in the streets for storm runoff by the criteria in Table 11,and then applying the reduction factors shown in Figure 7;these factors lirrrit ?ow velocities and account for reductions due to parked and moving vehicles that obstruct ?ows. If the Design Engineer encounters street cross slopes that are not 2 percent,then allowable ?ow can be calculated using the methods in the USDCM (Volume 1). FINAL DRAFT February 2020 ESDCM 29 FINAL DRAFT February 2020 Table 11 -—Allowable Street Inundation 2)Inlets Initial Storm Runoff —2-Year Storm Street Classi?cation Maximum Encroachment Local No curb overtopping.Flow may spread to crownofstreet. No curb overtopping.Flow must leave at least one 10’ Collector wide lane ?ee of water. No curb overtopping.Flow spread must leave at least one Arterial 10’wide lane free of water in each direction. Major Storm Runoff —100Year Storm Street Classi?cation Maximum Encroachment Local and Collectors with The depth of water over the gutter ?owline shall not exceed Mountable Curbs 7.5 inches.* Local and Collectors with The depth of water over the gutter ?owline shall not exceed Vertical Curbs 9.5 inches.* Arterials Depth of water shall not exceed 6 inches at the street crovm,in order to allow operation of emergency vehicles, and not exceed 9.5 inches at the gutter ?owline,whichever is more restrictive.* *Residential,public,commercial,and industrial development occurred prior to street improvements in most areas of Englewood.Streets were built to best-?t existing improvements. Therefore ?nish ?oor elevations are not necessarily elevated above the back of walk. The standard inlets permittedfor use in the City are: Table 12 —Standard Inlets Permitted 3)Storm Drains Inlet Type _ Standard Detail Permitted Use ,, Curb Opening Type R D-9 All Street Types Grated Type C Inlet D10 Medians and Detention Ponds where vehicle and pedestrian traf?c is not permitted. Grated Type 16 Inlet D—1 Alleys and Private Drives and Streets Grated Type 13 Inlet D-5 Landscaped Areas and Detention Ponds Combination Type 16 Open Throat D—2 All Street Types Inlet The hydraulic analysis of storm sewer systems shall be in accordance with the criteria presented in the USDCM,Volume 1 —Streets,Inlets,and Storm Sewers.Final grades,street geometries,types of construction,and all other street details relative to the design,construction,or operation of the storm sewer system must be approved by the Public Works Director. ESDCM 30 The design of the storm sewer system shall include hydraulic analysis of both the minor and the major storm events.The hydraulic grade line (HGL)shall be calculated by accounting for pipe friction losses,expansion,contraction,bend,and junction losses.The methods for estimating these losses are provided in USDCM (Volume 1 —Storm Sewers).The HGL shall be plotted for all storm sewers.The HGL shall not be higher than 6-inches below the gutter ?owline.When the hydraulic grade line cannot meet the 6-inch criteria then the capacity of the storm sewer will need to be improved by increasing pipe sizes. Storm drain velocities shall be as shown in Table 15. Table 15 —Storm Drain Velocity Criteria Initial Storm Major Storm Minimum Velocity 3.0 fps N/A Maximum Velocity 16.0 fps 20.0 fps a)Construction Materials:Storm drains shall be constructed of reinforced concrete (Class IH is the required minimum)meeting current CDOT Speci?cations.The systems shall be designed to handle anticipated loads.Other types of pipe material and sizes may be acceptable on private property,but the owner will be responsible for it.The Public Works Department may allow alternative pipe materials,if justi?ed. b)Minimum Pipe Diameter:The minimum pipe diameter of storm drains shall be 15 inches. c)Horizontal Alignment:Storm drains shall usually be straight between manholes. Long radius curves are permitted for pipe diameters equal or larger than 24 inches. The radius of curvature shall be no less than the radius associated with the maximum permissible joint de?ection speci?ed by the manufacturer and no less than 100 feet. Storm drains shall be no closer than 5 feet,measured horizontally from the outside of parallel sanitary sewer or water line to the outside of the storm drain.Storm drains shall be no closer than 18 inches vertically from any crossing utility lines. Spacing of manholes shall conform to Table 16.Mauholes shall conform to Figure 14 —Standard Manhole Details. Table 16-Manhole Spacing Pipe Size Maximum Spacing 15 inches to 36 inches 400 feet 42 inches or greater 500 feet The minimum width of easement for installation of a storm drain shall be the pipe diameter plus 15 feet with the pipe normally centered in the easement. Vertical Alignment:Whenever possible,the crowns of the inlet and exit pipe should be aligned when the downstream pipe is larger than the upstream pipe within a manhole,in order to minimize backwater effects.The elevation drop through a manhole shall be no less than 0.2 feet.Refer to USDCM (Volume 1)for guidelines about shaping manhole bottoms and other details. Storm drain grades shall be such that a minimum 18 inches cover over the crown of the RCP is maintained.If less cover is shown,the Engineer shall submit the pipe FINAL DRAFT February 2020 ESDCM 31 structural design to the Public Works Director for approval.Uniform slopes shall be maintained between manholes.Final grades shall be set with ?rll consideration to capacity required,sedimentation problems,and other design parameters.The minimum slope shall be capable of producing a velocity of 3 feet per second when the drain is conveying initial storm ?ows. When an existing culvert is to be extended and the grade changes,a concrete collar as shown in Figure 15 —Concrete Pipe Collar Detail shall be used. e)Storm Drain Outlets:Erosion protection shall be provided at the outlet in accordance with the criteria presented in the Hydraulic Structures chapter of the USDCM (Volume 2).All storm drain outlets into open channels shall be constructed with a headwall and wing walls or a ?ared end section and toewall. 5.4 CULVERTS AND BRIDGES The hydraulic design of culverts bridges in Englewood shall be in accordance with the Culverts and Bridges chapter of the USDCM (Volume 2).Culverts are to be sized so that in the 2-year storm a minimum cleansing velocity of 3 fps is provided.The major storm design criteria are governed by the allowable street inundation as provided in Table 11.Culverts at a minimum shall be sized to convey the 5-year storm without overtopping and convey the difference between the 100-year storm and the allowablestreet overtopping,whichever is larger.Private driveway crossings over roadside ditches are required at a minimum to convey the 2-year storm. All culverts shall be designed with headwalls and wing walls,or with ?ared end sections and toewalls at the inlet and outlet. Conduit materials acceptable for use in culvert construction shall be in accordance with the criteria for storm drains,except for driveway culverts,which also allow corrugated metal pipe,and HDPE pipe.Driveway culverts shall be designed and installed to be resistant to damage from mowing equipment and errant vehicles. FINAL DRAFT February 2020 ESDCM 32 SECTION 6.0 STORAGE 6.1 GENERAL Detention basins constructed in the City shall be full spectrum detention facilities designed in accordance with the Storage chapter of USDCD (Volume 2).The first stage of these facilities, capturing and treating the water quality capture volume (WQCV),shall consist of extended detention basins,retention ponds,constructed wetland ponds,bioretention,or sand ?lter basins designed in accordance with USDCM (Volume 3). 5.2 DETENTION CRITERIA 1)Landscaping Reguirements All detention basins shall be covered with a minimum of 6 inches topsoil and landscaped and/or revegetated.Detention basins when properly landscaped can be an attractive part of a development. 2)Maintenance The Owner and subsequent owners,heirs,successors,and assigns shall maintain Stonnwater detention ponds.In the event that the maintenance is not performed by said owner,the City of Englewood shall have the right to enter such area(s)and perform the necessary work,the cost of which said owner,heirs,successors,will be responsible for paying upon billing.Detention facilities shall be designed so that they are accessible to maintenance equipment as well as for removal of silt and debris and for repairs that may need to occur. 3)Drainage Plan Detention Facilig Notes The following notes shall be included on the “Drainage Plan Sheets”for detention facilities. a)Detention basin embankment shall have a minimum relative compaction of 95%at optimum moisture content of standard proctor.Provisions shall be made for watering of all native seeded areas until it is established. b)The detention basin embankment top and spillway crest shall be staked by the Developer to con?rm that design grades are achieved prior to topsoil placement and landscaping. c)The detention facility volumes and all related drainage appurtenances (including basin boundaries)shall be determined and con?rmed by a registered professional engineer prior to issuance of the certificate of occupancy for any structure on the site or in the Development. d)No building or structure will be constructed in the detention areas and no changes or alterations affecting the hydraulic characteristics of the detention areas will be made without the approval of the Public Works Director. e)Maintenance and operation of the detention areas will remain the responsibility of the property owner,if the property owner fails in this responsibility the City has the right to enter the property,maintain the detention areas,and require reimbursement for the costs that may be incurred. 4)Flat Detention Facility Notes a)The following notes shall be included on plats when storrnwater detention basin areas are required: i.The storm water detention area(s)shown hereon shall be constructed and maintained by the owner and subsequent owners,heirs,successors,and assigns.In the event that said construction and maintenance is not performed by said owner,the City of Englewood shall FINAL DRAFT February 2020 ESDCM 33 have the right to enter such area(s)and perform the necessary work,the cost of which said owner,heirs,successors,and assigns agrees to pay upon billing. ii.No building or structure will be constructed in the detention area(s)and no changes or alterations affecting the hydraulic characteristics of the detention a.rea(s)will be made without the approval of the Public Works Director. b)For public stormwater detention or drainage easements,the following notes shall be included on the face of the plat: i.The storm water detention /(drainage easement(s))shown hereon are hereby granted to the City.This (these)easement(s)is (are)being conveyed for the purposes of operation,repair, alteration,and maintenance of the storm water management system.The maintenance and operation of the said facility (facilities)shall be the responsibility of the City providing the design,construction,and maintenance criteria of the City are followed and the said facility (facilities)has (have)been accepted.The City has the right to enter the property for the purposes for which this (these)easement(s)has (have)been granted. ii.No buildings,?lls,excavations,structures,fences,or other alterations shall be constructed within a storm water detention (retention)/(drainage easement(s))without the express written consent of the Public Works Director. FINAL DRAFT February 2020 ESDCM 34 BY AUTHORITY ORDINANCE NO.COUNCIL BILL NO.__ SERIES OF 2020 INTRODUCED BY COUNCIL MEMBER BILL FOR AN ORDINANCE AUTHORIZING THE ADOPTION OF THE “ENGLEWOOD STORM DRAINAGE CRITERIA MANUAL” FOR THE REGULATION OF THE STORMWATER UTILITY WITHIN THE CITY OF ENGLEWOOD,COLORADO. WHEREAS,the Federal Clean Water Act requires stormwater discharges be authorized under a General Permit for Stormwater Discharge issued by the Colorado Department of Health and Environment,Water Quality Control Division; WHEREAS,the Colorado Discharge Permit System,Regulation 61,states that the City is responsible for the quality of the stormwater dischargedqfromits jurisdiction; WHEREAS,the current “Englewood Storm Drainage Manual”was adopted by the Englewood City Council by passage of Ordinance No.28,Series of 2005,and the regulations regarding stormwater discharge have been updated by the State of Colorado; WHEREAS,the 2020 edition of the “Englewood Storm Drainage Manual”will supplant the 2005 manual in its entirety by the passage of this Ordinance; WHEREAS,the rules and regulations regarding Stormwater Utility are authorized under Englewood Municipal Code 2000,12-5-1; WHEREAS,the City of Englewood has developed an updated “Englewood Storm Drainage Criteria Manual”for the purpose of granting the authority to address drainage and water quality mandates that have been imposed by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)and the Colorado Department of Health and Environment; WHEREAS,the “Englewood Stonn Drainage Criteria Manual”will affect large developments and will not he a burden on small lot developments in the City of Englewood; WHEREAS,the “Englewood Storm Drainage Criteria Manual”gives the City, developers,design engineers and contractors concise directions on what is required to meet the intent of the EPA mandates,and WHEREAS,the Englewood Water and Sewer Board recommended Council approval of the “Englewood Storm Drainage Criteria Manual"at their February 11,2020 meeting. NOW,THEREFORE,BE IT ORDAINED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF ENGLEWOOD,COLORADO,AS FOLLOWS: Section 1.The City Council of the City of Englewood,Colorado hereby authorizes the adoption of the “Englewood Storm Drainage Criteria Manual”,as a requirement and regulation for the City of Englewood. Section 2.Pursuant to Article V,Section 40,of the Englewood Home Rule Charter, the City Council has determined that this Ordinance shall be published by title because of its size.A copy of the Englewood Design and Construction Standards and Specifications is available in the Office of the Englewood City Clerk. .1. Introduced,read infull,and passed on first reading on the 18”‘day of February,2020. Published by Title as a Bill for an Ordinance in the City’s of?cial newspaper on the 20"‘ day of February,2020. Published as a Bill for an Ordinance on the City’s official website beginning on the 19”‘ day of February,2020 for thirty (30)days. Linda Olson,Mayor ATTEST: Stephanie Carlile,City Clerk 1,Stephanie Carlile,City Clerk of the City of Englewood,Colorado,hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true copy of the Bill for an Ordinance introduced,read in full,and passed on first reading on the 18"‘day of February,2020. Stephanie Carlile City of Englewood Appendix B IPIRIEILUH Eh’!@I@IE-.'©[K§ll-.[l§'F' Developer or Design Engineer: The drainage report for the location described below has been received and lacks the required information noted.All the missing information must be provided before this report will be accepted for review.If you have any questions,call the City Review Engineer.This checklist must be returned with your submittal. Project Name:Date Submitted: Site Address:City Review Engineer: Subdivision Name: Preparer. g?gineen——Phone: one:-. E-mail:e mall’ I.TITLE PAGE V Missing Present Not Required A.Type of Report (Preliminary,Final,Flood Plain Development) B.Project Name/Address C.Preparer:Name,Firm,Date H.BODY OF REPORT Legible Historic Initial and Major Storm Analysis Soil and Water Table Data Peak Discharge Table Developed Initial and Major Storm Analysis Offsite Runoff Impacts Analysis Detention Pond Storage Requirements Discussion J.Permanent Stormwater Quality (Post Construction) IH.AP ENDICES A.Legible B.Computations Degree of Irnperviousness -”‘F1QT*'I§f’.°’?> 1 2 Time of Concentration 3.Peak Discharge Calculations 4. 5. Detention Pond Storage Requirements Water Quality Capture VolumeRequirements C.Map of Total Drainage Basin D.Rainfall Curves E.Design Nomographs February,2020 I Preliminary Review Checklist Appendix B February,2020 Missing Present Not Required IV.DRAINAGE PLAN SHEET Legible Location Map Site Location Shown Legend Benchmark Reference North Arrow Scale F1'«'.Q."’P”. U.0P’?’ Date Prepared and Revision Dates Existing and Proposed Contours (2’Max.Interval) J.Drainage Basin and Sub-Basin Boundaries (Historic and Developed) 1.Acreage 2.Imperviousness 3.Peak Discharge Data Table a.Historic Initial and Major b.Developed Initial and Major 4.Offsite drainage ?ow patterns and impacts. K.Design Point Flow Data Shown (Initial and Major) Street Names and Grades .Property Lines &ROW Lines Easements Storm Sewer Layout with Sizes Storm Inlet Locations Cross Pan Locations Open Channel Drainageways Detention Pond Location(s) i'3."’.W’.0-"’.0.ZZ.l" Permanent Stormwater Quality (Post Construction) Facility Location (s) S?‘ Location and Elevation of Outfall Points ._. Historic Initial and Major Developed Initial and Major Irrigation Ditch .Flood Plain and Floodway Infonnation Critical Minimum Finish Floor Elevations .?<?<€.<N Standard Notes Preliminary Review Checklist Appendix B February,2020 V.OTHER City of Englewood Appendix C February,2020 lF'?l:‘i]l.‘llL.lEl}£lél@E [RF EW ©M Developer or Design Engineer: The drainage report for the location described below hasbeen received and lacks the required information noted.All the missing information must be provided before this report will be accepted for review.If you have any questions,call the City Review Engineer.This checklist must be returned with your submittal. Project Name:Date Submitted: Site Address!City Review Engineer: Subdivision Name: Preparer: Engineer‘.. Phone:Phone. e-mail:e-mail: I.TITLE PAGE Missing Present Not Required A.Type of Report (Preliminary,Final,Flood Plain Development) B.Project Name C.Preparer:Name,Firm,Date II.BODY OF REPORT Legible Historic Initial and Major Storm Analysis Soil and Water Table Data Peak Discharge Table Developed Initial and Major Storm Analysis Offsite Runoff Impacts Analysis -”‘F.C1rnp1s==.> Detention Pond Storage Requirements Discussion J.Permanent Stormwater Quality (Post Construction) III.AP ENDICES A.Legible B.Computations Degree of Irnperviousness Time of Concentration Peak Discharge Calculations Street Capacity Analysis Storm Inlet Design Analysis Pipe Sizing Calculations Open Channel Calculations 9°.\|9\.‘-":'~‘~.W5\'!‘- Detention Pond Storage Requirements *0 Pond Outlet Design Calculations I0.Pond Volume Provided Calculations 11.Permanent Stormwater Quality (Post Construction)Calculations C.Map of Total Drainage Basin D.Rainfall Curves E.Design Nomographs Final Drainage Report Checklist Appendix C February,2020 IV.DRAINAGE PLAN SHEET Missing Present Not Required Legible Location Map Site Location Shown Legend BenchmarkReference North Arrow Scale Date Prepared and Revision Dates "‘P.0i"‘F"1_ U.0F”E> Ex.and Proposed Contours (2’max interval) (50’beyond project limits) 1-‘ Drainage Basin and Sub-Basin Boundaries (Historic and Developed) 1.Acreage 2.Imperviousness 3.Peak Discharge Data Table a.Historic Initial and Major b.Developed Initial and Major 4.Offsite drainage ?ow patterns and impacts. K.Design Point Flow Data Shown (Initial and Major) L.Street Names and Grades .Property Lines &ROW Lines Easements Storm Sewer Layout with Sizes Storm Inlet Locations Cross Pan Locations Open Channel Drainageways -"’.W.0-'°.0.ZZ DetentionPond Location(s) 1.WQCV,EURV and 100 yr Volumes 2.WQCV,EURV and 100 yr Volume Elevations 3.Outlet Details 4.Emergency Over?ow .Permanent Stonnwater Quality (Post Commotion)T U.Location and Elevation of Outfall Points 1.Historic Initial and Major 2.Developed Initial and Major V.Irrigation Ditch W.Flood Plain and Floodway Information X.Critical Minimum Finish Floor Elevations X.Standard Notes Final Drainage Report Checklist Appendix C February,2020 V.OTHER City of Englewood Appendix D February,2020 §lMlA|LlL.ll-.©?|EEWE'|l_-.@|PlMJlE[N]‘Fl?@lT<ZlM] This form shall be used for the development and/or redevelopment of in?ll lots that are less than 0.5 acre in size.Attach any additional information as required. City of Englewood Engineering Services 1000 Englewood Parkway Englewoo d,CO 80110 303.762.2500 www.englewoodco.gov Project Name: Site Address: Subdivision Name: Preparer: Firm:Engineer: Phone:e-mail: Site Description:Address existing conditions such as topography,present land use,existing structures,and pavement M385. Proposed Project Description:Address any and all proposed changes and land use. Existing Drainage Pattern:Address ?ows,direction of ?ows,concentrated vs.sheet ?ows,where do ?ows go,any offsite flows,irrigation ditches,existing drainage structures,and ?ood plain or ?ood hazard issues. Proposed Drainage Pattern:Describe any proposed changes to the existing pattern or drainage system. Small Lot DevelopmentForm Appendix D February,2020 Weighted Impervious Calculations: Existing Site A B C Impervious (%)Existing Existing Impervions Areas:Area (st)Imperviousness (AxB) Roof Areas 90% Paved Areas 100% Other Pervious Areas: Gravel Areas 40% Native Areas 0% Grass Landscape Areas 0% Other Sum B=Sum C= Existing Imperviousness=% (Sum C/Sum B) Developed Site A B C Impervious (%)Existing Existing Impervious Areas:Area (st)Imperviousness (AXB) Roof Areas 90% Paved Areas 100% Other Pervious Areas: Gravel Areas 40% Native Areas 0% Grass Landscape Areas 0% Other Sum B=Sum C= Developed Imperviousness=% (Sum C/Sum B) Development Impact Analysis:Address the bene?cial and detrimental impactsthat the proposed development/redevelopment will have. Best Management Practices Plan:Evaluate the possible pollution sources that are common for the proposed type of developmentand indicate the controls recommended to mitigate adverse impacts. Site Plan Provided: El Scale El North Arrow El Property Lines El Easements El Existing Utilities El Adjacent Streets El Drainage Flow Arrows El Existing and Proposed Site Improvements El Ex &Proposed Contours El Benchmark City of Englewood Appendix E February,2020 [WE ©@@W@lll ©[HlE@lil1J]§‘l’ Project Name: Site Address: Sub division Name: Preparer: Engineer: Phone: e-mail: Missing Date Submitted: Review Comments Sent: 2'“Submittalz Review Comments Sent: 3'“Submittal: Date Approved: Present Not Required 1.PLAN Title Block Scale (Horizontal and Vertical) North Arrow Location Map with Site Location Shown Legend Plan Date and Revisions Professional Engineer and/or Firm PE Seal Speci?cations Drawing Numbers Notes !“F"""P.Q3""P"_U.0F°?’ Location and elevation of USGS Benchmark II.Basic Data A.Street Information 1.Street Names 2.Grades and Cross Slopes 3.ROW/Street Dimensions B.Soil and Water Table Information 1.Test I-IoleLocations 2.Classi?cation of Major Soil Types .Property Line/ROW Lines .Easements .Structures .Proposed and Existing Contours .Critical Spot Elevations and Slopes Retaining Walls C D E F.Walks,Drives and Parking G H I. J.Irrigation Ditches K.Flood Plain Limits Drainage Construction Plan Checklist Appendix E February,2020 Missing Present Not Required II.HYDROLOGY B.Storrnwater WQCV,EURV and 100 Year Storage Data 1.Required Volumes 2.Provided Volumes 3.WQCV,EURV and 100 Yr Water Surface Elevations 4.Pond Release Rates K.Storm Inlets (Labels consistent with drainage report) 1.Type 2.Size 3.Flowline and Invert Elevations 4.Flow Data (?ow intercepted and by-passed) L.Storm Sewers 1.Pipe Capacity and Design Flow Stationing Pipe Size and Material Pipe Lengths Pro?les Hydraulic Grade Lines Invert Elevations and Grades ‘.’°>‘.°‘5":"P’!" Manlroles,Inlets 9.Trench and Bedding Details M.Existing and Proposed Utilities 1.Location and Depth a.Water Gas Electric Sanitary Sewer Fiber Optics "".°.°‘.°P‘ .Cable TV 2.Utility Noti?cation Note &Phone # 3.Potential Con?icts Noted and Identi?ed Drainage Construction Plan Checklist Appendix E February,2020 Missing Present Not Required N.DetentionPond l.Contours 2.Outlet Details 3.Lining Details 4.Key Elevations Noted 5.Minimum Freeboard Provided 6.Emergency Over?ow 0.Open Channels 1.Stationing 2.Cross-Sections Provided 3.Trickle Channel 4.Lining Details 5.Max and Min Velocities 6.Grades 7.Pro?le 8.Freeboard Requirements Met P.Special Structures 1.Plan 2.Elevations 3.Design Details Q.Standard Notes IV.OTHER City Review Engineer:Date:Phone: e-mail: City of Englewood Appendix F February,2020 STGJRMWATEIIRQUALITYm PLANRE-(lU|R~E=M’E=NTS_ Developer or Design Engineer: The SWMP report for the location described below has been received and lacks the required information noted.All the missing information must be provided before this report will be accepted for review.If you have any questions,call the City Review Engineer.This checklist must be returned with your submittal. Project Name:Date Submitted: Site Address!City Review Engineer: Subdivision Name: Preparer:_ Engineen Phone. Phone:94113115 e-mail: Sites one (1)acre and larger must meet additional requirements per the Colorado Department of Health and Environment,Water Quality. 1.TITLE PAGE Missing Present Not Required A.Stormwater Management Plan B.Project Name/Address C.Preparer:Name,Firm,Date D.Engineer’s Stamp/Signature II.BODYOF REPORT A.Legible B.Description of Project . 1.Location General Description Topography,Soil Types,Vegetation Site Area Disturbed Area Cut/FillVolumes Receiving Waters City of EnglewoodDrainage Basin .Scheduleof Major Construction Activities 10.Contact Information for Quali?ed Stonnwater Manager Potential Pollution Sources Erosion and SedimentControl Measures Materials Handling and Spill Prevention Inspection Scheduling and Reporting Corrective Action Final Stabilizationand Long Tenn Storrnwater Management ‘°9°>‘.°‘E-":“5*’.“’F.0-’”!'“.U.0 Stormwater Management Plan Appendix F February,2020 Missing Present Not Required III.APPENDICES A.Legible B.Computations I.Diversion Swale 2.Sediment Pond 3.Other; 4.Other C.InspectionReport Forms IV.Plan Title Block Scale North Arrow Location Map with Site Location Shown Legend Plan Date and Revisions ProfessionalEngineer and/or Firm PE Seal Speci?cations Drawing Numbers ?‘5“"‘FQi‘1P’53'.0!37?> Notes _L.Location and elevation of USGS Benchmark M.0wner’s Acknowledgement N.Site Plan Property/ROW Lines Street Namm Structures Walks,Drives and Parking Retaining Walls Storm Sewer Pipes,Inlets and Manholes .\|P\.“':‘\P-*.N!*- FloodplainLimits 0.BMP Legend P.BMP Notes Q.Stonnwater Data Block 1.Total Area/DisturbedArea 2.Cut/Fill Volumes 3.City of Englewood Drainage Basin 4 Receiving Waters Project/BMP Schedule BMP Symbols Labeled &Dimensioned Limits of Construction Flow Arrows Existing and Proposed Contours at 1’Interval .<.C1:-150?’? Standard Details Stormwater Management Plan Appendix F February,2020 V.OTHER APPENDIX G CITY OF ENGLEWOOD STANDARD FORM-1 TIME OF CONCENTRATION SHEET NO: PROJECT:JOB N0; CALCULATEDBV:DATE’DESIGN STORM _TCCHECK FINALTCSUBBASINDATAINITIAL/OVERLANDTIME(TI)TRAVEL TIME(Tl)(umanued basins)(mm)REMRRKS '0 .-.3?‘3 -9zu_g -:F g 1 1:F v :0: <3 :2'5 3 E a E_5.1 E 5‘.9 E-E 3 ; In <o E m 5:z m z z m ,2 p =., 2 z 0 <z n.">-'w n.—_."E E :-5 Q 3 I 5-H g 2'E 3 E..-u 3 9 E.5 33TI33InE“‘Fa‘-I 2 5 nno50zcs,5 g E |-ou=-u :2 * APPENDIX H CITY OF ENGLEWOOD STANDARD FORM-2 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM DESIGN SHEET NO: JOB NO:PROJECT: DESIGN STORM:DATE:CALCULATED BY: REMARKSTRAVELTIMESTORMSEWERSTREETIINLET (24) 3.5mE_.._._m>E._. (23) E..=m..w._ (22) is.§8_¢> (11) §.«Em (20) 33EE=m_mmn (19)(19) is.56 (17) E.mum Eoewmw (16) 33.u>o>=mo (15) Eu..€&8§=_ .5new (13) E3 Emcmman.2... (14) is25:sea (12) DIRECTRUNOFF Eu. .0.%_sm_So._. (11) <.oEEm (10) E3m0eazmSEE( A93mw.<BEawMaw AnnymE<m 3.5_ _>?_.2=_m 0 ..:a_oEmaouo?i (5) 3.58.M Emmamm..< (3) IDENTIFICATION Eon.532. (1) STREET in 1:: 1a 17 1a CITY OF ENGLEWOOD Storm Drainage Baslns “GU”1‘ I : I I x‘; 5 :LEGEND3zs2\e \‘ mm —-—-—'-r———1 I. Adrian:———I wanna —-—K ': hm‘V:s .:_n_I . c...‘.‘.”.{' I "3. w....,—.—._*i 5iv,.j».——_:... M2:‘“ I ____H;u..u.4 an,‘ ""mum.i-Norm t \g;,3 E 3 " E E g ; "”"'*'-332H vim?.-_,,,,,._B;:uJ_.'~ 0 of §3 5 5 3 8 = ‘Ill:—————~:~—W‘''§5 ‘r”-\‘,r “M”-~--7L \‘ yr ' I‘v*' sun can W." ‘|Trautmcnr/,'_......-.._..L_..!’E-g.PI.“NoI1'h-cntrll ‘= cmndl ____‘___.L§H'l 3 _‘T*\\ mmnouln ‘V Durlmauth _,Dartmouth Ave:l$In ' .L._ll0L‘_"f""Dwcmld‘ '"" _Dartmouth Industrial ,'_|____‘ _1;,,_—_e}.,_%v_.“a__\<‘Eumnn Basin ,I I.s I ‘II~~I - _____-..--.._ I ne/I.‘at’,‘I "‘-.._.I,~_L~’L 5”” my-1_,m K ‘ . ‘‘___.g on"my cu-ru‘~, ‘‘A ‘,,* :E E .' I ~*as?»-*\‘."Jr«?"'*'il'!3“”‘”“v-»~~-:::.'*'‘\.-\= u..L__J I ..l‘"lI*~_‘~4._4-1 I K N“I’‘‘I \~4-us 235 -_.1 ~_//'vA-~'-kc‘K ‘ I \;k .)¢?c!sanA9m:u ,/’35/~.r.-,\mu .1 __-\,3;‘55g',\,-'~v ._‘\_4\I_r «-.‘__---.2 \> -mum:noun:u:1!u _II»2“\0*‘lull \.~.__‘,.].Lak-o <-—~~~—-'~— §.Fnglowooi . I u.I Buln év’Highfchool-»~-~.2--A2'I II N K .4 A ~-—»sun:mu..n.eoov-ux I -~.‘<,|um:-dz Fmuuy,2o2n CU‘!OF ENGLEWOOD storm Drainage Basins “GU”15 LEGEND Cr,,~\-: nnnsnz nu-co-u 1n:oI:a cum;mm Ln. Tutu -"~‘—-—\,'Engluwoud , .._\ \Llmon nun...‘ -_...._l_.—.—_.__»-»; I=adoraI‘aQrd.\,\"“""‘°""’7- ‘, hm ~-\‘x E \lulu L..-.5s_.,_-.....7.-..-V.1...... A-nun n‘E (umon Avanuc lasin mm;‘Ev -._ '5 §3 §‘i 5 i u E k} clunmoo |.--.‘_---~”'-.<— Gum ‘* ,\?ltrationI‘_* Monmouth Centennill ‘~“DIanL...‘.‘. Iollowood 5'5"’Ms?" K.saammu *’\-, nlg Dry Creek anln ‘ x\§.\\ 'hf con:-mun: Brookr/dyeC. ~--V.A uyn‘‘.443 _lasin |g umrrv ».‘\/~\\“‘J \AN ‘Salk:I Inch U LIN)lent\nvnud:Fnbvuary.2020 ‘\Nlndurmcn INTENSITY (INCHES PER HOUR) 90 8.0 70 x.<3 30 20 10 0.0 RAINFALLINTENSITY-DURATION CURVES FIGURE 2 l\VIIIIII I‘L‘IIIII m—yenr|1C!1mcN 5—yeaIu as mm 2—year (0 s2 mm TIME IN MINUTES February.2020 n-Iozauc-uuussnr !ouruI:lKDA'SolISurvIyoHnnIIon¢'AuI(v.cdorI¢o‘mg:-mypuuunanuuunn CITY OF ENGLEWOOD Soll Claulflcatlons FIGURESA SOIL LIGIID um m'&"f.= «on can souamp AID B BIB BVC BVE EUB FgD Gr LV NIB RIIE RID E >UUU??O)???7WW x E] sale:1 may -1.600but unwind:Fobruury,um ?¢IDUU(UUUDO?( SE 3809!! E333 it GIIIDIT ‘I10! ..3><N5a2 Bill GIN A1 19 O53 GP! BAG DAB 3 Iilllmmulllaa wuz'£unnu'»9IIu-u I 'IuII4MHnIIUIn-I?giltdvu,.q,,,,,:,..,.,,,3,,‘ "U .wI-nun:mmnuhwpmmmsvmtl-mm NV mum:rl-tun:am-an 'U°D§3|Jl33‘|3 lI°S aooumsua 10 MD CITY OF ENGLEWOOD Soil Classifications Soil Legend AsD Ascalon sandy loam,5%to 9%slopes BtB Bresser loam,gravelly subsoll varlant,1%to 3%slopes Bvc Bresser-Truckton sandy loams,3%to 5%slopes BVE Bresser-Truckton sandy loams,5%to 20%slopes EdB Edgewater loam,0%to 3%slopes FgD Fondis-Ascalon,gravelly subsoll variant,complex,1%to 9%slopes Gr Gravelly land Lv Loamy alluvlal land NIB Nunn Loam,0%to 3%slopes RhE Renohlll-Bulck loams,9%to 20%slopes RID Renohlll-Lltle clay loams,3%to 9%slopes RtE Renohlll-Lltle-Thedalund complex,9%to 30%slopes Wt Wet alluvlal land X Gravel plt z Unable to determine classlfication from source map Notes: Map source:USDA "Soil Survey of Arapahoe County,Colorado"orlginally published March 1971. FIGURE 3C *1 Flgure4 GROUND COVER VELOCITIES I-i g "I II I.# 5 "o IL 1 ',_° o ' IE «~%« _§2'”‘6’ IL4 3 ' OE n .9 1 V -J 1 J 0.5 ..,.a 941 aihnib«:15 1.9 an 4;an 19 40 VLOGITY m FEET PER sacoun N FEETFLOWDISTANCE 155.0mn:>zzmromoozocz....._.0<<.:2_mzo_s.oo_~>2._ea N 80L Sou m8 _. I 0T3v..NNamoonIEmoPC TRN..8..-.-.N....o3ES E........ I P 8 I ........... I C ..... I.NE I com I 3 M3 F8I8 E98T amE:w.,m.o.,.w 98LSbo 8s985N3It.8 SF m 8 E98Eom V0NCT HAI.mm GFU moURD3 ouN I.IRs0ea .C 8 RcuNo B L9.. E N N _.E.8_A :uo.SmH mu9.§con u._.o3.35m 0.5 F ossgym s Cross S|op_e=2% (_Q in cfs) February,2020 Figure 7 REDUC (F)FACTOR 2 O REDUCTI T cars and moving vehicles, ?ows in the available ROW. February.2020 0.8 E0 0.‘! 0.0 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 I ’. 1!-'ebrua[x,2020 =2% n/I__ e WOm 5 S IIIIIIIIIIIIIII0 r C Iu kn. S I I I I II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Igure ' I I I I Where: I I I I I I I II I II I I I I I I Nm T A U Q E AW H F M 0 R F S E U N. V _.m U COUNCIL COMMUNICATION TO: Mayor and Council FROM: Tim Hoos DEPARTMENT: Public Works DATE: March 23, 2020 SUBJECT: CB #5 - An Ordinance adopting the updated Engineering Design and Construction Standards DESCRIPTION: CB #5 - An Ordinance adopting the updated Engineering Design and Construction Standards RECOMMENDATION: Staff recommends that Council adopt the ordinance as presented. PREVIOUS COUNCIL ACTION: Study sessions were held on September 23, 2019 and January 27, 2020 to review the proposed Construction Standards and Concrete Specifications Manual with the City Council. SUMMARY: The last revision to the City's standards for the construction of public improvements was published as a document titled "Construction Standards and Concrete Specifications Manual" in April of 2011. As the name implies, the document mainly focused on requirements for the replacement of concrete. Public Works staff have developed new and updated Engineering Design and Construction Standards and Specifications for public improvements in order to establish standards for both the design and construction of all types of infrastructure. Staff members from the Community Development & Utilities Departments also participated in the preparation of this document by providing review and content. The proposed new Engineering Design and Construction Standards and Specifications have been divided into three divisions. Division 1 contains design standards for public improvements and general performance standards for the design and construction of public improvements. Division 2 outlines the permitting process and provides information to contractors as to when a permit supporting what and improvements public required construction the for is of documentation is required with an application. Division 3 covers the materials, means and methods to be used for construction of all public improvements. These updated Engineering Design and Construction Standards and Specifications will apply to all private development, public and private utility work and capital improvement projects. Staff is proposing that the Engineering Design and Construction Standards and Specifications be adopted by ordinance into the Englewood Municipal Code as a requirement and regulation for the design and construction of public improvements. This action is considered critical to maintaining fair and consistent regulations for future development and to ensure that work completed is to the highest quality and in accordance with industry standards. ANALYSIS: Policy statements contained in Section 1.1.4 of the document are to be the basis of regulation . The Required Public Improvements included in this section are intended to ensure that development and re-development projects provide infrastructure that meets Federal, State and Local requirements (including conformance with the Americans with Disability Act) and to reduce the physical and financial impacts created by increasing density. Included policies are as follows: • Developers must replace any existing sidewalk adjacent to a development site that is too narrow with a sidewalk that is a minimum of four feet in width to meet current ADA requirements; pedestrian ramps adjacent to the site must also be upgraded to meet current guidelines • In cases where a development is increasing the traffic volume in an alley, the policy will require the developer to provide a plan and profile design and pave a portion of the affected alley as follows: • Addition of 1-4 units will require paving the alley along the length of the property frontage only; • Addition of 5 or more units will require paving the alley along the property frontage and to the nearest avenue (cross street). FINANCIAL IMPLICATIONS: No direct financial implications are created for the City of Englewood by the adoption of the Engineering Design and Construction Standards and Specifications. ALTERNATIVES: The alternative to adopting the 2020 Construction Standards and Concrete Specifications Manual is to continue to rely on the 2011 "Construction Standards and Concrete Specifications Manual". As previously stated, the 2011 document focuses on concrete construction in the right of way and does not include any required design criteria for public improvements. The adoption of the Engineering Design and Construction Standards and Specifications is critical to providing a document that can be used to ensure the quality of both the design and construction of public improvements. CONCLUSION: The Engineering Design and Construction Standards and Specifications document is an important tool that the City will use to ensure that new or replacement infrastructure is properly designed and constructed to adequately serve the public and not create an unnecessary burden on the City's existing infrastructure. ATTACHMENTS: Council Bill #5 2020 Design and Construction Standards & Specifications -1- BY AUTHORITY ORDINANCE NO. _____ COUNCIL BILL NO. 5 SERIES OF 2020 INTRODUCED BY COUNCIL MEMBER SIERRA AN ORDINANCE AMENDING TITLE 11-7-25 OF THE ENGLEWOOD MUNICIPAL CODE TO ADOPT THE “ENGLEWOOD DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL” FOR THE REGULATION OF PUBLIC IMPROVEMENT DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OCCURRING WITHIN RIGHTS-OF-WAY LOCATED WITHIN THE CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO. WHEREAS, the City of Englewood adopted Construction Standards and Concrete Specifications in 2011; WHEREAS, professional staff has developed a 2020 Design and Construction Standards and Specifications manual for the purpose of informing developers, design engineers and contractors of the design and construction standards mandated for constructing projects within the City’s rights-of-way; and WHEREAS, adoption of updated design and construction standards will bring the City into conformance with communities throughout the region and into compliance with recently adopted federal and state laws and regulations. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT ORDAINED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO, AS FOLLOWS: Section 1. Amendment of Title 11, Chapter 7, Section 25. Title 11, Chapter 7, Section 25 of the Englewood Municipal Code shall be amended as follows: 11-7-25: Adoption of 2020 Design and Construction Standards and Specifications. A. There is hereby adopted, by reference thereto, the 2020 Design and Construction Standards and Specifications manual (Standards and Specifications), as developed by the City of Englewood. The City Clerk shall maintain a copy of the Standards and Specifications, including all appendices, within the office of the clerk and make such Standards and Specifications available for inspection during regular business hours. Additionally, a copy of the Standards and Specifications shall be maintained on the website of the City of Englewood. 1. The Standards and Specifications shall govern all work within the Public Right-of-Way. A permit is required for all work within the Public Right-of-Way. 2. All new developments and re-developments are required to construct new public right- of-way infrastructure or replace existing infrastructure within the public right of way and adjacent to the property to be in conformance with current ADA and City Standards. 3. A License Agreement is required for the design, construction, operation and maintenance of any overhead or underground facilities within the Public right-of-way by any entity without a franchise agreement with the City. The License Agreement -2- shall be on a form provided by the City. All work to construct and maintain facilities shall be covered by the applicable right-of-way permit. 4. Standards and Specifications shall include, but are not limited to: requirements for site plan, construction plans, plan submission, and plan approval. 5. Standards and Specifications shall include, but are not limited to: development guidelines and requirements, including traffic studies, roadway designs, bicycle trails and pedestrian facilities. 6. Standards and Specifications shall include performance standards. 7. Standards and Specifications shall include permit types. 8. Standards and Specifications shall include general construction requirements, including, but not limited to: construction materials and methods, asphalt pavement standards, concrete pavement standards, storm sewer standards, and traffic control device standards. 9. Standards and Specifications shall include standard detail drawing requirements, including, but not limited to: standard signal details, standard signing and striping details, and roadway and concrete details. B. The City of Englewood Construction Standards and Concrete Specifications, dated April, 2011, are hereby superseded and repealed in conformance with EMC Title 1, Chapter 2. Section 2. Notice of general provisions and findings applicable to interpretation and application of this Ordinance: Applicability of Title 1, Chapter 2, Saving Clause. The provisions of E.M.C. Title 1, Chapter 2, Saving Clause apply to interpretation and application of this Ordinance, unless otherwise set forth above, including, but not limited to, the provisions regarding severability, inconsistent ordinances or code provisions, effect of repeal or modification, and legislation not affected by repeal. Enforcement. E.M.C. Title 1, Chapter 4, “General Penalty” provisions mandate that except as otherwise provided within specific Titles, Chapters, or Sections of the Englewood Municipal Code, the violation of any provisions of the Code, or of any secondary code adopted therein, shall be punished by a fine not exceeding two thousand six hundred and fifty dollars ($2,650.00) or imprisonment for a term not exceeding three hundred sixty (360) days or by both such fine and imprisonment. Safety Clauses. The City Council hereby finds, determines, and declares that this Ordinance is promulgated under the general police power of the City of Englewood, that it is promulgated for the health, safety, and welfare of the public, and that this Ordinance is necessary for the preservation of health and safety and for the protection of public convenience and welfare. The City Council further determines that the Ordinance bears a rational relation to the proper legislative object sought to be obtained. Introduced, read in full, and passed on first reading on the 2nd day of March, 2020. Published by Title as a Bill for an Ordinance in the City’s official newspaper on the 5th day of March, 2020. -3- Published as a Bill for an Ordinance on the City’s official website beginning on the 4th day of March, 2020 for thirty (30) days. Read by Title and passed on final reading on the 23rd day of March, 2020. Published by Title in the City’s official newspaper as Ordinance No. ___, Series of 2020, on the 26th day of March, 2020 Published by title on the City’s official website beginning on the 25th day of March, 2020 for thirty (30) days. This Ordinance shall take effect thirty (30) days after publication following final passage. Linda Olson, Mayor ATTEST: Stephanie Carlile, City Clerk I, Stephanie Carlile, City Clerk of the City of Englewood, Colorado, hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true copy of the Ordinance passed on final reading and published by Title as Ordinance No. ___, Series of 2020. Stephanie Carlile -4- 2020 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION Standards and Specifications City of Englewood 1000 Englewood Parkway Englewood, CO 80110 www.englewoodgov.org Table of Contents DIVISION 1 Section 1 General Requirements .................................................................................................................. 5 1.1.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 5 1.1.2 Definitions & Abbreviations .......................................................................................................... 5 1.1.2.1 Definitions ..................................................................................................................................... 6 1.1.2.2 Abbreviations .............................................................................................................................. 12 1.1.3 Council Ordinance ....................................................................................................................... 14 1.1.4 Policy Statements ........................................................................................................................ 15 1.1.5 Submittal Requirements ............................................................................................................. 17 1.1.5.1 Submittals ................................................................................................................................... 17 1.1.5.2 Approved Plans ........................................................................................................................... 18 1.1.5.3 Permits ........................................................................................................................................ 19 1.1.5.4 Record Drawings ......................................................................................................................... 19 Section 2 ‐ Roadway And Pavement Design Guide ..................................................................................... 21 1.2.1 General ........................................................................................................................................ 21 1.2.2 Traffic Impact Study Guidelines .................................................................................................. 21 1.2.2.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 21 1.2.2.2 Responsibilities for Transportation Impact Studies .................................................................... 22 1.2.2.3 Transportation Study Contents ................................................................................................... 26 1.2.2.4 Submittal Requirements ............................................................................................................. 35 1.2.2.5 Revisions to Traffic Study ............................................................................................................ 35 1.2.3 Roadway Classification and Minimum Design Criteria ............................................................... 36 1.2.3.1 General ........................................................................................................................................ 36 1.2.3.2 Classifications .............................................................................................................................. 36 1.2.4 Access Standards ......................................................................................................................... 40 1.2.4.1 Access Points ............................................................................................................................... 40 1.2.4.2 Change In Use ............................................................................................................................. 41 1.2.4.3 Speed Change Lanes ................................................................................................................... 42 1.2.4.4 Access Alignment ........................................................................................................................ 42 1.2.4.5 Site Access Design ....................................................................................................................... 42 1.2.4.5.1 Spacing ................................................................................................................................. 42 1.2.4.5.2 Vehicle Storage: ................................................................................................................... 42 Table of Contents 1.2.5 Vertical Alignment. ...................................................................................................................... 44 1.2.5.1 Permissible Roadway Grades ...................................................................................................... 44 1.2.5.2 Permissible Intersection Grades (Public Right‐of‐Way) ............................................................... 44 1.2.5.3 Changing Grades ......................................................................................................................... 44 1.2.5.4 Cross Slope .................................................................................................................................. 45 1.2.5.5 Vertical Curves............................................................................................................................. 45 1.2.5.6 Intersections ............................................................................................................................... 45 1.2.6 Curb Returns ............................................................................................................................... 45 1.2.7 Connection With Existing Roadways ........................................................................................... 46 1.2.8 Sight Distance .............................................................................................................................. 47 1.2.9 Median Islands ............................................................................................................................ 49 1.2.10 Roundabouts ............................................................................................................................... 50 1.2.11 Traffic Signals, Striping and Signage ............................................................................................ 52 1.2.12 Bicycle and Pedestrian Design .................................................................................................... 52 1.2.12.1 Definition of Terms ................................................................................................................... 52 1.2.12.2 General Criteria ......................................................................................................................... 52 1.2.12.3 Off‐Street Bicycle Facilities (Multi‐Use Trails) ........................................................................... 54 1.2.12.3.1 Multi‐Use Trail Width, Type and Surface ........................................................................... 54 1.2.12.3.2 Clearance ........................................................................................................................... 54 1.2.12.3.3 Grade. ................................................................................................................................. 54 1.2.12.3.4 Cross Slope ......................................................................................................................... 55 1.2.12.3.5 Sight Distance ..................................................................................................................... 55 1.2.12.3.6 Design Speed ...................................................................................................................... 55 1.2.12.3.7 Radius of Curvature............................................................................................................ 55 1.2.12.3.8 Drainage ............................................................................................................................. 56 1.2.12.3.9 Safety Considerations ........................................................................................................ 56 1.2.12.3.10 Intersections .................................................................................................................... 57 1.2.12.3.11 On‐Street Bike Routes ...................................................................................................... 58 1.2.12.3.12 Width and Cross Sections ................................................................................................ 58 1.2.12.3.13 Signage and Striping ......................................................................................................... 58 1.2.12.3.14 Traffic Signal Detection .................................................................................................... 58 1.2.12.3.15 Bike Lanes at Intersections .............................................................................................. 58 1.2.12.4 Pedestrian Facilities (Sidewalks and Curb Ramps) .................................................................... 59 Table of Contents 1.2.13 Street Lighting ............................................................................................................................. 62 1.2.14 Pavement Design ........................................................................................................................ 65 1.2.14.1 General ...................................................................................................................................... 65 1.2.14.2 Pavement Design Report Submittal Options ............................................................................ 65 1.2.14.3 Field Investigation ..................................................................................................................... 66 1.2.14.4 Laboratory Testing .................................................................................................................... 66 1.2.14.5 Design Requirements ................................................................................................................ 67 1.2.14.6 Report Requirements ................................................................................................................ 67 Section 3 Performance Standards ............................................................................................................... 67 1.3.1 General ........................................................................................................................................ 67 1.3.2 Land Survey Plats, Major & Minor Subdivisions, Survey Monuments ........................................ 68 1.3.3 Drainage and Erosion Control ..................................................................................................... 68 1.3.4 Site and Grading Plans ................................................................................................................ 71 1.3.5 Alleys ........................................................................................................................................... 71 1.3.6 Concrete ...................................................................................................................................... 72 1.3.7 Structures .................................................................................................................................... 72 1.3.8 Utility Construction ..................................................................................................................... 72 1.3.8.1 Pre‐Design ................................................................................................................................... 73 1.3.8.2 Water System Design .................................................................................................................. 73 1.3.8.3 Sanitary Sewer ............................................................................................................................ 77 1.3.8.4 Easement..................................................................................................................................... 79 1.3.8.5 Utility Plan Requirements ........................................................................................................... 79 1.3.8.6 Post Construction ........................................................................................................................ 80 1.3.8.7 References .................................................................................................................................. 80 1.3.8.8 Contact ........................................................................................................................................ 80 1.3.9 Storm Sewer ................................................................................................................................ 81 1.3.10 Utility Potholing and Trenching .................................................................................................. 81 1.3.11 Public Notifications ..................................................................................................................... 84 1.3.12 Floodplain Development ............................................................................................................. 84 1.3.13 Testing, Inspection and Acceptance ........................................................................................... 85 1.3.14 Small Cell Installations ................................................................................................................ 85 1.3.15 Street Furniture Submittal and Installation Requirements ........................................................ 86 1.3.16 Food Trucks ................................................................................................................................. 89 Table of Contents Appendix A Construction Plan submittal checklist ..................................................................................... 90 Appendix B Standard Construction Plan Notes........................................................................................... 95 Appendix C Approval Stamps ...................................................................................................................... 99 Table of Contents DIVISION 2 Section 2 Permit Types .................................................................................................................................. 2 2.1.1 Occupancy ..................................................................................................................................... 2 2.1.2 Excavation ..................................................................................................................................... 2 2.1.3 Concrete (new construction and removal/replacement) ............................................................. 2 2.1.4 Grading, Erosion and Sediment Control ........................................................................................ 3 2.2 General Requirements and Permit Submittal: ........................................................................................ 3 2.2.1 General Requirements .................................................................................................................. 3 2.2.2 Permit Submittal Documents Required ........................................................................................ 4 2.2.2.1 Completed Application Form ........................................................................................................ 4 2.2.2.2 Site Plan. ........................................................................................................................................ 5 2.2.2.3 Contractor License, Bond and Insurance ...................................................................................... 5 2.2.2.4 Permit Fees ................................................................................................................................... 5 2.2.2.5 Temporary Traffic Control Plan ..................................................................................................... 5 2.2.2.6 Public Notification ......................................................................................................................... 6 2.2.2.7 Public Improvement Cost Estimate ............................................................................................... 7 2.3 Testing, Inspection and Close‐Out Procedures ....................................................................................... 7 2.3.1 Inspections .................................................................................................................................... 7 2.3.2 Materials Testing ........................................................................................................................... 7 2.3.3 Final Inspection ............................................................................................................................. 8 2.3.4 Warranty Inspection ..................................................................................................................... 8 2.4 Submittal Requirements Checklist……. ................................................................................................. ..9 Table of Contents DIVISION 3 SECTION 3.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................................... 5 3.1.1 SPECIFICATION BASIS ........................................................................................................................ 5 3.1.2 UTILITY LOCATES. .............................................................................................................................. 5 3.1.3 CONTRACTOR’S EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................ 5 3.1.4 MATERIAL STORAGE .......................................................................................................................... 5 3.1.5 STORMWATER MANAGEMENT ......................................................................................................... 5 3.1.6 CONCRETE REMOVAL MARKINGS ..................................................................................................... 6 3.1.7 OBSTRUCTIONS ................................................................................................................................. 6 3.1.8 FIELD ADJUSTMENTS ......................................................................................................................... 6 3.1.9 USE OF TRENCH PLATES .................................................................................................................... 7 3.1.10 FIRE HYDRANT POLICY ................................................................................................................... 8 3.1.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT. .................................................................................................. 8 3.1.12 WORK HOURS. ............................................................................................................................... 8 3.1.13 TESTING, INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE ..................................................................................... 9 3.1.14 STREET RIDEABILITY ...................................................................................................................... 9 3.1.15 STOCKPILES ................................................................................................................................... 9 SECTION 3.2 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS AND METHODS ........................................................................ 10 3.2.1 REMOVALS AND RELOCATIONS ...................................................................................................... 10 3.2.1.1 SITE PREPARATION..................................................................................................................................................... 10 3.2.1.2 SAW CUTTING ............................................................................................................................................................ 11 3.2.1.3 PAVEMENT REMOVAL‐FULL DEPTH .......................................................................................................................... 11 3.2.1.4 PAVEMENT REMOVAL‐PLANING ............................................................................................................................... 12 3.2.1.5 CONCRETE REMOVAL ................................................................................................................................................ 12 3.2.1.6 REMOVE STRUCTURE ................................................................................................................................................. 13 3.2.1.7 ADJUSTMENTS............................................................................................................................................................ 14 3.2.1.8 WATER ....................................................................................................................................................................... 15 3.2.1.9 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ................................................................................................................................ 16 3.2.2 EARTHWORK ................................................................................................................................... 17 3.2.2.1 EXCAVATION .............................................................................................................................................................. 18 Table of Contents 3.2.2.2 EMBANKMENT ........................................................................................................................................................... 18 3.2.2.3 BASE COURSE ............................................................................................................................................................. 20 3.2.2.4 RIPRAP ........................................................................................................................................................................ 21 3.2.2.5 UTILITY TRENCHING, EXCAVATION, BEDDING AND BACKFILL .................................................................................. 22 3.2.2.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT............................................................................................................................. 32 3.2.3 EROSION CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION ................................................................................ 32 3.2.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT PLACEMENT, PATCHING AND OVERLAYS (AND OTHER SURFACING METHODS)................................................................................................................................................... 35 3.2.4.1 MATERIALS, DESIGN AND PRODUCTION REQUIREMENTS........................................................................................ 35 3.2.4.2 CONSTRUCTION.......................................................................................................................................................... 36 3.2.4.3 TEMPORARY ASPHALT PATCHING ............................................................................................................................. 36 3.2.4.4 PERMANENT ASPHALT PATCHING ............................................................................................................................. 36 3.2.4.5 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ................................................................................................................................ 38 3.2.5 CONCRETE PAVEMENT (PAVEMENT, CURB, GUTTER, SIDEWALKS, CROSSPANS) ........................... 38 3.2.5.1 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................................................. 38 3.2.5.2 INSTALLATION, REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT ........................................................................................................ 39 3.2.5.2.1 Portioning, Batching, Mixing and Air Content Adjustment .................................................. 39 3.2.5.2.2 Forming ................................................................................................................................ 39 3.2.5.2.3 Placing Reinforcing Steel ...................................................................................................... 40 3.2.5.2.4 Placing Concrete .................................................................................................................. 40 3.2.5.2.5 Finish .................................................................................................................................... 41 3.2.5.2.6 Curb and Gutter, Curb walk, Sidewalks, Driveways, Alleys and Cross Pans ......................... 42 3.2.5.2.7 Curing ................................................................................................................................... 44 3.2.5.2.8 Cold Weather Concreting ..................................................................................................... 45 3.2.5.2.9 Hot Weather Concreting ...................................................................................................... 46 3.2.5.2.10 Opening to Traffic .............................................................................................................. 46 3.2.5.2.11 Barricades and Barricading of new concrete ..................................................................... 46 3.2.5.2.12 Maintenance of Traffic and Drainage................................................................................. 46 3.2.5.2.13 Concrete Washout Area ..................................................................................................... 47 3.2.5.2.14 Water ................................................................................................................................. 47 3.2.5.2.15 Saw Cutting Concrete and Asphalt Pavements .................................................................. 47 Table of Contents 3.2.5.2.16 Concrete Removal .............................................................................................................. 47 3.2.5.2.17 Asphalt Patch back ............................................................................................................. 48 3.2.5.2.18 Waste Disposal Areas ......................................................................................................... 48 3.2.5.2.19 Work on Exposed Overlaid Gutters .................................................................................... 48 3.2.5.2.20 Spalling Concrete ............................................................................................................... 48 3.2.5.2.21 Backfilling, Backsloping, Asphalt Patching, Final Cleanup ................................................. 48 3.2.5.2.22 Testing Concrete ................................................................................................................ 49 3.2.5.2.23 Measurement and Payment .............................................................................................. 49 3.2.6 STRUCTURES ................................................................................................................................... 50 3.2.6.1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................................... 50 3.2.6.2 RETAINING WALLS ...................................................................................................................................................... 51 3.2.6.3 INLETS AND MANHOLES ............................................................................................................................................. 51 3.2.6.3.1 Inlets .................................................................................................................................... 51 3.2.6.3.2 Manholes ............................................................................................................................. 53 3.2.6.3.3 Backfill Requirements .......................................................................................................... 53 3.2.6.3.4 Measurement and Payment ................................................................................................ 54 3.2.7 STORM SEWER ................................................................................................................................ 55 3.2.7.1 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................................................. 55 3.2.7.2 INSTALLATION METHODS .......................................................................................................................................... 57 3.2.7.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ............................................................................................................................ 57 3.2.8 TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES ............................................................................................................ 57 3.2.8.1 SIGNING AND STRIPING ............................................................................................................................................. 58 3.2.8.1.1 General Requirements ........................................................................................................ 58 3.2.8.1.2 Signage Requirements ........................................................................................................ 58 3.2.8.1.3 Pavement Markings ............................................................................................................ 59 3.2.8.1.4 Legends ............................................................................................................................... 61 3.2.8.1.5 Bike Lanes ............................................................................................................................ 62 3.2.8.1.6 Standard Signage and Striping Notes ............................................................................ 62 3.2.8.1.7 Measurement and Payment ......................................................................................... 64 3.2.8.2 TRAFFIC SIGNALS ........................................................................................................................................................ 64 3.2.8.2.1 General Requirements ......................................................................................................... 64 Table of Contents 3.2.8.2.2 Regulations and Codes ......................................................................................................... 68 3.2.8.2.3 Equipment List, Approvals and As‐Built Drawings ............................................................... 68 3.2.8.2.4 Excavation and Backfilling .................................................................................................... 70 3.2.8.2.5 Removing, Replacing and Resetting Improvements ............................................................ 71 3.2.8.2.6 Underground Facilities ......................................................................................................... 72 3.2.8.2.7 Conductor and Cable ............................................................................................................ 78 3.2.8.2.8 Field Testing and Maintenance ............................................................................................ 81 3.2.8.2.9 Traffic Signal Material Specification ..................................................................................... 83 3.2.8.2.10 Fiber Optic Cable ................................................................................................................ 95 3.2.8.2.11 Paint Equipment............................................................................................................... 115 3.2.8.2.12 Guarantees and Warranties ............................................................................................. 116 3.2.8.2.13 General Signal Design Requirements ............................................................................... 116 3.2.8.2.14 Construction Requirements ............................................................................................. 120 3.2.8.2.15 Basis of Payment .............................................................................................................. 122 3.2.9 SURVEY (DESIGN, CONSTRUCTION AND MONUMENTATION) ...................................................... 125 3.2.10 LANDSCAPING, IRRIGATION AND FENCES ................................................................................. 125 3.2.11 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ............................................................................................... 125 Table of Contents Division 4‐ Standard Detail Drawings ROADWAY AND CONCRETE E‐1 Table of Contents E‐2 Symbols E‐3 Typical Pavement Sections E‐4 Type I Curbwalk E‐5 Type II Curbwalk E‐6 Vertical Curb and Gutter Section View E‐7 New Driveway Cut E‐8 Concrete Curbs E‐9 Concrete Pans E‐10 Sidewalk Drain E‐11 Squared Out Return E‐12 Curb Ramps E‐14 Concrete Alley Patch E‐15 Concrete Pavement Joint Layout E‐16 Concrete Pavement Joint E‐17 Concrete Joint Details E‐18 Concrete Bus Pad D‐1 Type 16 Inlet Frame and Grate D‐2 Single Type 16 Open Throat Inlet D‐5 Type 13 Inlet Frame and Grate D‐6 Single Type 13 Inlet D‐9 Type R Curb Inlet D‐10 Type C Inlet D‐16 Pipe Collar Table of Contents STANDARD SIGNING AND STRIPING DETAILS SS‐1 Typical Sign Placement Detail SS‐2 Street Name Sign Assembly SS‐3 Ground Mounted Street Name Sign Detail SS‐4 Bike Lane Symbol SS‐5 Shared Lane Bicycle Marking SS‐6 Bike Detector Marking STANDARD SIGNAL DETAILS 1 Title Sheet 2 General Notes 3 Mast Arm and Signal Heads 4 Mast Arm Attachment and Pole Base 5 Luminaire Pole 6 Mast Arm Pole Footings (20’ through 80’) 7 Temporary Span Wire Pole 8 Pedestrian Pole 9 Pedestrian Push Button Pole / Pedestal Pole 10 Controller Cabinet Installation 11 Signal Heads and Mounting / General Wire Notes 12 Permanent (precast) Pull Box / Temporary (plastic) Pull Box 13 Pull Box (special) / Loop Detector Lead‐In 14 Detectors Conduit Installations 15 Underground Power Schematic‐Signals / Ground Trenching 16 Overhead Power Schematic‐Signals / Ground Trenching 17 School Flashing Beacons – Side of Road 18 Warning / Regulatory Flashing Beacon / Typical Crosswalk Marking 19 Street Name Signs 20 Blank‐Out Regulatory / Warning Sign 21 Signal Phasing / Standard Intersection Wiring / Typical Legend Table of Contents TRAFFIC CONTROL DETAILS TC‐0 Table of Contents TC‐1 General Notes TC‐2 Work on Shoulder or On‐Street Parking Lane TC‐3 Two‐Lane, Two‐Way Lane Closure TC‐4 Multilane, Outside Lane Closure TC‐5 Multilane, Inside Lane Closure TC‐6 Multilane, Complete Closure in One Direction TC‐7A Pedestrian Detours TC‐7B Crosswalk Closures and Pedestrian Detours TC‐8A Bike Lane Closure TC‐8B Lane Closure with Temp. Bike Lane TC‐9 Business Entrance TC‐10 Local Street Detour 2019 CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO DIVISION 1 DEVELOPMENT GUIDELINES AND REQUIREMENTS 5 Section 1 General Requirements 1.1.1 Introduction These regulations, together with all amendments, shall be known as The City of Englewood 2020 Design and Construction Standards and Specifications, hereinafter called Standards and Specifications. These Standards and Specifications replace the City of Englewood Construction Standards and Concrete Specifications, dated April, 2011. All development within the rights-of-ways of the City of Englewood shall be in conformance with Englewood Municipal Code, Title 11, Public Ways and Property, Title 12, Public Utilities and Title 16, Unified Development Code. The policies and criteria set forth within these Standards and Specifications may be amended as new technology is developed or if experience gained in the use of these Standards and Specifications indicates a need for revision. Clarifications and interpretations of these Standards and Specifications shall be made by the City Manager, or designee. Examples of Minor and Major Revisions Minor Revisions Major Revisions Grammar Policy Statements Submittal Requirements Clarifications to procedural or technical criteria changes Construction Detail Revision Technical Criteria Changes Rules and Regulations The more stringent requirements shall apply for any conflicts between these Standards and Specifications and any other Municipal Code, Federal or State Law. 1.1.2 Definitions & Abbreviations 2019 CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO DIVISION 1 DEVELOPMENT GUIDELINES AND REQUIREMENTS 14 TIS Traffic Impact Study UDC Englewood Municipal Code Title 16-Uniform Development Code UDFCD Urban Drainage and Flood Control District, currently the Mile High Flood District WW-P Federal Specifications Prefix 1.1.3 Council Ordinance ADD Ordinance language from Legal 2020 CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO DIVISION 2 RIGHT OF WAY PERMITS 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS Section 2 Permit Types .................................................................................................................................. 2 2.1.1 Occupancy ..................................................................................................................................... 2 2.1.2 Excavation ..................................................................................................................................... 2 2.1.3 Concrete (new construction and removal/replacement) ............................................................. 2 2.1.4 Grading, Erosion and Sediment Control........................................................................................ 3 2.2 General Requirements and Permit Submittal: ........................................................................................ 3 2.2.1 General Requirements .................................................................................................................. 3 2.2.2 Permit Submittal Documents Required ........................................................................................ 4 2.2.2.1 Completed Application Form ........................................................................................................ 4 2.2.2.2 Site Plan. ........................................................................................................................................ 5 2.2.2.3 Contractor License, Bond and Insurance ...................................................................................... 5 2.2.2.4 Permit Fees ................................................................................................................................... 5 2.2.2.5 Temporary Traffic Control Plan ..................................................................................................... 5 2.2.2.6 Public Notification ......................................................................................................................... 6 2.2.2.7 Public Improvement Cost Estimate ............................................................................................... 7 2.3 Testing, Inspection and Close‐Out Procedures ....................................................................................... 7 2.3.1 Inspections .................................................................................................................................... 7 2.3.2 Materials Testing ........................................................................................................................... 7 2.3.3 Final Inspection ............................................................................................................................. 8 2.3.4 Warranty Inspection ..................................................................................................................... 8 2.4 ‐ Submittal Requirements Checklist ........................................................................................................ 9 2020 CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO DIVISION 2 RIGHT OF WAY PERMITS 2 All work within the public right of way (ROW), public easements or other public property consisting of repairs and installation of sewer, storm sewer, water mains, laterals and services, curb and gutters, sidewalks, concrete pavement, underground and aerial power and communication lines require a permit from the City of Englewood Public Works Department. The City of Englewood issues three types of permits for the occupancy of or for work within the public right of way. A fourth type of permit for Grading, Erosion and Sediment Control is issued for work on private development and utility projects that meet certain requirements as defined in Section 2.1.4. The public right of way includes streets, alleys and other property owned by the city. Permitting requirements are set forth in Title 11, Chapter 7 of the Englewood Municipal Code. The types of permits, application requirements and inspection and close out procedures are listed below. Contact Public Works at 303-762-2500 with any questions. All permit fees are non-refundable. A copy of the approved permit must be on site at all times. Section 2 Permit Types 2.1.1 Occupancy Parade Contractor or Utility Parking or other closures Dumpsters (Resident or Contractor) Monitoring Wells News Racks Oversize/Overweight Vehicles Signing and Striping 2.1.2 Excavation Utility installation/repair (electric, gas, communication and fiber optic) Storm Sewer (mains, laterals, manholes, inlets and service connections) Sanitary Sewer (mains, laterals, manholes, cleanouts and service connections) Domestic water (mains, laterals and service connections) Fire lines and hydrant laterals Potholing 2.1.3 Concrete (new construction and removal/replacement) Sidewalks Curb and Gutter 2020 CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO DIVISION 2 RIGHT OF WAY PERMITS 3 Curbwalk (Type 1 & Type 2) Industrial V-Pan Sidewalk Drains Curb Ramps Cross-pans and fillets Curb or Driveway Cut Alley Paving Concrete (all types) removal and replacement after utility construction 2.1.4 Grading, Erosion and Sediment Control All land development projects disturbing more than one acre (must be accompanied by a permit from the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment) All land development projects that disturb more than 10,000 square feet for more than 60 days that have the potential to adversely impact the public right of way, public infrastructure or adjacent property as determined by the Director of Public Works. Construction or maintenance of underground utilities (all types) of more than 1,000 linear feet inside or outside of the right of way. 2.2 General Requirements and Permit Submittal: 2.2.1 General Requirements All permits are reviewed and approved by the Engineering Division of the Public Works Department. Referrals are sent to other City Departments for review and approval as necessary. Please allow 3 to 5 business days for review of all applications. Work must start within ten business days of issuance of permit or permit will be invalid and all permit fees paid are non-refundable. Work not completed by the expiration date of the permit will require a new permit. Work performed after the expiration of the permit will be required to obtain a new permit and will be charged double the calculated fee. Work without a permit will be charged double the calculated fee. Contractors shall notify all adjacent property owners of any road closure or parking restrictions that impacts the adjacent properties. Notification shall include a description of the work, the times and duration that the closure or restrictions will be in effect and the company name and emergency contact number. See below for additional information. 2020 CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO DIVISION 2 RIGHT OF WAY PERMITS 4 Emergency excavations required to repair critical underground mains, laterals and services may commence with proper utility locates and traffic control. Contractor shall call Englewood Police Dispatch at 303-761-7410 prior to starting work. Contractor shall apply for Excavation Permit the next business day. Excavations in streets that have been overlaid or reconstructed within the last two years are prohibited unless work is an emergency repair to critical infrastructure mains or services. Work within the US285, US 85, Belleview Ave. and S. Federal Blvd. rights of way require a permit from CDOT and in most cases from the City of Englewood. Contact the Public Works Department at 303-762-2500 for additional information. The use of the City of Englewood’s rights-of-way for the purpose of staging is strictly forbidden. Staging is defined as the storage of (but not limited to) material, equipment, or vehicles outside of the normal working hours allowed for in the permit. Working hours: Allowable work hours in the public right of way are Monday-Friday 7:00 AM to 7:00 PM unless otherwise approved by the Traffic Engineer. Allowable work hours for arterial and collector streets are 9:00 am to 3:30 pm. Public Works must be notified of any work scheduled on a Saturday. Work performed in the Public right of way on Saturdays must be scheduled a minimum of 2 weeks prior to the start date. No work is allowed between the hours of 7 PM and 7 AM per Englewood Municipal Code section 6-2-5(E) No right-of-way permits for non-emergency work will be issued between December 24th and January 1st. Work within the City of Englewood Right-of Ways shall NOT occur on any City recognized holiday, without prior permission from the Director of Public Works, or designee. See http://www.Englewoodgov.org/our-community/news-and- events/calendar-of-events for a list of the recognized holidays 2.2.2 Permit Submittal Documents Required 2.2.2.1 Completed Application Form Application forms may be obtained from the City of Englewood Public Works website or by calling 303-762-2500. Please see the checklist included below for specific information required on all applications. Incomplete applications may be rejected. Application shall include the contact information, including an emergency number, for the Applicant and each sub-contractor. 2020 CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO DIVISION 2 RIGHT OF WAY PERMITS 5 The Applicant shall describe the nature of the work, where it will be performed and an estimate of the disturbed area. The Application shall include the anticipated schedule of the work and the expected duration. Contractors are responsible for verifying information on Permit when it is issued. 2.2.2.2 Site Plan Each application must be accompanied by a site plan that shows the location and extent of the work. The site plan shall consist of a drawing or aerial photo that contains sufficient dimensions and labels that adequately describe the work and shows the surrounding area. A phasing plan may be included. 2.2.2.3 Contractor License, Bond and Insurance Contractor must have a current City of Englewood license. Contact the Building Division at 303-762-2357 for licensing requirements. Excavation permits will require a Class A, B or D5 licensed contractor Concrete permits will require a Class A, B, D6 R2 or R3 licensed contractor. Contractor shall provide a calendar year Performance Bond, valid for two years from the application date in an amount equal to the valuation of the work ($5,000 minimum). The bond shall be accompanied by the standard City of Englewood Bond Form. Contractor shall provide a certificate of insurance and shall explicitly name the City of Englewood as additional insured and a certificate holder. Contact the Public Works Department at 303-762-2500 for specific insurance requirements. 2.2.2.4 Permit Fees Permit fees are based on the administrative time to process an application, and time for permit review and inspection. See the Public Works Fee Schedule for specific information. ALL PERMIT FEES ARE NOT-REFUNDABLE. A City of Englewood Use Tax (3.5%) and Arapahoe County Open Space Tax (0.25%) will be assessed to all materials used in the public Right of Way. The assessment will be based upon 40% of the total valuation of the work. Contractor shall submit the total valuation of work (labor, materials, equipment, etc.) and estimated quantities for verification. 2.2.2.5 Temporary Traffic Control Plan 1. All permit applications shall include a traffic control plan that has been prepared in accordance with the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD), latest edition. 2020 CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO DIVISION 2 RIGHT OF WAY PERMITS 6 2. The plan shall clearly identify the type of work involved and the work area and shall be consistent with the site plan 3. Individuals who are trained in the principals of safe traffic control should be assigned responsibility for safety at work sites. The most important duty of these individuals is to ensure that all traffic control measures implemented on the project are necessary, conform to the traffic control plan, and are effective in providing safe conditions for motorists, pedestrians and workers. The City strongly encourages that all workers in the Right of Way take classes from the American Traffic Safety Services Association (ATSSA) to increase their awareness in the work zone. More information on training can be found from the ATSSA website: http://www.atssa.com/Training. 4. All traffic control devices should be removed when no longer needed. When work is suspended for short periods, advanced warning signs that are no longer appropriate shall be removed, covered, or turned and other inappropriate devices removed from the work area so they are not visible to motorists or a hazard to pedestrians. 5. The Contractor shall not have construction equipment or materials in lanes open to traffic at any time. 6. Major changes to the approved TCP shall be reviewed by the City prior to the implementation. 7. TCS shall be present on site (or be available) at all times during the duration of the project. 8. Contractor shall inform Public Works of exact dates of lane or alley closures 24 hours prior to construction. 9. Lane closures may only be made between 9am and 3pm on arterial and major collectors. All lanes must be re-opened by 3 pm. 10. Local access shall be maintained during alley closures. 11. All traffic control plans shall be in conformance with the latest Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices. 2.2.2.6 Public Notification Contractor must provide written notification to all affected residents 48 hours in advance of all work resulting in road closures, parking restrictions or service outages. Notifications must provide the following information: a. Dates of work b. Hours of impact 2020 CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO DIVISION 2 RIGHT OF WAY PERMITS 7 c. Details of restrictions/outages d. Company Name and Emergency 24 hour contact. All notification shall be pre-approved by the Public Works Director or Designee; submittals must be 5 days prior to the start of any work and a map showing all affected residents shall also be submitted with the proposed notification. 2.2.2.7 Public Improvement Cost Estimate Applicant shall list the valuation of the work. The valuation shall include all labor, equipment materials, overhead costs and profit Applicant shall submit a cost estimate for the work. This estimate should be based on a typical line item bid tab for a capital improvement project. 2.3 Testing, Inspection and Close-Out Procedures 2.3.1 Inspections Inspections are completed on a daily basis between 8:00 AM and 3:00PM. Please call 303-762- 2500 to schedule an inspection BY 12:00 pm on the day before the inspection. Removal and Replacement of Unsatisfactory Work Removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work shall be completed within fifteen (15) days of written notification of the deficiency unless deemed an emergency requiring immediate action. In the event the replacement work has not been completed, the City of Englewood will take action upon the Contractor’s bond to cover all related costs. Work that is not ready for inspection or fails inspection will be charged a $75 re- inspection fee. Pre-construction and concrete pre-inspection Backfill Inspection Subgrade Inspections Form Inspections Concrete Placement Weekend inspections by prior approval only. No inspections on recognized City Holidays 2.3.2 Materials Testing Subgrade Testing: Proctor moisture/density every 50 lf 2020 CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO DIVISION 2 RIGHT OF WAY PERMITS 8 Concrete Slump and air entrainment: 1 test per 28 cy Concrete Strength: 1 test per 28 cy Asphalt: to be completed? Submit test results to City 2.3.3 Final Inspection The Department of Public Works will conduct a final inspection of the work, review materials test results and prepare a punch list of items that need immediate attention. Contractor will have two weeks to correct deficiencies. Deficiencies that are un-corrected in a timely manner and pose a hazard to the traveling public will be repaired by the City of Englewood and the cost of such repairs will be the responsibility of the contractor and/or the property owner. Un-corrected deficiencies may also delay the issuance of a building permit or certificate of occupancy. After all work has been satisfactorily completed for an individual permit or all work related to a major project has been completed, the Public Works Department will issue a letter of Probationary acceptance. The date of the letter will start the two year warranty period Owner/contractor is responsible for all repairs and maintenance of the work throughout the warranty period. 2.3.4 Warranty Inspection The Department of Public Works will conduct a Warranty Inspection six (6) months prior to the expiration of the warranty period. The owner/contractor will be notified of any deficiencies noted in the Warranty Inspection. The owner/contractor will make the necessary corrections and notify the Department of Public Works prior to the expiration of the warranty period The Department of Public Works will issue a letter of final acceptance after it has been determined that all work is substantially complete and in conformance with city standards. 2020 CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO DIVISION 2 RIGHT OF WAY PERMITS 9 The 2.4 - Submittal Requirements Checklist All permits require: Completed Application including location and type of work, contact information for applicant/owner and contractors/subcontractors. Incomplete applications will delay the review and approval. Permits will not be issued until all documentation has been submitted Site Plan, can be construction plans, satellite image or sketch plan showing work location, street(s), work address or nearest intersecting street(s), street names, medians, ditch line, curb, gutter and sidewalk, approximate easement and property lines, existing and proposed utilities, dimensions and north arrow. Traffic Control Plan, for each phase of the work. Copy of City of Englewood contractor’s license. Certificate of Insurance Additional Requirements for Excavation and Concrete Permits Valuation of Work showing quantities and unit prices Anticipated Construction Schedule Expected duration of work (used to determine inspection permit fees) Confirmation number for utility locates Original signed and notarized copy of Bond (if a current bond is not on file) Emergency Work: state the nature of work and if any customers are out of service: 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -1 Table of Contents SECTION 3.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................................... 5 3.1.1 SPECIFICATION BASIS ........................................................................................................................ 5 3.1.2 UTILITY LOCATES. .............................................................................................................................. 5 3.1.3 CONTRACTOR’S EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................ 5 3.1.4 MATERIAL STORAGE ......................................................................................................................... 5 3.1.5 STORMWATER MANAGEMENT ......................................................................................................... 5 3.1.6 CONCRETE REMOVAL MARKINGS ..................................................................................................... 6 3.1.7 OBSTRUCTIONS ................................................................................................................................. 6 3.1.8 FIELD ADJUSTMENTS ......................................................................................................................... 6 3.1.9 USE OF TRENCH PLATES .................................................................................................................... 7 3.1.10 FIRE HYDRANT POLICY .................................................................................................................. 8 3.1.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT. .................................................................................................. 8 3.1.12 WORK HOURS................................................................................................................................ 8 3.1.13 TESTING, INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE ..................................................................................... 9 3.1.14 STREET RIDEABILITY ...................................................................................................................... 9 3.1.15 STOCKPILES ................................................................................................................................... 9 SECTION 3.2 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS AND METHODS ........................................................................ 10 3.2.1 REMOVALS AND RELOCATIONS ...................................................................................................... 10 3.2.1.1 SITE PREPARATION .................................................................................................................................................... 10 3.2.1.2 SAW CUTTING ............................................................................................................................................................ 11 3.2.1.3 PAVEMENT REMOVAL-FULL DEPTH .......................................................................................................................... 11 3.2.1.4 PAVEMENT REMOVAL-PLANING ............................................................................................................................... 12 3.2.1.5 CONCRETE REMOVAL ................................................................................................................................................ 12 3.2.1.6 REMOVE STRUCTURE ................................................................................................................................................. 13 3.2.1.7 ADJUSTMENTS ........................................................................................................................................................... 14 3.2.1.8 WATER ....................................................................................................................................................................... 15 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -2 3.2.1.9 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ................................................................................................................................ 16 3.2.2 EARTHWORK ................................................................................................................................... 17 3.2.2.1 EXCAVATION .............................................................................................................................................................. 18 3.2.2.2 EMBANKMENT ........................................................................................................................................................... 18 3.2.2.3 BASE COURSE ............................................................................................................................................................. 20 3.2.2.4 RIPRAP ........................................................................................................................................................................ 21 3.2.2.5 UTILITY TRENCHING, EXCAVATION, BEDDING AND BACKFILL .................................................................................. 22 3.2.2.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ............................................................................................................................. 32 3.2.3 EROSION CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION ................................................................................ 32 3.2.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT PLACEMENT, PATCHING AND OVERLAYS (AND OTHER SURFACING METHODS)................................................................................................................................................... 35 3.2.4.1 MATERIALS, DESIGN AND PRODUCTION REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................... 35 3.2.4.2 CONSTRUCTION ......................................................................................................................................................... 36 3.2.4.3 TEMPORARY ASPHALT PATCHING ............................................................................................................................. 36 3.2.4.4 PERMANENT ASPHALT PATCHING ............................................................................................................................. 36 3.2.4.5 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ................................................................................................................................ 38 3.2.5 CONCRETE PAVEMENT (PAVEMENT, CURB, GUTTER, SIDEWALKS, CROSSPANS) ........................... 38 3.2.5.1 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................................................. 38 3.2.5.2 INSTALLATION, REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT ........................................................................................................ 39 3.2.5.2.1 Portioning, Batching, Mixing and Air Content Adjustment .................................................. 39 3.2.5.2.2 Forming ................................................................................................................................ 39 3.2.5.2.3 Placing Reinforcing Steel ...................................................................................................... 40 3.2.5.2.4 Placing Concrete .................................................................................................................. 40 3.2.5.2.5 Finish .................................................................................................................................... 41 3.2.5.2.6 Curb and Gutter, Curb walk, Sidewalks, Driveways, Alleys and Cross Pans ......................... 42 3.2.5.2.7 Curing ................................................................................................................................... 44 3.2.5.2.8 Cold Weather Concreting ..................................................................................................... 45 3.2.5.2.9 Hot Weather Concreting ...................................................................................................... 46 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -3 3.2.5.2.10 Opening to Traffic .............................................................................................................. 46 3.2.5.2.11 Barricades and Barricading of new concrete ..................................................................... 46 3.2.5.2.12 Maintenance of Traffic and Drainage ................................................................................ 46 3.2.5.2.13 Concrete Washout Area ..................................................................................................... 47 3.2.5.2.14 Water ................................................................................................................................. 47 3.2.5.2.15 Saw Cutting Concrete and Asphalt Pavements .................................................................. 47 3.2.5.2.16 Concrete Removal .............................................................................................................. 47 3.2.5.2.17 Asphalt Patch back ............................................................................................................. 48 3.2.5.2.18 Waste Disposal Areas ......................................................................................................... 48 3.2.5.2.19 Work on Exposed Overlaid Gutters .................................................................................... 48 3.2.5.2.20 Spalling Concrete ............................................................................................................... 48 3.2.5.2.21 Backfilling, Backsloping, Asphalt Patching, Final Cleanup ................................................. 48 3.2.5.2.22 Testing Concrete ................................................................................................................ 49 3.2.5.2.23 Measurement and Payment .............................................................................................. 49 3.2.6 STRUCTURES ................................................................................................................................... 50 3.2.6.1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................................... 50 3.2.6.2 RETAINING WALLS ...................................................................................................................................................... 51 3.2.6.3 INLETS AND MANHOLES ............................................................................................................................................. 51 3.2.6.3.1 Inlets .................................................................................................................................... 51 3.2.6.3.2 Manholes ............................................................................................................................. 53 3.2.6.3.3 Backfill Requirements .......................................................................................................... 53 3.2.6.3.4 Measurement and Payment ................................................................................................ 54 3.2.7 STORM SEWER ................................................................................................................................ 55 3.2.7.1 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................................................. 55 3.2.7.2 INSTALLATION METHODS .......................................................................................................................................... 57 3.2.7.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ............................................................................................................................... 57 3.2.8 TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES ............................................................................................................ 57 3.2.8.1 SIGNING AND STRIPING ............................................................................................................................................. 58 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -4 3.2.8.1.1 General Requirements .................................................................................................. 58 3.2.8.1.2 Signage Requirements .................................................................................................. 58 3.2.8.1.3 Pavement Markings ...................................................................................................... 59 3.2.8.1.4 Legends ............................................................................................................................... 61 3.2.8.1.5 Bike Lanes ...................................................................................................................... 62 3.2.8.1.6 Standard Signage and Striping Notes ............................................................................ 63 3.2.8.1.7 Measurement and Payment ......................................................................................... 64 3.2.8.2 TRAFFIC SIGNALS ........................................................................................................................................................ 64 3.2.8.2.1 General Requirements ......................................................................................................... 64 3.2.8.2.2 Regulations and Codes ......................................................................................................... 68 3.2.8.2.3 Equipment List, Approvals and As-Built Drawings ............................................................... 68 3.2.8.2.4 Excavation and Backfilling .................................................................................................... 70 3.2.8.2.5 Removing, Replacing and Resetting Improvements ............................................................ 71 3.2.8.2.6 Underground Facilities ......................................................................................................... 73 3.2.8.2.7 Conductor and Cable ............................................................................................................ 78 3.2.8.2.8 Field Testing and Maintenance ............................................................................................ 81 3.2.8.2.9 Traffic Signal Material Specification ..................................................................................... 83 3.2.8.2.10 Fiber Optic Cable ................................................................................................................ 95 3.2.8.2.11 Paint Equipment .............................................................................................................. 115 3.2.8.2.12 Guarantees and Warranties ............................................................................................. 116 3.2.8.2.13 General Signal Design Requirements ............................................................................... 116 3.2.8.2.14 Construction Requirements ............................................................................................. 120 3.2.8.2.15 Basis of Payment .............................................................................................................. 122 3.2.9 SURVEY (DESIGN, CONSTRUCTION AND MONUMENTATION) ...................................................... 126 3.2.10 LANDSCAPING, IRRIGATION AND FENCES ................................................................................. 126 3.2.11 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ............................................................................................... 126 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -5 Section 3.1. General Requirements 3.1.1 Specification Basis Engineering specifications for all Projects shall be the latest editions of the following as modified by the Contract Documents for the project; • Design and Construction Standards and Specifications for the City of Englewood, Colorado • City of Englewood, Colorado Storm Drainage Criteria Manual • Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, sections 200-700 • Colorado Department of Transportation M&S Standard Plans • Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways, and the latest revision of the Colorado Supplement thereto. The presence of a conflicting provision in any article, paragraph or subparagraph shall not have any effect on any other provisions of the same article, paragraph, or subparagraph which do not conflict and such other provisions shall remain in full force and effect. The more restrictive provisions shall govern. 3.1.2 Utility Locates. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to contact Utility Notification Center of Colorado (Ph. 1-800-922-1987 or 811); and City Traffic Division (Ph. 303-762-2514) for all utility locates prior to construction. 3.1.3 Contractor’s Equipment The Contractor shall be permitted to operate only pneumatic-tired equipment over any paved street surfaces and shall be responsible for any damage to street surfaces in any manner resulting from the Contractor’s operation. No metal tracked vehicles shall be permitted on streets unless approved by the City. The City may require that any scarred area to be restored at the contractor's expense. 3.1.4 Material Storage Material storage within the City of Englewood right of way will not be allowed. Temporary daily storage of base course and topsoil, with proper sediment control and traffic control devices in place, may be allowed upon approval of the Engineer. 3.1.5 Stormwater Management Contractor shall provide and maintain all stormwater BMP measures in conformance 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -6 with the requirements in the Englewood Storm Drainage Criteria Manual and Volume 3 of the Urban Storm Drainage Criterial Manual until final stabilization of all disturbed areas have been achieved. The stormwater BMP’s should be updated as necessary to reflect changing site conditions. The contractor shall be responsible for cleaning all paved areas of mud and debris due to construction activities on a daily basis or as directed by the Engineer. Inlet protection in the right-of-way shall be made from a manufactured, heavy duty geotextile filter bag or sleeve to protect the grate and curb opening. Rock socks and concrete blocks are not to be used as inlet protection in the right-of-way. 3.1.6 Concrete Removal Markings All required concrete removals shall be marked by the Inspector with a pink painted dot in the Center of the stone, or arrows at both ends of removal. If removal is in question, contact the Inspector on the job. 3.1.7 Obstructions No extra payment shall be considered or allowed for removal or protection of any obstruction which can be seen by a visual inspection, nor shall any payment be made for extra work involved in the protection or the repair of damage to any underground service, the presence of which can be ascertained by inspection of appropriate maps of the utility companies or the City, or by proper inquiry with the utility companies, the City and the property owners. Any conditions not identified on the Detailed Plans and Specifications, nor plainly visible should be brought to the immediate attention of the Engineer. 3.1.8 Field Adjustments Minor adjustments to the work may be necessary to accommodate or protect unknown existing structures. Such adjustments shall be made only at the direction of Engineer. If existing structures are encountered that prevent construction, and that are not properly shown on the Detailed Plans and Specifications, Contractor shall notify Engineer before continuing with construction in order that Engineer may make such field revision as necessary to avoid conflict with the existing structures. If Contractor fails to notify Engineer when an existing structure is encountered, and then proceeds with the construction despite the interference, it is at Contractor’s own risk. Minor adjustments in the work are those that do not constitute a change in work, scope or cost and will be authorized through a Field Order. In the event that Contractor believes such Field Order will result in a change in the cost or schedule of the Work, Contractor shall request a Change Order in conformance with General Conditions section 6.5 Extra Work. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -7 3.1.9 Use of Trench Plates In the ROW The use of trench plates is strictly forbidden from October 1st through April 30th. The Contractor shall secure approval, in advance, from the Engineer for any steel plate bridges proposed by it for public use. Transverse or longitudinal cuts in the right-of- way that cannot be properly completed within a workday shall be protected by structural steel plate bridging in such a way as to preserve unobstructed traffic flow. All structural steel plates placed over surface voids, such as trenches and other areas to be protected in the public right-of-way shall conform to the following: All unrestored voids, trenches, holes, excavations, etc., that are in the pedestrian or traveled way shall be protected through the use of adequately designed barricades and structural steel plates that will support legal vehicle loads. Structural steel plate bridging shall be designed for HS-20 truck loading per CDOT. See Trench Width/Minimum Plate Thickness table below. Steel plates used for bridging must extend a minimum of 12 inches beyond the edges of the trench. All plates shall provide complete coverage to prevent any person, bicycle, motorcycle or motor vehicle from being endangered due to plate movement causing separations or gaps. Plates shall be installed with the plate laid in reasonably flat plane and all vertical edges transitioned with asphaltic cold-mix or other acceptable ramping device(s) acceptable to the Engineer. Structural steel plates shall have a skid-resistant surface. Fine graded asphalt concrete shall be compacted to form ramps with a maximum slope of eight and one-half percent (8.5%) and a minimum of 12-inches taper to cover all edges of the steel plates. When steel plates are removed, any damage to the pavement shall be repaired with either graded fines of asphalt concrete mix, or equivalent material satisfactory to the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintenance of the structural steel bridging plates, shoring and asphalt concrete ramps. The trench shall be adequately shored to support the bridging and traffic loads. Steel plate bridging shall be secured against movement or displacement by using adjustable cleats, shims, welding, or other devices, and shall be installed in a manner that will minimize noise. When steel plates are placed within the public right of way the Contractor’s name and twenty four (24) hour phone number shall be visible, legible and permanently affixed on each plate or the Contractor shall erect sign(s) in the immediate area of the trench plate(s) identifying the Contractors name with a twenty-four (24) hour phone number. The minimum height of letters and numbers shall be 2 inches. The Contractor shall immediately mobilize necessary personnel and equipment after being notified by the Engineer of the City’s emergency service personnel of a repair need, This includes, but is not limited to, plate anchors, cold-mix, and asphalt concrete to transition/ramp from the existing roadway or sidewalk to the plate surface and back down. Failure to respond to the emergency request within two hours will be ground for City repairs that will be invoiced at actual cost including overhead or $500 per incident, 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -8 whichever is greater. Lack of Contractor conformance will be automatic grounds for suspension of their permit/contract. The following table shows the required minimal thickness of steel plate bridging required for a given trench width: Table 1 – Trench Width/Minimum Plate Thickness Trench Width Minimum Plate Thickness Less than 12” 1/2” 12”-23” 3/4” 24”-35” 7/8” 36”-47” 1” 48”-60” 1-1/4” Note: For spans greater than 60”, a structural design shall be prepared by a Colorado registered civil engineer and approved by the Engineer. A Rough Road sign with black lettering on an orange background shall be used in advance of structural steel plate bridging 3.1.10 Fire Hydrant Policy Hydrant use is strictly regulated by the Englewood Utilities Department. Their hydrant policy shall govern all hydrant use. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining these regulations and paying any associated hydrant meter deposit fees. 3.1.11 Measurement and Payment. Items will be measured and paid for in accordance United States standard measure (English units). The method of measurement and payment to be used shall align with CDOT’s methods unless otherwise modified herein or in the project special construction requirements Work or materials that are essential to the project but for which there are no pay items, will not be measured and paid for separately but shall be included in the project. The term “lump sum” when used as an item of payment will mean complete payment for the work described in the Contract and as shown on the plans. 3.1.12 Work Hours The Contractor shall work only on weekdays between the hours of 7:00 a.m. to 7:00 p.m. Lane closures on roads classified as arterial or collection shall only be allowed between 9:00 a.m. and 3:30 p.m. The Contractor must receive written approval from the City to work at any other time. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -9 3.1.13 Testing, Inspection and Acceptance All testing shall follow the current CDOT testing frequency standards section 106.05. The contractor shall sub-contract with a City approved and CDOT qualified independent testing firm for all necessary materials testing on the project. The cost of testing shall be considered included in the cost of the associated pay item and will not be paid for separately. Except as otherwise provided, sampling and testing of all materials, and the laboratory sampling and testing of equipment required by these Standards, shall be in accordance with the current edition of the ASTM publication of Standards. When designated, sampling and testing of materials shall be in accordance with the current edition of "The American Standards Association Specifications"; the current edition of the AASHTO publication "Standard Specification for Highway Materials and Methods of Sampling and Testing"; the current edition of the "American Water Works Association Specifications"; the current edition of the "Federal Specifications" or the current edition of "MIL Specifications" adopted and in effect on the date of the Invitation for Bids. 3.1.14 Street Rideability Completed street repairs should have rideability at least as good as, if not better than, the pavement prior to the repairs. A driver may be able to see a street repair, but in the case of a quality repair, they should not be able to "feel" it in driving normally down the street. Do not construct asphalt overlays in such a manner that create a bump to the motoring public. If the leading edge of an overlay in substantially noticeable to a car it is likely to be significant to the snow plow trucks. The City shall determine the rideability of the overlay. If the transition is not smooth the contractor shall remove and replace to feather out the leading edge to the satisfaction of the City. Surface tolerances for street repairs should meet the standard for new construction. That is, the finished surface of the street repair, when tested with a ten (10) foot straightedge parallel to the centerline or perpendicular across joints, will show variations measured from the testing face of the straightedge to the surface of the street repair which do not exceed one-quarter (1/4) inch. Transverse patches shall be replaced across the entire street width for a distance of two (2) feet minimum on both side of the trench, thus creating a 'T' shaped patch above the trench. Do not allow the edges of patches to fall in existing wheel paths. The edges of patches parallel to the direction of traffic shall be limited to the boundaries of lanes or to the centerline of travel lanes. 3.1.15 Stockpiles 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -10 All excavated material shall be stockpiled in a manner that does not endanger the work or workers and that does not obstruct sidewalks, streets and driveways. The work shall be done in a manner that will minimize interference with traffic and/or drainage of the street. The Contractor at the end of each day shall remove excess material from rights- of- ways, and thoroughly clean all street, alleys and sidewalks affected by the excavation. If it becomes necessary to accomplish this, all streets, alleys (if asphalt or concrete) and sidewalks shall be swept as required by the City. Section 3.2 Construction Materials and Methods General The following construction materials and methods shall apply to construction of all public improvements whether publicly or privately funded. Each section is organized as follows: 1. Description 2. Materials 3. Construction Requirements 4. Measurement and Payment Measurement and Payment standards shall apply only to City funded projects. 3.2.1 Removals and Relocations Description. The requirements of this section shall apply to all removals, relocations and other incidental work necessary for construction. 3.2.1.1 Site Preparation All areas within the limits of construction shall be cleared of trees, bushes, hedges and miscellaneous items as shown on the plan or as directed by the Engineer. A. Trees. When called for on the plans or directed by the Engineer, all trees and stumps shall be removed to at least eighteen (18) inches below the proposed grade and backfilled with clean, compacted material suitable for subgrade. Trees not designated to be removed shall be protected carefully during clearing and subsequent construction operations. Trees that have been designated to be saved shall have roots cleanly cut with a saw and removed completely as required for construction. All limbs, branches, stumps and roots which have been removed shall be disposed of by the Contractor. All tree removals shall be performed by a City of Englewood licensed Arborist. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -11 B. Landscaping Material. Removal of hedges, shrubbery, sod, pavers, edging, timbers and other landscaping items shown on the plan or required for the work as directed by the Engineer shall be completed with care so as not to unnecessarily damage adjacent landscape materials which are to remain. Landscaping material replaced after the completion of construction shall be equal to or in better condition than prior to construction. No separate payment will be made for the removal and replacement of landscaping material. C. Irrigation Systems. Irrigation systems that conflict with construction shall be capped and shut-off with the permission of the owner for the duration of the construction. Watering of adjacent areas that are affected by the shut-off shall be made by the Contractor at their expense. The irrigation system shall be completely restored, tested and placed in service after construction. No separate payment will be made for the removal, modification, replacement or repair of irrigation systems will be made. D. Protection of Utility Lines. The Contractor shall at all times take proper precautions for the protection of utility lines, the presence of which are known or can be determined by the examination of appropriate maps of the utility companies or the City. Call Utility Notification Center of Colorado at 1-800-922-1987. The Contractor shall be responsible for the repair of any damaged utility mains or service lines. E. Salvable Material. All salvable material designated on the plans to remain the Property of the City shall be removed without damage, in sections or pieces which may be readily transported, and shall be stored by the Contractor at specified locations within the project limits or as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor is responsible for protection of the salvable materials and repairing any damage occurring prior to being returned to the City. 3.2.1.2 Saw Cutting Concrete and asphalt pavements shall be saw cut to full depth at the nearest joint or as marked by the Engineer and along the joint between concrete and asphalt pavements shall be saw cut for the full depth of the concrete. All advance sawing shall be performed with a wet saw. All water and concrete dust residue shall be cleaned from site at the time of sawing. 3.2.1.3 Pavement Removal-Full Depth Existing pavement that is shown on the plan or as ordered by the Engineer shall be saw cut for the full depth of the pavement and removed. The edge of pavement which is to remain shall be cut in a straight line so as to provide a reasonably straight and square edge for joining with the new surface course material. The Contractor shall dispose of 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -12 the removed materials directly into trucks or bins. Piling of removed asphalt within the street right-of-way will not be allowed. 3.2.1.4 Pavement Removal-Planing This item shall consist of furnishing all equipment, supervision, labor, and necessary items for removal and disposal of pavements and pavement markings as illustrated in the Plans. It shall also include salvaging and hauling away all planed material, and sawing and cutting to facilitate controlled breaking and removal of concrete and asphalt cement concrete pavement to a neat line. A planer with sufficient power, traction, and stability shall be required to maintain an accurate depth of cut. The propulsion and guidance system of the planer shall be maintained in such condition that the planer may be operated to straight and true lines without excessive lateral deviation. Operation with broken or missing teeth will not be allowed. Worn teeth shall be replaced if the planer does not produce a uniform surface. The planer shall be capable of picking up the removed asphalt cement concrete pavement and directly load into a truck in a single operation. A self-loading conveyer shall be an integral part of the planer. Windrows will not be allowed. A sufficient number of brooms shall be used immediately after planing to remove all planed material remaining on the roadway. Signage and traffic control shall be consistent with the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Device, latest edition. All equipment and machinery shall be kept in good working order, free of leaks and properly muffled. All taxes, licenses and fees shall have been paid and proper licenses and permits shall be posted as required by law. When planing adjacent to new asphalt cement concrete pavement, the planer shall cut a minimum of 3 inches laterally into the new asphalt cement concrete pavement. When a planned area is adjacent to Portland cement concrete, the concrete shall be cut with a saw to form a smooth, straight line at the joint with the Portland cement concrete. The asphalt cement concrete pavement shall be broken or chipped away to match the plane depth. Pavement millings shall become property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site and properly disposed of. 3.2.1.5 Concrete Removal The Contractor shall remove existing concrete pavements, including, but not limited to, curb and gutter, curb walk, sidewalk, cross pans and fillets, driveway and alley entrances and flares and handicap ramps. The Contractor shall saw the limits of removal, unless clean joints exist. The Contractor is responsible for replacing any concrete damaged 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -13 beyond the designated limits of removal. The Contractor shall dispose of the removed materials directly into trucks or bins. Stockpiling of removed concrete within the street right-of-way will not be allowed. Suitable materials may be salvaged as riprap as ordered by the Engineer. 3.2.1.6 Remove Structure This work shall consist of the removal of the designated structure and all attached or associated appurtenances including, but not limited to: abandoned utility services, curb, gutter, pipes, sidewalk, miscellaneous structures, bridges, parts of bridges, railroad appurtenances, guardrail, fences, inlets, manholes, and all other obstructions that are not designated to remain. It shall also include salvaging, stockpiling and loading salvable materials, sandblasting, plugging structures, cleaning culverts, and sawing and cutting to facilitate controlled breaking and removal of concrete and asphalt to a neat line. Except in areas to be excavated, the resulting trenches, holes, and pits shall be backfilled. Materials removed and not designated in the Contract to be salvaged or incorporated into the work shall become the property of the Contractor. The Contractor shall raze, remove, and dispose of all structures and obstructions which are identified on the project, except utilities, structures and obstructions removed under other contractual agreements, and salvable material designated to remain the property of the City of Englewood. Cavities left by structure removal shall be filled to the level of the surrounding ground with suitable material and, if within the construction limits, shall be properly compacted. Bridges, culverts, and other drainage structures shall not be removed until satisfactory arrangements have been made to accommodate traffic and drainage. Where portions of structures are to be removed, the portions designated to remain shall be prepared to fit the new construction, and shall be protected from damage. All damage to structures designated to remain in place shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense. Method of repair shall be approved by the Engineer. Sawing of concrete shall be done to a true line, with a vertical face, unless otherwise specified. The minimum depth of a saw cut in concrete shall be 2 inches or to the depth of the reinforcing steel, whichever occurs first. Where culverts or sewers are to be left in place and plugged, the ends of concrete or masonry culverts shall be filled with suitable material. The ends of corrugated metal pipe culverts shall be crushed. Culvert and sewer ends are to be sufficiently filled or crushed to prevent future settlement of embankments. Plugging of culverts shall include removal of headwalls and other appurtenances where necessary to accommodate the work. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -14 Existing guardrail shall not be removed unless the need for the guardrail has been eliminated or the hazard has been protected or delineated. The duration and manner of protection or delineation shall be submitted in writing for approval by the Engineer. All salvable material designated in the Contract to remain the property of the City shall be removed without damage, in sections or pieces which may be readily transported, and shall be stockpiled by the Contractor at specified locations within the project limits. The Contractor shall safeguard salvable materials and shall be responsible for the expense of repairing or replacing damaged or missing material until it is incorporated into the work, or is loaded onto City equipment by the Contractor. 3.2.1.7 Adjustments Adjusting structures shall apply, but not be limited to, manhole rings and covers, inlet gratings and frames, water valve boxes, water meters, gate posts, and other structures and facilities. Construction operations shall consist of raising, lowering, moving, or removing masonry or concrete; adding brick-work, masonry, or concrete; and resetting grates, frames, or rings and covers to fit the new construction. Any necessary removal or repair of the existing structure down to 2’ below the existing grade shall be included in the cost of this item. Structures in the traveled roadway shall be adjusted to a tolerance of 0 to ¼ inch below the surface of the roadway and ¼ inch to ½ inch for HMA. Work on water mains and services, sanitary sewer mains and services shall be subject to inspection and testing by the City of Englewood Utilities Department. Damage to any fire hydrant or any part of the water system by the Contractor shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense. Reset: This work consists of removing, relaying, resetting, or adjusting structures and related materials. All designated items shall be carefully removed, and stored, reinstalled, or adjusted, in a manner that will avoid loss or damage. Re-laid pipe and conduit, and reset structures shall be cleaned of foreign material prior to reinstallation. Except in areas to be excavated, all holes resulting from the removal of structures shall be neatly backfilled. Methods shall conform to those required in the specifications for the various types of construction involved. Materials in good condition from removed structures may be re-used. Salvable material, as designated in the Contract, that is not re-used shall remain the property of the City, and the Contractor shall be held responsible for safekeeping of all materials until receipted by the City. Materials damaged, stolen, or lost prior to receipt by the City shall be repaired or replaced, as determined by the Engineer, at no cost to the City. Unserviceable material, as determined by the Engineer, shall be replaced with new material of similar dimensions at no additional cost to the City except as otherwise provided in this section. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -15 All new materials and replacement parts shall conform to the requirements of the Contract for the appropriate items. Where fences are reset, the Contractor shall supply and install any new materials required to restore the fence to acceptable condition. The Contractor shall supply new posts as needed for the reset fence. Wire in the old fence shall be salvaged and used in the reset fence. Gates designated to be reset shall be removed and restored for service at the new locations. Fence shall be reset approximately 6 inches inside the boundary of the right of way or shown on the plans. Anchorages, footings, or fence appurtenances shall not extend beyond the limits of the right of way without the written consent of the abutting property owner Where guardrail is reset the Contractor shall supply and install any new materials needed to restore the guardrail to acceptable condition. New materials shall include additional posts, blocks, and hardware needed to complete the intermediate post installations as shown on the City’s Standard Plans. Posts with similar tops shall be installed in groups as directed. Installation of fiat-top posts alternately with other top shapes will not be permitted. Posts may be cut, rotated, or turned upside down to eliminate unacceptable tops. If the posts are cut, the Contractor shall treat the exposed surface with two coats of an approved preservative. Adjust guardrail shall be the work necessary to adjust the height to the standard 27 inches in accordance with Standard Plan M-606-1, and filling the resulting voids under the posts with a lean concrete mixture consisting of one part cement and ten parts sand. Mailboxes complete with supporting structures are to be removed and temporarily reset at points near their original location to be accessible for mail delivery service. Upon completion of surfacing operations, the boxes shall again be reset at the locations designated. A supporting structure may contain one or more mailboxes. New permanent mailbox support posts and mounting brackets shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the Department's Standard Plans. Signs and posts designated to be reset shall be removed, cleaned, and reset at designated locations, including all work necessary to provide the existing posts with break-away devices, where required. 3.2.1.8 Water When directed by the Engineer water shall be applied to the subgrade fill or embankment material to facilitate compaction or as a dust palliative. Separate measurement and payment will not be made for water used during removals and relocation. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -16 3.2.1.9 Measurement and Payment The following items shall constitute pay items for the work to be done in this section. Payment for these items shall be full payment for all materials, labor, excavation, tools, equipment, supplies, and work incidental to completion of each item. Items that are integral to construction but do not contain a pay item shall be considered subsidiary to other items and shall be included in the work. A. Remove Tree. Payment for this item shall be at the contract unit price for each tree with an average diameter of six (6) inches or more and shall be full compensation for removal and disposal, excavation and backfill. The diameter of the trees shall be taken at a distance of three (3) feet above the base of the tree at the ground line. Removal of trees with a smaller diameter will not be paid for as a separate item but shall be included in the work. B. Saw Cutting. Saw cutting of asphalt and concrete pavements will be paid at the contract unit price per lineal foot for the actual length of cuts made as shown on the plan or marked by the Engineer. Additional saw cutting for the convenience of the Contractor shall be at the expense of the Contractor. C. Concrete Removal. Payment shall be made at the contract unit price per square yard. Measurement will be of the actual area of pavement in place. This item includes the complete removal of the various types of concrete pavement included in the bid schedule. Saw cutting and disposal will not be measured and paid separately but shall be considered subsidiary to the work. No separate payment will be made to the Contractor for the removal and replacement of concrete over break beyond the marked limits. D. Remove Asphalt Pavement. Payment shall be made at the contract unit price per square yard. Measurement will be made for the actual area of pavement in place. This item includes the complete removal of asphalt pavement included in the bid schedule. Saw cutting and disposal will not be measured and paid separately but shall be considered subsidiary to the work. No separate payment will be made to the Contractor for the removal and replacement of asphalt over break beyond the marked limits. E. Pavement Removal-Planing: Pavement Planing will be paid for at the contract unit price per square yard milled and cleaned per the plans. No excess beyond the plan quantities shall be paid. Payment for planing shall include all removal, disposal, equipment, supervision, labor, material, supplies, maintenance and other items necessary to complete the work. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -17 F. Remove Structure: Payment shall be made at the contract unit price per each. The removal of structures shall be as indicated on the plan by the type of structure to be removed and extents to be removed. Measurement and payment shall include all sawing, breaking, removal, disposal, hauling, excavation and subsequent backfill and the salvage of materials removed, their custody, preservation storage and transfer. G. Adjustments; Payment shall be made at the contract unit price per each. Items to be adjusted shall be as indicated on the plan by the type of structure to be adjusted. Measurement and payment shall include all labor, materials equipment necessary to complete the work. H. Reset Structures; Payment shall be made at the contract unit price per each. Structures to be reset shall be indicated on the plan by the type of structure to be reset. Measurement and payment shall include all labor, materials equipment necessary to complete the work. I. Measurement and Payment: Pay Item Pay Unit Pay Item Pay Unit Remove Tree (dia) Each (ea) Remove Sidewalk Square Foot (sf) Remove Vertical Curb and Gutter Lineal Foot (lf) Remove Asphalt Pavement Square Foot (sf) Saw Cutting Lineal Foot (lf) Remove Asphalt Pavement-Planing Square Yard (sy) Remove Curb walk (Type I, Type II) Lineal Foot (lf) Adjust Valve Box Each (ea.) Remove Cross Pan and Alley Paving Square Foot (sf) Adjust Manhole Each (ea.) Remove Structure (Type) Each (ea.) Adjust Splice Box Each (ea.) 3.2.2 Earthwork Description: This work pertains to construction and consists of excavation, hauling, disposal, placement, and compaction of all material encountered on-site within the limits identified in the plans. All excavation and embankment for construction will be classified as "unclassified excavation" as hereafter described. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -18 Referenced Standards AASHTO M 145 Classification of soils and soil-aggregate mixtures AASHTO T99 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils using a 5.5-lb Rammer and a 12- inch Drop AASHTO T180 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils using a 10-lb Rammer and an 18- inch Drop 3.2.2.1 Excavation Unclassified excavation shall consist of the excavation of all materials of whatever character required for the work, obtained within the construction project site, including surface boulders, masonry, organics, rocks, muck material, miscellaneous debris and slag that are not removed under some other item. The work also includes excavation for the ditches, channels, and placement, water and compaction of the material to construction embankments in accordance with the plans. 3.2.2.2 Embankment Embankment material shall consist of approved material acquired from excavations, hauled and placed in embankments. Approval of the embankment material will be contingent on the material having a maximum dry density of not less than 90 pounds per cubic foot. Soil embankment shall consist of materials obtained on-site and approved by the Engineer. Construction Requirements The excavations and embankments shall be finished to a smooth and uniform surface conforming to the line and grade specified. Variation from the subgrade plan elevations specified shall not be more than 1.0 inch. Excavation operations shall be conducted so material outside of the slope limits will not be disturbed. Prior to beginning grading operations, all necessary clearing and grubbing and site demolition in that area shall be performed. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer not less than ten working days prior to beginning excavation so the necessary cross sections may be taken. Baseline survey for purposes of payment of the unclassified excavation work item will be obtained by the CCD Survey Group. The baseline survey will be taken once all building and site demolition, including removal of the buildings, parking lots, driveways is complete. The baseline survey is intended to set the topography of the existing native soil below the pavements and building elevations. Once the construction is complete a second survey will be completed to determine the final 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -19 quantity of unclassified excavation. The Contractor shall not excavate beyond the dimensions and elevations established. All material to be excavated shall be stockpiled as subgrade material or removed from the site. Materials excavated beneath the top twenty six (26) inches shall, at the discretion of the Engineer, either be placed in the subgrade stockpile or removed from the site and disposed of at Denver Arapahoe Disposal Site (DADS}. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine the amount of subgrade material to be stockpiled and necessary for completion of the work. All stockpiled material not used shall be disposed of per Contract requirements. Embankment construction shall include preparation of the areas upon which embankments are to be constructed, placing, moisture conditioning and compacting of approved material to the limits shown on the plans or as directed. Only approved materials shall be used in the construction of embankments and fills. The type of relative compaction required shall be a minimum of 95% of Standard Proctor density AASHTO T-99 within 2% of optimum moisture content. The soil upon which the embankments are to be constructed shall be scarified to a depth of eight {8} inches and compacted with moisture and density control. The moisture content of the soil at the time of compaction shall be as specified or directed. Embankment shall be placed in horizontal layers not to exceed six (6) inches loose measurement and shall be compacted as specified before the next layer is placed. Spreading equipment shall be used to obtain uniform thickness prior to compaction. As the compaction progresses, continuous mixing, leveling and manipulating shall be done to assure uniform moisture and density. Embankments shall be constructed with moisture and density control. The moisture content of the soil at the time of compaction shall be as specified or directed. Maximum dry density of all soil types encountered or used will be determined in accordance with AASHTO T-99. The amount of water to be used in compacting A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4 and A-6 through A-7 soils shall not deviate from optimum on the dry side by more than two percentage points as determined by AASHTO T-99. A-4 soils, which are unstable at the above moisture content, shall be compacted at lower moisture content to the specified density. Additional work involved in drying embankment material to the required moisture content shall be included in the work. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -20 Measurement and Payment Measurement will be made by the method of average end areas based on dimensions shown on the plans. The unit bid price per square yard of earthwork shall include: all labor, equipment, material, subcontractors and incidentals required to perform earthwork as identified within the contract documents; clearing and grubbing; excavation; loading, hauling and disposal of excess excavated material anddebris, stockpiling as necessary; hauling, procurement, placement and compaction of embankment materials as required; grading; diversion of water courses and/or dewatering operations as necessary; compaction to specified limits; excavation below the grades shown on plans to remove unsuitable foundation material, replacement of unsuitable foundation materials with suitable select materials; QC testing; and all other materials, work and equipment required to complete the construction in accordance with the contract documents. Pay Item Pay Unit Earthwork Cubic Yard (cy) 3.2.2.3 Base Course Description: This work shall consist of furnishing, placing, watering, shaping, and compacting a course or courses of gravel to provide a firm and stable foundation for subsequent construction. The base course shall be constructed on a previously prepared subgrade in accordance with the requirements of these specifications and in conformity with the lines, grades, quantity requirements, and the typical cross-section shown on the plans and as directed by the Engineer. Materials Base Course material shall meet the requirements of CDOT Class 6 Aggregate Base Course per section 703.03 of the latest edition of the Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction Base Course (RAP) shall meet the requirements of CDOT Class 6 Aggregate Base Course Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement per section 703.03 of the latest edition of the Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction Recycled Concrete Base Course meeting the grading requirements of CDOT Class 6 Aggregate Base Course shall also be allowed. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -21 Construction Requirements Base Course shall be placed to the depth as shown on the plan or as directed by the Engineer and with proper moisture and density control. The thickness of any one layer shall in no case exceed eight (8) inches. Base material shall be compacted to +/- 2% of optimum moisture content and a minimum density of 95% moisture content as determined by Laboratory Test Method A.A.S.H.T.O. T-99, Method D. Water is needed to facilitate compaction and bonding of the materials shall not be measured and paid for separately. The finished base course surface shall be smooth and free of ruts and irregularities and true to grade. The finished surface shall be finished with a surface smoothness tolerance of one-fourth (¼) inch. Measurement and Payment Base Course and Base Course (RAP) will be measured by weight, including the weight of any moisture contained therein at time of weighing, except that material containing moisture which will drain as free water will not be permitted. Pay Item Pay Unit Base Course Ton (ton) Base Course (RAP) Ton (ton) 3.2.2.4 Riprap Description: This work consists of furnishing all labor, equipment and materials necessary to place riprap, soil riprap, grouted riprap, and erosion resistant materials where detailed on the Plans or as directed by the City of Englewood. The work includes water control, excavation and backfill, grading, sub-grade preparation, materials and installation of bedding, rock, riprap, boulders and grout as indicated herein and in the Contract Documents. Materials All materials and submittals shall conform to the requirements of the latest edition of Section 31 37 00, Riprap, Boulders, and Bedding in the Construction Specifications of the Urban Drainage and Flood Control District. Construction Requirements 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -22 All construction shall conform to the requirements of the latest edition of Section 31 37 00, Riprap, Boulders, and Bedding in the Construction Specifications of the Urban Drainage and Flood Control District. Measurement and Payment Measurement and payment shall be made at the Contract unit price for the quantities shown in the Contract Documents. Material used for Contractor’s convenience will not be paid for. Measurement will be made by the method of average end areas based on dimensions shown on the plans. Payment shall be full compensation for all clearing and grubbing, excavation, removals of excess materials, subgrade preparation, filter material, drains, concrete, grout, water diversion and/or dewatering and all labor, equipment and supplies required to construct the riprap as shown on the plans. Pay Item Pay Unit Riprap ( in) Cubic Yard (cy) Grouted Riprap ( in) Cubic Yard (cy) 3.2.2.5 Utility Trenching, Excavation, Bedding and Backfill Description: This section outlines the guidelines and requirements for Utility Trenching, Excavation, Bedding and Backfill required to complete construction per the Contract Documents. Construction Requirements Excavation All excavations, trenching, shoring and stockpiling of excavated materials shall be in strict compliance with the applicable Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) rules and regulations. Payment shall be made at the Contract unit price for the quantities shown on the plan or as directed by the Engineer. Material used for Contractor’s convenience will not be paid for. This payment shall be full compensation for all tools, equipment and labor necessary for producing, crushing, screening, hauling, spreading, compacting, shaping, or reshaping, water for compacting and maintaining, and incidental work necessary for the completion of the work in accordance with the plans and specifications and as directed by the Engineer. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -23 Except where shown otherwise on the Drawings, and except when the Engineer provides written permission to do otherwise, all trench excavation shall be made by open cut to the depth required to construct the pipe line as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Permission for tunnel work may be granted by the Engineer for crossing under sidewalks, driveways, or existing utility lines. No separate payment will be made for any of the work involved for these items and all costs incurred will be included in the applicable unit price bid for the associated pipe segments, structures and appurtenances. The length of trench permitted to be open at any one time may be limited when, in the opinion of the Engineer, such limitation is necessary for the safety and convenience of the public; however, in no case shall the length of open trench exceed 400 feet, except when the Engineer provides written permission to do otherwise. All trenches and excavations left overnight shall be protected as specified by the Engineer. This may include, but is not limited to: fencing, concrete, barriers, additional signage or any other measures required to provide public safety. Trench plates may be used with the approval of the Engineer. Preparation of Foundation for Pipe Laying When the excavation is in firm soil, care shall be taken to avoid excavation below the established grade (i.e. the specified over depth to accommodate the particular class of bedding). The different methods and classes of bedding are described within these Standard Construction Specifications. Dewatering: During construction, the Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate equipment to properly remove and dispose of all water entering the trench or other part of the work. In water bearing strata, well points, sub drains or any other method approved by the Engineer that may be required to provide a dry trench. Pipe trenches shall be kept free from water during excavation, fine grading, pipe laying and jointing. Dewatering, sufficient to provide a completely dry trench, shall be maintained during all pipe laying and jointing operations. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage resulting from the dewatering operations. The discharge from any trench dewatering operations shall be conducted to natural drainage channels or other structures as approved by the Engineer and in accordance with applicable permits. Ground water shall not be discharged into sanitary sewers. Unless provided for in the Contract Documents, dewatering shall be considered as 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -24 incidental to construction and all costs incurred will be considered to be included in the unit price bid for the construction of each section of sewer line, associated structures, laterals and appurtenances. Over excavation and Replacement with Select Backfill Material If soft or otherwise unsuitable foundation material is encountered during the course of completing the work, it shall be removed and replaced with select backfill material and/or angular rock bedding material so as to provide a suitable foundation for the pipe, structure and/or appurtenance or roadway, as determined by the Engineer. In the event that over excavation and replacement with select backfill material is below the water table, the sub-bedding material shall consist of 3/4 to 1-1/2-inch rock (or larger if approved). The presence of excessive moisture in a material is not, by itself, sufficient cause for determining that the material is unsuitable. Additionally, material which becomes unsuitable due to negligence or the means and methods utilized by the contractor will not be considered for payment. The costs incurred to remove and replace these materials shall be included in the associated unit price bid for the respective utility line, associated structures, laterals and/or appurtenances. If provided for in the Contract Documents, the cost of over excavation and replacement with select backfill material will be paid for per the associated measurement and payment description. If no pay item for such work is included in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall consider all costs incurred to be included in the unit prices bid for the construction of each section of sewer, associated structures, laterals and appurtenances. At the option of the Engineer, select backfill material meeting the requirements of these Standard Construction Specifications shall be delivered to the job site by the Contractor. The Contractor will be paid for placement of this material and the removal and disposal of the over excavated material per the associated measurement and payment description. Unsuitable Materials Excavation Unsuitable material encountered within an excavated area during construction shall be excavated and disposed of by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer. Payment for excavation, disposal and replacement of unsuitable materials will not be paid for unless specifically authorized in writing by the Engineer. It may be necessary for the Contractor to rework, solely at the Contractor's own expense; dry, 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -25 wet or otherwise satisfactory excavated material as necessary to obtain conformance with backfill requirements. Unsuitable materials are defined as: 1. Rock Excavation: Rock shall be defined as material consisting of igneous, metamorphic and sedimentary materials which cannot be excavated without blasting or the use of rippers, or boulders or other detached stones having a volume of 1/2 cubic yard or more, or having a specific gravity of at least 2.24 and weight not less than 140.4 pounds per cubic foot. The unit price bid for rock excavation will include granular bedding, select material, or any other material specifically approved in writing by the Engineer required to fill the excavated area. 1. Soil and excavated material containing rubbish, organics, frozen material, broken pavement, debris, stones larger than three (3) inches in diameter. 2. Muck, defined as an organic soil consisting of highly decomposed materials with more than 30% organic material and are generally referred to as peat or muck. These soils have bulk densities as low as 25 to 37 lb/ ft 3• 3. Material determined to be of such an unstable nature as to be incapable of being compacted to the specified density using ordinary methods, at optimum moisture content. 4. Material which is too wet to be properly compacted and circumstances prevent suitable in-place drying prior to incorporation into the work. 5. For backfill to be used within a street, roadway or any other area where the degree of compaction is critical, material having a plasticity index greater than twenty (20) shall be considered unsuitable. 6. Material otherwise unsuitable for the planned use per the Contract Documents. Pavement Cuts Where excavation is required under concrete or asphalt paved areas, including gutters and walks, the surfacing material shall be cut or rotomilled in such a manner as to produce a smooth, structurally sound, straight cut edge and confine the excavation to a minimum practical width in conformance with section 3.2.1 Removals and Relocations of these Standard Specifications All broken pavement, asphalt, concrete or other debris resulting from this initial work shall be immediately removed from the job site or stockpiled in an approved manner so that it is kept separated from the remaining trench excavation. This debris will not be allowed to be mixed in the trench backfill material Utility Bedding and Backfill 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -26 This section outlines the guidelines and requirements for pipe bedding and backfilling operations required to complete construction per the Contract Documents. Unless specified otherwise on the Drawings or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, or directed otherwise by the Engineer, the Contractor shall bed all conduit according to the Class B Bedding method using a crushed granular, mineral aggregate material as noted in these Standard Construction Specifications and install the required geotextile over the pipe and/or bedding. Substitutions of recycled materials or manufactured materials in place of mineral aggregate mixtures for pipe bedding will not be allowed. If, in the course of construction, it is determined that the pipe foundation is unsatisfactory or the prescribed maximum allowable trench width is exceeded, the Engineer may require that an alternate class of bedding be installed. The Contractor shall be required to place the improved bedding class or make other remedies, at his/her expense. No separate payment will be made for placement of the required bedding material. All costs incurred will be considered to be included in the unit price bid for each section of sewer line, associated structures, laterals and appurtenances. Bedding Materials #67 Bedding This bedding shall consist of a durable crushed granular material with a well graded mineral aggregate mixture, which will provide good stability. This bedding shall not contain recycled or manufactured materials. The size range of the aggregate shall be from 1/4-inch minimum to 3/4-inch maximum with a maximum amount of fines passing a No. 8 sieve not to exceed 5% by weight and shall conform to ASTM C-33 or ASTM 0-448, gradation size #67. At least 50% of the material greater than the 3/8-inch sieve shall contain particles having 3 or more fractured faces. CLASS 67 GRADATION Nominal Size Percent Passing by Weight 3/4” 90-100 3/8” 20-55 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -27 No. 4 0-10 No.8 0-5 Alternate classes of bedding may be required within the Contract Documents or requested within the project scope. All such bedding materials must be submitted and separately approved for use by the Engineer. Recycled or manufactured materials will not be considered and alternate bedding materials used on site which have not been approved shall be rejected and the removal and replacement of these materials will be at the Contractor's expense. Bedding Requirements On rigid pipe of fifteen (15) inches or less in diameter and on all pipe classified as flexible, the bedding shall be continued until the bedding is filled to one foot above the top of the pipe. On rigid pipes twenty four (24) inches or greater in diameter, the bedding can be terminated at a point equal to the spring line of the pipe. Bedding Methods Class A Bedding shall be defined as that method of bedding by which additional supporting strength of the pipe is attained by supporting the lower part of the pipe with a concrete cradle or distributing trench loads on the upper portion of the pipe by means of aconcrete arch. In those instances where Class A Bedding is required, the Contractor shall construct either a concrete cradle or concrete arch as specifically noted in the Contract Documents or as directed by the Engineer. Class A Bedding shall be constructed of non-reinforced concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength (f' c) of no less than 2000 psi, unless otherwise noted. Additional requirements for either type of construction are specified below. Class A Bedding will normally not be allowed for flexible type installations such as corrugated steel pipe, plastic pipe, etc After concrete cradle or arch bedding has been constructed, no backfilling shall be completed above the pipe until the concrete has attained the required minimum compressive strength. Where sheeting is removed or left in place, all cavities remaining, adjoining and/or behind shall be firmly filled with a suitable backfill material. Concrete Cradle: This method of Class A Bedding construction shall consist of bedding the lower part of the pipe in a poured-in-place concrete cradle. The minimum thickness of concrete under and around the conduit shall not be less than 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -28 that specified on the project detail drawings. The concrete shall extend upward around the pipe a minimum distance of 1/4 of the outside diameter (but not less than 4-inches), measured from the lowest portion of the pipe exterior. The width of the concrete cradle shall be at least equal to the outside diameter plus 8-inches. Blocking material required to support the pipe prior to placement of concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 2000 psi. The remaining excavation to a point two (2) feet above the top of pipe shall be backfilled and compacted in accordance with the Class B Bedding Method described below. Concrete Arch: This method of Class A Bedding construction shall consist of bedding the upper part of the pipe in a poured-in-place concrete arch. The minimum thickness of concrete over and around the conduit shall not be less than that specified in project detail drawings. The concrete shall extend upward around the pipe a minimum distance of ½ the outside diameter plus 4-inches, measured from the spring line of the pipe. The width of the concrete arch shall be at least equal to the outside diameter plus 8 - inches. Where a concrete arch is required, the lower portion of the pipe (from spring line down) shall be bedded with Class B bedding, in accordance with this section. The remaining excavation to a point two (2) feet above the top of pipe shall be backfilled and compacted in accordance with Backfill Method B as specified below. Class B Bedding shall be defined as that method of bedding in which the pipe is set on an approved granular material. The trench shall be excavated to a depth below the bottom of the pipe as specified in the project detail drawings or specifications. The overexcavation shall be backfilled and compacted with a clean granular material free from organic and/or unsuitable materials. The material shall be placed under the pipe and on either side of the pipe up to depths specified within these Standard Construction Specifications. The placing shall be done in a manner which will assure no separation or change in uniform gradation. All bedding material shall be placed under the pipe haunches, then brought up in six inch (6") lifts (maximum) and compacted by hand operated mechanical vibrators equally and thoroughly along each side of the pipe in such a manner as to avoid displacement of, or damage to the pipe. All bedding material shall be compacted to a density of at least ninety percent (90%) as determined by the Modified Proctor Method, AASHTO designation T-180, before the next lift is placed. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -29 In no case will jetting or flooding be allowed as means for consolidation or compaction of the bedding material. Backfill Material Excavated material will be considered suitable for backfill purposes, provided its use results in a well-compacted stable condition. All backfill material shall be free from rubbish, organics, frozen material, broken pavement, debris, stones larger than three (3) inches in diameter, or other unsuitable materials. Material having a plasticity index greater than twenty (20} shall not be used for backfill within a street, roadway, or any other area where the degree of compaction is critical. It may be necessary for the Contractor, at his/her sole expense, to dry, wet, mix or otherwise rework satisfactory excavated material as necessary to obtain conformance with these Standard Construction Specifications. The use of squeegee material or pea gravel will not be allowed as backfill material due to their free flowing nature if undermined. These materials may be used as pipe bedding if required by a specific utility owner. When, in the opinion of the Engineer, the excavated material is unsuitable for use as backfill, or when there is a shortage of satisfactory backfill material within the project limits, the Contractor shall locate and furnish all necessary suitable backfill material and shall dispose of the unacceptable material. All excess backfill or unacceptable excavated material shall be disposed of off the rights-of-way and public property by the Contractor, unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. Backfilling shall be performed in strict conformance with these Standard Construction Specifications. Trench Backfill Installation The entire area from the top of bedding material to the top of subgrade shall make up the trench backfill zone. The backfill shall be placed in horizontal layers of such depths as are specified below for the material being placed and the type of equipment being used. Granular soils shall be compacted by vibration; whereas cohesive soils shall be compacted by a kneading action. Material for mechanically compacted backfill shall be placed in lifts, which, prior to compaction, shall not exceed the thickness specified below for the various type of equipment: a. Vibratory equipment, including vibratory plates, vibratory smooth-wheel rollers, and vibratory pneumatic-tired rollers - maximum lift thickness of two (2) feet; 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -30 b. Rolling equipment, including sheepsfoot (both vibratory and non-vibratory), grid, smooth-wheel (non-vibratory), pneumatic-tired (non-vibratory), and segmented wheels-maximum lift thickness of one (1) foot; c. Hand-directed mechanical tampers - maximum lift thickness of six (6) inches. Permission to use specific compaction equipment shall not be construed as guaranteeing or implying that the use of such equipment will not result in damage to adjacent ground, existing improvements, or improvements installed under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall make his/her own determination in this regard. It will be the Contractors responsibility to maintain a minimum of eighty-five (85%) density from the top of bedding to a distance of two (2) feet over the top of pipe. The density from two (2) feet over the top of pipe to the subgrade surface shall maintain a minimum of ninety percent (90%) density. Regardless of facility depth, the last foot of subgrade material shall be compacted to a minimum density of ninety percent (90%). All densities shall be determined by the Modified Proctor Method, AASHTO Designation T-180. Each lift of backfill material shall have the proper moisture content and consistency to permit compaction to the designated density. The compacted material may be tested at any time for adherence to these Standard Construction Specifications. Structure Backfill Installation Backfill for cast-in-place or precast structures and appurtenances, including but not limited to: manholes, transition structures, junction structures, vaults, inlets and concrete box culverts, shall start at the subgrade for the structure, or appurtenance. Each lift will have the proper moisture content and consistency to permit compaction to the prescribed density. Each lift will be uniformly and completely compacted by either handheld pneumatic or mechanical tampers to a density of at least equal to ninety percent (90%) of the density determined by the Modified Proctor Method, AASHTO designation T-180, before the next lift is placed. Unless otherwise set forth in the Contract Documents, the cost of the bedding and trench backfill requirements shall be included in the associated unit price bid for the respective utility line, associated structures, laterals and appurtenances. Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM) Controlled Low Strength Materials (CLSMs) consist of a well-graded mixture of mineral aggregates, cementitious materials, water and admixtures. Other common 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -31 names for CLSMs include: flowable fill, flowfill, non-shrink backfill, fly ash fill and controlled density fill. The contractor will be required to submit a mix design and test data to the Engineer for approval, prior to excavating the area for which CLSMs are proposed for use. All materials of this category placed without previous approval, or which do not perform as specified, will be rejected by the Engineer and all costs incurred for removal and replacement of these materials will be at the Contractor's expense. All CLSMs shall adhere and conform to the following, unless noted otherwise: a. The mix must be capable of freely flowing to fill all voids in trenches or other areas without compaction or other additional effort, b. The mix must be of uniform density and low permeability to prevent migration of adjacent fines into the set mix, c. Must be placed in a uniform manner that will prevent voids or segregation of the backfill and shifting of pipelines, structures and appurtenances. Foreign material that falls into the trench prior to, or during placement shall be immediately removed, d. The CLSM shall be produced using a central-mixed concrete plant or other approved method, e. Chemical admixtures containing chlorides shall not be used unless approved otherwise, f. CLSMs will be classified as either Standard Aggregate or Fine Aggregate CLSM according to the table below. Submitted CLSMs must follow the gradation guideline provided here, unless approved otherwise: Standard Sieve Size % Passing (by Weight) 1 inch (For Standard Aggregate CLSM) 3/8 inch (For Fine Aggregate CLSM) 100 100 No. 8 50 minimum No.200 0-30 maximum g. The 28-day compressive strength must be between 50 and 150 psi, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Test cylinders may be required to insure 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -32 that the specified strength is obtained. The compressive strength shall be determined by ASTM D4832, "Preparation of Testing of Soil• Cement Slurry Test Cylinders", h. The mix shall have a slump between 7 and 10 inches as per AASHTO Designation T 119-82, i. When CLSMs are placed within the right-of-way, or they are to be covered by paving materials, the final set product must achieve a maximum indentation diameter of 3-inches prior to covering and opening the area to traffic. Penetration resistance shall be as measured by ASTM C6024, "Standard Test Method for Ball Drop on Controlled Low Strength Material to Determine Suitability for Load Application", j. Final set product shall excavate easily, minimizing the risk of damage to buried utilities during future work, k. Must be placed within 2 hours after mixing at the batch plant, unless otherwise approved or specified by the Engineer, l. Delivery tags shall be collected from the delivery driver and provided to the Engineer. The delivery tag shall contain the supplier name, the mix identifying name and/or number as listed in the supplier's submitted mix design. The Engineer may reject any mix that does not appear to meet the requirements of this specification (segregation, insufficient slump, open graded aggregates, etc.). 3.2.2.6 Measurement and Payment Trench Excavation, Bedding and Backfill shall not be measured and paid for separately, but will be part of the work. 3.2.3 Erosion Control during Construction Description: This section details the labor, materials and equipment and procedures required to manage erosion and sedimentation from construction sites. All work shall be in conformance with the latest editions of the Englewood Storm Drainage Criteria Manual and Volume 3, Best Management Practices, Drainage Criteria Manual from the Urban Drainage and Flood Control District. Materials Erosion control devises and procedures to be utilized include, but are not limited to; 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -33 Check Dams Vehicle Tracking Control Pad Surface Roughening Inlet Protection Straw Bale Barrier Concrete Washout Basin Sediment Basins Sediment Control Log Street Sweeping Surface Roughening Outlet Protection Fuel/Chemical Handling Seeding/Mulching Curb Socks Sanitary Facilities Inlet protection in the right-of-way shall be made from a manufactured, heavy duty geotextile filter bag or sleeve to protect the grate and curb opening and shall be installed to allow overflow into the inlet. Construction Requirements The contractor shall place all erosion control devices as shown on the plan or as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall monitor the performance of the erosion control devices and other Best Management Practices (BMP’s) on a regular basis. Inspections shall be made at least once every fourteen calendar days and after every rainfall event. Contractor shall maintain a log of maintenance activities and a map of all erosion control BMP’s Contractor shall adjust, repair or replace all erosion control BMP’s when necessary. The contractor shall be responsible for cleaning all paved areas of mud and debris due to construction activities on a daily basis or as directed by the City of Englewood. Erosion Control BMP’s shall remain in place and in working condition until final stabilization of the site is achieved. A designated area shall be provided on site for concrete truck chute washout. The Area shall be so as to contain washout material and located at least fifty (50) feet away from any waterway during construction. Upon completion of construction activities, the concrete washout material will be removed and properly disposed of prior to the area being restored. All work shall be completed in conformance with the approved Erosion Control Plan and/or Stormwater Management Plan (SWMP) and the requirements of the Colorado Discharge Permit System (CDPS) along with the City of Englewood Storm Drainage Criteria Manual 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -34 Erect and maintain adequate erosion protection for the duration of the project. No material will be allowed to leave site. All erosion control BMP’s shall be per the latest issue of Volume 3 of the Urban Storm Drainage Criterial Manual. The SWMP should be updated as necessary to reflect changing site conditions. Minor modifications may be made by the SWMP Administrator and will generally include substitutions for BMP’s that are equivalent or more suitable to specific conditions. Minor modifications will be tracked on the approved SWMP at the site and will not require submittal to the City of Englewood. Major modifications to a SWMP are those involving re-engineering or changes to the site grading and drainage plan. Major modifications will need to be made by the Engineer of Record and be submit to the City of Englewood Public Works for approval. The contractor shall be responsible for cleaning all paved areas of mud and debris due to construction activities on a daily basis or as directed by the City of Englewood. Inlet protection in the right-of-way shall be made from a manufactured, heavy duty geotextile filter bag or sleeve to protect the grate and curb opening and shall be installed to allow overflow into the inlet. A designated area shall be provided on site for concrete truck chute washout. The Area shall be so as to contain washout material and located at least fifty (50) feet away from any waterway during construction. Upon completion of construction activities, the concrete washout material will be removed and properly disposed of prior to the area being restored. Erosion Control BMP’s shall remain in place and in working condition until final stabilization of the site is achieved. Soil on the site shall not be left exposed for more than 60 days. All disturbed areas on the site shall be stabilized with seeding/mulching, paving or other approved method. Pre-construction meeting shall be held on-site after perimeter BMP controls have been installed and prior to the start of construction or demolition. Schedule Pre-Construction Meeting and all inspections with Public Works at 303-762-2500 Measurement and Payment Erosion Control will be measured and paid by the contract unit price and shall include all furnishing, erecting, cleaning, maintaining, resetting, repairing, replacing, moving, removing and disposing of the erosion control devises. The payment for Erosion Control as a lump sum will be made as a percentage of the total work completed. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -35 If a contract unit price for Erosion Control is not included, then this work shall be considered subsidiary to other work and will not be measured and paid separately. Pay Item Pay Unit Erosion Control Lump Sum 3.2.4 Asphalt Pavement Placement, Patching and Overlays (and other surfacing methods) Description: These Specifications contain the requirements for the design, manufacture and placement of Asphalt Paving Mixture (APM) for street construction, re-construction and overlays. HMA shall consist of mineral aggregate and mineral filler, if required, all uniformly mixed with asphalt cement and laid upon the prepared base to the finished thickness shown on the typical cross sections on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. All materials, methods of preparation, and construction shall conform to the requirements of these specifications. The latest edition of the MGPEC Pavement Design Standards and Construction Specifications for Asphalt Pavement Materials shall be the standard specification for work in this section (MGPEC APM Specification). All references to AGENCY shall mean the City of Englewood. 3.2.4.1 Materials, Design and Production Requirements All materials, design and production shall conform to the requirements of the MGPEC APM Specification. 1. The asphalt cement shall have a performance grade (PG) of 76-28 or 58-28. The content of the asphalt cement shall be as determined by the mix design. 2. The gradation of the mineral aggregate shall be grading SG (1-1/2 inch maximum) or grading S (3/4 inch maximum) for the lower lifts of construction for new street construction. The top lift shall be grading SX (1/2-inch maximum). 3. The mix shall conform to the job mix formula specified by the City Engineer for the pit supplied materials, if a current job mix formula is available, and shall meet the requirements as shown in MGPEC Tables 4-6 Superpave Mix Properties, 4- 6a Minimum VMA Requirements, and 4-7 Properties of Superpave Performance Graded Binders. A copy of the mix formula shall be submitted to the Project Manager for review and approval at least seven (7) days prior to starting paving work. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -36 3.2.4.2 Construction All construction means, methods procedures and testing and inspection shall conform to the requirements of the MGPEC APM Specification Proof rolling shall be required to determine whether certain areas of Subgrade meet compaction requirements. Proof rolling shall be carried Out with a pneumatic-tired water truck/similar vehicle loaded to a minimum Of 36,000 pounds within a maximum of 10 hours prior to paving. Areas of subgrade that are found to be weak and/or fail the proof roll shall Be investigated, and a determination shall be made to solve the failure Condition by the contractor or his consultant. The area of failure shall be Brought up to the requirements for density and moisture prior to paving. 3.2.4.3 Temporary Asphalt Patching Temporary Patching; when the final surface is not immediately installed within two weeks of construction, it shall be necessary to place a temporary asphalt surface on any street cut opening. The temporary surface installation and its maintenance shall be the responsibility of the contractor until the permanent surface is completed and accepted. It shall be either a hot mix or cold mix paving material. Temporary surfaces shall be compacted, rolled smooth and sealed to prevent degradation of the repair and existing structures during the temporary period. Permanent patching shall occur within two (2) weeks except as permitted by the Engineer. During winter, the temporary surface (cold mix asphalt) shall be installed immediately. Wheel rolling is not an acceptable means of final compaction. The use of trench plates is strictly forbidden from October 1st through April 30th. 3.2.4.4 Permanent Asphalt Patching Paving shall be performed by an approved contractor. All material quality and installation shall meet the standards of the latest CDOT Highway Specifications. All permanent pavement patches and repairs shall be made with "in kind" materials. For example, concrete patches in concrete surfaces, full depth asphalt patches with full depth asphalt, concrete pavement with asphalt overlay patches will be expected in permanent overlaid concrete streets, etc. In no case is there to be an asphalt patch in concrete streets or concrete patch in asphalt streets. Any repair not meeting these requirements will be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. When more than 300 square feet of existing roadway is disturbed within a single block (either by a single street cut on arterial or collector streets or by multiple street cuts on local streets), the construction area shall be milled and overlaid to the extent designated by the City inspector. Generally, the mill and overlay shall encompass all of the disturbed 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -37 asphalt areas in a rectangular shape. All pavements shall be saw cut to a minimum of one foot beyond the edge of the trench prior lo patching. If the distance between the edge of the trench and the lip of the concrete gutter or crosspan, or edge of existing pavement is less than 3 feet, all pavement between the edge of the trench and the lip of gutter, crosspan or edge of pavement shall be removed and replaced. Bituminous pavement shall be saw cut to clean, straight lines and shall be perpendicular or parallel to the flow of traffic. For original excavation, roll cutting or jack hammering is an acceptable means of removal. However, saw cutting to meet these standards shall be required prior to asphalt patching. In existing pavement, all excavations within 36" of the edge of the asphalt or another excavation, either existing or proposed, shall require removal and replacement of that asphalt from the edge of road to the excavation. Concrete pavement, cross pans, driveways, streets and alleys shall be removed to neatly sawed edges cut to full depth Completed street repairs should have ride ability at least as good as, if not better than the pavement prior to the repairs. A driver may be able to see a street repair, but in the case of a quality repair, they should not be able to "feel" it in driving normally down the street. Do not construct asphalt overlays in such a manner that create a bump to the motoring public. If the leading edge of an overlay in substantially noticeable to a car it is likely to be significant to the snow plow trucks. The City shall determine the rideability of the overlay. If the transition is not smooth the contractor shall remove and replace to feather out the leading edge to the satisfaction of the City. Surface tolerances for street repairs should meet the standard for new construction. That is, the finished surface of the street repair, when tested with a ten (I0) foot straightedge parallel to the centerline or perpendicular across joints, will show variations measured from the testing face of the straightedge to the surface of the street repair which do not exceed one-quarter (1/4) inch. Transverse patches shall be replaced across the entire street width for a distance of two (2) feet minimum on both sides of the trench, thus creating a 'T shaped patch above the trench. Do not allow the edges of patches to fall in existing wheel paths. The edges of patches parallel to the direction of traffic shall be limited to the boundaries of lanes or to the centerline of travel lanes. No tracked vehicles shall be permitted on streets unless approved by the City. Any damage caused by contactor operations to existing facilities will be restored to original condition or better at the Contractor's expense. The City may require that any scarred area to be restored at the contractor's expense. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -38 3.2.4.5 Measurement and Payment APM for construction, re-construction and overlay shall be measured by the amount actually completed and accepted. APM for patching shall be measured by the amount used in the completion of the patch and shall include all saw cutting, removal base course and compaction required to complete the work. APM will be paid at the contract price when complete and in place according to the Contract Documents. The contract price shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work. Pay Item Pay Unit Asphalt Pavement Material Ton (ton) Asphalt Pavement Material (Patch) Ton (ton) Emulsified Tack Coat (measured prior to the addition of water) Gallon (gal) 3.2.5 Concrete Pavement (pavement, curb, gutter, sidewalks, crosspans) Description: This work consists of furnishing and placing portland cement concrete in accordance with these specifications and in conformity with the lines, grades and dimensions as shown on the plans or established. The latest edition of the Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction shall be the standard specification for work in this section (CDOT Specification). 3.2.5.1 Materials Concrete for pavements and structures shall be Class B, D, H or P in conformance with section 601.02 Classification of the CDOT Specification. Other classifications of concrete within this section may be used with the approval of the Engineer All materials shall be in conformance with sections 601.03 Materials and 601.04 Sulfate Resistance in the CDOT Specification. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -39 3.2.5.2 Installation, Removal and Replacement 3.2.5.2.1 Portioning, Batching, Mixing and Air Content Adjustment This work shall be done in conformance with sections 601.5 Proportioning, 601.06 Batching, 601.07 Mixing and 601.08 Air Content Adjustment in the CDOT Specification. 3.2.5.2.2 Forming The forms shall be tight and constructed in a workmanlike manner, and shall be of such dimensions and so constructed as to remain rigid and unyielding under the load of wet concrete. The lumber used shall be sound and free from loose knots. The form work shall be so constructed as to permit easy removal without injuring the concrete. Lumber previously used in forms shall be cleaned before being used again. Before depositing concrete, the forms shall be thoroughly wetted and cooled, and the space to be occupied by the concrete cleared of shavings, sticks of wood, deleterious materials or other debris. Use an approved type of form clamps and ties for all forms. Form ties in walls shall be cut off back of surface of wall. Whenever concrete is to be left exposed, the forms shall be given special attention and all splinters, defects, loose knots, etc., shall be removed. Chamfer all exposed edges of concrete one (1) inch unless otherwise directed. Unless otherwise authorized, the form lumber which is in contact with all exposed concrete surfaces shall be plywood or shall be faced with an approved type of composition board. All joints in such plywood or facing material shall be carefully matched to prevent the forming of irregularities in the concrete surface. The term “exposed concrete surfaces” applies to above ground outside faces of structures. Approved type metal forms may be used. Battered, bent, or twisted forms which will affect the alignment or appearance of the finished concrete shall not be used. Openings shall be left at the bottom of the wall forms so they may be cleaned out after the forms have been washed. The time for removal of 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -40 the form work shall depend on the weather conditions and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Forms for exposed surfaces shall be coated with oil before reinforcement is placed. The oil shall be a mineral base oil which will not discolor or interfere with the finish of the concrete. Surplus oil on form surfaces and any oil on reinforcement shall be removed before concrete is placed. Forms for interior surfaces and for exterior surfaces not exposed to view may be thoroughly wet with water in lieu of oiling immediately before placement of concrete, except that the freezing weather, oiling will be mandatory. 3.2.5.2.3 Placing Reinforcing Steel Reinforcing steel delivered or stored along the site of the work shall be neatly piled on blocks or timbers in such a way as to keep it off the ground. Before being placed, all steel shall be thoroughly cleaned of mill rust, scale and of grease or other coatings that will destroy the bond. Reinforcement shall be carefully placed as indicated on the plans. Bars shall not be bent or straightened in a manner that will injure the material. Bars shall be accurately and rigidly secured in position by use of such approved metal clips, spacers, bar supports, or high-chairs as may be necessary. Should it be necessary to supply extra reinforcing bars for the purpose of supporting the mat of reinforcement and tying it together, such bars shall be furnished at the expense of the Contractor. Splices shall not be made at point of maximum stress and where made, bars shall be lapped at least forty (40) times their least diameter. Reinforcement shall be secured in position, inspected and approved before placing of concrete. 3.2.5.2.4 Placing Concrete The Contractor shall give notice sufficiently in advance of placing concrete to permit proper inspection of forms and reinforcement by the Engineer. Concrete shall be as specified in section 3.2.5.1 of these Standard Specifications. After the completion of the mixing, the concrete shall be rapidly conveyed to and deposited in the forms. The concrete shall be deposited in such a 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -41 manner as will prevent the separation of the ingredients and permit the most thorough compacting. It shall be compacted by spading or by a mechanical vibrator until the concrete has settled in the proper place and the surplus water is forced to the surface. Form vibrators shall be used only with the specific approval of the Engineer. Vibrators shall not be used to move the concrete within the formwork. The concrete shall be placed as near its final position as possible and in such manner as to prevent excessive crawling and segregation of the aggregate. Location of all construction joints must be as approved by the Engineer. Such joints shall be roughened, rabbeted horizontally and grouted with cement, before joining new concrete to old. Construction dowels shall be placed as directed by the Engineer in both reinforced and non-reinforced work. Before pouring new concrete on top of concrete which has set, the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign matter and laitance of scum, drenched and slushed with neat cement. 3.2.5.2.5 Finish All exposed formed concrete surfaces exclusive of any surfaces below the water line or below the line of backfill, and exclusive of curbs and walks, will be given the surface finish described as follows: As soon as the concrete has set sufficiently to permit it, the surface shall be thoroughly wet with a brush and rubbed with a No. 16 carborundum stone or an abrasive of equal quality, bringing the surface to a paste. The rubbing shall be continued sufficiently to remove all form marks and projections producing a smooth, dense surface without pots or irregularities. The material which, in the above process, has been ground to a paste shall be carefully spread or brushed uniformly over the entire surface and permitted to reset. The final finish shall be obtained by thoroughly rubbing with a No. 30 carborundum stone or an abrasive of equal quality. This rubbing shall continue until the entire surface is of a smooth texture and uniform in color. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -42 3.2.5.2.6 Curb and Gutter, Curb walk, Sidewalks, Driveways, Alleys and Cross Pans A. Preparation of Subgrade. All subgrade upon which concrete is to be placed shall be thoroughly compacted and moistened. This work shall be included in the unit bid price for the various units requiring tamping by the Engineer on City projects. Concrete shall be placed only when the subgrade is moist and not when it is too wet or dry or unstable. Jumping-jack and plate tampers must be on site at all times during sub grade preparations. B. Forms. Metal or wooden forms may be used. They shall be free from warp, of sufficient strength to resist springing out of shape. Forms shall be cleaned of all mortar and dirt and oiled before they are used. They shall be set to the established line and grade, being well staked, braced, or otherwise held in place. Forms shall remain in place at least twelve (12) hours after concrete has been placed against them or for a longer period if so directed by the Engineer. Maximum deviation of the top surface shall not exceed one-eighth (1/8) inch in ten (10) feet or the inside face not more than one-quarter (¼) inch in ten (10) feet. The method of connections between sections shall be such that the joint thus formed is tight and free from movement in any direction. Approved flexible forms shall be used for construction where the radius is one hundred fifty (150) feet or less. C. Placing Concrete. After the inspector has approved the forms and subgrade, then concrete shall be deposited on the subgrade to the required depth and width in successive batches and in a continuous operation. The concrete shall be placed as uniformly as possible to minimize the amount of spreading necessary. While being placed, the concrete shall be spaded and/or vibrated with suitable tools to prevent the formation of voids or honeycomb. Wire fabric shall be placed at a point three (3) inches below the surface of a cross pan and squared-out return. The fabric shall be fully supported on precast mortar blocks prior to placing the concrete. D. Expansion Joints. Expansion joints shall be provided in accordance with the thickness and other dimensions indicated on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. The joint filler shall extend the full depth and width of the concrete and shall be set vertical with the tip edge flush with the finish surface of the concrete. Preformed expansion joint filler conforming to the 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -43 requirements of A.A.S.H.T.O. Specification M 213-74 or latest revision shall be used. Expansion joints shall be provided at the following locations and shall be in place prior to the placing of concrete: 1. Between back of sidewalk and driveway slab or service walk. 2. Between new concrete and existing masonry buildings. 3. As shown on the plans. 4. As directed by the Engineer. E. Finishing. Unless otherwise specified, hand finishing methods will be permitted only when performed under the direct supervision of a Craftsman holding a current ACI Concrete Flatwork Finisher and Technician (ACICFFT) certification or other Flatwork Finisher certificate approved by the City. A minimum of one (1) certified Craftsman is required at each finishing operation. A minimum of one (1) certified Craftsman is required for each six (6) or fewer finishers (non-certified ACICFFTs) at each finishing operation. Finishing shall be done with a screed or mule designed to give proper shape to the section as detailed. Final finish shall be applied by a float or other means approved by the Engineer. The final texture desired may be obtained by lightly brooming the surface, edge to edge, to produce a slightly roughened finish at the discretion of the Engineer. Particular care shall be used to finish gutter flow line to a true uniform grade. Any pockets which will pond any appreciable amounts of water shall be removed by grinding. No water shall be added to the concrete surface to facilitate finishing. 1. Edging. Before final finishing is completed and before the concrete has taken its initial set, all edges in contact with the forms shall be tooled with an edger having three-eighth (3/8) inch radius. 2. Jointing. Transverse joints shall be placed at maximum intervals of ten (10) feet. To control random cracking, the joints shall be formed, sawed or tooled to a minimum depth of one-quarter (¼) of the total thickness. If divider plates are used, the maximum depth of plates shall not be greater than one-half (½) the total thickness. The joints shall be finished with a jointer having a width no greater than five-sixteenth (5/16) inch and a depth of not less than three-quarter (¾) inch. A maximum joint width at the finished surface shall be no greater than five-sixteenth (5/16) inch. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -44 Tool joints shall be spaced as follows: a. Not more than ten (10) feet nor less than five (5) feet apart in curb and gutter and curb walk. b. Not more than six (6) feet nor less than four (4) feet apart in sidewalk. c. In driveways one or two joints equally spaced as applicable. d. As directed by the Engineer. 3. Marking. All sidewalks, curb, gutters and driveways shall have the name of the Contractor and the year of construction impressed therein, using block letters one (1) inch high and three-eighth (3/8) inch deep. One impression shall be made in each driveway. Impressions shall be made in sidewalks, curbs, gutters at each end of the construction, or at one hundred (100) foot intervals and at each extension to curbing. F. Adjustments to Finished Grade: Any adjustment to utility covers, stop boxes, meter pits, manhole lids, splice boxes, valve boxes etc will be completed by the Contractor. Any stop boxes broken or unable to be adjusted will be identified for replacement by the Engineer at time of inspection and will be measured and paid for in accordance with section 3.2.1 of these Standard Specifications 3.2.5.2.7 Curing Concrete shall be cured by protecting it against moisture loss, rapid temperature change, rain, flowing water and mechanical injury for a period of not less than five (5) days after placement. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to protect from the elements and traffic, and if neglected the Engineer shall direct that the necessary protective measures be taken at the expense of the Contractor, and no further pouring will be permitted. a. Moist Curing. Moist curing shall be accomplished after initial set by covering with wet burlap, cotton mats, or other approved fabric used singly or in combination. Curing mats shall be kept continuously wet and in intimate contact with the concrete for the duration of the moist cure. b. Waterproof Paper and Polyethylene Sheets. The surface of the concrete shall be thoroughly moistened with a fine spray of water 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -45 and then covered after initial set with the waterproof paper or sheeting. Paper or sheeting shall cover the entire width and edges shall be lapped at least twelve (12) inches to insure complete coverage. Paper or sheeting shall be adequately weighted to prevent displacement or billowing due to wind. (“Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete”, A.A.S.H.T.O. Designation: M 171-70.) c. Liquid Membrane Curing Compound. Only white pigmented membrane curing compound shall be used (PROTEX Promulsion 50AW or equivalent) and shall be applied immediately after the water sheen has left the finished concrete. The compound shall be applied at a rate of one gallon per 200 square feet. Clear curing compound shall be used for any colored concrete placed. 3.2.5.2.8 Cold Weather Concreting Except by specific written authorization, concreting shall cease when ambient air temperature in the shade and away from artificial heat falls below 40 degrees Fahrenheit. It shall not be resumed until the ambient air temperature in the shade and away from artificial heat is 35 degrees Fahrenheit and rising. Concrete shall not be place on frozen ground. When concrete is permitted during cold weather, the temperature of the mix shall be not less than 50 degrees Fahrenheit or more than 90 degrees Fahrenheit at the time of placing. Aggregates or water or both may be heated, but shall not be heated to a temperature greater than 150 degrees Fahrenheit. Before concreting is started, remove ice, snow and frost. When concrete is being placed in cold weather and temperature may be expected to drop below 35 degrees Fahrenheit, a supply of straw, insulated curing blankets, or other suitable material shall be provided along the line of work. At any time when the air temperature may be expected to reach the freezing point during the day or night, the materials so provided shall be spread over the concrete to a sufficient depth to prevent freezing of the concrete. Concrete shall be protected from freezing temperatures for a minimum of three (3) days from the time of placement. Maintain concrete surface temperatures for the period in accordance with Column 2 of ACI 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -46 306, Table 3.2.1. Concrete injured by frost action shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense. 3.2.5.2.9 Hot Weather Concreting Except by written authorization, concrete placing shall cease if the temperature of the plastic concrete cannot be maintained at 90 degrees or lower. To facilitate the placement of concrete in hot weather, the aggregates or water or both may be cooled. 3.2.5.2.10 Opening to Traffic Concrete shall not be opened to traffic for a period of at least three (3) days after the last concrete has been placed or until test results show that concrete has obtained at least 3,000 PSI strength or for a longer period of time if the Engineer considers it necessary. If it is desired to open newly placed concrete to traffic earlier than three (3) days, Contractor may elect to place an accelerated curing mix, at no additional cost to the City, and open the area to traffic once strength has reached at least 3,000 PSI. Contractor must demonstrate that the in-place concrete has achieved a compressive strength acceptable to the Engineer. It shall be the obligation of the Contractor to maintain suitable barricades while concrete cures. 3.2.5.2.11 Barricades and Barricading of new concrete At the end of each workday, it shall be the contractor’s responsibility to check each concrete location and insure proper barricading is in place. Barricading shall be in conformance with the MUTCD for the protection of a work area. Barricades shall not be removed until the concrete has attained the necessary strength. All barricades and traffic control devices must have working lights when in service. 3.2.5.2.12 Maintenance of Traffic and Drainage During the progress of concrete work, the Contractor shall provide free access to fire hydrants, water and gas valves, sanitary and storm sewer manholes. Gutters, inlets and drainage ways must be kept clear or other suitable provisions made for the conveyance of storm water. The Contractor shall build and maintain temporary driveways, bridges and crossings, such as in the opinion of the Engineer as necessary to reasonably accommodate the public. In the event of the Contractor’s failure to comply with the foregoing provisions on City projects, the City 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -47 may without notice, cause the same to be done and deduct the cost of such work from any money due, or to become, due, the Contractor under this Contract. Performance of such work by the City shall in no way to release the Contractor from their general or particular liability for the safety of the public or the work. 3.2.5.2.13 Concrete Washout Area It shall be the obligation of the contractor to provide and maintain a contained concrete washout area for the duration of concrete work. If proper methods are not being followed, the engineer can direct all work to stop until the situation is corrected. 3.2.5.2.14 Water At the direction of the Engineer, water shall be furnished to insure the proper compaction of the subgrade, select material and gravel base course or as a dust palliative. On City projects, costs for water used shall not be measured and paid for separately, but shall be subsidiary to other pay items. Water may be obtained by the Contractor from municipal fire hydrants designated by the Utilities Director for the City. The Contractor shall be responsible for all fees to be paid to the Utilities Department for the water and equipment to be used. The Contractor shall be liable for any damage to fire hydrants and adjacent property resulting from the use of the hydrants. Any damage so incurred shall be repaired by the City at the expense of the Contractor. 3.2.5.2.15 Saw Cutting Concrete and Asphalt Pavements All cuts in existing concrete and asphalt pavements shall be made for the full depth of the pavement, to a smooth, straight-cut edge. All water and dust residue shall be cleaned from site at the time of sawing. 3.2.5.2.16 Concrete Removal All existing concrete removed that is scheduled for replacement shall be replaced within two (2) days of removal. Each removal shall be barricaded, per the MUTCD for the protection of the public and provided with a diversion of drainage flows. The engineer may direct all removals to stop if concrete is not being replaced within the required time. On City 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -48 projects no time extensions or extra cost associated with the stoppage will be granted. 3.2.5.2.17 Asphalt Patch back Asphalt shall be sawcut a minimum of nine (9) inches and a maximum of twelve (12) inches away from the lip and the asphalt removed. After concrete has been placed, cured and forms removed, the area shall be thoroughly cleaned and compacted and patched with asphalt. 3.2.5.2.18 Waste Disposal Areas The disposal of all waste material such as broken concrete, pavement, trees, roots, rocks, pipe and excess earth material shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor and shall be removed from site on a daily basis. Waste material shall not be stored in the public Right of Way out side of working hours. 3.2.5.2.19 Work on Exposed Overlaid Gutters The Contractor will remove the existing asphalt gutter pan overlay on identified streets. Upon completion of that operation, City staff will evaluate the newly exposed concrete for necessary repair. Payment on City projects will be per the bid schedule. 3.2.5.2.20 Spalling Concrete The Contractor shall guarantee all concrete against spalling for two (2) years from the date of acceptance. Spalling is generally due to defective materials and/or workmanship if concrete is placed between April 1 and October 15. Concrete placed between October 16 and March 31 may be exposed to chemical deicers that may affect the finish and cause spalling of the concrete. 3.2.5.2.21 Backfilling, Backsloping, Asphalt Patching, Final Cleanup Wherever the installation requires backfilling or backsloping, the top six (6) inches shall be top soil. The backfilling, backsloping, asphalt patching and final cleanup shall be completed within 3 days of concrete pour. If this time frame is not being followed, the engineer can direct all other work to stop until this situation is corrected. No time extensions or extra cost associated with the stoppage will be granted. No work shall be paid for until all backfilling, backsloping, asphalt patching and final cleanup is complete. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -49 3.2.5.2.22 Testing Concrete Concrete shall be sampled and tested to verify conformance with project specifications. Concrete shall be sampled in accordance with AASHTO Designation: T 141. Testing shall include Slump (AASHTO T 119), Unit Weight (AASHTO T 121), Air Content (AASHTO T 152). Compressive strength test specimens shall be fabricated in accordance with AASHTO Designation: T 23 and tested in accordance with AASHTO Designation T 22. One set of cylinders shall consist of at least six (6) test specimens. Two cylinders shall be tested at the age of seven (7) days, three cylinders shall be tested at the age of twenty-eight (28) days, and the remaining cylinders held for later testing if considered necessary by the Engineer. The expense of testing on City of Englewood funded projects shall be borne by the City, unless otherwise stated in the Special Conditions. 3.2.5.2.23 Measurement and Payment The following items shall constitute pay items for the work to be done in this section. Payment for these items shall be full payment for all materials, labor, excavation, tools, equipment, supplies, and work incidental to completion of each item. Items that are integral to construction but do not contain a pay item shall be considered subsidiary to other items and shall be included in the work. A. Curb and Gutter, Curb walk, Sidewalks, Driveways, Alleys and Cross Pans. Measurement of Curb and Gutter and Curb walk will be made along the flowline. Measurements of Sidewalks, Driveways, Alleys and Cross Pans will be made to the neat dimensions of the pavement as shown on the plan or altered to meet field conditions. B. Structural Concrete: Payment of structural concrete items shall be as set forth in the Proposal Form and shall be full payment for excavating to grade, disposal of all excess material, backfilling, the finishing and compacting of subgrade, furnishing, placing, finishing and curing of the concrete, reinforcing and other materials, and all incidentals connected therewith. C. Curb Ramps: This item shall include all material, labor and any incidental work to construct a curb ramp per the standard detail. Detectable warning surface shall be Cast-In-Place Composite Paver Unit by manufactured ADA Solutions or Approved Alternate, color; Brick 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -50 Red. An area of up to 56 SF of 6” thick walk and 14.0 LF of 8” thick curb and gutter shall be included in the unit price for each curb ramp. Concrete shall be 4500 psi Class B with proper rebar or wire mesh. Pay Item Pay Unit Vertical curb and gutter Lineal Foot (lf) Curbwalk (Type I, Type II) Square Foot (sf) 8” Concrete alley paving Square Foot (sf) Sidewalk (4” thick) Square Foot (sf) Sidewalk/Driveway Apron (6” thick) Square Foot (sf) Cross pans/Fillets Square Foot (sf) Curb Ramp Each (ea) 3.2.6 Structures 3.2.6.1 General Major structures that are appurtenant to the proposed improvements such as retaining walls, box culverts, and bridges, shall conform to the structural and loading requirements of CDOT and geometry and drainage requirements of the City Engineer. Bridge and roadway guardrails shall be designed and constructed in accordance with current AASHTO Standards. Plans and supporting calculations for major structures shall be prepared and stamped by a registered Professional Engineer. 1. All bridge and culvert elements shall be designed in accordance with: a. A. AASHTO, “LRFD Standard Specifications for Transportation Materials and Methods of Sampling and Testing”, latest edition and applicable interims. b. B. CDOT, “Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction”, latest edition and Standard Special Provisions and Bridge‐specific Project Special Provisions. c. C. CDOT, “Bridge Manual”, latest edition and Bridge Technical Memorandums. 2. Any structure over a 20 ft. span must be designed to current AASHTO vehicular live loading. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -51 3. All box culverts and bridges shall have the year of construction permanently indentured on the downstream headwall face in legible numbers. The numbers shall be 3” high by 1½” deep in the headwall face. 4. Culvert and bridge waterway opening designs shall also conform to the Parameters set forth in the City of Englewood Drainage Criteria Manual, latest edition. 5. If a vehicular railing or safety‐shaped barrier is within the clear zone as defined by AASHTO Roadside Design Guide, approach guardrails are to be installed on all approach ends in accordance with AASHTO guidelines. 6. The crown should be centered on the bridge except for 1‐way bridges, where a straight cross slope in one direction may be used. The cross slope should match that of the approach pavement. 7. Approach railings are required at the ends of bridges exposed to approach traffic. The type of approach railing selected should match the rail to be used on the bridge. Approach railings must have an approved end treatment that meets current standards at any exposed end. (For detailed Information see the AASHTO “Roadside Design Guide”.) 8. Timber bridges are not allowed. 9. A safety railing is required on or adjacent to vertical faces such as retaining walls, wing‐walls and abutments, etc., and where the vertical fall is 2 feet or more. The safety railing shall be placed on top of the vertical face structure of the vertical drop. 3.2.6.2 Retaining walls Proposed Retaining walls greater than 30” face height within or directly adjacent to the public right of way require a building permit submittal and review. Design shall be stamped and signed by a Colorado Licensed Professional Engineer. 3.2.6.3 Inlets and manholes 3.2.6.3.1 Inlets Description: This work shall consist of furnishing all materials and constructing concrete catch basins, including excavation, concrete removal and backfill. Work shall be done at the locations designated on the project plans and in accordance with the Standard Detail Drawings and other requirements of the Contract Documents. All inlet 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -52 structures and related components shall be designed for AASHTO HS20 loading conditions. Materials: Concrete shall be Class D, with a minimum 28-day strength of 4500 psi. Cement used in concrete shall conform to ASTM Designation C-150 Type II cement. All concrete used for these applications shall be meet the requirements set forth within these Standard Construction Specifications. Grout - grout shall be composed by volume of one part Portland cement, two parts fine aggregate, one fifth part hydrated lime and sufficient water to provide a plastic mixture. Mortar in concrete fill shall obtain a 28 day strength of 2000 psi. Reinforcement - All inlets shall be reinforced as shown on the Drawings or Standard Details. All reinforcing steel shall be ASTM A- 615, Grade 60 with deformed bars. The diameter of bend measured on the inside of the bar shall be 6 bar diameters. All reinforcing steel shall be 2" clear minimum from formed surfaces and 3" clear against earth unless otherwise noted. Splicing of reinforcing steel shall be permitted only where detailed on the Drawings. Castings (No. 16 Inlets) - Frame shall be No. 16 Grate Detail-S-716). AII castings shall conform to ASTM A-48 (Class 35b) with a minimum tensile strength of 35 ksi. All castings shall be heavy duty and capable of withstanding AASHTO H-20 loadings. Horizontal bearing surfaces ofall frames and grates shall be machined to eliminate any rocking action or non-uniform bearing. Steps - Manhole steps shall be required for all new inlets greater than 4' in depth,, unless otherwise specified within the Contract Documents. Single Type 16 inlets are exempt from this requirement. Construction: All storm inlets shall be constructed of cast-in-place concrete, unless specifically approved for precast construction by the City. Bedding and Backfol - All catch basins/inlets shall be cast in place unless otherwise approved by the Project Manager. Subgrade shall be Class B Bedding compacted to 90% maximum dry density (AASHTO designation T-180). Backfill shall be hand tamped in 6" lifts, Backfill Method B. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -53 Inlet Depths - Desired depths for single inlets shall be 3.5 feet (flow line to floor), for double inlets depth shall be 4 feet and for triple inlets depth shall be 4.5 feet. Inlets are designed to allow for 6 foot depth maximum; for depths greater than 6 feet, shop drawings and design analysis shall be submitted for approval by the Construction Project Manager. Forming - Inlets shall be formed both inside and out; casting of sidewalls against earth walls or other structures is not permitted. No formwork shall remain inside structure when complete. 3.2.6.3.2 Manholes Precast manhole barrel sections shall meet the requirements of ASTM C478. Eccentric cones shall be used on all manholes greater than 6 feet in depth from bench to rim. Flat tops shall be used on all manholes less than 6 feet in depth. Manhole steps shall be copolymer polypropylene plastic over 1/2" diameter Grade 60 steel, PS2-PFS as manufactured by M.A. Industries, American Step Company or equal installed on nonstaggered, fifteen (15) inch vertical centers. 3.2.6.3.3 Backfill Requirements The following outlines backfill requirements around manholes, structures, inlets, utilities and appurtenances. Structures shall include but not be limited to: manholes, box culvert and special structures noted within the Contract Documents. All structures shall be constructed in accordance with the most recent addition of the Standard Detail drawings, and/or in conjunction with special details provided within the Contract Documents. Cast-in-place: Inlets (< 6' deep), Manhole Bases and Structure Bases May be backfilled and compacted around, once the concrete has achieved 80% of the required 28-day compressive strength indicated in the Contract Documents. For inlet depths larger than six (6) feet, from top of base slab to the top of wall at flow line of the lip, shop drawings and a design analysis must be submitted to the Project Manager for approval. These submittals shall address the backfilling constraints during and after inlet placement. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -54 Cast-in-place: Structure Walls Shall not be backfilled or compacted against until the deck (top) slab has been placed, the walls have attained 80% of the required 28-day compressive strength, and the deck (top) slab has attained 80% of its required 28-day compressive strength as indicated in the Contract Documents. Cast-in-place: Structure Decks or Top Slabs May only be backfilled and compacted over once the concrete has attained the required 28-day compressive strength indicated in the Contract Documents. Precast: Structures, Manhole Bases, Barrels, Cone Sections and Inlets All precast components may be backfilled and compacted against, if manufactured a minimum of 28-days prior to placement, or if concrete test results demonstrate that the required 28-day compressive strength indicated in the Contract Documents has been achieved. Precast barrels and cone sections may only be placed on cast-in- place manhole bases after 80% of the required 28 day compressive strength indicated in the Contract Documents has been attained. Alterations and special allowances to these criteria may be granted at the discretion of the Project Manager on a case by case basis. 3.2.6.3.4 Measurement and Payment Structural concrete: Bridges, box culverts, catch basins, cut off walls, diversion structures, head and wing walls, inlets, vaults Measurement: (Cubic Yard) (Each) - Bulk structural concrete will be measured by the cubic yard in accordance with the neat line dimensions called for in the Contract Documents. Deductions in the bulk measurement will be made for voids, wherein the volume of concrete displaced exceeds one (1) cubic foot. No deduction will be made for the volume of reinforcing steel contained therein. Minor structures such as catch basins, diversion structures, cut off walls, etc., may be measured as the actual number installed, when so specified in the Bid Schedule. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -55 3.2.7 Storm Sewer Payment: The accepted quantity of structural concrete and or structures cast in place will be paid at the contract unit price bid. No separate measurement or payment will be made for structural excavation, dewatering, foundation stabilization, forming, embedded frames, grates, access covers, reinforcing or structural steel, colored concrete, etc. but shall be included in the work. NOTE: Deck concrete within plan limits for curb, gutter, sidewalk and transitions shall be included in the contract unit price bid, when basins and inlets are to be paid for on the per each basis Precast concrete: Box culverts, catch basins, inlets, pre-stressed members, manholes, vaults, flared end sections Measurement: (Each) - Actual number of precast structures of the various sizes and shapes specified in the Contract Documents. Payment: Accepted quantities of precast structures will be paid for at the contract unit price bid. No separate measurement or payment will be made for excavation, dewatering, rock stabilization, shaped inverts or bases, eccentric cones, flat top covers, joint and outlet gasket or sealants, exterior drop pipe and fittings, concrete cast outs, steps, leveling rings, sump pit frame and grate; vent and sump piping; access frames and covers, backfill, etc., but shall be included in the work. NOTE: Concrete curb, gutter, sidewalk and transitions cast in place shall be included in the contract unit price bid for catch basin and inlet. Description: All storm sewer design and construction, including manholes, inlets and pipe trenches, shall be governed by the City of Englewood Storm Drainage Criteria Manual. Any specifications or requirements not listed in the Manual shall conform to the following or refer to CDOT standards or the manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.2.7.1 Materials All storm sewer piping installed by open trenching methods shall meet the requirements of ASTM C76 RCP Class III unless other materials are approved by the Engineer for the specific project. This section covers material requirements, inspection, marking, delivery, installation, field performance and acceptance of reinforced concrete pipe for storm drainage systems. This shall include circular, elliptical and arch pipe along with all associated special pipe sections. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -56 All precast reinforced concrete pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with the applicable ASTM designation or as specified in the Contract Documents. The wall thickness and reinforcing steel shall comply with the appropriate ASTM Specification and the designated class of pipe as indicated in the Contract Documents. For jacked pipe, the pipe manufacturer shall supply allowable jacking force calculations for each size of pipe supplied for the project. The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that the allowable jacking force is sufficient to install the product based on anticipated site conditions and the forces that the pipe may be subjected to during jacking operations. Pipe joints for all reinforced concrete pipes shall be formed using rubber gaskets that provide a watertight seal, in accordance with ASTM C443. The joints shall be of such design that they will withstand the forces caused by the compression of the gasket when joined. The joint design of concrete pipe shall be a bell and spigot or a tongue and groove style joint meeting the requirements of ASTM C443. The spigot or tongue shall be grooved to properly contain and seat the rubber gasket. The joint assemblies shall be accurately formed so that when each pipe section is forced together in the trench the assembled pipe shall form a continuous watertight conduit with a smooth and uniform interior surface, and shall provide for slight movement of any piece of the pipeline due to expansion, contraction, settlement or lateral displacement. The gasket shall be the sole element of the joint providing water tightness. The ends of the pipe shall be perpendicular (90° angle) to the longitudinal centerline of the pipe, except where bevel• end pipe is required. The ends shall be finished so that they are uniform and smooth. Gaskets may be either isoprene or neoprene conforming to ASTM C443. All gaskets shall be stored in a cool place, preferably at a temperature of less than 70 degrees Fahrenheit (F), and in no case shall the gaskets be stored in the open, or exposed to direct sunlight. No gaskets which show signs of deterioration, such as surface cracking or checking, shall be installed in a pipe joint. When the air temperature is 10 degrees F or lower, the gaskets shall be warmed to temperature of 60 degrees Fahrenheit for a period of 30 minutes before being placed on the pipe. The following shall be clearly marked on both the interior and exterior surface of the pipe: ASTM specification designation - Class and size - Date of manufacture 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -57 - Name or trademark of manufacturer 3.2.7.2 Installation Methods Reinforced concrete pipe shall be installed continuously, from downstream to upstream, except when otherwise approved by the Project Manager, in writing. The Contractor is responsible for matching line and grade as shown within the Construction Plans. Bedding material shall be placed in accordance with these specifications to provide uniform and continuous support. Pipe shall be placed with the grove or bell end upstream. Each conduit section shall be set into position and checked for line and grade prior to continuing placement. The manufacturers' recommendations shall be closely followed during installation. The Contractor shall ensure that all reinforced concrete pipe is kept clean and free from gravel, dirt and debris during and after installation. Precautions shall be taken by the Contractor to eliminate soil and debris from being washed into the sewer prior to completion of the entire system and its appurtenances. The Contractor shall incur all costs associated with street failures, cave-ins, system washouts and settlements, and conduit cleaning as a result of carelessness during this timeframe. 3.2.7.3 Measurement and Payment Measurement: (Lineal Feet) - Pipe of the various types, classes and sizes called for in the Bid Schedule will be measured by the lineal foot along the in place pipe centerline, between points of connection 0with existing facilities or extremities specified on the plans. NOTE: Deduction in measured quantities will be made for piping in vaults and pipe at manholes and structures where the concrete inverts are cast in place and shaped. No deduction in measured length will be made for in line fittings and valves. Payment: - Accepted quantities of pipe will be paid for at the contract unit price bid. No separate measurement or payment will be made for excavation, dewatering, trench stabilization material, bedding material, in line fittings and connectors, tape wrapping, gasket and joint materials, all thread ties, joint restraints, concrete anchor blocks, clay trench and inversion plugs, backfill, disposal of surplus materials, etc., but shall be included in the work. 3.2.8 Traffic control devices 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -58 3.2.8.1 Signing and Striping 3.2.8.1.1 General Requirements Because the City will maintain the traffic control devices on public rights- of-way, all traffic control devices shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with The City of Englewood Standards. The City of Englewood Signage and Striping Notes shall be included in all sets of construction plans. The "Engineer" refers to the City of Englewood Engineer and/or authorized agent or representative. Permanent signage and striping shall be completely in place before any new roadway is opened to the public. These standards are to be used in conjunction with other applicable City of Englewood Standards. Signage installed onto traffic signal equipment shall conform to the Colorado Department of Transportation standards and specifications and the City of Englewood Signal Specifications. All traffic control devices shall conform to the most recent version of the federal Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD), and the "Colorado Supplemental MUTCD”. Further specifications and illustrations are located in the Colorado Department of Transportation (CDOT) "M and S Standards". A field inspection of location and installation of all signs & markings shall be performed by the City of Englewood. All discrepancies identified during the field inspection must be corrected before the two-year warranty period will begin. 3.2.8.1.2 Signage Requirements A. Sign Material Sign Material shall be sheet aluminum, .08” thickness. Overhead Street Name Signs may be .10” Thick. Retroreflective sheeting on Stop signs (R1-1), Yield signs (R1-2), chevron signs (W1-8), Pedestrian (W11-2) and school zone signage shall meet ASTM D4956-13 Type XI. All other retroreflective sheeting on roadway signage shall meet a minimum of ASTM D4956-13 Type IV or better. B. Posts and Anchors Posts shall be Telspar, or equivalent, 1 ¾” square posts, pre-punched, 14 gauge, 10 feet in length. Posts with multiple signs may be 12 feet in length and may have extensions added to achieve proper mounting height of signs per MUTCD minimum guidelines. Anchors shall be Telspar, or equivalent, 2” square tube, pre-punched, 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -59 36” in length. Anchors shall be installed a minimum of 30” below the surface for soil applications. Bored concrete applications shall not protrude more than 3” above surface of concrete. Posts and anchors installed on concrete shall be installed with an approved breakaway device. C. Variations on Street Name Signs Street name signs are maintained by the City Traffic Department and Variances should not be allowed with the exception of Dedication style Memorial signs. D. Designer Responsibility Street name signs shall be provided by the City of Englewood. All signs shall conform to the MUTCD and FHWA Highway Signs and Markings Manual. 3.2.8.1.3 Pavement Markings A. Material The following materials are approved for striping: • Methyl-mythacralate (MMA) • Epoxy paint (Modified Epoxy Pavement Marking, see latest CDOT section 627 & 713) • Preformed thermoplastic • Inlay tape (Stamark or approved equivalent) • Waterborne traffic paint (prefer Ennis Flint #980601W, 980602YE or Swarco Colorado Paints #1160 Series) • Paint Bead – Colorado blend 40%(T-20 coated or equivalent) • Epoxy Bead – Colorado blend 40%(T-20 coated or equivalent) • MMA Bead – Swarco #3131 Blend (T-13’) or Potters Visiblend MMA AC 20’s B. Dimensions & Application 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -60 The following striping widths shall be used unless otherwise directed by the Engineer: • Edge Line 4” • Skip/Lane Line 4”, 10’ long, 30’ spacing • White Channelizing 8” • Bike Lane 6” • Double Yellow 4” (4” Gap) • Stop Bar 12” (4’ from crosswalk) • Diagonal Shoulder Marking 4” • Continental Crosswalk Bar* 2’x8’ on Multi Lane Mains, all others to be 12”x8’, (Centered in lane) layout and/or size to be determined by the City Engineer. Conventional Crosswalks* 8” width with minimum 6’ spacing between lines. Note: Dotted Lane Extension marking patterns shall be per CDOT specs The following thicknesses shall be applied unless otherwise directed by the Engineer: • Paint 15-19 mils • MMA 50-70 mils (RMV or 4:1) Spray application only • Preform Thermo Plastic 90 mils • Epoxy 16-18 mils per 90-100 Sq ft • Inlay Tape Per manufacturer specification • Beads • Paint 7-8 lbs. per Gal • MMA 11.5-12.5 per 100 Sq ft (Pressurized bead applicator) • Epoxy 18-20lbs. per 90-100 Sq ft C. Surface Preparation • Surface preparation shall include clean-up and disposal of removed materials 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -61 • New concrete pavement shall have all residues removed, such as mud, dirt, curing compound, etc. Removal shall be by water blasting, sand blasting or other method approved by the Engineer. • New asphalt pavements shall be dry and free of dirt and debris. • For all re-striping on existing concrete or asphalt pavement, the surface shall be clean, dry and free of debris. Cleaning shall be by water sweeping, water or air blasting, or other method approved by the Engineer. Surface grinding shall be performed where directed by the Engineer. • Surface temperatures shall be 50° F and rising for all pavement marking applications. • When the surface temperature does not reach 50° F (seasonal), the Contractor may, on approval of the Engineer, substitute designated pavement markings with temporary marking materials to be replaced with permanent materials when weather dictates. Temporary pavement markings shall be refurbished as determined by the Engineer. D. Installation All pavement markings shall be applied per the manufacturer's recommendations, unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. E. Pavement Marking Warranty The following warranty is required for pavement marking installations: Two year with normal traffic wear. Material shall not peel or lift in this time period. Approval of all work must be obtained from the City of Englewood Traffic Division prior to the start of this warranty period. 3.2.8.1.4 Legends • Use of Stop Bars • All stop bar applications must be pre-formed thermoplastic or MMA. • Any multi-way stop controlled approach may include a stop bar. • Any approach to a signalized intersection which does not have a crosswalk shall include a stop bar. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -62 • Stop lines may be staggered longitudinally on a lane-by-lane basis or as determined by City Traffic Engineering. • Word or Symbol Pavement Marking • See MUTCD Section 3B.20 for all word or symbol pavement marking placement or as determined by Traffic Engineering. • All word or symbol pavement markings shall be MMA or preformed thermoplastic • Crosswalks • Crosswalks shall be constructed of preformed thermoplastic or MMA unless approved by the City of Englewood. • Crosswalks shall line up with handicap ramps. Continental crosswalks shall be centered on lane lines so as to be straddled by vehicles. • Any Special Design of Crosswalk shall meet the City specs for conventional crosswalks, include 8” horizontal lines of conventional crosswalks, and have documented approval by the City of Englewood Engineer prior to installation 3.2.8.1.5 Bike Lanes • Bike Lane Widths: Bike Lanes shall be installed according to engineering plans and be no less than 60 inches wide measured from the inside edge of the designating white line or lines. Where appropriate lane width does not accommodate bike lane installation, the Engineer may approve a narrower bike lane. Bike lanes installed less than 60 inches wide without approval may be required to be removed and reinstalled at the contractor’s expense. • Designating Bike Lanes: Bike lanes shall be marked with appropriate pavement markings as described by Part 9 of the MUTCD with consideration of the NATCO Bicycle Facilities Design Guide. Bike Lanes may be marked with ground mounted signs in accordance with the MUTCD. Variations of standard signs or custom signs must be approved by the Engineer. • Bike Lanes at Driveways and Intersections: The long line white striping indicating bike lanes shall break at intersections. The striping shall align across all intersections to prevent bicyclists and motorists 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -63 from maneuvering unnecessarily within the intersection. Dashed or broken lines, 2 feet in length with 6 foot spacing may be used to direct the flow of traffic through an offset intersection. • Shared Lanes: Shared lanes may be indicated by Sharrow pavement markings in accordance with the MUTCD. 3.2.8.1.6 Standard Signage and Striping Notes • All traffic control devices shall conform to the most recent version of the federal manual on uniform traffic control devices (MUTCD), and the “Colorado supplemental MUTCD.” Further specifications and illustrations are located in the Colorado Department of Transportation (CDOT) “M and S standards.” • A field inspection of location and installation of all signs & markings shall be performed by the City of Englewood. All discrepancies identified during the field inspection must be corrected before the two-year warranty period will begin. • The contractor installing signs shall be responsible for locating and protecting all underground utilities. • Type III lighted barricades shall be set at ends of roadways, separating finished (and/or accepted) and unfinished construction areas and shall be maintained by the contractor/developer. A “road closed ahead” warning sign shall be installed appropriately in advance of the type III barricades. • Special care shall be taken in sign location to ensure an unobstructed view of each sign. • Where stop sign control is appropriate, 30” Stop Signs shall be used. • A 7-Foot minimum height shall be maintained from bottom of sign panel to the top grade of sidewalk (at top grade of pavement edge where no sidewalk exists). • Delineation of roadways without curb and gutter shall be as specified in the CDOT “M and S standards.” See (SS-7) for raised median signs and delineation. • Signage and striping has been determined by information available at the time of review. Prior to initiation of the any warranty period, the City of Englewood reserves the right to require modifications to existing, or installation of, additional signage and/or pavement marking if it is 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -64 determined that an unforeseen safety condition warrants such modification according to the MUTCD of the CDOT M and S standards. All signage and striping shall fall under the requirements of the two (2) year warranty period for new construction. Additionally, all pavement markings shall not lift or peel during the first year after installation. • Diamond grade material shall be used on all stop signs and overhead signs. All other roadside traffic control devices shall be high intensity prismatic retroreflective. • All public road street name signs shall have City of Englewood logo on left side of sign. • All removed signs shall be returned to City of Englewood. • Crosswalks: Shall be constructed of preformed thermoplastic or MMA unless approved by the City of Englewood. Shall line up with handicap ramps. Continental crosswalks shall be centered on lane lines so as to be straddled by vehicles. • All pavement marking material (including words and symbols) shall be as follows: Methyl-Mythacralate (MMA), epoxy paint, performed thermoplastic, inlay tape (stamark or approved equivalent), waterborn traffic paint (per CDOT specifications), glass beads or as specified by engineer, (sand or water blast curing compound prior to installation of markings). • Inspection and approval of striping and crosswalk layout to be done by City of Englewood prior to application of final striping. 3.2.8.1.7 Measurement and Payment Pay Item Pay Unit Striping SF Signs EA 3.2.8.2 Traffic signals 3.2.8.2.1 General Requirements Beginning June 1, 2019, City of Englewood will enforce the following requirements for all Traffic Signal Construction Projects and roadway construction projects requiring traffic signal modifications or installations. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -65 1. IMSA Level II Traffic Signal Bench Technician/Signal Technician certification (BB certification) for any work within the traffic signal cabinet. This includes corrective maintenance and signal turn-on. Signal CONTRACTOR shall produce copies of certificates at the pre-construction meeting. 2. IMSA Level II Traffic Signal Field Technician/Electrician (BE certification) or Traffic Signal Bench Technician/Signal Technician Certification (BB Certification) for any work external to the traffic signal cabinet. An IMSA Level II Traffic Signal Electrician (minimum BE certification) must be on the job-site at all times to supervise construction. Signal CONTRACTOR shall produce copies of certificates at the pre-construction meeting. 3. The United States Department of Labor – Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training can be substituted for the IMSA Level II Traffic Signal Electrician. Signal CONTRACTOR shall produce copies of certificates at the pre- construction meeting. A. Scope and Intent These specifications describe the installation of necessary material, equipment and work procedures to complete traffic signals and/or other electrical systems as shown on the drawings, in the special contract provisions, or herein, for projects in Englewood, Colorado. These specifications provide minimum functional requirements that must be satisfied for all such work. B. Roadway Work and Permit Unless stated otherwise, all roadway and sidewalk work shall be in accordance with the latest version of the City of Englewood Roadway Design and Construction Standards and Specification. For all work, the CONTRACTOR shall obtain a permit from the Englewood Department of Public Works and shall pay the required construction permit fees. C. Engineer Englewood Project Engineer or authorized city personnel (Engineer) shall be the responsible person overseeing all work on the City's behalf. D. Private Access and Traffic Control Plan • The Contractor will be required to maintain access to all private drives throughout the period of construction. The Contractor shall be required to erect, maintain, and remove all barricades, traffic control 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -66 signs and devices. Such barricades and traffic control signs and devices shall be in accordance with the latest version of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD) published by the U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration, and as directed by the ENGINEER. Construction signs not applicable during non-construction times shall be set so traffic cannot see the signs, as per section 630 of the latest edition of the Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. Should this not occur, section 8.30c of this document shall be enforced. • A Traffic Control plan prepared by a certified traffic control supervisor shall be submitted and approved prior to issuance of the permit by the Englewood Department of Public Works. The Traffic Control plan shall be submitted along with a set of construction drawings signed and approved by City of Englewood. The Contractor shall submit the plan at least 5 working days in advance of the intended start date. A Englewood approved copy shall be kept at the site and shall be exhibited upon request to any authorized representative of the City. Englewood reserves the right to require the Contractor to modify the traffic control in the field as necessary. Englewood also reserves the right to issue a stop work order. Right-of-way use and/or construction permit documentation can be found online at www.englewoodco.gov. Permit applications can be submitted in person or online at PWpermits@englewoodco.com. Contact Englewood Engineering Permits and Inspections (303) 762-2300 for all permit related questions. E. Testing • The City may, at its option and cost, retain the services of an independent testing lab to perform all testing consultation and to assist in the review of the work and equipment. • See section 3.2.8.2.9 section A “Vehicle Signal Head” for requirements regarding early delivery of controller and cabinet to the City for testing purposes. F. Equipment Salvage 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -67 • All traffic signal equipment that is removed shall remain the property of City. Such property is to be removed from the work site, tagged with date removed and location, and returned by the Contractor to the City at 2800 S. Platte River Dr., Englewood, CO 80107. When signal pole and mast arm assemblies are removed, all components shall be marked as a set with permanent markings. The equipment shall be returned in the same condition as prior to removal. Contact City Traffic Signal Supervisor to coordinate delivery (720) 525-1608. G. Existing Traffic Signals • When existing traffic signal installations are modified or completely rebuilt, the Contractor shall work around existing traffic signal equipment until the new or modified traffic signal system has been installed and put into operation. Signal heads and Pedestrian heads installed on mast arms or poles for new installation which are not ready for actual electrical operation shall be bagged with black cover with the wording out of service. The Contractor shall at all times maintain a minimum of two (2) three-section (red, yellow, and green) traffic signal heads and pedestrian heads (if required) for each roadway approach. Special consideration shall be made to avoid the left turn trap situation. H. Intersection Power • Unless otherwise directed in the plans, Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the power company to obtain power hook-up to the intersection and luminaires two weeks prior to signal flash. See section 14.70. I. Utilities • Utilities are shown on the plans to the extent that they can be, based upon records and surface field indications. All utility locations will require field verification in cooperation with the affected utility companies and public agencies. The Contractor shall be responsible for locating all valve boxes, manholes, etc., and ensuring that they are properly protected and that signal equipment locations are adjusted accordingly, with approval from the Engineer. The Contractor is also responsible for filling all holes made by vacuum potholing (in regards 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -68 to required utility locates) with appropriate material (concrete, asphalt or other fill) to restore back to previous condition. J. Project Schedule • The following schedule shall apply: Item Schedule Shop Drawing Submittals At the pre-construction meeting, which normally will be about 2-3 weeks prior to the Notice to Proceed. Ground Work (conduit, mast arm pole foundations, etc.) May start up to 30 calendar days after Notice to Proceed but no less than 30 calendar days prior to essential equipment delivery date. 100 Percent Completion Prior to signal flash. Overall Project 90 calendar days for mast arm project. 60 calendar days for span 3.2.8.2.2 Regulations and Codes A. Reference Documents • All equipment, material and construction methods shall conform to the standards of the Institute of Transportation Engineers (ITE), International Municipal Signal Association (IMSA), and Colorado Department of Transportation Standard specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (latest edition), unless noted otherwise. In addition to the requirements of these specifications, the plans, standard details, and the special contract provisions, all material and work shall conform to the requirements of the MUTCD, National Electrical Code (N.E.C.), National Electrical Safety Code (N.E.S.C.), the Rules for Overhead Electrical Line Construction of the Colorado Public Utilities Commission (Rules), the Standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) and local ordinances which may apply. • Wherever reference is made in these specifications or in the special contract provisions to the MUTCD, NEC, NESC, Rules, or the standards mentioned above, the reference shall be construed to mean the document that is in effect at the date of bidding. 3.2.8.2.3 Equipment List, Approvals and As-Built Drawings • Bid Requirements 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -69 • Shop drawings are not required for the bid, but the Contractor shall submit with its bid a list of equipment and materials which it proposes to furnish for those items listed in section 3.10b, including all equipment and materials as identified on the plans or in the specifications, by the manufacturer's name that is necessary or customary in the trade to identify such equipment and material. The list shall be complete as to name of manufacturer, unit name and model number. • The items to which section 3.10a applies are as follows but not limited to: traffic signal poles and mast arms, pedestrian push buttons, traffic signal controller and cabinet, UPS, vehicle detection, vehicle and pedestrian signal heads, pedestrian signs, pre-emption devices, mounting hardware for signal heads, street name signs, pull boxes, wire, communication equipment, fiber or radio (fiber optic cable shall include interconnect schematic diagram), PTZ cameras, travel time equipment, meter disconnect pedestal and any additional items indicated in the project special provisions or requested at the pre- construction meeting. Sign panel layouts for both illuminated and aluminum street name signs shall also be submitted for approval by the City. • Sampling and Substitutions • Inspection or sampling of any materials, other than those already approved, must be made by the Engineer prior to installation. Whenever particular material or equipment is identified by manufacturer name in the plans or specifications, the term "or approved equivalent" is implied. If the Contractor proposes a substitution, Contractor shall provide additional information with the bid to prove the substitution item is of equal or superior quality, and it shall be at the Engineer’s sole discretion whether to approve such substitution. If not approved, Contractor shall agree to supply the originally stated material or equipment at no additional cost. Otherwise, the Engineer may reject the bid as non-responsive. • The Contractor shall attach to the bid a statement that all material to be supplied is either in exact accordance with the specifications, or shall list in detail any and all substitutions and request the approval of 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -70 the Engineer for the substitutions. The Engineer may request further technical information to support the substitution. • During execution of the work, the supplying of equipment that is not in accordance with the specifications and on which the Contractor has not received the Engineer’s approval shall be cause for rejection. Correction of the non-specification items will be entirely at the Contractor’s expense. • As-Builts • Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall submit an "as- built" or corrected plan showing, in detail, all construction changes including, but not limited to, wiring, cable, poles, controller cabinet, vehicle detection, and location of all conduit. Red lined, signed, stamped plans may be submitted as “as- built” plans. 3.2.8.2.4 Excavation and Backfilling • General • Street cuts for conduit on existing pavements shall not be allowed unless approved by the City Roadway Inspector. Excavations for the installation of conduit, foundations, and other equipment shall be performed in such a manner as to cause the least possible damage to the streets, sidewalks, and other improvements/landscape and sprinklers. Trenches shall not be excavated wider than necessary for the proper installation of the electrical appliances and foundations, and shall be kept clean and as free of moisture as possible. Excavations shall be backfilled or poured with concrete within 24 hours of opening, unless otherwise approved in writing by the ENGINEER. The material from the excavation shall be removed as the trenching progresses. • Excavations, after backfilling, shall be kept well filled and maintained in a smooth and well-drained condition until permanent repairs are made. • Excavating and backfilling for foundations shall be incidental to the pay item for which a foundation is required. Excavating and backfilling for conduit trenches shall be paid for under the appropriate conduit trenching pay item. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -71 • At the preconstruction meeting, the Contractor will be provided contacts for landscape and sprinkler repair. The Contractor is responsible for contacting these entities when damage occurs and coordinating repairs. Any necessary repairs will not be paid for separately but shall be included in the cost of the project. Damages found subsequent to project completion, and related costs, will be the responsibility of the Contractor. • Maintenance of Traffic • At the end of each day's work and any other time construction operations are suspended, all construction equipment and other obstructions shall be removed from that portion of the roadway open for use by public traffic. Construction signs not applicable during non- construction times shall be set so traffic cannot see the signs, per section 630 of the latest version of the Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. Should this not occur, section 8.30c of this document shall be enforced. • Excavations in streets or highways shall be performed in such a manner that at least one (1) lane of traffic in each direction shall be open to public traffic at all times. All lane closures shall be approved by the Engineer prior to closure. • When excavations must remain open overnight, they shall be properly marked to warn motorists and/or pedestrians according to the MUTCD. Flashing barricades shall be provided, unless otherwise authorized in writing by the Engineer. 3.2.8.2.5 Removing, Replacing and Resetting Improvements A. General • The Contractor shall, at its sole expense, replace or reconstruct sidewalks, curbs, gutters, rigid or flexible pavement, and any other improvements removed, broken, or damaged by it with material and methods that conform to current City standards. • Whenever a part of a square or slab of existing concrete, sidewalk, or driveway is broken or damaged, the entire square or slab shall be removed and the concrete reconstructed. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -72 • Concrete pavement and sidewalk designated for removal shall be removed as marked by the Engineer or his or her designee. The concrete pavement or sidewalk shall be cut to the existing depth of concrete prior to removal. Any over-break, separation or other damage to the existing concrete outside of the designated removal limits shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense. Payment for removal of concrete pavement or sidewalk shall be based on square yards of surface area regardless of the concrete thickness. • Removal items shall be as indicated in the pay item list or items specifically identified on the plans, or in writing by the Engineer. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to assure that it has a full and complete understanding of included removal items prior to bidding. • Reset pay items shall be as indicated in the pay item list. These items are to be initially removed, then adjusted or modified as directed by the Engineer, and finally reinstalled to full operational capability. Modifications and adjustments shall be detailed on the plans or project special provisions and shall be incidental to the reset pay item. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to assure that it has a full and complete understanding of included reset items prior to bidding. • The "Reset Traffic Signal Equipment" pay item list shall consist of the items specifically identified in the plans or in the project special provisions. Reset traffic signal equipment typically shall include the traffic signal poles, arms, controllers, cabinets, signal and pedestrian heads, detectors, coordination and interconnect equipment and all other related equipment and materials necessary to remove the items from their existing location and reset them at the new location. This shall include all mounting hardware, bases, other electrical equipment and service, including temporary power, and all other materials and work necessary to complete the reset item in service at the new location. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to assure that it has a full and complete understanding of included reset traffic signal equipment items prior to bidding. • Equipment and materials shall be cleaned and touched-up prior to reset. This work shall be included in the cost of “Reset Traffic Signal Equipment”. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -73 3.2.8.2.6 Underground Facilities • Drilled Caissons and Foundations • All drilled caissons and foundations shall be Portland cement concrete conforming to the applicable requirements of CDOT construction standards, except as herein provided. • The bottom of concrete drilled caissons and foundations shall rest on firm ground. Cast-in-place foundations shall be poured monolithically where practicable. The exposed portions shall be formed to present a neat appearance. Concrete shall be Class BZ per the latest edition of the Colorado Department of Transportation’s Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. • All poles shall be grounded as indicated in the standard details, and shall be incidental to the installation pay item. • For drilled caissons requiring casing, casings shall be removed in a manner such that voids between the excavation and the casing will be completely filled with fresh concrete. • Anchor bolts shall conform to the manufacturer's specifications and each individual bolt shall have two (2) flat washers and two (2) nuts. Shims or other similar devices for plumbing or raking will not be permitted. Stirrups shall be installed on all caissons. See Englewood Standard Signal Details for additional requirements. • All caissons will be measured and paid for separately • Forms shall be true to line and grade. Tops of caissons and foundations, except as noted on plans, shall be finished to curb or sidewalk grade or as ordered by the Engineer. Forms shall be rigid and securely braced in place and inspected prior to the pouring of concrete. Conduit ends and anchor bolts shall be placed in proper position and in a template until the concrete sets. • Both forms and ground that will be in contact with the concrete shall be thoroughly moistened before placing concrete. Forms shall not be removed until the concrete has thoroughly set. • Whenever excavation for a foundation requires removal of excess ground materials, the excavation shall be backfilled to within 12" of 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -74 ground level with concrete as specified by the Engineer, and then backfilled to ground level with compacted native material. • Any abandoned caisson or foundation shall be fully or partially removed and disposed of by the Contractor per the direction of the Engineer. Any conduit runs associated with an abandoned caisson or foundation shall be extended or abandoned as called for on the plans. • The Contractor is responsible for filling all holes made by vacuum potholing, in regards to locating utilities for caisson placement, with appropriate material or replacing curb, sidewalk or roadway panels or stones as specified in the City’s Roadway Design and Construction Standards to restore back to previous condition. • Conduit • All intersections undergoing initial development or construction that are anticipated to require immediate or short-term future signalization shall include signal conduit at the time of initial road construction, in conformance with this section. Those intersections not completely built out or anticipated to be signalized within a year’s timeframe, shall have construction funds escrowed for construction costs at a later date. Roadway developers should consult with the Engineer to identify intersections to which this requirement applies. • Pull boxes made of fiberglass reinforced polymer concrete (See section 6.30b) shall be used at termination points, as shown in the standard details. • All cables and conductors not shown on the plans as aerial cable shall be installed in conduit unless installed in poles, pedestals, or mast arms. All metal conduit referred to in the specifications and shown on the plans shall be the rigid pipe type of ductile steel that is adequately galvanized. All PVC conduit shall be Schedule 80 or heavier. Poly pipe commonly used for boring shall be Schedule 80 or heavier. All transitions from poly pipe to PVC shall be by means of Etco “E- LOC” couplings or approved equivalent. • New conduit runs shown on the plans are for bidding purposes only and may be changed at the direction of the Engineer. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -75 • All conduit installed, including poly pipe, shall be at full depth (minimum 30 inches below finish grade) for the entire conduit run. 90- degree sweeps shall not be cut to achieve proper entrance to pull box. Conduit runs shall have no more than a 180-degree bend. • Conduit shall always enter a pedestal base, pull box, or any other type of structure from the direction of the run only. Conduit connections at junction boxes shall be tightly secured. • Conduit under railroad tracks shall be at the minimum depth below the bottom of tie required by the particular railroad company • The following conduit schedule is in effect unless otherwise specified in the plans: Run Type Quantity Size Use Street Crossings 2 1 1 3” 2” 2” High voltage load wiring Low voltage detection Luminaire load Signal Pole Pedestal Pole 2 1 1 1 3” 2” 3” 2” High voltage Low voltage High voltage Low voltage Controller Cabinet 2 2 1 1 3” 2” 2” 2” High voltage load wiring Low voltage detection - size per Code Service power Interconnect Interconnect 1 2” Interconnect run only Service Points Signal 1 2” Utility company service run for traffic signal • Existing underground conduit to be incorporated into a new system shall be cleaned with a mandrel or blown out with compressed air. • All conduit in pull boxes shall extend a minimum of 3” above crushed rock. • All conduit shall terminate in pull boxes such that when cable is pulled and coiled within the pull box, there is a minimum clearance of 3” between the pull box lid and the conduit and cable. Cable and conduit shall not be crushed or damaged. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -76 • Conduit terminating in a standard power pedestal, signal pole or pedestal pole base shall extend a minimum of three (3”) inches above foundation vertically. • All underground interconnect conduit runs shall have a single #14 AWG (minimum) fully annealed, solid conductor tracer wire with an orange sheath/jacket, installed for locating purposes. • Field cuts of existing or new conduit shall be made square and true, and the ends shall butt together for the full circumference thereof. Slip joints or running threads will not be permitted for coupling metal conduit. When a standard coupling cannot be used, an approved threaded union coupling shall be used. All couplings shall be screwed tight until the ends of the metal conduits are brought together. The ends of all metal conduit, existing or new, shall be well reamed to remove burrs and rough edges. • Where a "stub out" is called for on the plans, a minimum 18” radius sweeping elbow shall be installed in the direction indicated and sealed with a metallic cap to facilitate future locating. The locations of ends of all conduits in structures or terminating at curbs shall be marked by a "Y" at least three inches (3") high cut into the face of the curb, gutter, or wall directly above the conduit. • Where factory bends are not used, conduit shall be bent without crimping or flattening, using the longest radius practicable. Conduit bends feeding pull boxes and foundations shall be as shown on the standard details, typically 18". • All conduit runs that exceed ten feet (10') in length shall have at a minimum a continuous ½” 1250 pound pull strength, flat woven polyester tape (Muletape, BullLine or equivalent) pulled into the conduit along with the specified electrical cables. The line shall be firmly secured at each end of the conduit run with a minimum slack of four feet (4’). The purpose of this rope is to be able to pull future electrical cable through the existing conduit runs and the rope shall not be tangled or twisted around cables. • Any spare or unused conduits installed for future use shall be sealed with a metallic cap and a single #14 AWG (minimum) fully annealed, solid conductor tracer wire installed for locating purposes. Conduit 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -77 shall also have at a minimum a continuous ½” 1250 pound pull strength, flat woven polyester tape (Muletape, BullLine or equivalent) pulled into the conduit along with the specified electrical cables. The line shall be firmly secured at each end of the conduit run with a minimum slack of four feet (4’). • Split duct may be allowed on a case by case basis approved by the ENGINEER. • Pull Boxes • A pull box shall be installed at all locations as shown on the plans and at such additional points as ordered by the Engineer. Englewood IF2 pull boxes shall be installed at intervals of every 500 feet or as specified in the plans for all fiber interconnect conduit runs. Pull boxes shall be fiberglass reinforced polymer pre-cast concrete with a minimum Tier 15 rating (See Standard Details). The Contractor shall install City provided delineators at all pull box locations. The delineators shall be anchored into the ground with minimum ¼” diameter bolt, minimum 2 inches in length so they cannot be easily pulled out of the ground. • At new roadway construction sites where conduit for future traffic signals is installed, pull boxes shall be installed at conduit termination points and single #14 AWG (minimum) fully annealed, solid conductor tracer wire installed through the entire conduit run to facilitate future locating. • At sites where operational traffic signals are being installed, permanent fiberglass reinforced polymer concrete precast pull boxes shall be installed (See standard details). • Pull boxes shall be installed so that the covers are level, as well as level with curb or sidewalk grade or level with the surrounding ground when no grade is established. The entire excavation required to install 90 degree sweeps into a future pull box shall be backfilled from the full depth of the conduit run to the bottom of the pull box with crushed rock. The depth of crushed rock from the bottom of the excavation to the bottom of the pull box shall be a minimum of 18 inches. • The interior of the pull box shall be backfilled with crushed rock from the base of the pull box to a minimum depth of 3” below the top of 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -78 conduit runs. The area of the excavation surrounding the pull box may be backfilled with excavated soil. • When a new conduit run enters an existing pull box, the Contractor shall temporarily remove the pull box, or tunnel under the side at no less than eighteen inches (18") below the pull box bottom and enter from the direction of the run. All backfill shall be gravel. No new conduit will be allowed to enter a new or existing pull box in any other manner than that shown on the standard details. • Loop and Micro-Loop Detectors • Each individual loop or micro loop is to be terminated and spliced within a side-of-road pull box as specified on the standard details. Each loop shall consist of one continuous wire, without splicing, to this termination point, and each micro loop detector shall include two continuous wires, without splicing, to this termination point. Each loop or micro loop shall have its own dedicated lead in pair (of wires) to the cabinet from the side of road pull box. Detector lead-in wire shall be continuous from the controller to the side-of-road pull box. • All detectors shall have a color-coded tag attached to the lead-in to indicate the relative location and the direction served by the detector. See section 3.2.8.2.7 (below). • Loop sealant is to be used in all saw cuts whether or not the roadway is to be overlaid. See standard details. 3.2.8.2.7 Conductor and Cable • General • Wiring shall conform to appropriate articles of the N.E.C. Wiring within cabinets, junction boxes, etc., shall be landed and labeled as shown in the specifications and details as well as neatly arranged. • Powdered soapstone, talc, or other approved lubricant shall be used in placing conductors in conduit. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, wiring shall not occupy more than 40% of the inside area of all conduit. If more than 40% of the inside area is occupied, the Contractor shall provide additional conduit to satisfy this requirement. • ½” 1250 pound pull strength, flat woven polyester tape (Muletape, BullLine or equivalent) shall be installed in all new conduit and in all 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -79 existing conduit where a cable is added or an existing cable is replaced. A minimum of four feet (4’) of slack shall be left in each conduit at each termination. • At least five feet (5’) of slack shall be left for each conductor at each span wire support pole. • Except per section 6.40a, splices will not be allowed in pull boxes. Splices shall be kept to a minimum and will only be allowed in hand holes at pole bases. A minimum of twenty-four inches (24") of slack shall be left on each splice wire. In no case shall any shellac compounds be used. • Signal load splices shall utilize a copper crimp sleeve connector that is compressed from four directions, for example, as manufactured by the Buchanan Company. All hand hole splices shall be compressed by a C-24 4-way press-sure- tool, for example, such as produced by the Buchanan Company. The crimped sleeve shall then be protected within a flexible rubber insulating cover, for example, an Ideal Wrap Cap. All splices or splice bundles shall face upward in the hand hole compartment. • Detector loop lead-in splices in pull boxes, see section 6.40a, shall be fully waterproofed using a splice kit or epoxy wire nuts (Buchanon BTS2 or BTS4 or approved equivalent). A minimum of twelve inches (12") of slack shall be left on the detector loop. • When conductors and cables are pulled into the conduit, all ends of conductors and cables shall be taped to exclude moisture and shall be so kept until the splices are made or terminal appliances attached. Ends of spare conductors shall be taped and marked. • All high voltage home run signal wiring shall use IMSA spec 19-1, 25 conductor cable, continuous from the cabinet to the base of each pole/hand hole. Conductor cable shall be installed where required in the plans. Overhead cable shall be secured to messenger cable with cable rings or stainless-steel wire wrap only. • All signal cables terminating at the cabinet shall contain a small permanent tag identifying phase and direction. All signal cables shall be phase taped in the cabinet and at each hand hole using the codes 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -80 given in the “Conductor Schedule” below. Loop detector lead-ins shall be tagged in the splice pull box behind curb. • Conductor Schedule Key-Phase: Color of Signal Load Conductor, "Code" (on tag at each end of conductor) (NOTE: x = phase number): 1. Northbound Left Turn: Red/White, "x-NBLT" 2. Northbound: Red, "x-NB" 3. Southbound Left Turn: Green/White, "x-SBLT" 4. Southbound: Green, "x-SB" 5. Eastbound Left Turn: Orange/White, "x-EBLT" 6. Eastbound: Orange, "x-EB" 7. Westbound Left Turn: Blue/White, "x-WBLT" 8. Westbound: Blue, "x-WB" 9. Pedestrian: Yellow, "x-PED" 10. Supplemental: Brown, Right turn overlap 11. Supplemental: Purple, spare This is a typical conductor identification schedule and shall be used for the wiring of all signal installations. An individual conductor wire schedule is in the standard signal details. Deviations from these standards will be noted on the plans at each intersection where different phasing and/or special equipment is required. It should be noted that a band of white is used to indicate a left turn, a band of brown for a right turn and a band of yellow is used for a pedestrian movement. • Each pedestrian push button shall have a dedicated wire pair lead-in to the controller cabinet. • Separate luminaire wire shall be 12/2 conductor, plus ground and UL listed. • Signal heads mounted on mast arms or poles shall be wired individually with IMSA spec 19-1, 7-conductor cable from the head to the hand hole at the bottom of the pole. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -81 • Span wire and tether cable shall be affixed to the pole using short bail strand vices. If required by the ENGINEER, insulators shall be provided, in which case long bail strand vices shall be used. • Bonding and Grounding • Metal poles, pedestals and cabinets shall be made mechanically and electrically secure to form a system of isolated grounded components. Each pole and pedestal shall have a separate ground rod, located in an adjacent pull box and connected to the system component. The controller cabinet shall have a ground rod located in its foundation. Separate ground rod locations shall not be directly connected to one another with ground wire, in order to minimize transient distribution among the components. • Bonding and grounding jumpers shall be copper wire, No. 8 AWG, for all systems. Loop lead-in drain wire is to be grounded in the control cabinet only. The other end of the sheath is to be taped and left ungrounded. • Bonding of poles and pedestals shall be by means of connecting to the ground rod, a bonding strap attached to an anchor bolt or a 3/16” diameter or larger brass or bronze bolt installed in the lower portion of the shaft. • At each grounded pull box, the ground electrode shall be a one-piece copper ground rod driven into the ground so that the top is at least two to four inches (2” to 4") below the bottom of the pull box lid. The ground rod connector shall be placed so that the bare copper wire, No. 8, can be pulled into a pole, pedestal, or attached to the control cabinet ground bus. 3.2.8.2.8 Field Testing and Maintenance • Field Testing • Prior to completion of the work, the Contractor shall run the following tests on all traffic signals in the presence of the Engineer or the City signal maintenance contractor. • Each circuit shall be tested for continuity and for grounds. • A functional test shall be made in which it is demonstrated that each and every part of the system functions as specified or intended herein. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -82 The functional test for each traffic signal system shall consist of not less than twenty (20) days of continuous, satisfactory operation commencing with full operation of all electrical facilities. • For all fiber optic cable testing requirements, see section 3.2.8.2.1.10. • Maintenance During Construction • The Contractor shall have full maintenance responsibility of the traffic signal from the time of the Notice to Proceed to substantial completion. Continuous maintenance and emergency service shall be provided by the Contractor 24 hours each day during the time period defined above. The Contractor shall provide and maintain a 24-hour continuous telephone answering service with one number with a response time of 2 hours or less. Should this not occur, section 3.2.8.2.2.8 Section C of this document shall be invoked. • If the Contractor must close lanes or otherwise shift traffic for construction purposes, the Contractor shall have full responsibility of bagging existing or new signal indications and/or traffic control signs as directed by the Engineer for the impacted approach for the duration of each phase of work impacting that approach. Should this not occur, section 3.2.8.2.2.8 Section C of this document shall be invoked • Emergency and Non-Emergency Repairs • During the two-year (2) warranty period, all hazardous conditions or all malfunctions of a controller and its accessory equipment following turn on shall be considered an Emergency unless otherwise identified by the Engineer. Site conditions, equipment malfunctions and/or damage, which in the opinion of the Engineer constitute a serious hazard or inconvenience to the public, shall be considered an Emergency. Such malfunctions or damage may include, but not necessarily be limited to, situations where: 1. All indications are out including bulbs and lenses, for any one traffic movement; 2. Signal heads give conflicting indications to any intersection approach or approaches; 3. Any signal head or sign becomes loose and or twisted; 4. Any accessory equipment malfunction. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -83 Contractor shall dispatch personnel to undertake each such repair no later than one hour after the City notifies Contractor of the Emergency. Personnel responding shall arrive within one hour after notification during regular City working hours and within two hours during non-working hours after notification. • In instances of repairs that are of a non-emergency nature and determined to be the Contractor’s responsibility by the Engineer, such repairs shall be undertaken at the site within one working day after the Engineer notifies the Contractor of the needed repair. • Should the Contractor fail to perform any maintenance responsibilities within the prescribed time periods, the Engineer shall employ the services of the City's traffic signal maintenance contractor to perform said maintenance work. The Contractor shall reimburse the City for labor and equipment charges plus ten percent (10%) for administration associated with the utilization of the City's traffic signal maintenance. Labor, materials and ten percent (10%) will be subtracted from the total contract amount. 3.2.8.2.9 Traffic Signal Material Specification • Vehicle Signal Head • All vehicle signal heads shall be McCain or approved equivalent, shall be the modular section type and shall be adjustable with respect to positioning and lens replacement. Heads shall be polycarbonate and black in color and shall meet the requirements of the latest version of the ITE standard, "Vehicle Traffic Control Signal Heads". Unless otherwise indicated, traffic signal faces shall be LED. Refer to section 3.2.8.2.9 Section F for LED requirements. • Visors shall be the detachable tunnel type and black in color. • All mast arm mounted vehicle signal heads shall be equipped with louvered aluminum backplates, black in color, with 2-inch diamond grade fluorescent yellow retro-reflective border. • Doors on the signal heads for the installation of lamps and lens replacement or other maintenance shall not require use of any tool whatsoever to open. Doors and lenses shall be equipped with neoprene weatherproof gaskets to insure against infiltration of 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -84 moisture, road film, and dust. Each signal indication shall have leads from all signal sections connected to a terminal board stamped with identifiable terminals. There shall be a terminal for color indication plus a common terminal where one lead from each LED indication shall terminate. The terminal board shall be mounted in the middle section and be fully insulated. Gaskets shall be supplied for top and bottom openings. • Traffic signal heads shall be attached using standard ASTRO-BRAC Assembly or approved equivalent. Side of pole signal heads shall be installed with banding blocks and 90-degree elbows with nipple length determined by the size of the head so as not to interfere with closing doors. • Pedestrian Signal Head • Pedestrian signal heads shall be sixteen-inch (16"), "clam shell" type, McCain or approved equivalent, and shall be adjustable with respect to positioning. Heads shall be polycarbonate, black in color, and shall meet the requirements of the latest version of the ITE standard, "Pedestrian Traffic Control Signal Indications". "Countdown” pedestrian indications shall be the symbol type with a minimum height of 11 inches. Countdown pedestrian indications shall be LED indications. Doors and lenses shall be installed with weatherproof gaskets to insure against infiltration of moisture, road film and dust. Visors shall be egg crate type. • Countdown Pedestrian Signal Head • Two message overlay combining Portland Orange LED for the “Hand” and White LED for “Walking Man”. LED should be incandescent style. • Double digit display for countdown made of Red LED’s. LED should be incandescent style. • Timing is derived directly from the controller and no timing shall be programmed, or otherwise initiated. • Countdown numerals shall be illuminated continuously during countdown and not alternating. • Pedestrian signal head shall blank out countdown portion if the countdown is different than the controller. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -85 • Hand/Man indications shall be LED incandescent style. • Blank-Out Regulatory/Warning Sign • General Description - LED Blank-Out Signs are designed to display single or multiple messages. The messages shall be clear and legible, under any lighting conditions. When not energized the sign shall be completely dark without any ghost images. LED blank-out signs shall be compliant with applicable MUTCD/ITE specifications on LED signals. - Illumination of the messages shall be provided by an assembly of LED’s. LED’s shall be wired to incorporate fault tolerance or bypass to isolate LED failures - failure of one LED string shall not cause the failure of any other LED strings. - When energized, the messages shall provide a minimum 30 degree viewing angle centered about the optical axis. • Housing - LED Blank-Out Sign housing shall be an aluminum alloy that is moisture proof and mechanical vibration protected. - Housing shall have Neoprene gaskets installed between sign panels and fixture housing to prevent entry of water. Screened weep holes shall be provided on housing bottom for drainage. - Housing shall be mounted with Astrotype mounting brackets. - Sign fixture and panels shall withstand 90 MPH wind loading, with structural requirements meeting AASHTO “Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires, and Traffic Signals,” latest edition. • Illuminated Street Name Sign (LED) All signs must be submitted to and reviewed by the City of Englewood Department of Public works Engineering. Allowances: Internally illuminated street name signs may be allowed at the discretion of the Engineer. Internally illuminated street name signs will then be maintained 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -86 by the agency paying for the installation of the traffic signal and shall bear the appropriate agency’s logo to determine maintenance responsibilities. Such signs shall be in conformance with standard specifications listed and the standard details. Sign panel layouts shall be submitted to Englewood Traffic Services for approval prior to manufacture. When indicated on the plans, illuminated street name signs (LED) shall be used, conforming to the following requirements: • Mechanical Specifications. Illuminated street name sign housings shall be constructed of 5052 aluminum alloy with a minimum 1/8” thickness. All hardware parts shall be stainless steel. The outer dimensions of the sign assembly (excluding the mounting bosses) shall be standard widths of 15 to 30 inches (in 3 inch increments), and standard lengths of four to ten feet (4’-10’) in one foot (1’) increments, unless otherwise approved. The maximum thickness of the sign shall be 3.95 inches for single sided signs, and 5.4 inches for double-sided signs. The overall weight, excluding mounting hardware, shall not exceed 6 pounds per square foot for single sided signs, and 8 pounds per square foot for double-sided signs. Signs shall be mounted either free swinging or rigid on approved Pelco or equivalent mounts. No tools shall be required to open the sign. Finish shall be polyester powder coated to required color specification. • Sign Panel and Sheeting. The sign panel shall be Polycarbonate, white with a 1/8” minimum thickness. Sign sheeting shall be 3M 4000DG3 series reflective sheeting or equivalent. The sign colors shall not fade when exposed to an accelerated test of ultraviolet light equivalent to five years of outdoor exposure. The Electrocut film shall be 3M 1170 Green. The font type is FHWA Hwy. Series “D” unless otherwise specified. The street name shall be 10 inch initial upper case letters with a combination of lower case letters and the designator shall be 8 inch initial upper case with a combination of lower case letters. • LED Light Engine and Light Intensity. LED drive current shall be regulated using a pulse width modulated 24 volt DC drive and limited to approximately 300 mA through the LED chain at normal room temperature. A stable light intensity under varying voltage shall be provided having a color temperature of 6,500oK. Sign elements to be 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -87 illuminated shall include the sign legend and background, per MUTCD section 2A.08. The entire surface of the sign panel shall be evenly illuminated. • Light Source. The light source for the sign shall be LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) that are mounted along the top and/or bottom edges of the sign. The LEDs shall evenly illuminate a light panel that is the same dimensions as the sign face. The LEDs shall have a minimum projected life of 60,000 hours and provide a color temperature of 6,500oK. LEDs shall be wired to incorporate fault tolerance or bypass to isolate LED failures of a particular LED allowing remaining LEDs to operate normally. Thermal monitoring shall be provided to protect LED chains. Light source shall be readily accessible through hinged doors or sliding panels. • Electrical. The power supply shall be housed inside the sign frame assembly. Power supply shall be UL Class 2 limited output voltage and current plus isolation for safe operation, and UL Outdoor damp location rated. Power supply shall be IP66 Outdoor Rated. • Energy Requirements. The overall power required shall not exceed 3 watts per square foot for single sided signs, and 4 watts per square foot for double sided signs. • Photoelectric. Cell Provision for photoelectric control shall be available. The photoelectric cell shall have a power unit that plugs into a twist lock receptacle mounted on top of the housing. • Environmental Specifications. The sign shall be designed and constructed to withstand 150 mph wind loads in conformance with the requirements of the most recent edition of the AASHTO publication, “Standard Specifications for Structural Supports of Highway Signs, Luminaires, and Traffic Signals”. The sign and power supply should be able to withstand and operate at temperature extremes of –40 degrees Celsius to +60 degrees Celsius. UL approved neoprene gaskets shall be installed between the sign panel and fixture housing to prevent water or other debris from entering. Screened weep holes shall be provided on housing bottom for drainage. • Quality Assurance Manufacturer must be ISO 9001 certified. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -88 • Product Guarantee Product must be guaranteed for a minimum of 7 years. • The overall weight of the complete sign assembly including mounting hardware shall not exceed 70 lb. for a 6 foot sign and 95 lb. for an 8 foot sign. • Traffic Signal Faces (LED) All traffic signal faces (vehicular and pedestrian) shall be LED type, unless otherwise specified by City of Englewood. The LED traffic signal faces shall conform to the following requirements: • The LED optical units shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. • LED optical units shall meet or exceed the latest ITE Vehicular Traffic Control and Pedestrian Signal indication specifications. In addition to this, LED optical units shall conform to the following requirements: • Wattage: - Max. 35 watts, +/-5 watts for 12 inch red, yellow, or green ball - Max. 15 watts, +/-5 watts for 12 inch red, yellow or green arrow - Max. 15 watts, +/-5 watts for PED hand and man symbol - Maximum total harmonic current distortion (THD) shall be < 20%. - Power factor shall be > 90%. - Load balance requirement: load in one phase shall not exceed the load in any other phase by 15%. • Voltage - Operating shall be between 85 and 130 VAC. Electronic circuitry shall assure proper operation of the load switch and monitor in the control cabinet. • Minimum Number of LEDs Per Optical Unit - The minimum number of LEDs per optical unit shall be as specified by the manufacturer to meet ITE luminance specifications for signal installation. • Manufacturer's Warranty - Repair or replacement guarantee of five (5) years covering all but accidental damage. • Electrical Cable 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -89 • Signal cable shall be No. 14 AWG multi-conductor, stranded, copper wire manufactured to meet IMSA Specification 19-1. Each conductor in the cable shall be individually insulated and rated at 600 volts. • Power service conductors shall be THWN soft drawn copper, installed per the NEC and shall be black and white in color. • Ground wire shall be single conductor, No. 8 AWG, soft-drawn bare copper wire. • Luminaire wire shall be 12-2 plus ground and UL listed. • Pedestrian push-button and detector loop lead-in cable shall be shielded single or multiple twisted pairs in jacketed cable. Conductors shall be No. 14 AWG stranded copper continuous runs – no splicing to the cabinet. The pairs shall be twisted at least six turns per foot. The cable jacket shall consist of black high density polyethylene. The jacket shall not be degraded by prolonged exposure to typical pavement runoff components. A stranded tinned copper drain wire shall be provided. The cable shall be suitable for operation at temperatures of -70oF to +170oF. • Loop detector wire shall meet IMSA specification 51.5. Loop detector wire shall be encased in 1/4" OD PVC or polyethylene tubing. • Optical detector lead-in cable for the emergency vehicle pre-emption optical detectors shall be GTT Model M138 or approved equivalent. • Where specified on the plans, overhead interconnect wire shall be a 1/4" strand galvanized steel messenger cable integrated into the jacket to form a Figure 8 cross-section and shall meet REA Specification PE-38. • Radio Communications Equipment • Where specified in the plans, radio communication shall be included on the project. The radio communication system shall be compatible with the existing spread spectrum radio system, and meet the requirements set forth in 9.80b, c and d. • Data Radio Requirements – The spread spectrum radio transceiver using dual band 2.4/5.8 Mhz Frequency Hopping spread Spectrum Transceiver Encom 5800 series or approved equivalent. All 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -90 associated cables and surge suppression equipment required to connect the radio shall be provided at no extra cost. • Master Antenna – The Master antenna shall be as specified on the plans and the mounting arrangement shall be with the appropriate degree tilt to assure communications to all local transceivers. All associated cables and surge suppression equipment required to connect the antenna shall be provided at no extra cost. • Supplier On-Site Service – The supplier shall have a qualified, factory- trained, engineer or technician on site when requested during the installation of radio equipment. • Emergency Vehicle Detector • Optical detectors for emergency vehicle pre-emption shall be the GTT Model 711 Optical Detector or latest model, as needed. Placement of the detectors shall be determined by the Engineer. • Timer modules for emergency vehicle pre-emption shall be the GTT Discriminator, Model 762, which handles two channels of detection. Modules shall be capable of locking out unauthorized users by means of emitter coding. • Optical emitter for emergency vehicle pre-emption shall be the GTT Model latest model. The emitter shall be programmable for priority and identification purposes via internal programming. • The Contractor shall notify the Engineer when optical detectors are operational for testing prior to final acceptance. • Video Detection • Where specified on the plans, video detection shall be installed. The following describes the minimum requirements for providing a complete Video Detection System. Initially, the system shall be capable of providing presence vehicle detection at selected intersections. The video system shall be expandable without removing or replacing existing units. • The manufacturer shall be on-site during installation. The factory representative shall install, make fully operational, and test the system as indicated on the intersection drawings and this specification. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -91 Video detection cameras shall be mounted using “Band-It”banding material only (not hose clamps). • Warranty - The video detection system shall be warranted against manufacturing defects in materials and workmanship for a period of two years from date of installation. The video detection supplier shall provide all documentation necessary to maintain and operate the system. • Microwave Vehicle Radar Detector • Where specified on the plans, microwave vehicle radar detection shall be installed. The Microwave Radar Vehicle Detector shall be the Wavetronix Smart Sensor Matrix, or approved equivalent, for all approaches with advance detection for main street approaches on major/minor intersections and all approaches for major/major intersections. • Pedestrian Detector • Pedestrian push buttons shall be as specified in 9.120b or approved equivalent as called out in the signal construction plans. They shall be of tamper-proof design and the housing shall be yellow in color. • 9.120b: • Pedestrian Push Button Sign • Pedestrian push button signs shall be integral to the button. Pedestrian signage shall be MUTCD R10-3e 9” x 15” sign. • Mast Arm and Pole • Mast arms and poles shall meet the requirements of the standard details, which indicate the critical dimensions that must be met exactly or within stated tolerances. The intent is to provide mast arms and poles that match the overall appearance as illustrated and meet the performance requirements of the details and these specifications. Pole supplier submittals shall demonstrate conformity with this intent. • Mast arms and poles shall be wrapped for shipping from the factory in heavy duty paper or plastic, to protect them from scratches and abrasions in transit. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -92 • Mast arms and poles shall be factory coated conforming to standard detail requirements. • Specialty signal poles, such as modular or nostalgia designs, may only be installed with approval from the ENGINEER. The entity paying for the signal will be required to have spare components available and stored in the vicinity of Englewood in case of pole failure, required replacement, or other Emergency. • Mast arms shall not be installed and left unloaded for an extended period of time. If, at the discretion of the Engineer, the mast arms are installed and loading cannot occur by installing signal heads or mast arm signing, the mast arms shall be loaded with a minimum of two sign panels on each mast arm. These sign panels shall be mounted with Astro brackets so a gap is maintained between the mast arm and the sign panel. These sign panels shall be spaced at one-third intervals on the mast arm. The sign panels shall be mounted parallel with the roadway on the top of the mast arm. The Contractor shall then contact the Engineer so the mast arm and signal pole can be inspected for excessive vibration. Additional sign panels or adjustments in sign panel spacing may be required at the discretion of the Engineer. • Span Wire Pole • Unless otherwise specified in the plans and specifications, span wire poles are intended for temporary use only, prior to installation of permanent mast arm signals or for emergency use. In all cases, span wire signals will be allowed only with written authorization of the Engineer. • Span wire poles and cable shall be designed to meet the structural requirements given in the latest edition of "Standard Specifications for Structural Support for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals", published by AASHTO, for a wind velocity of 90 MPH. The minimum pole weights and span wire cable rating given in the standard details shall be increased as necessary in accordance with the AASHTO requirements. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -93 • Span wire pole may be seamless, or may be fabricated as one piece without transverse joints or welds and with only one longitudinal seam which shall be either continuously welded and ground, or rolled flush. • Span wire cable shall be seven wire stranded, common galvanized, and utilities grade. The cable shall have a minimum wire diameter of 3/8 inch, and shall be rated at 13,000 pounds minimum. Tether cable shall have a maximum diameter of 1/4 inch and shall be stranded, galvanized steel. Both span wire cable and tether cable shall be incidental to the span wire pole pay item. • Pedestal Pole • Pedestal poles shall be designed to meet the structural requirements given in the latest edition of "Standard Specifications for Structural Support for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals", published by AASHTO, for a wind velocity of 100 MPH. The pole base shall be frangible. All ped poles shall include Pelco pole and base collar assembly #PB-5334 or approved equivalent. • The pedestal pole shall also meet the requirements as stated in section 9.140 of these specifications. • Pedestrian Push Button Pole • Pedestrian push button pole shall be as illustrated in the standard details and installed at locations shown on the plans. When indicated on the plans, push buttons, pedestrian signs and instructional signs shall be mounted on the pedestrian push button pole. • Controller and Cabinet (Local/Master) • Each controller and cabinet assembly shall be in conformance with the latest edition of the Englewood Construction Standards and Specifications, as clarified by the following. • Each controller and cabinet assembly shall include: 1. When a Cobalt controller is required the following shall be provided: A P38/P44 cabinet with an exterior painted CDOT silver with an anti-graffiti coating, interior shall be painted white. Cabinet shall be 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -94 furnished with a “BEST” door lock kit. Lock and core is “BEST” Englewood SK1. • The cabinet shall contain 1. Polymer concrete cabinet base pad 2. Electronic copy of all cabinet documentation, including the cabinet manual and cabinet prints, shall be provided on a flash drive • P38/P44 Cabinet Equipment Layout – Top to Bottom (facing cabinet) • Notes: 1. The cabinet drawings shall be non-fading prints using the xerography method. No blue line drawings will be acceptable. 2. The County shall be supplied a computer printout of the complete environmental testing results. • The controller and cabinet shall be delivered to the Englewood Traffic Signal Shop for testing, programming, and operational checking. No testing shall commence until cabinet is completely assembled by the Contractor (UPS, communication equipment, etc). Englewood Traffic Signal Operations staff will have the complete cabinet available for pickup no more than 10 working days after final testing. Contractor is responsible for delivery and pick-up. Any malfunctions or problems with the testing and programming will be reported to the Contractor for immediate repair. Any malfunctions or problems will not count against the 10 working days. • Uninterruptable Power Source • Unless otherwise indicated, an uninterruptable power source (UPS) shall be installed. The uninterruptable power source shall be Alpha FXM1100 with Ethernet SNMP card, transfer switch (U-ATS and U- GTS), weather rated Alpha enclosure, battery string monitor (Alpha Guard), heater mats and equipped with Alpha Cell 195 XTL batteries having a minimum rating of 100 amp hours or approved equivalent. • Documentation and Warranty – The manufacturer shall furnish the owner an instruction manual covering the installation, operation and maintenance of the UPS and batteries. The UPS shall be covered by a parts and labor warranty per the manufacturer’s Standard Terms 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -95 and Conditions. The warranty period shall be for 2 years from in service date. • Miscellaneous Hardware • All ferrous mounting hardware and weather heads shall be galvanized, cadmium plated, or made of stainless steel to resist corrosion. Payment for miscellaneous hardware, including pole plates for side-of-pole mounting, shall be incidental to the pay item to which the miscellaneous hardware items are attached. • Instructions and Wiring Diagrams • All equipment shall be provided with a minimum of two sets of complete installation and operating instructions, including a chart of field connections, as well as a service manual for the controller containing service instructions, wiring diagrams, and trouble-shooting procedures. Each and every component used shall be clearly referenced in the service manual, and its value, ratings and manufacturer part number shall be given. Schematics shall be provided for all electronic equipment. • School Flashing Beacon Assembly • A school flashing beacon assembly shall be as shown in the standard details. Payment for this item shall be inclusive of all work to provide an operational flashing assembly, including materials, installation, and electrical service connection (if not a solar installation). Fluorescent yellow-green signs shall be installed as an integral part of the flashing assembly. • Warning or Regulatory Sign Flashing Beacon Assembly • A warning or regulatory sign flashing beacon assembly shall be as shown in the standard details. Payment for this item shall be inclusive of all work to provide an operational flashing assembly, including materials, installation, and electrical service connection (if not a solar installation). Signs shall be installed as an integral part of the flashing assembly. 3.2.8.2.10 Fiber Optic Cable A. Fiber Optic Cable Industry Standards 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -96 • Fiber optic cable shall conform to the industry standards listed below to assure the cable’s performance and durability in the field environment: - Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) - Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) - International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) - International Organization of Standardization (ISO) - International Telecommunication Union – Telecommunication Standardization Sector (ITU-T) - Telcordia Technologies, Inc. (Telcordia) - Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) - United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) Rural Utilities Service (RUS) • The industry standards shown in the table below shall be referenced throughout this section by its Section Standard Number (SSN). The Contractor shall be responsible for utilizing the most current edition or version of the standard listed below or the replacement standard if the standard has been superseded. SSN Standard Edition Fiber Optic Test Procedure (FOTP) Standard Title 10-1 TIA-526-7 A 7 Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant 10-2 TIA-455-78 B 78 Optical Fibers: Attenuation Measurement Methods and Test Procedures 10-3 ITU-T G.652D 2009 N/A Characteristics of a Single-Mode Optical Fiber and Cable 10-4 TIA-455-3 B 3 Procedure to Measure Temperature Cycling Effects on Optical Fiber Units, Optical Cable and Other Passive Components 10-5 EIA-359 A N/A Colors for Color Identification and Coding 10-6 TIA-598 D N/A Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding 10-7 TIA-455-82 B 82-B Fluid Penetration Test for Fluid-Blocked Fiber Optic Cable 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -97 10-8 TIA/EIA- 455-81 B 81 Compound Flow (Drip) Test for Filled Fiber Optic Cable 10-9 TIA/EIA- 455-41 A 41 Compressive Loading Resistance of Fiber Optic Cables 10-10 TIA-455-104 B 104 Fiber Optic Cable Cyclic Flexing Test 10-11 TIA/EIA- 455-25 D 25 Impact Testing of Optical Fiber Cables 10-12 TIA-455-33 B 33 Optical Fiber Cable Tensile Loading and Bending Test 10-13 TIA-455-85 A 85 Fiber Optic Cable Twist Test 10-14 TIA/EIA- 455-226 2002 226 Calibration of Optical Time-Domain Reflectometers 10-15 TIA-455-231 2015 231 Calibration of Fiber Optic Power Meters 10-16 ISO/IEC 17025 2nd N/A General Requirements for the Competence of Testing and Calibration Laboratories 10-17 TIA-455-37 A 37 Low or High Temperature Bend Test for Fiber Optic Cable 10-18 TIA/EIA- 455-98 A 98 Fiber Optic Cable External Freezing Test 10-19 Telcordia GR-20 CORE 4 N/A Generic Requirements for Optical Fiber and Optical Fiber Cable 10-20 ISO 9000 4th N/A International Standards for Quality Management 10-21 ICEA S-87- 640 6th N/A Optical Fiber Outside Plant Communications Cable 10-22 RUS PE-90a N/A N/A Minimum Performance Specifications for Fiber Optic Cables 10-23 IEEE C2 2017 N/A National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) B. Fiber Optic Material Specifications • Where specified on the plans, interconnect wire connecting traffic signal controller cabinets shall be fiber optic type. • Fiber optic cable runs consist of a backbone cable, which runs the length of the project, and lateral connections to the individual local controller cabinets and material specifications for each are explained in detail in this specification: - Backbone fiber optic cable shall be loose tube non-armored outdoor cable consisting of forty eight (48) single-mode fibers, unless otherwise specified on the plans. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -98 - The lateral fiber optic cable shall be loose tube non-armored outdoor cable with fiber count as indicated on the plans and complying with the following specification for fiber optic cable. Lateral cables shall include pre-terminated type termination panel, similar to Fiber Connections GatorPatch panel, Corning Zeux Panel, or approved equivalent, and shall be spliced to the backbone fiber optic cables in the splice closure as specified in the plans or Project Specifications, or as directed by the ENGINEER or his or her designee. - Fiber optic cable for installation in conduit shall meet the requirements of SSN 10-3. • General Considerations - The cable shall be new, from an unused reel and of current design and manufacture. - Connectors shall be “SC” single-mode type with a UPC finish (nominal reflectance of -50 dB), unless otherwise specified on the plans. - A #14 AWG (minimum) fully annealed, solid conductor tracer wire shall be installed in conduit with fiber. The tracer wire shall utilize HDPE insulation and the APWA color code standard for buried communications. • Fiber Characteristics - All fibers in the cable must be usable fibers. - The cable and jacket shall be sufficiently free of surface imperfections and inclusions to meet the optical, mechanical and environmental requirements of this specification. - Each optical fiber shall consist of a doped silica core surrounded by a concentric silica cladding. - The single-mode fiber utilized in the cable specified herein shall conform to SSN 10-3, except as noted herein. • Fiber Specification Parameters All fibers in the cable shall meet the following requirements: 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -99 - Have attenuation values of 0.35 dB/km at 1310 nm and 0.25 dB/km at 1550 nm. - Temperature testing shall be in accordance with SSN 10-4. - The chromatic dispersion for single-mode optical fibers shall be as required per SSN 10-3. - Specifications for Outdoor Fiber Cables Optical fibers shall be placed inside loose buffer tubes. All cable shall be dielectric. Up to 36 fibers per cable shall have 6 or 12 fibers per buffer tube and greater than 36 fibers per cable shall have 12 fibers per buffer tube. The fibers shall not adhere to the inside of the buffer tube. The ultraviolet (UV) acrylate coated fibers shall be color-coded with highly distinguishable colors according to the following: 1. Blue 7. Red 2. Orange 6. Black 3. Green 7. Yellow 4. Brown 8. Violet 5. Slate 9. Rose 6. White 10. Aqua All colors shall meet Munsell standards as specified in SSN 10-5 and 10-6. - Buffer tubes containing fibers shall also be color coded or numbered with distinct and recognizable colors or numbers according to the following: 1. Blue 7. Red 2. Orange 8. Black 3. Green 9. Yellow 4. Brown 10. Violet 5. Slate 11. Rose 6. White 12. Aqua - These colors shall meet SSN 10-5 and 10-6. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -100 - In buffer tubes containing multiple fibers, the colors or numbers shall be stable during temperature cycling and not subject to fading or smearing onto each other. Colors shall not cause fibers to stick together. - Buffer tubes shall be of a dual-layer construction with the inner layer made of polycarbonate and the outer layer made of polyester. - Fillers may be included in the cable core to lend symmetry to the cable cross-section where needed. - The central anti-bucking member shall consist of a fiberglass reinforced plastic rod. The purpose of the central member is to prevent buckling of the cable (blocking) meeting the requirements of SSN 10-19, 10-21, and 10-22. - Buffer tubes shall be stranded around a central member using the reverse oscillation, or “SZ”, stranding process. - The cable core interstices shall be filled with a swellable glass yarn and the buffer tubes shall be surrounded by a dry water blocking tape meeting the requirements of SSN 10-19, 10-21, and 10-22. - Binders shall be applied with sufficient tension to secure the buffer tubes to the central member without crushing the buffer tubes. The binders shall be non-hygroscopic and dielectric with low shrinkage. - The cable shall contain at least one ripcord, unless cable is utilizing fast access technology, under the sheath for easy sheath removal. - Tensile strength shall be provided by high tensile strength aramid yarns, fiberglass yarns, or both. - The high tensile strength aramid yarns and/or fiberglass yarns shall be helically stranded evenly around the cable core. - All cables shall be sheathed with medium density polyethylene. The minimum nominal jacket thickness shall be 1.4 mm. Jacketing material shall be applied directly over the tensile strength members and dry water blocking materials. The 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -101 polyethylene shall contain carbon black to provide ultraviolet light protection and shall not promote the growth of fungus. - The jacket or sheath shall be free of holes, splits and blisters. - The cable jacket shall contain no metal elements and shall be of a consistent thickness. - Cable jackets shall be marked with the following items: Fiber optic cable manufacturer’s name and/or logo Month/Year of manufacture Fiber optic cable manufacturer’s part number Fiber count Sequential length markings in feet or meters Telecommunication handset symbol, as required by section 350G of SSN 10-23. All length markings shall be placed at two foot, three foot or one meter intervals. The actual length of the cable shall be within ±3% of the length markings. All markings shall be indented in permanent white characters. The height of the marking shall be approximately 2.5 mm. If remarking is required, yellow markings shall be used to correct the error in the original markings. All cable markings shall be in English. • General Fiber Optic Performance Specifications - The unaged cable shall withstand water penetration when tested with a one meter static head or equivalent continuous pressure applied at one end of a one meter length of filled cable for 24 hours. No water shall leak through the open cable end. When a one meter static head or equivalent continuous pressure is applied at one end of a one meter length of aged cable for one hour, no water shall leak through the open cable end. Testing shall be done in accordance with SSN 10-7. - When tested in accordance with SSN 10-8 the cable shall exhibit no flow (drip or leak) of filling or flooding compound at 80°C. If material flow is detected, the weight of any compound that drips from the sample shall be less than 0.05 grams (0.002 ounce). 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -102 - The cable shall withstand a minimum compressive load of 220 N/cm (125 lbf/in) for non-armored cables applied uniformly over the length of the compression plate. The cable shall be tested in accordance with SSN 10-9, except that the load shall be applied at the rate of 3 mm to 20 mm per minute and maintained for 10 minutes. The magnitude of the attenuation change shall be within the repeatability of the measurement system for 90% of the test fibers. The remaining 10% of the fibers shall not experience an attenuation change greater than 0.1 dB at 1550 nm (single-mode). The repeatability of the measurement system is typically +/- 0.05 dB or less. No fibers shall exhibit a measurable change in attenuation after load removal. - When tested in accordance with SSN 10-10, the cable shall withstand 25 mechanical flexing cycles at a rate of 30 +/- 1 cycles per minute, with a sheave diameter not greater than 20 times the cable diameter. The magnitude of the attenuation change shall be within the repeatability of the measurement system for 90% of the test fibers. The remaining 10% of the fibers shall not experience an attenuation change greater than 0.1 dB at 1550 nm (single- mode). The repeatability of the measurement system is typically +/- 0.05 dB or less. The cable jacket shall exhibit no cracking or splitting when observed under 5X magnification. - When tested in accordance with SSN 10-11, the cable shall withstand 25 impact cycles. The magnitude of the attenuation change shall be within the repeatability of the measurement system for 90% of the test fibers. The remaining 10% of the fibers shall not experience an attenuation change greater than 0.1 dB at 1550 nm (single-mode). The repeatability of the measurement system is typically +/- 0.05 dB or less. The average increase in attenuation for fibers shall be +/- 0.04 dB at 1300 nm (multimode). The cable jacket shall not exhibit evidence of cracking or splitting at the completion of the test. - When tested in accordance with SSN 10-12, using maximum mandrel and sheave diameter of 560 mm, the cable shall withstand a tensile load of 2700 N (608 lbf) applied for one hour (using “Test Condition II” of the procedure). In addition, the cable sample, while subjected to a minimum load of 2660 N (600 lbf), 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -103 shall be able to withstand a twist of 360 degrees in a length of less than 3 meters. The magnitude of the attenuation change shall be within the repeatability of the measurement system of 90% of the test fibers. The remaining 10% of the fibers shall not experience an attenuation change greater than 0.1 dB at 1550 nm. The repeatability of the measurement system is typically +/- 0.05 dB or less. The cable shall not experience a measurable increase in attenuation when subjected to the rated residual tensile load, 890 N (200 lbf). - When tested in accordance with SSN 10-13, a length of cable no greater than 2 meters will withstand 10 cycles of mechanical twisting. The magnitude of the attenuation change will be within the repeatability of the measurement system for 90% of the test fibers. The remaining 10% of the fibers will not experience an attenuation change greater than 0.1 dB at 1550 nm. The repeatability of the measurement system is typically +/- 0.05 dB or less. The cable jacket will exhibit no cracking or splitting when observed under 5X magnification after completion of the test. - Low and high temperature cable bending, maximum bend radius and cable aging shall be tested in accordance with SSN 10-17. - Cable freezing shall be tested in accordance with SSN 10-18. - Color coding permanence shall be tested in accordance with SSN 10-19, 10-21, and 10-22. - Per SSN 10-4, the fiber optic cable shall conform to the following temperature requirements: Operation -40°C to +70°C (-40°F to +158°F) Installation -30°C to +60°C (-22°F to +140°F) Shipping/Storage -40°C to +75°C (-40°F to +167°F) • Quality Assurance Provisions - All optical fiber shall meet SSN 10-20 standards. - All optical fibers shall be proof tested by the fiber manufacturer at a minimum load of 100 ksi. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -104 - All optical fibers shall be 100% attenuation tested by the manufacturer. The attenuation of each fiber shall be provided with each cable reel. • Packaging - The complete cable shall be packaged for shipment on non- returnable wooden reels. - Text on the reels shall contain the following information: Fiber optic cable manufacturer’s name and/or logo Fiber optic cable type Fiber count Marking showing side to unreel cable - Top and bottom ends of the cable shall be available for testing without removing cable from the reel. - Both ends of the cable shall be sealed to prevent the ingress of moisture. - Each reel shall have a weatherproof reel tag attached identifying the reel and cable. - Each cable shall be accompanied by a cable data sheet that contains significant information on the cable. • Miscellaneous The cable manufacturer shall provide installation procedures and technical support concerning the items contained in this specification. C. Fiber Optic Cable Installation • Interconnect Cable Installation. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with two copies of the cable manufacturer’s recommended installation instructions for fiber optic cable in conduit. All installation shall be in accordance with these practices except as directed by the Engineer or his or her designee. Additional cable costs due to damage caused by the Contractor’s neglect of recommended procedures shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -105 • Fiber optic cable shall be installed in continuous runs except where cable type changes or where maximum pull lengths govern. The manufacturer’s recommended limits for cable lengths shall not be exceeded. • Cable ends shall be stored in splice enclosures immediately adjacent to cabinets or in controller cabinets as directed by the ENGINEER or his or her designee. Only fibers called out in plans need to be spliced. All other fibers shall be sealed in a manner recommended by the manufacturer. • The Engineer or his or her designee shall provide an interconnect schematic diagram to the Contractor. The diagram shall clearly indicate cable routing, splice points and fiber connections including identifying the color-coded fibers and buffer tubes. Installation of the cable will not be permitted until the schematic diagram has been reviewed by the Contractor in the preconstruction meeting and with the Engineer, or his or her designee, oversight during installation. • The fibers and buffer tubes noted on the plans shall be the only ones terminated or spliced, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer or his or her designee. Under no conditions shall the single-mode fibers be cut or spliced at intermediate points without express written direction from the Engineer or his or her designee. The Contractor shall place an end cap on any bare cable ends to prevent moisture or dirt intrusion. • Field terminations of fiber shall not be allowed without express written direction from the Engineer or his or her designee. • The Contractor shall leave a minimum of 50 feet coiled in each pull box, a minimum of 10 feet within the controller cabinet, and 100 feet coiled in splice vaults, unless otherwise specified on the plans. • The maximum pulling tension shall be 2700 N (600 lbf) during installation (short term) and 890 N (200 lbf) long term installed as tested per SSN 10-12. • The Contractor shall seal all ends of conduit for pulled fiber cable with approved duct seal products. • The Contractor shall place fiber tags on the ends of all pulled fiber cable with the following information: 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -106 - Name of Manufacturer - Type of Fiber (single mode or multi-mode) - Number of strands - Date of installation - Cable end to end locations - Lateral run identification (where applicable) D. Fiber Optic Cable Testing • The Contractor shall demonstrate that all fiber optic cable testing results in acceptable attenuation values. All fiber optic cable testing parameters shall be submitted as specified in this section and in section 10.70. • The Contractor, solely at the Contractor’s cost, shall resplice any fusion splices and/or reterminate any terminations that have test results exceeding acceptable attenuation values. The Contractor, solely at the Contractor’s cost, shall retest any fiber links that have been re-spliced. • The Contractor, solely at the Contractor’s cost, shall bring any link not meeting the requirements of testing specifications into compliance. • The installed fiber optic cable test shall consist of the testing of single- mode fiber optic cable. The testing procedures involve an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) test and an Optical Power Meter Test. Under no circumstances shall fiber optic testing begin before cable installation is complete, without the express written consent of the Engineer. • The guidelines for fiber optic cable testing include: - Launch box or test jumpers must be of the same fiber core size and connector type as the cable system: Single-mode fiber 8.3/125 m - The optical sources for testing are stabilized and have center wavelengths within 20 nm of the 1310/1550 nm single-mode nominal wavelength for testing in accordance with SSN 10-1. - The power meter and the light source must be set to the same wavelength during testing. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -107 - The OTDR and power meter must be calibrated at each of the nominal test wavelengths and traceable to the National Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST) calibration standards. The calibration of the OTDR and power meter shall conform to the requirements set forth in SSN 10-14 and 10-15, respectively. - All system connectors, adapters and jumpers are properly cleaned prior to and during measurements. • Materials for Testing Fiber Optic Cable Testing Equipment – Equipment shall be calibrated annually by the manufacturer or by a SSN 10-16 accredited calibration laboratory. A copy of the most recent certificate of calibration and any out-of-tolerance conditions shall be provided with project submittals prior to the initiation of any testing activities. The following equipment and information is required to perform fiber optic cable tests: 1) Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) 2) Launch box (minimum length – 300 meters or 984 feet) 3) Light source at the appropriate wavelengths (1310 and 1550 nm) 4) Optical Power Measurement Equipment capable of measuring optical power in dBm. 5) Minimum length for test jumpers shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the light source and power meter. The connectors on the jumpers shall be compatible with the light source and power meter and have the same fiber construction as the link segment being tested per SSN 10-1. The Contractor shall also be responsible for providing any adapters, if needed. 6) Jacket length measurements for lateral and backbone cable at each cable end including splice points and termination panels. Optical Fiber Testing with OTDR The Contractor shall perform an OTDR test of all fibers in all tubes on the reel, prior to installation of the fiber. The test results shall be supplied to the Engineer prior to installation of the cable. The pre- installation testing shall be used to evaluate the integrity, overall length, and fiber attenuation in dB/km for fiber optic cables prior to the installation in conduit. The Contractor 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -108 shall use a pigtail and mechanical splice to access one cable end to verify the length and attenuation of each fiber. The results of the testing shall be compared to the reel tag. Results indicating that the fiber optic cable received does not meet the specification and/or the discovery of point defects due to shipping and handling shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer or his or her designee immediately. If the fiber is specified as “Install Only”, the Contractor shall test the fiber on the reel and provide the test results to the Engineer prior to the Contractor accepting the cable. After installation, if there are unused portions of cable remaining on the reel, the Engineer may request the Contractor or other qualified technician to perform a reel test. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer the test results prior to delivering the cable to the Engineer. Any cable damaged while in the Contractor’s possession shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense. Fiber testing shall be performed on all terminated fibers from patch panel to patch panel and unterminated fibers from end to end. Additionally, mid entry splices into mainline cables require testing of all strands in the mainline cable, before and after installation. Testing shall consist of a bi- directional end-to-end OTDR trace performed per SSN 10-2 at both the 1310 and 1550 nm wavelengths. The attenuation measurements shall be provided at dual wavelengths 1310 and 1550 for single-mode fibers. OTDR inspection will be used to verify installed cable integrity and length. It will also be used to assess splices and connectors. OTDR signature traces will be used for documentation and maintenance. Attenuation numbers for the installed link shall be calculated by taking the sum of the bi-directional measurements and dividing that sum by two. The Contractor shall use an OTDR that is capable of storing traces electronically and shall save each final trace. To ensure the traces identify the end points of the fiber under test and the fiber designation, the Contractor shall use a 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -109 launch box, if required with the OTDR being used, to eliminate the “dead zone” at the start of the trace so that the start of the fiber under test can be identified on the trace. The length of the launch box shall be indicated for all test results. In compliance with SSN 10-2, the Contractor shall record the following information during the test procedure: 1. Name and contact information for individuals responsible for conducting the test 2. Type of test equipment used (manufacturer, model, serial number, calibration date and valid certification of calibration) 3. Date test is being performed 4. Jacket readings in and out of each splice vault and each pullbox 5. The index of refraction value used to perform the testing (1.466 for1310 nm and 1.467 for 1550 nm per SSN 10-3) 6. Optical source wavelength and spectral width 7. Fiber identification 8. Start and end point locations 9. Launch box length 10. Method of calculation for the attenuation or attenuation coefficient 11. Acceptable link attenuation Optical Fiber Cable Testing with Optical Power Meter: The Contractor shall conduct an Optical Power Meter Test for each fiber installed. Single-mode segments shall be tested in one direction at both the 1310 nm and 1550 nm wavelength. In compliance with SSN 10-1, the following information shall be recorded during the test procedure: 1. Names and contact information of personnel conducting the test 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -110 2. Type of test equipment used (manufacturer, model, serial number, calibration date, and valid certificate of calibration) 3. Date test is being performed 4. Optical source wavelength and spectral width 5. Fiber identification 6. Start and end point locations 7. Test direction 8. Reference power measurement (when not using a power meter with a Relative Power Measurement Mode) 9. Measured attenuation of the link segment 10. Acceptable link attenuation Acceptable Attenuation Values: Acceptable attenuation values shall be calculated for each fiber tested. These values represent the maximum acceptable test values. Single-mode Fiber: The general attenuation equation for any single- mode link segment is as follows: Acceptable Link Attenuation (Attn.) = Cable Attn. + Connector Attn. + Splice Attn. 8.3 micrometers Single-mode Attenuation Coefficients: 1. Cable Attenuation = Cable Length (km) x (0.35 dB/km@1310 nm and 0.25 dB/km@1550 nm) 2. Connection Attenuation = Number of Mated Connections x 0.50 dB 3. Splice Attenuation (Fusion) = Splices x 0.10 dB. Test Procedures All fiber testing shall be performed on all fibers in the completed end-to-end system. Single-mode Fiber: The single-mode Optical Power Meter fiber test shall be conducted as follows: 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -111 Light Source Test Jumper - 1 TX Optical RX Power Meter Light Source Test Jumper - 1 Test Jumper - 2 TX Optical RX Power Meter Test Couplings A. Clean the test jumper connectors and the test coupling per manufacturer’s instructions B. Follow the test equipment manufacturer’s initial adjustment instructions 1. Connect Test Jumper-1 between the light source and the power meter. Avoid placing bends in the jumper that are less than 100 mm (4 inches) in diameter 2. If the power meter has a Relative Power Measurement Mode, select it. If it does not, reduce the Reference Power Measurement (Pref). If the meter can display power levels in dBm, select this unit of measurement to simplify subsequent calculations, unless attenuation values can be read on the display directly in dB without calculations 3. Disconnect Test Jumper-1 from the power meter. Do NOT disconnect the test jumper from the light source 4. Attach Test Jumper-1 to one end of the cable plant to be measured and Test Jumper-2 to the other end 5. Record the Power Measurement (Psum). If the power meter is in Relative Power Measurement Mode, the meter reading represents the true value. Record the Relative Power Measurement, if meter does calculation and provides this information E. Fiber Acceptance 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -112 • Once the fiber optic communication system is in place and passed the fiber testing requirements, it shall be made operational for a burn-in period test. During this time, the system will be exercised and monitored for a period of 30 calendar days to exhibit fault-free operation. During the 30-day burn-in period, the Contractor’s is responsible for the maintenance or repair of the system or systems. The cost of any maintenance or repair necessary, except electricity, damage by the public or acts of God, shall be borne by the Contractor and will be considered as included in the price paid for the contract item involved, and no additional compensation will be allowed therefore. The Engineer shall suspend the 30-day burn-in period when a problem is detected and then continue once the failure has been corrected. F. Fiber Emergency and Non-Emergency Repairs during Construction and Burn-In Period • The Contractor shall provide Emergency maintenance and fiber restoration services on the project corridor(s) where fiber optic communication systems are installed for Englewood Traffic based on the terms and conditions set forth in the executed Agreement. All unplanned service disruptions of fiber optic communication systems along project corridors shall be considered an Emergency unless otherwise identified by the Engineer or his or her designee. The terms of this service shall be provided from the initiation of the Agreement through system acceptance at the successful completion of the burn- in period. The Contractor shall include its fees or compensation to provide these services as part of its executed Agreement. The Contractor shall have access to the fiber optic system documentation that it prepares for Englewood to assist in the Emergency maintenance and fiber restoration activities. Englewood will provide the Contractor with a project contact list to initiate contact about any disruptions in fiber optic cable service. Project contacts will be responsible for notifying affected users of impacted fiber optic cable of any service disruptions. Englewood will also provide access permission for local work permits, if needed, for restoration activities. • Englewood or a third party may provide the first response in the event of an Emergency and contact Contractor to repair the problem. Contractor shall dispatch personnel to undertake each such repair no 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -113 later than one half hour after the City initially notifies the Contractor of the Emergency. Personnel responding shall arrive within one hour after notification during regular working hours and within two hours during non- working hours after notification. • The Contractor shall provide the following to support its activities under this section: - Contractor shall provide a single point of contact to initiate restoration service. - Contractor will provide qualified employees and a supervisor, including skilled fiber optic splicers. - Response time shall be as noted in the previous paragraph. - Upon starting of restoration services, Contractor technicians shall continue those services as expeditiously as possible until temporary emergency services are completed and the fiber link is Contractor ready for service. - Contractor crews shall be available 24 hours/day, seven days/week from the initiation of the project through successful completion of the burn-in period. - Contractor shall provide all tools, materials, and test equipment needed to perform repairs associated with restoration services. - Contractor shall update record drawings and project documentation to reflect changes in the fiber optic communication system due to restoration activities. • Where emergency splicing is required, the Contractor may utilize temporary mechanical splicing until such time that fusion splicing can be performed to replace the temporary mechanical splice. The attenuation for mechanical splices shall not exceed 0.30 dB/splice. • In instances of repairs that are of a non-emergency nature and determined to be the Contractor’s responsibility by the Engineer, such repairs shall be undertaken at the site within one working day after the Engineer notifies the Contractor of the needed repair. • Should the Contractor fail to perform any maintenance responsibilities within the prescribed time period(s), the Engineer shall employ the 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -114 services of the City's traffic signal maintenance contractor to perform said maintenance work. The Contractor shall reimburse the City for labor and equipment charges plus ten percent (10%) for administration associated with the utilization of the City's traffic signal maintenance contractor. Labor, materials, and ten percent (10%) will be subtracted from the total contract amount. G. Submittals • The Contractor is responsible for submitting all fiber optic equipment calibration documentation, testing information and fiber optic testing results as specified in section 10.40. • Additional Submittals– The following test data, certificates of compliance and material specifications shall also be included with testing results specified in section 10.40. - End-to-end attenuation data resulting from the measurement of the optical power loss between cable termination points using a stabilized light source and optical power meter. - OTDR signature traces resulting from the pre- and post- installation measurements for cable integrity, overall length, fiber attenuation in dB/km, and losses associated with fusion splices and connectors at patch panels. Electronic copies shall include the required viewing software, if needed, for the Engineer to interactively review, analyze, and print the traces. - Certificate of compliance for end-to-end, connector and splice loss to confirm test performance, compliance with stated loss requirements, and applicable warranty coverage for all individual connector and splice losses in the installed cable plant. - Cable specifications provided by the cable manufacturer that defines the minimum optical and mechanical performance guaranteed for the cable. • As-Built Submittal The Contractor shall submit one copy of the complete contract plans, including additional drawings issued as part of any change orders, with any deviations clearly marked in color. Deviations to be noted shall include but not be limited to the following: 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -115 1. Fiber routing and location information 2. Fiber splice location 3. Fiber splice configuration 4. Patch panel locations 5. Installed cable lengths • Emergency and Non-Emergency Repair Submittal The Contractor shall submit one copy of the complete plans showing all fiber optic cable repairs, including additional drawings issued as part of any repair work, with any deviations clearly marked in color. Deviations to be noted and shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Repaired fiber routing and location information 2. Repaired fiber splice locations 3. Repaired fiber splice configuration 4. Patch panel modifications where applicable 5. Installed cable lengths necessary for repairs The Contractor shall submit all fiber optic equipment, material and testing documentation related to any repair work as specified in sections 10.40, 10.70a and 10.70b. • File Format The Contractor shall submit fiber optic interconnect documentation to the Engineer as both a hard copy and electronic copy on a Compact Disc (CD), emailed through File Transfer Protocol (FTP) or contained in a portable Universal Serial Bus (USB) drive. 3.2.8.2.11 Paint Equipment • Previously installed signal poles shall be field painted when indicated on the plans. When so indicated, all exterior surfaces shall be cleaned and examined for damaged paint, and any such damage shall be given a spot coat of primer and the entire exterior surface re- painted. Previously painted surfaces, whether finish or prime coated, shall be scuff sanded with particular attention paid to the lower eight feet (8') of the pole. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -116 • Inspection of the poles by the Engineer prior to application of the finish coats is required. Two finish coats of paint selected by the Engineer shall be applied over the primer or previously painted surfaces. • The painting shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner and may be applied either by hand brushing or spraying. The Engineer reserves the right to require the use of brushes for the application of paint should the work done by the paint spraying machine prove unsatisfactory or objectionable. • Touch up painting shall be completed at the direction of the Engineer. Nicks and abrasions shall be cleaned and the Engineer shall designate the appropriate primer coat, and finish coat if applicable. • When indicated on the plans, traffic and pedestrian signal heads shall be painted black. 3.2.8.2.12 Guarantees and Warranties A. General • All work completed by the Contractor shall be guaranteed against defects in workmanship or materials for a period of two (2) years from the date of Preliminary Acceptance, excepting ordinary wear and tear, abuse or neglect. Please refer to the Englewood Roadway Design and Construction Standards, Chapter 11 – Acceptance Procedures and Requirements for explanation of the required two-year warranty period and for Final Acceptance requirements. • Pavement Marking Warranty – The following warranty is required for pavement marking installations: One year with normal traffic wear. Material will not peel or lift in this time period. Approval of all work must be obtained from the Engineer or his or her designee prior to the start of this warranty period. B. Materials and Parts The Contractor shall supply the City with all manufacturer warranties and/or guarantees covering materials and parts. 3.2.8.2.13 General Signal Design Requirements A. Scope 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -117 This section describes general signal design requirements for use in Englewood. Variances from these requirements require written approval of the Engineer. Refer to sections 1.00, 2.00 and 3.00 for additional design requirements. B. Signal Head Placement and Sizes • For all installations, one signal head shall be provided centered over each exclusive left turn and through lane. If mast arms do not reach the left turn lane(s), the number and configuration of signal heads should be adjusted in consultation with the Engineer. Far left and far right pole-mounted signal heads shall also be provided. The need for one signal head per right turn lane should be determined on a site specific basis. The traffic signal design engineer (Engineer of Record) shall coordinate with the pole manufacturer to ensure the structure is adequate to accommodate the proposed loading. • 14.20b: Where left turn arrows are included, at least two signal heads with left arrow sections shall be provided, with one of these located on the far left pole. • 14.20c: Pedestrian signal heads shall be provided for all marked crosswalks. Where pedestrian signal heads are provided, corresponding pedestrian push buttons shall be provided. • 14.20d: All mast arm and span wire mounted signal heads shall have aluminum louvered backplates, black in color with 2 inch diamond grade fluorescent yellow retroreflective border. • 14.20e: All vehicle signal sections shall be 12-inch LED. Pedestrian indications shall be LED. (See section 9.00) • 14.20f: Where mast arms extend over the left turn lane(s), left turn only sign(s) (R3-5) shall be provided. Double lefts may be covered with one left turn only sign (R3-5) per lane, or one double left turn only sign located over the lane line between the double lefts as directed per plan. • 14.20g: Where Flashing Yellow Arrow left turn control is recommended for left turn operations, a custom 30”x36” “Left Turn Yield on Flashing Yellow Arrow” pictorial (for the arrow – no starburst) sign shall be installed to the right of the left- turn signal indication. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -118 C. Pole and Cabinet Placement All signal poles, pedestals and cabinets shall be placed a minimum of three feet (3’) from face of traffic signal item to face of curb where curbing is present, with a desired separation of five feet (5’). The traffic control cabinet and base shall be placed on level ground with adequate room to access and maneuver around the cabinet. The cabinet location shall be such that it guarantees adequate visibility of intersection and approaching traffic from all directions. The same separations apply from face of traffic signal item to outside edge of shoulder where pavement and shoulder exist with no curbing. Where only pavement exists without shoulder and curbing, a minimum of five feet (5’) from face of traffic signal item to edge of pavement shall be maintained, with a desired separation of seven feet (7’). See section 15.30 for further details. D. Street Name Signs Rigidly affixed street name signs shall be provided for all approaches. They shall be on 0.100 Aluminum Sign and shall consist of Diamond Grade LDP reflective material or equivalent. The E.C. (ElectroCut) film shall be 3M 1170 Green or equivalent. The font type is FHWA Hwy. Series C unless otherwise specified. The street name shall be 12” initial upper case and combination of lower case and the designator shall be 8” initial upper case and combination of lower case. E. Signal Conduit See section 3.2.8.2.6.2 for requirements. F. Interconnect Requirements for traffic signal interconnect shall be determined on a site specific basis. The traffic signal designer shall coordinate with the ENGINEER or his or her designee to determine the need for interconnect. G. Luminaires Unless otherwise indicated in the plans, the Contractor shall provide a luminaire extension and luminaire wiring. The final power hook-up and the actual luminaire shall be provided and installed by the Contractor. Luminaire heads shall be General Electric (GE) ........ or approved equivalent. H. Vehicle Detectors and Bluetooth Readers 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -119 • Stopbar detection for designated phases shall be provided. The locations and type of detection shall be indicated in the plans. • Counting detectors, when explicitly called out in the plans, shall be provided for each approach lane of traffic per the direction of the ENGINEER. When imbedded in the roadway, detectors shall be located twenty feet (20’) (+) upstream of stopbar detectors, or ten feet (10’) (+) upstream of the closest water type pull box where no stopbar detector exists. See Englewood Standard Signal Details. • On all approaches with free-flow speeds of 40 to 45 MPH and greater, advance detection for dilemma zone protection shall be provided. Site-specific conditions such as grades or sight distance obstructions may also justify use of advance detection. The potential need for advance detection in these cases should be reviewed with the ENGINEER. • Advance Detection Zones placement shall be per the following table: Posted Speed Zone Placement (measured from back edge of crosswalk or stop bar) 25 mph 100 ft. 30 mph 150 ft. 35 mph 205 ft. 40 mph 235 ft. 45 mph 270 ft. 50 mph 300 ft. • When microwave or video detection is specified, a note shall be included on the signal plans that requires the Contractor to coordinate with the device manufacturer to determine placement and orientation of detection. Detection supplier’s representative must be present for detection setup and initial operation. I. Signal Power • The traffic signal design engineer (Engineer of Record) or the Contractor responsible for signal construction shall coordinate power source and meter location and requirements as part of the signal design. Coordination shall include determination of, and initial contact with, the appropriate power company, indication of the power source 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -120 and meter location on the signal plans and the Power Company’s contact name and number. Meter location shall be within 75 feet of the vault/cabinet/home run pullbox and on the cabinet corner unless otherwise approved. • In general, circuit breakers and power disconnects should be located internal to service meter assemblies and signal controller cabinets, and should not be readily accessible to the public. • Typically, the City electrical inspector will be responsible for inspecting service installations and certifying acceptability to the utility company for hook-up. • Englewood Traffic personnel shall be responsible for all inspections from the point of connection of power to the inside of the cabinet out through the intersection. 3.2.8.2.14 Construction Requirements A. Scope This section describes general signal construction requirements for use in Englewood. Variances from these requirements require written approval of the Engineer. B. Inspections • For all City field inspections, the Contractor shall give at least 48- hour prior notice to the Traffic Engineering Division 303-762-2300, Inspections will normally be completed by City staff or the Contract Administrator. • The Contractor shall contact the Engineer at least 48 hours prior to placing the pole foundations. • The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 48 hours prior to standing the traffic signal poles. C. Field Location • Prior to initiating the traffic signal design, the Contractor’s Engineer of Record (or authorized representative) shall schedule and attend a field meeting with the Engineer, and/or the authorized city personnel and the utility location company to field locate the signal pole foundation locations and determine the appropriate mast arm lengths. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -121 • All poles, power meters, control cabinets, and pull boxes shall be field located by the Engineer and/or his or her designee(s). The Contractor shall contact the Engineer two days prior to field location. D. Signal Turn-On • Signal heads installed on mast arms, span wires or poles at new signal locations that are not ready for actual electrical operation shall be covered with black bag with the wording Out Of Service. • Traffic signal construction and all associated work, including operational luminaries, shall be 100 percent complete prior to flashing operation. • Immediately prior to signal turn-on, signals shall be flashed from two to five days, with the exact duration of flashing determined by the ENGINEER. Mondays, Fridays and holidays are excluded for start of flash days. • The Contractor’s Project Manager, IMSA Level II Traffic Signal Bench Technician/Signal Technician (BB Certification), Opticom emitter, Foreman (BE Certification) and a bucket truck are required at all signal turn-ons. • The Contractor must contact the Engineer and/or the CIty’s authorized personnel 48 hours PRIOR to signal flash. At the scheduled signal flash, the date and time for full operation will be determined. Failure to contact these parties will result in the forfeiture of retainage or liquidated damages equal to retainage. E. Condition of Equipment • The Contractor shall verify that the traffic signal cabinet is in good condition upon delivery. Any surface areas damaged during the handling and installation shall be repaired immediately per the manufacturer’s specifications. • Prior to the installation of the mast arms and poles, the Contractor shall wipe them clean. Following installation of the poles, the Contractor, shall use factory supplied paint to touch up nicks and abrasions, per section 3.2.8.2.11. F. Cabinet Base Installation 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -122 At the cabinet base location, Contractor shall install gravel in the excavation for the conduit, set the cabinet base, and fill the riser portion of the base with gravel. 3.2.8.2.15 Basis of Payment The accepted quantities will be paid for at the contract unit price for each of the pay items listed below that appear in the bid schedule. Payment will be made under: Pay Item Unit Removal of Traffic Signal Equipment LS Reset Traffic Signal Equipment LS PVC Conduit 2” Trenched LF PVC Conduit 3” Trenched LF PVC Conduit 2” Bored LF PVC Conduit 3” Bored LF Common Trench LF Common Boring LF PVC Conduit 2” (within common boring, trench, and/or sleeve) LF PVC Conduit 3” (within common boring, trench, and/or sleeve) LF Traffic Signal Light Pole, xx’ mast arm w/o luminaire (Install EA Traffic Signal Pole, xx’ mast arm (Install Only) EA Traffic Signal Pedestal Pole (Install Only) EA Street Name Signs (Aluminum) (Illuminated) EA Sign Panel (Class I) EA Sign Panel (Class II) EA Traffic Signal Head, 3-section, 12” lenses EA Traffic Signal Head, 3-section, 12” lenses “Arrow” EA Traffic Signal Head, 5-section, 12” lenses “Vertical” EA Traffic Signal Head, 5-section, 12” lenses “Dog House” EA Pedestrian Head (16-inch) (Countdown) EA Pedestrian Push Buttons EA Intersection Detection System (Camera) LS Microwave Radar Vehicle Detection system LS Traffic Signal Controller Cabinet (P38/P44) EA Traffic Signal Controller (Cobalt) EA Uninterrupted Power Source EA Fiber Optic Cable LF Fiber Termination EA Network switch, power supply and rack mount kit LS Test Fiber Optic Cable LS Pull Box (Type I) EA Pull Box (Type II) EA Pull Box (Type III) EA Pull Box (Special) EA 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -123 Emergency preemption Card EA Emergency preemption detector EA Radio Communications System LS Furnish and Install Electrical Service Connection LS Traffic Control, Mobilization, and Start-up LS Englewood Permit LS Remove Striping and/or surface prep LF 10’x2’ Crosswalks LF Arrows EA Only’s EA Striping (Double Yellow) LF Striping (White) LF A. Pay Item Notes and Clarifications • Removal pay items shall consist of items in the pay item list or items specifically identified on the plans or in writing by the Engineer. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to assure that it has a full and complete understanding of included items prior to bidding. • Removal of traffic signal equipment items shall consist of items in the pay item list or as specifically identified in the plans or in the project special provisions or at a minimum as identified in section 5.10e. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to assure that it has a full and complete understanding of included items prior to bidding. • Reset pay items shall consist of items in the pay item list or items specifically identified on the plans or in writing by the Engineer. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to assure that it has a full and complete understanding of included items prior to bidding. • Reset of traffic signal equipment items shall consist of items in the pay item list or as specifically identified in the plans or in the project special provisions or at a minimum as specified in section 5.10g. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to assure that it has a full and complete understanding of included items prior to bidding. • Common trench is the trench itself not including conduit. • Common boring is the boring itself not including conduit. • Conduit shall include signal cable, elbows, pull wire, weatherheads, adaptors, condulets, saw cutting, excavation, backfill, jacking and drilling pits, removal of pavement, sidewalks, gutters, curbs and their 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -124 replacement in kind to match existing grade and all work necessary to complete the item. • The cost of the traffic signal light pole/mast arm, traffic signal pole/mast arm and the traffic signal pedestal pole shall include the cost of the concrete foundations and all items associated with the installation and construction of the foundations, unless the foundations are existing. See the standard details for concrete foundation size requirements. • Microwave Radar Vehicle Detection shall be paid for based on the detector system required to complete the item. • Fiber optic cable installation shall include all labor and materials required to install the cable including, but not limited to, the following items: - All required splice kits, splicing tools, ancillary hardware and labor to accomplish the splices. - All required Patch Cords. - All required fan-out kit tools, ancillary hardware and labor to accomplish the fan-out. Fiber optic termination shall include all labor and materials required to terminate the interconnect cable and make a complete and operational system including, but not limited to, the following: - All required termination enclosures (including specified features), connectors, adaptors, jumpers, pigtails, ancillary hardware, and labor required to accomplish the termination. - All other work necessary to complete the item. • 16.10k: Test Fiber Optic Cable – Lump sum includes the complete end-to-end OTDR test on all fiber strands (before and after installation), including document submission and the complete end-to- end optical power meter test on all fiber strands, including document submission. • 16.10l: Furnish and Install Electrical Service Connection – Lump sum. This information shall be clarified on the plans. 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -125 • 16.10m: Striping Material (Crosswalks, Arrows, Onlys, Lines) – Striping materials shall be as determined by Englewood Traffic Division of Public Work 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -126 3.2.9 Survey (design, construction and monumentation) The Contractor shall be responsible for construction surveying, calculating, and staking necessary for the construction of all elements of the work. The Contractor shall also locate and preserve existing land monuments based on specific known monuments identified in the Special Provisions of the project.specific known monuments identified in the Special Provisions of the project. Unless otherwise noted, payment for construction surveying and existing monument preservation shall be a subsidiary obligation of the work. The work shall be done under the supervision of a Professional Land Surveyor (PLS) who is experienced and competent in infrastructure construction surveying and licensed in the State of Colorado. The PLS shall be available to review work, resolve problems, and make decisions in a timely manner. Survey records shall be completed as the work is done. Field survey notes for construction surveying and checking by the Contractor shall be recorded in survey records in conformance with industry standards and acceptable practices. All survey records generated shall be the property of the City and shall be available to the City’s Project Manager for inspection or reproduction at all times. All survey records shall be transmitted to the City before final project acceptance. All survey records shall be stamped with the seal of, and signed by, the responsible PLS. "As-built" and "Red-lined" drawings and prints necessary for the construction and preparation of record drawings for all elements of the project shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. All "As-built" and "Red-lined" drawings generated shall be the property of the City and shall be submitted to the Project Manager upon completion. In addition to red• lined prints, the Contractor shall supply the Construction Project Manager with electronic survey data information in the form ".asc", ".txt", and/or ".dwg" files upon request. 3.2.10 Landscaping, Irrigation and Fences Existing landscaping, irrigation and fences which interfere with new construction shall be removed to the extent determined by the Engineer. Wood and wire fences, posts and gates which have a salvage value shall be neatly deposited near the site of removal if so requested by the private property owner. Other fences and masonry materials shall be wasted. Refer to restoration section 3.2.1. 3.2.11 Work Zone Traffic Control 2020 DESIGN CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO Division 3 CONSTRUCTION -127 All construction, maintenance, and utility work in the roadway, or adjacent to the roadway, requires Temporary Traffic Control be set up prior to work being started. Motorists, bicyclists, and pedestrians should be guided in a clear and positive manner while approaching and traversing work zones in accordance with the guidelines set forth in Chapter 6 of the MUTCD. The following principles should be applied: A. Adequate warning, delineation, and channelization should be provided to assist in guiding road users in advance of and through the TTC zone by using proper pavement marking, signing, or other devices that are effective under varying conditions. B. Permanent traffic control devices conflicting or inconsistent with intended travel paths through TTC zones should be removed or covered. However, in intermediate-term stationary, short-term, and mobile operations, where visible permanent devices are inconsistent with intended travel paths, devices that highlight or emphasize the appropriate path should be used. C. To provide acceptable levels of operations, routine day and night inspections of TTC elements should be performed. D. All TTC devices shall be removed as soon as practical when they are no longer needed. When work is suspended for short periods of time, TTC devices that are no longer appropriate shall be removed or covered. CITY OF ENGLEWOOD COLORADO ROAD AND CONCRETE Department of Public Works Engineering Division DRAWN BY: DJK REVISED BY: TRH APPROVED BY: MDA SCALE AS SHOWN UAII:. 8/25/75 � 4/22/97 2/1/2008 10/15/18 2/1/2020 •CITY OF ENGLEWOOD File I nfor mation DETAILS • ■.•DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS DR AWN BY: DJK 1000 ENGLEWOOD PARKWAYENGLEWOOD, co so110 Drawi ng File Nam e: CCDTOOO.DWG DATE: 02/2020 DETAIL NO. E-0 Phone: (303) 762-2500 t-Ac-ad___,.Ve-rs -io-n :-20-2---.0I-Sc _a_le:--'-N -A ---+-U -n i t-s:---'-E n-g-l is -h --+-1s-su-e d-By-: -MD_A _ /T _RH---------1 CONTENT Sheet Number SS-1 TYPICAL SIGN PLACEMENT DETAIL…………………………………………………………..... SS-1 SS-2 STREET NAME SIGN ASSEMBLY……………………………………………………............... SS-2 SS-3 GROUND MOUNTED STREET NAME SIGN DETAIL……………………………..……..… SS-3 SS-4 BIKE LANE SYMBOL …….……………………………..……………………………………………… SS-4 SS-5 SHARED LANE BICYCLE MARKING…………………………..……….………….……..……… SS-5 SS-6 BIKE DETECTOR MARKING……………………………………………………….…………….... SS-6 City of Englewood Standard Signing and Striping Details SS-1 TYPICAL SIGN PLACEMENT DETAIL SS-2 STREET NAME SIGN ASSEMBLY SS-3 GROUND MOUNTED STREET NAME SIGN DETAIL SS-4 BIKE LANE SYMBOL SS-5 SHARED LANE BICYCLE MARKING SS-6 BICYCLE DETECTOR MARKING SHEET NO. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 1 12 CONTENTS TITLE SHEET GENERAL NOTES MAST ARM AND SIGNAL HEADS MAST ARM ATTACHMENT AND POLE BASE LUMINAIRE POLE MAST ARM POLE FOOTINGS (20' THROUGH 80') TEMPORARY SPAN WIRE POLE PEDESTRIAN POLE PEDESTRIAN PUSH BUTTON POLE PEDESTAL POLE CONTROLLER CABINET INSTALLATION SIGNAL HEADS AND MOUNTING GENERAL WIRING NOTES PERMANENT (PRECAST) PULL BOX TEMPORARY (PLASTIC) PULL BOX Englewood STANDARD SIGNAL DETAILS UPDATED JUNE 2019 INDEX SHEET NO. CONTENTS 13 PULL BOX (SPECIAL) LOOP DETECTOR LEAD-IN 14 DETECTORS CONDUIT INSTALLATIONS 15 1 6 17 18 1 9 20 21 UNDERGROUND POWER SCHEMATIC SIGNALS / GROUND TRENCHING OVERHEAD POWER SCHEMATIC SIGNALS / GROUND TRENCHING SCHOOL FLASHING BEACONS -SIDE OF ROAD WARNING / REGULATORY FLASHING BEACON / TYPICAL CROSSWALK MARKING STREET NAME SIGNS BLANK-OUT REGULATORY / WARNING SIGN SIGNAL PHASING / STANDARD INTERSECTION WIRING / TYPICAL LEGEND SHEET 1 OF 21 SHEETS GENERAL NOTES: 1.ALL CONSTRUCTION AND MATERIALS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH Englewood STANDARDS ANDSPECIFICATIONS, THE LATEST EDITION OF THE MUTCD, AND THE PROJECT CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGSAND SPECIFICATIONS INCLUDED HEREIN. IN CASES OF OMISSION FROM DC STANDARDS ANDSPECIFICATIONS, THE MOST CURRENT EDITION OF THE COLORADO DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION (COOT) STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION AND THE LATEST EDITION OFTHE COOT STANDARD PLANS, M&S STANDARDS SHALL APPLY. 2.THE BID QUANTITIES OF THE PROJECT ARE THE RESULT OF A CAREFUL QUANTITY TAKEOFF BY THEPROJECT ENGINEER. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL, HOWEVER, SATISFY HIMSELF AS TO THE ACCURACY OFALL QUANTITIES AND BRING ANY DISCREPANCIES TO THE ATTENTION OF THE PROJECT ENGINEER, INWRITING, AT HIS EARLIEST OPPORTUNITY. 3.ALL LABOR, EQUIPMENT, INCIDENTAL MATERIAL AND WIRING NECESSARY FOR THE INSTALLATION OFTRAFFIC SIGNAL POLE, SIGNAL HEADS, CABINET MODIFICATIONS (INCLUDING SIGNAL PHASE CHANGESAND VEHICLE DETECTION MODIFICATIONS) AND OTHER DEVICES SHALL BE PROVIDED BY THECONTRACTOR AND SHALL NOT BE PAID FOR SEPARATELY, BUT INCLUDED IN THE COST OF THE WORK. 4.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS TO DC TRAFFIC SERVICES FOR APPROVAL ONALL EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. THE CITY SHALL REVIEW THE REQUIRED MATERIALSUBMITTALS AND RETURN COMMENTS WITHIN 5 BUSINESS DAYS. 5.ALL TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT WILL BE MEASURED BY THE VARIOUS TYPES INSTALLED AND SHALLINCLUDE ALL INCIDENTAL MATERIALS AND WIRING NECESSARY FOR THE INSTALLATION AND OPERATIONOF EACH ITEM. 6.THE UTILITY INFORMATION SHOWN ON THE SIGNAL PLANS IS APPROXIMATE ONLY AND IS NOTGUARANTEED TO BE ACCURATE OR ALL INCLUSIVE. TO AVOID ANY DAMAGE TO A UTILITY, THECONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR FIELD VERIFYING THE EXACT LOCATION OF UTILITIES BEFORECOMMENCING ANY DRILLING, BORING, TRENCHING OR OTHER EXCAVATION TYPE WORK. THE CONTRACTORSHALL CONTACT COLORADO 811 AT 811 OR 1-800-922-1987. 7.CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WITH XCEL ENERGY TO INITIATE ELECTRICAL POWER APPLICATIONPROCESS AND DETERMINE POWER SOURCE LOCATION. 8.THE POWER SOURCE SHALL BE 120/240 VOLT 60 AMP METERED SERVICE. IT SHALL INCLUDE AWEATHERPROOF METERED CIRCUIT DISCONNECT BOX AND TYPE Ill PULL BOX. LOCATION OF METERED CIRCUIT DISCONNECT BOX TO BE DETERMINED BY CITY ENGINEER AND SHALL NOT BE PLACED FURTHER THAN 75 FEET FROM THE SIGNAL CABINET. 9.UPON COMPLETION OF WORK, CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE RECORD AS-BUil T DRAWINGS, CORRECTEDPLANS AND ANY OTHER ADDITIONAL DATA REQUIRED BY THE COUNTY. 10.TRAFFIC SIGNAL INSTALLATION AND ALL ASSOCIATED WORK SHALL BE 100% COMPLETE PRIOR TOFLASH TURN ON. THIS INCLUDES ALL PUNCH LIST ITEMS AND OPERATIONAL LUMINAIRES. 11.ALL SIGNAL POLE AND CONTROLLER CABINET LOCATIONS SHOWN IN THE PLANS ARE APPROXIMATEONLY. ACTUAL LOCATIONS SHALL BE APPROVED IN THE FIELD BY ENGLEWOOD TRAFFIC PRIOR TO ANYDRILLING OR EXCAVATION. THE LOCATION OF EACH SIGNAL POLE FOUNDATION SHALL BE POTHOLED,PRIOR TO DRILLING, TO VERIFY WHETHER ANY UTILITY CONFLICTS EXIST. 12.ALL NON-FUNCTIONING TRAFFIC OR PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL HEADS AND PEDESTRIAN PUSH BUTTONSSHALL BE BAGGED WHILE UNDER CONSTRUCTION. BAGS SHALL BE BLACK AND HAVE THE WORDS OUT OFSERVICE. 13.MAST ARMS SHALL BE OF SUFFICIENT LENGTH TO ALLOW A SIGNAL HEAD TO BE MOUNTED IN THECENTER OF THE INSIDE LEFT TURN LANE. TO ENSURE PROPER MAST ARM LENGTHS, THE CONTRACTORSHALL FIELD VERIFY THE EXACT LOCATION OF THE POLE FOUNDATIONS WITH PROJECT AND CITYENGINEERS (PRIOR TO ORDERING THE SIGNAL POLES AND MAST ARMS). 14.THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR STORAGE AND UL Tl MATE DELIVERY OF NEW TRAFFIC POLESAND MAST ARMS TO THE PROJECT SITE UNLESS OTHERWISE APPROVED BY ENGLEWOOD TRAFFICSERVICES. 15.ALL ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SHALL BE PROPERLY GROUNDED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LATESTENGLEWOOD TRAFFIC SIGNAL SPECIFICATIONS AND DETAILS. A GROUND ROD SHALL BE INSTALLED FOREACH POLE AND CONTROLLER CABINET FOUNDATION. 16.ALL SIGNAL CABLE IS CONTINUOUS FROM CONNECTIONS MADE IN THE HAND HOLE COMPARTMENT OFTHE SIGNAL POLE BASE TO THE TERMINAL COMPARTMENT IN THE CONTROLLER CABINET. SPLICINGSHALL NOT BE PERMITTED UNLESS SPECIFICALLY APPROVED BY THE ENGLEWOOD TRAFFIC ENGINEER. 17.ALL HAND HOLE SPLICES SHALL BE BUCHANAN TYPE USING THE PRES-SURE-TOOL PART #C-24CRIMPING TOOL AND SHALL BE STORED IN THE "UP" ORIENTATION. 18.WHENEVER MULTIPLE CABLES FEED EQUIPMENT ON A SINGLE POLE, EACH CABLE SHALL CONTAIN ANEUTRAL WIRE. 19.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE THE LUMINAIRE WIRING AND FINAL HOOK UP. LUMINAIRE FIXTURE SHALLBE APPROVED LED TYPE. EXISTING STREET LIGHTS SHALL NOT BE REMOVED UNTIL NEW LUMINARIES AREOPERATIONAL. 21.SIGNAL HEADS SHALL BE WIRED SEPARATELY FROM THE SIGNAL HEAD TO THE ABOVE GROUND HANDHOLE AT THE BASE OF THE SIGNAL POLE (NO OVERHEAD SPLICES). A SEPARATE 25 CONDUCTORCABLE SHALL RUN FROM THE CONTROLLER CABINET TO THE TRAFFIC POLE HAND HOLE WITH NOSPLICES. WIRING SHALL BE LANDED AND LABELED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LATEST ENGLEWOODTRAFFIC SIGNAL SPECIFICATIONS AND DETAILS. 22.EACH VEHICLE SIGNAL HEAD ON MAST ARMS SHALL HAVE A LOUVERED ALUMINUM BACKPLATE, BLACKIN COLOR, WITH 2 INCH FLUORESCENT YELLOW, DIAMOND GRADE RETROREFLECTIVE BORDER. 23.SIGNAL HEAD HOUSINGS SHALL BE POLYCARBONATE AND BLACK IN COLOR. MAST ARM MOUNTEDSIGNAL HEADS AND SIGNS SHALL USE PELCO ASTRO-BRAC OR SKY-BRAC TYPE MOUNTING BRACKETS. 24.ALL VEHICLE AND PEDESTRIAN INDICATIONS SHALL BE APPROVED SOLID STATE LED TYPE. ALL VEHICLEINDICATIONS SHALL BE 12-INCH. ALL PEDESTRIAN INDICATIONS SHALL BE 16-INCH WITH A COUNTDOWNTIMER. 25.EACH APPROACH SHALL INCLUDE OPTICOM DETECTION IN ACCORDANCE WITH LATEST ENGLEWOOD TRAFFIC SIGNAL SPECIFICATIONS. 26.THE CONTROLLER CABINET SHALL BE A P38/P44 CABINET PAINTED COOT SILVER WITH AN ANTI-GRAFFITI COATING AND A PAINTED WHITE INTERIOR IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LATEST ENGLEWOODTRAFFIC SIGNAL SPECIFICATIONS AND DETAILS. THE CONTROLLER CABINET SHALL BE INSTALLED SUCHTHAT, WITH THE FRONT DOOR OPEN, A TECHNICIAN CAN VIEW BOTH THE CONTROLLER AND THE SIGNALOPERATIONS. CABINET BASE SHALL BE APPROVED POLYMER CONCRETE. 27.THE TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONTROLLER SHALL BE A ECONOLITE COBALT TYPE COMPATIBLE WITH SIGNALSYSTEM SOFTWARE. CONFLICT MONITOR PROVIDED SHALL BE THE THE EDI MMU2-16LE SMART MONITOR. 28.AN UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SOURCE (UPS) SHALL BE INSTALLED IN THE CONTROLLER CABINET. THEUPS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LATEST ENGLEWOOD TRAFFIC SIGNAL SPECIFICATIONS. 29.COMMUNICATION AND ALL INTERCONNECT EQUIPMENT INSTALLED INSIDE AND OUTSIDE THE CONTROLLERCABINET SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LATEST ENGLEWOOD TRAFFIC SIGNAL SPECIFICATIONS. 30.THE TRAFFIC SIGNAL CABINET, CONTROLLER AND ALL ANCILLARY CABINET EQUIPMENT NEEDED TOPROVIDE PLANNED SIGNAL OPERATIONS SHALL BE DELIVERED TO ENGLEWOOD TRAFFIC OPERATIONS FORINSPECTION, PROGRAMMING AND TESTING. A MAXIMUM OF 15 BUSINESS DAYS SHALL BE ALLOWEDPRIOR TO SUBSEQUENT PICKUP BY CONTRACTOR. ANY CABINET, CONTROLLER OR OTHER EQUIPMENTERRORS WILL RESULT IN A RETURN OF THE CABINET ASSEMBLY TO CONTRACTOR AND A RESTART OF15 BUSINESS DAYS FOR REINSPECTION, PROGRAMMING AND TESTING UPON SUBSEQUENT DELIVERY. 31.All PULL BOXES AND CONDUIT SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LATEST ENGLEWOOD TRAFFICSIGNAL SPECIFICATIONS. ALL MULTIPLE CONDUIT RUNS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN A COMMON BORE ORTRENCH. 32.ALL CONDUIT SHALL HAVE PULL TAPE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LATEST ENGLEWOOD TRAFFIC SIGNALSPECIFICATIONS LEFT INSIDE CONDUIT WHEN CONSTRUCTION IS COMPLETED. 33.ALL INTERCONNECT CONDUIT TO INCLUDE A #14 AWG SOLID COPPER WIRE, IN ACCORDANCE WITH THELATEST ENGLEWOOD TRAFFIC SIGNAL SPECIFICATIONS, THROUGH ENTIRE RUN TO FACILITATE FUTURELOCATING. 34.CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL CITY PROVIDED DELINEATORS ON ALL PULL BOXES. COST OFINSTALLATION SHALL BE INCLUDED IN THE COST OF THE PULL BOX. 35.WHEN FIBER INTERCONNECT IS BEING INSTALLED, A MINIMUM OF 100 FEET SHALL BE COILED IN EACHCOMMUNICATION VAULT, A MINIMUM OF 50 FEET IN EACH PULL BOX AND A MINIMUM OF 10 FEET IN THECONTROLLER CABINET. 36.VEHICLE DETECTION AND ASSOCIATED HARDWARE SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LATESTENGLEWOOD TRAFFIC SIGNAL SPECIFICATIONS. STOP BAR DETECTION SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR ALLAPPROACHES AND ADVANCE DETECTION AS SPECIFIED IN DESIGN PLANS. 37.CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WITH VEHICLE DETECTION MANUFACTURER REPRESENTATIVE TODETERMINE FINAL PLACEMENT AND ORIENTATION OF DETECTION. VEHICLE DETECTION REPRESENTATIVESHALL BE PRESENT FOR DETECTION SET UP AND INITIAL OPERATION. 38.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL ACCESSIBLE PEDESTRIAN PUSH BUTTONS, PEDESTRIAN SIGNAGE ANDASSOCIATED RACK MOUNTED EQUIPMENT AND WIRING IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LATEST ENGLEWOODTRAFFIC SIGNAL SPECIFICATIONS. 39.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY AND COORDINATE ALL STRIPING WITH CITY ENGINEER PRIOR TOREMOVAL AND INSTALLATION. CONTACT ENGLEWOOD ENGINEER TO COORDINATE. 40.APPROPRIATE REGULATORY SIGNS, WARNING SIGNS AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS (ARROWS, SYMBOLS,ETC.), APPROVED BY ENGLEWOOD, SHALL BE IN PLACE PRIOR TO SIGNAL OPERATION. 41.STRIPING AND MARKING LEGENDS MAY BE SUBJECT TO MATERIALS CHANGES DUE TO SEASON AND ORWEATHER. TEMPORARY STRIPING MAY BE REQUIRED. FINAL SPECIFIED MATERIALS SHALL BE INSTALLEDWHEN WEATHER/SEASON ALLOWS AS APPROVED BY ENGLEWOOD TRAFFIC SERVICES. 42.FOR ALL DESIGN OR CONSTRUCTION INQUIRIES CONTACT CITY ENGINEER, 303-762-2300. FOR 24HOUR EMERGENCY AND NON EMERGENCY, CONTACT ENGLEWOOD TRAFFIC AT303-762-2449. ENGLEWOOD STANDARD NOTES:1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. THE ENGLEWOOD ENGINEERING DIRECTOR SIGNATURE AFFIXED TO THIS DOCUMENT INDICATES THE ENGINEERING DIVISION HAS REVIEWED THE DOCUMENT AND FOUND IT IN GENERAL CONFORMANCE WITH THE ENGLEWOOD ROADWAY DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS. THE ENGLEWOOD ENGINEERING DIRECTOR, THROUGH ACCEPTANCE OF THIS DOCUMENT, ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY, OTHER THAN STATED ABOVE, FOR THE COMPLETENESS AND/OR ACCURACY OF THESE DOCUMENTS. THE OWNER AND ENGINEER UNDERSTAND THAT THE RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE ENGINEERING ADEQUACY OF THE FACILITIES DEPICTED IN THIS DOCUMENT LIES SOLELY WITH THE PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER REGISTERED IN THE STATE OF COLORADO WHOSE STAMP AND SIGNATURE IS AFFIXED TO THIS DOCUMENT.ALL CONSTRUCTION SHALL CONFORM TO ENGLEWOOD STANDARDS. ANY CONSTRUCTION NOT SPECIFICALLY ADDRESSED BY THESE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS WILL BE BUil T IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE LATEST EDITION OF THE MOST STRINGENT OF THE FOLLOWING: -THE ENGLEWOOD ROADWAY DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS-THE COLORADO DEPARTMENT OF HIGHWAYS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD ANDBRIDGE CONSTRUCTION-THE COLORADO DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION M STANDARDS ALL MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP SHALL BE SUBJECT TO INSPECTION BY THE CITY ENGINEERING DIVISION AS APPLICABLE. THE CITY RESERVES THE RIGHT TO ACCEPT OR REJECT ANY SUCH MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP THAT DOES NOT CONFORM TO ITS STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ENGLEWOOD ENGINEERING INSPECTION DIVISION, 303-762-2300, A MINIMUM OF 24-HOURS AND A MAXIMUM OF 72-HOURS PRIOR TOSTARTING CONSTRUCTION. CONTRACTOR SHALL CITYY ENGINEERING INSPECTION DIVISIONWHEN WORKING OUTSIDE OF THE PUBLICRIGHT-OF-WAY ON ANY FACILITY THAT WILL BE CONVEYED TO THE CITY, URBANDRAINAGE & FLOOD CONTROL DISTRICT, OR OTHER SPECIAL DISTRICT FOR MAINTENANCE (STORM SEWER, ENERGY DISSIPATERS, DETENTION OUTLET STRUCTURES, OR OTHER DRAINAGE INFRASTRUCTURES). FAILURE TO NOTIFY THE ENGINEERING INSPECTION DIVISION TO ALLOW THEM TO INSPECT THE CONSTRUCTION MAY RESULT IN NON-ACCEPTANCE OF THE FACILITY/INFRASTRUCTURE BY THE CITY AND/OR URBAN DRAINAGE. CONSTRUCTION WILL NOT BEGIN UNTIL ALL APPLICABLE PERMITS HAVE BEEN ISSUED. IF A ENGLEWOOD ENGINEERING INSPECTOR IS NOT AVAILABLE AFTER PROPER NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY HAS BEEN PROVIDED, THE PERMITTEE MAY COMMENCE WORK IN THE INSPECTOR'S ABSENCE. HOWEVER, CITY RESERVES THE RIGHT NOT TO ACCEPT THE IMPROVEMENT IF SUBSEQUENT TESTING REVEALS AN IMPROPER INSTALLATION. THE LOCATION OF EXISTING UTILITIES SHALL BE VERIFIED BY THE CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO ACTUAL CONSTRUCTION. FOR INFORMATION CONTACT COLORADO 811 AT 811 OR 1-800-922-1987 THE CONTRACTOR SHALL HAVE ONE (1) COPY OF THE PLANS SIGNED BY THE CITY ENGINEERING DIRECTOR, ONE (1) COPY OF THE ROADWAY DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS, AS AMENDED, AND ALL APPLICABLE PERMITS AT THE JOB SITE AT ALL TIMES. 8.A TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN, IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUAL ON UNIFORM TRAFFICCONTROL DEVICES, SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO CITY FOR ACCEPTANCE WITH THERIGHT-OF-WAY USE AND CONSTRUCTION PERMIT APPLICATION. A RIGHT-OF-WAY USEAND CONSTRUCTION PERMIT WILL NOT BE ISSUED WITHOUT AN ACCEPTED TRAFFICCONTROL PLAN FOR TRAFFIC CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION. 9.THE CONSTRUCTION PLANS SHALL BE CONSIDERED VALID FOR THREE (3) YEARS FROMTHE DATE OF COUNTY ACCEPTANCE, AFTER WHICH TIME THESE PLANS SHALL BE VOIDAND WILL BE SUBJECT TO RE-REVIEW AND RE-ACCEPTANCE BY ENGLEWOOD. 10.ENGLEWOOD STANDARD DETAILS SHALL NOT BE MODIFIED. ANY NON-STANDARD DETAILSWILL BE CLEARLY IDENTIFIED AS SUCH. 11.STANDARD ENGLEWOOD HANDICAP RAMPS ARE TO BE CONSTRUCTED AT ALL CURBRETURNS AND AT MID-BLOCK LOCATIONS OPPOSITE OF ONE OF THE CURB RETURNS OFALL "T" INTERSECTIONS AS IDENTIFIED ON THESE PLANS. 12.THE PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER, REGISTERED IN THE STATE OF COLORADO, SIGNING THESEPLANS IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ENSURING THAT THE DETAILS INCLUDED ARE COMPATIBLEWITH THE STANDARD CITY DETAILS CONTAINED IN THE LATEST VERSIONS OF THE CRITERIAMANUALS. THIS INCLUDES, BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO:-ENGLEWOOD ROADWAY DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS-ENGLEWOOD STORM DRAINAGE DESIGN AND TECHNICAL CRITERIA-ENGLEWOOD GRADING, EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL CRITERIA-COOT M & S STANDARDS-MUTCD-URBAN STORM DRAINAGE CRITERIA MANUAL VOLUMES 1,2 & 3 13.A TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION ACCESS PERMIT FROM ENGLEWOOD MAY BE REQUIRED FORANY PROJECT. SHEET 2 OF 21 SHEETS ri DETAIL 1DETAIL 3 � I----"L" --------j ,,._,5=--'c"----. <=<=======:$1-------";-1 REMO VABLE END CAP J 35' LUM I NA IRE MOUNTING HEIGHT >-------SEE POLE AND SIGNAL ARM SM/CB POLE TYPES DETAIL 2 _/ DETAIL 8 � L� 1' -0" a I l' 20' -0" 35' -0" (CB POLE) DETAIL 11 ____,/ ,J\_ DETAIL 9 & 10 �10'1 8� § @® © 15•�� - @ --l3F 1 o. ,�1 o. I s§ � § @® © © 15•�--,___ @ l SM POLES -SINGLE 20' SM POLES J 40 THRU 55' SPANS 20' THRU 35' \§ ��2 j 1"L" 7 SPANS 35' M.H SM POLES 10' & 15' SPANS 20' ;�_ r-- 1-0' ��,--- IO' 1------1 §,>---....,-------,15 ' - � ® 135' VY © © @ CB POLES -SINGLE DEVICE DE SCRIPTION A 1 2"-5 SEC. SIGNAL WITH BACKPLATE B 30" X 36" REGULATORY SIGN C 1 2"-3 SEC. SIGNAL WITH BACKPLAT E ID 18" X 7 2 " STREET NAME SIGN PROJ 30' THRU 55' SPANS .AREA (FT 2 ) WEIGHT 15.00 75 7.50 23 8.67 45 9.00 2 7 20' (LBS) l 20' J CB POLE - DOUBLE 25' & 30' SPANS VIBRATION NOTE: ALTHOUGH RARE, VIBRATIONS SEVER ENOUGH TO CAUSE DAMAGE CAN OCCASIONALLY OCCUR IN STRUCTURES OF ALL TYPES. BECAUSE THEY ARE INFLUENCED BY MANY INTERACTING VARIABLE, VIBRATIONS ARE GENERALLY UNPREDICTABLE. THE USER'S MAINTENANCE PROGRAM SHOULD INCLUDE OBSERVATION FOR EXCESSIVE VIBRATION AND EXAMINATION FOR ANY STRUCTURAL DAMAGE OR BOLT LOOSENING. THE VALMONT WARRANTY SPECIFICALLY EXCLUDES FATIGUE FAILURE OR SIMILAR PHENOMENA RESULTING FROM INDUCED VIBRATION, HARMONIC OSCILLATION OR RESONANCE ASSOCIATED WITH MOVEMENT OF AIR CURRENTS AROUND THE PRODUCT. MAXIMUM LOADING INFORMATION L================================================================== �================================================================================================i------------------------� -DESIGN NOTE: COMPONENT MATERIAL DATA ASTM MIN.DESIGNATION YIELD(KSII COMPONENT ASTM MIN. DESIGNATION YIELD (KSII POLE SHAFT - 7 GA. WALL A595 GR. A 55 f::A'::-NC:.,CH:::--'O--::-R�B=-OL_T_S ____ -----t-__ \:---;l;:c::�--4---t---;::;-5;::-5_POLE SHAFT - 0 .188"WALL A572 GR. 65 55 rP:-0--,--L E=--B--=A:-S _E=-=-=-c=c--------t-----:-::c:::-----i-------;::;-3--;:--6_ARM SHAFTS -7, 5, 3 GA. A595 GR. A 55 rM_A _ST_A_R _M _S,...,I,---M __ P _LE----,X,----,----=--c-_-t--------,A-=3--::-c6::-------t-3 _6_ARM SHAFTS -0.313"WALL A572 GR.65 65 MAST ARM CONN. BOLTS A325 FINISH NOTES: �G_A _L V_A_N_I _Z_ED _H_A _RD_W_A_R _E _� __ A_1 _53_�_-_FINISH COAT -TGIC OR URETHANE POLYESTER POWDER. FINISH COLOR -DARK OLIVE / FEDERAL GREEN, NUMBER 14056 VALMONT FINISH SPEC -F-264T POLE DATA SINGLE DOUBLE POLE TUBE POLE BASE SIGNAL SIGNAL GAUGE BOLT POLE ARM ARM BASE TOP SQUARE CIRCLE THK.LENGTH DR HOLE TYPE SPAN SPAN DIA. DIA. (FT)THICK "S" "Y" "M" (FT) (FT) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) "Z" (IN) SM 10 THRU 35 13. 00 9.92 22.00 7 19.00 17 50 1. 75 2.00 SM 40 THRU 55 15. 00 11.92 22.00 0. 188 20.00 19 00 1. 75 2.00 CB 20 THRU 55 15. 00 10. 10 35.00 0. 188 20.00 19 00 1. 75 2.00 CB 25 & 30 15 00 10. 10 35.00 0. 188 20.00 19 00 1. 75 2.00 DIA. "K " (IN) 1. 751. 75I. 751. 75 CB -25 -30 -FP ANCHOR LENGTH "J" (IN) 84.00 84.00 84.00 84.00 \_l l POWDER COATED FINISH 2ND SIGNAL ARM SPAN (WHEN SIGNAL ARM SPAN VALMONT POLE TYPE DES I GNA TI ON EXAM PLE SIGNAL ARM DATA BOLT SIGNAL ARM TUBE HOOK THREAD FIXED FREE GAUGE MAX. LENGTH END ENO OR ARM "H" "U" DIA. DIA. THICK SPAN (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) (FT) 6.00 8.00 7.00 5.60 7 10.00 6.00 8.00 7.00 4.90 7 15.00 6.00 8.00 8.00 5.20 7 20 00 6.00 8.00 10.00 6.50 7 25.00 10.00 5.80 3 30 00 10.00 5. 10 3 35 00 REQ' D) (i;_ ANCHOR HOLE (i;_ SIGNAL ARM "�: ALL ANGLES MEASURED CLOCKWISE FROM HANDHOLE AS VIEWED FROM SMALL END OF POLE BOLT__)C. 45 ° - (i;_ HANDHOLERADIAL INDEX -SM POLES (i;_ LUMINAIRE ARM � (i;_ SIGNAL ARM/ � 315• 12.50 6.90 5 40 00 13 00 6.70 3 45 00 13 00 6.36 SEE 50 00 DET. 6 13 00 5.66 SEE 55.00 DET. 6 180 ° ( (a; � ALL ANGLES MEASURED q;_ 2ND SIGNAL ARM � • �10 CLOCKWISE FROM HAND-(WHEN REQ'D) HOLE AS VIEWED FROM SMALL END OF POLE goo (i;_ TOP HANDHDLE q;_ ANCHOR BOLT (DOUBLE SIGNAL ARM)HOLE 45' i--__j__------1--------+-------------------, I TITLE ENGLE WOOD COL OR ADO B GGL 08/22/ 11 GGL 08/22/ 11 ADDED PG4-SIGNAL LIGHT POLE A MRL1 06/27 /04 MRL 06/27 /04 ADDED LUM I NA IRE ARM -GSM1 05/19/04 TPC 05/25/04 - - - - -- - - - - - - - - -REV DRAWN BY DATE CHECK BY DA TE TRAFFIC SIGNAL STRUCTURES - MAST ARM AND SIGNAL HEADSDESCRIPTION � Q;_ HANDHOLES RADIAL INDEX -CB POLES THESE TRAFFIC SIGNAL SUPPORT STRUCTURES ARE DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOADING AND ALLOWABLE STRESS REQUIREMENTS OF 2001 AASHTO "ST ANDA RD SPEC IF I CAT ION FOR STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS FOR HIGHWAY SIGNS, LUMINAIRES AND TRAFFIC SIGNALS", FOURTH EDITION. WIND LOADS ARE BASED ON A BASIC WIND SPEED OF 100 MPH WITH THE RECURRENCE INTERVAL OF 50 YEARS, AND A FATIGUE CATEGORY OF ll. FATIGUE LOADS ARE BASE ON THE REQUIREMENTS OF SECTION 11.7 AND THE FOLLOWING DESIGN LOADS: VORTEX SHEDDING: NOT APPLICABLE FOR STRUCTURES WITH TAPER OF AT LEAST 0.14 IN/FT, PER AASHTO. NATURAL WIND GUSTS: THE YEARLY MEAN WIND SPEED FOR NATURAL WIND GUSTS WILL BE ASSUMED TO BE 11 .2 MPH. GALLOPING: STRUCTURES ARE NOT DESIGNED TO RESIST PERIODIC GALLOPING FORCES. ARE TRUCK-INDUCED GUST: STRUCTURES DESIGNED TO INCLUDE TRUCK-INDUCED SPECIFIED AVERAGE TRUCK SPEED IS 65 GUSTS. (THE MPH) . SHEET 3 OF 21 SHEETS REMOVABLE POLE CAP SECURED TD POLE TOP WITH (3)SET SCREWS. "C" HOOK FOR WIRING AND HANDLING -0. 75" DIA. COMMERCIAL GRADE HOT ROLLED BAR 5. 94" 1. 00"MIN. DETAIL 1 POLE TOP 7" 2" DIA. ACCESS HOLE (3)-0.75" X 1.75" HEX CAP SCREWS .25 1. 00" 0.250" THICK GUSSETS DETAIL 2 LUMINAIRE ARM ATTACHMENT DETAIL "L" L 8" NOM. STRAIGHT SECTIONREFORMED TO 2.375" 0.0. c::::::: -t�8 oj\ 2' -O" DETAIL 3 ARM RISE AFTER LOADING IS BETWEEN -0' DEG. +2 ° DEG FROM THE HORIZONTAL. ARM SPAN FIXED END FREE END Ill II DIA. DIA GA. (FT) (IN) (IN) 11 10 3.80 2.38 11 15 4.50 2.38 11 3 I LUMINAIRE ARM DATA � END SECTION WITH HOLE FOR 0.53" BOLT BASE SECTION WITH FIELD DRILLED HOLE FOR 0.63" BOLT FIELD ASSEMBLED TO ACHIEVE A SNUG TIGHT JOINT 0 .63" THRU BOLT (MIN. OVERLAP NOT LESS THAN -t-----j 1 .5 TIMES THE I.D. OF THE END SECTION) SPAN 50.00' 55.00' DETAIL 4 TYP _31 lf1 C\J DETAIL ARM SECTION DATA BASE SECTION END SECTION LENGTH IWALL THICK LENGTH I GAUGE 12.27' I 0. 313"40.30' I 7 12.27' I 0. 313"45.30' I 7 SIGNAL ARM SLIP JOINT 21 .25" 17. 50" (4) -1. 50" X 4.25"HEX HEAD BOLTS WITH(1)WASHER PER BOLT SEE SIGNAL ARM SIMPLEX PLATE WELD DETAIL 8 FOR MAST ARM CONNECTION. 1. 50" 0 . 75" X O . 75" CHAMFERS FDR---� GALVANIZE VENTING 0 .50" THICK GUSSETS ATTACHMENT -SINGLE (8) -1.50" X 4 .25"HEX HEAD BOLTS WITH(1)WASHER PER BOLT SEE SIGNAL ARM SIMPLEX PLATE WELD DETAIL 8 FOR MAST ARM CONNECTION. 0.75" X 0.75" CHAMFERS FDR---� GALVANIZE VENTING. 0. 50" THICK GUSSETS DETAIL 6 SIGNAL ARM ATTACHMENT -DOUBLE TITLE ENGLEWOOD COLORADO TRAFFIC SIGNAL STRUCTURES - MAST ARM ATTACHMENT AND POLE BASE SHAFT ("T"+.44) x"T" 0.25" STAINLESS STEEL HEX BOLT INTO TUBE WALL NUT COVER BASE PLATE DETAIL 10 0 NUT COVER CONTINUOUS BACK UP RING 0 .25" THK. X 2. 00" WIDE ARM BASE PLATE (4) -ANCHOR BOLTS WITH(2)HEX NUTS AND (2) WASHERSPER BOLT WITH THREADED ,·:ei t·J" END GALVANIZED AT LEAST 12". DETAIL 7 SIGNAL ARM SIMPLEX PLATE WELD (T -SHAFT WALL THICKNESS) U-----.-<Q 188" T-.06 (T-.06) _06 POLE SHAFT WALL HANDHDLE RIMS FOR 11,7,5 � 3GA. POLES FORMED FROM 5" BLACK PIPE. ALL OTHER RIMS FORMED FROM 6. 75" D. D. X C 0 .50" WALL (70 KSI MIN.) D.D.M. TUBING. T+ .06 45• (2)-0.25" HEX HEAD STAINLESS STEEL SCREWS HANDHDLE COVER 11 GAUGE H.R.M.S. COVER MOUNTING SECTION A-A CLIP 0.50" NUT HOLDER WITH FASTENERS FDR GROUNDING POLE WALL A 7 GA. 7.56" 0. 188" 7.56" DETAIL 8 B B 5. 19" 5. 50"HANDHOLE SEAL WELD C 0. 280" 0. 500" 0.25" THICK BACK-UP RING DETAIL 9 "Y" POLE BASE INSIDE DIAMETER MINUS 1.00" POLE BASE DETAIL 11 I ANCHOR BOLT SHEET 4 OF 21 SHEETS DETAILl�� SEE PED POLE DATA 15' -0" = DETAIL 2 ]\ 0 DETAIL 3 � �I ::::::::i MATERIAL DATA ASTM COMPONENT DESIGN A TIDN 4" SCHEDULE 40 PIPE A501,A513,A618, OR A500 GR. B ALUMINUM TRANSFORMER BASE CLASS 356. O-T6 ANCHOR BOLTS F1554 GR. 55 FINISH NOTES: FINISH COAT -TGIC OR URETHANE POLYESTER POWDER FINISH COLOR -DARK OLIVE/ FEDERAL GREEN, NUMBER 14056 VALMONT FINISH SPEC. -F-264T POLE SCHEDULE POLE TUBE POLE BASE ANCHOR BOLT BASE TOP TRANSFORMER DIA. LENGTH HOOK QTY. LENGTH THICK DIA. DIA. (FT) (IN) BASE "K" "J" "H" (IN) (IN) TYPE (IN) (IN) (IN) 4.50 4.50 13.83 0.237 TUCKER 0.75 17 3 MIN. YIELD (KSI) 36 55 THREAD LENGTH "U" (IN) 6 L" "C" HOOK FOR WIRING AND t I 4.94" HANDLING -0.50" DIA. COMM � I t CIAL GRADE HOT ROLLED BAR :=,____ � 1. 00"i--MIN. DETAIL 1 I POLE TOP INTERNAL PIPE THREADS 0.25" HEX HEAD SCREW \l 'o 8" X 8.25" � \J' DOOR OPENING 12"-14" BOLT CIRCLE r 14" SQUARE DETAIL 2 I TRANSFORMER BASE ,·:� "U" (4)-ANCHOR BOLTS WITH (l)HEX NUT AND (1) WASHER 7 "J" PER BOLT WITH THREADED iEND GALVANIZED AT LEAST 12". -----1---"H" DETAIL 3 I ANCHOR BOLT TITLE ENGLEWOOD COLORADO TRAFFIC SIGNAL STRUCTURES - LUMINAIRE POLE SHEET 5 OF 21 SHEETS 6" DETAIL 4 SEE POLE DATA >------"L" -------< DETAIL 1 SEE LUMINAIRE ARM DATA DETAIL 5 DETAIL 6 & 7 DETAIL 3 "R" MATERIAL DATA ASTM MIN. COMPONENT DESIGNATION YIELD COMPONENT (KSI) 35' -0" LUM I NA IRE MOUNTING HEIGHT ASTM MIN. DESIGNATION YIELD IKSI) "C" HOOK FOR WIRING AND HANDLING-0.50" DIA. COMMERCIAL GRADE HOT ROLLED BAR 0. 50" DETAIL 1 POLE TOP 1.00" MIN ,,__ _______ "L " _______ __, � Is" N□M. STRAIGHT SECTION j REFORMED TD 2.375" 0.0. ---- ";_R "-+-I �---========----==�=DI � s" ARM SPAN FIXED END 11 L II DIA' (FT) (IN) 10 3.80 DETAIL 3 I FREE END DIA. (IN) 2.38 GA. 11 11 RISE HEIGHT "R" (IN) 4. 13 LUMINAIRE ARM DATA t.LUMINAIRE ARM 7" 2" DIA. ACCESS HOLE (3) -0.75" X 2.25" HEX CAP SCREWS 2" .25 I. 00" 0.250" THICK GUSSETS DETAIL 4 LUMINAIRE ARM ATTACHMENT HANDHOLE RIM FORMED FROM 6. 75" 0. D. X0. 50" WALL (70KSI MIN.) 0.0.M.TUBING 0.500" COVER MTG. CLIP (T -SHAFT WALL THICKNESS) POLE TUBE WALL T-.06 (T-.06) _06 T+.06 45• (2) -0.25" HEX HEADSTAINLESS STEEL SCREWSHANDHOLE COVER 11 GAUGE H.R.M.S. SECTION A-A 0.50" NUT HOLDER WITH FASTENERS FOR GROUNDING. LOCATED AT 180' FROM HANDHOLE 5.50" POLE SHAFT A595 GR. A 55 GALVANIZING -HARDWARE A153 ARM SHAFT A595 GR. A 55 LUM. CONNECTION BOLT POLE BASE A36 36 LUM. ARM ATTACHMENTS ANCHOR BOLTS FINISH NOTES: FINISH COAT -TGIC DR URETHANE POLYESTER POWDER. FINISH COLOR -DARK OLIVE/ FEDERAL GREEN, NUMBER 14056. FINISH SPECIFICATION -F264T A325 A36 F1554 36 55 \:.ANCHOR HOLE BOLT ALL ANGLES MEASURED t.HANDHOLE CLOCKWISE FROM HANDHOLE AS VIEWED FROM SMALL END OF POLE RADIAL INDEX 7.56" DETAIL 5 HANDHOLE TABLE 2: POLE DATA DESIGN NOTE: SINGLE POLE TUBE PO LE BASE QTY. ARM BOLT SPAN BASE TOP LENGTH THICK SQUARE CIRCLE THK. (FT) 0.0. D.D."S" "M" (IN) (IN)(FT) (IN) (IN) "Y"(IN) (IN) 10 8.75 3.85 35.00 7 11.50 12.00 1 . 25 ANCHOR BOLT HOLE OR DIA. LENGTH HOOK SLOT "K" "J" "H" "Z" (IN) (IN) (IN) (IN) 1. 38X 1. 25 42.00 6.00 1. 94 THREAD 7.00 THREAD LENGTH "U" (IN) 6.00 THESE TRAFFIC SIGNAL LIGHTING SUPPORT STRUCTURES ARE DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOADING AND ALLOWABLE STRESS REQUIREMENTS OF 2001 AASHTO "STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS FOR HIGHWAY SIGNS, LUMINAIRES AND TRAFFIC SIGNALS", FOURTH EDITION. WIND LOADS ARE BASED ON A BASIC WIND SPEED OF 100 MPH WITH THE RECURRENCE INTERVAL OF 50 YEARS. ENGLEWOOD COLORADO 2001 AASHTO DESIGN CRITERIA TRAFFIC SIGNAL LIGHT POLE STRUCTURES - MAST ARM POLE FOOTINGS NUT COVER "Y" POLE BASE ---DIA.+ 0.06" DETAIL 6 DETAIL 7 HEX BOLT INTO TUBE WALL NUT COVER BASE PLATE "Z" TUBE WALL THK. POLE BASE NUT COVER " K " ----j i-- 14)-ANCHOR BOLTS WITH 12)HEX NUTS AND (2) WASHERS PER BOLT WITH THREADED "J" END GALVANIZED TO AT LEAST12" FROM END j DETAIL 8 I ANCHOR BOLT SHEET 6 OF 21 SHEETS 8'-10' '-:-b --. I'?" ---::--J=r - ---,11 I I DETAILS THIS SHEET CABLE RING-5/16"x2" LIGHT GALVANIZED ZINC 0 I I I I (/) w f:r: ('.)-w :r: - CX) SPAN VARIES 1 1 i------------------+---+-------->HI SEE DETAIL "B" SEE DETAIL "D" ALL SIGNAL HEADS AND SIGNS SHALL BE TETHERED WITH 1 / 4" CABLE . z 2 - 3' MIN. ..- FROM FACE OF CURB 5' MIN. FROM EDGE OF PAVEMENT IF NO CURBING 1•8' MIN.·I SEE DETAIL "A" . X <( - (J) ..--- MAIN ST. -0 SEE DETAIL I I BREAK-AWAY TETHER ASSEMBLY, 1 1 /2" PIPE • BREAK-AWAY ASSEMBLY ADJUSTABLE BREAK-AWAY ASSEMBLY STEEL TETHER PLATE MINIMUM 3" GALVANIZED WEATHERHEAD SPAN WIRE SHALL BE STRUNG SO THAT A THREE PERCENT SAG EXISTS AFTER SIGNAL HEADS ARE INSTALLED. BOTTOM OF ALL SIGNAL HEADS SHALL BE ON THE SAME PLANE. HANDHOLE PULL BOX & CONDUIT-INSTALL POLE IF NEEDED FOR DETECTOR LEADS OR SERVICE INSTALLATION, OR IF DIRECTED BY ENGINEER �2' DIRT BACKFILL, COMPLETED AFTER ELECTRICAL INSPECTION INCREASE TO 13' IF LUMINAIRE *INCLUDED . - ----UNDERGROUND STRAPPING, ATTACHED TO POLE N I L *STUB 3" DIAMETER CONDUIT FROMPULL BOX, INTO POLE * - :.. . . . :. . · ... ... . . ... .. .. . . .. . . . ,. 1 • : : :: . . ' _: � ·..•... .... 0 .. ':. . . . . ·• .. . . ... :: .. . _, 5/8"x12' COPPERWELD GROUND ROD -PUT IN PULL BOX, IF PRESENT CONCRETE CLASS B -·-.. ·• •· ... . ·• ... .. .. --: .•. , ..... :. ·: : ....... . : . CRUSHED----�"--".__,,AJ ROCK 1. 30". I (3" MIN. DEPTH) DETAIL "c"TYPICAL TRAFFIC SIGNAL SPAN WIRE POLE FOOTING (CAST IN PLACE) GENERAL NOTES 1.SPAN WIRE POLES SHALL BE FINISHED PER ENGLEWOODPAINT SPECIFICATION OR APPROVED EQUAL. 2.DESIGN CRITERIA SHALL MEET LATEST AASHTO EDITION OF "STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS FOR HIGHWAY SIGNS, LUMINAIRES AND TRAFFIC SIGNALS," FOR A WIND VELOCITY OF 90 MPH. STEEL BRACKET SINGLE HOLE TETHER PLATE SINGLE HOLE TETHER P LATE -------..... 0 � VARIES 0 JAM NUT AND 5/8" WASHER POLE CAP 3.SPAN WIRE POLES SHALL BE FABRICATED OF STEEL WITH AMINIMUM YIELD STRENGTH OF 35 KSI. AND A MINIMUM WEIGHTPER LINEAR FOOT AS FOLLOWS: 40.4 POUNDS FOR 10 INCHDIAMETER POLES AND 49.5 POUNDS FOR 12 INCH DIAMETER SPAN WIRE� HANGER DETAIL "A" TETHERING OPTIONS 0 WHERE BACKPLATES ARE REQUIRED, THE SIGNAL PANEL IS TO BE LOWERED SO THAT THE BACKPLATE IS 1" (MIN.) BELOW MESSENGER CABLE. -9" DRIP LOOP DETAIL "D" TYPICAL SPAN WIRE MOUNTING 6" MIN. - N ..--- 5/8" THIMBLE EYE BOLT SHORT BAIL STRAND VICE -----CABLE RING 12" MAX. 5/16"x2" LIGHT � GALVANIZED ZINC 9" DRIP LOOP --------:r ETH ER CAB LE .___2" NIPPLE AND WEATHERHEAD (3" ON POLE NEAREST CONTROLLER CABINET) DETAIL "B" TYPICAL CABLE AND TETHER 1 NSTALLATION POLES. POLES SHALL BE INSTALLED SO THAT THEY WILL BEPLUMB WHEN DEFLECTED BY THE INSTALLED LOAD. SPAN WIRECABLE SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 3/8 INCH DIAMETER, RATEDAT A MINIMUM OF 13,000 POUNDS. 4.SPAN WIRE SIGNAL HEADS SHALL HAVE ONE POWER FEED WIREIN AND OUT PER HEAD. CONNECTIONS SHALL BE MADE ONLYON THE SIGNAL HEAD TERMINALS, WITH NO EXTERNAL SPLICES. 5.ALL SIGNAL INDICATIONS SHALL BE WIRED INDEPENDENTLY ANDTERMINATED IN THE HANDHOLE WITH NO EXTERNAL SPLICES, TEMPORARY SPAN WIRE POLE DETAIL (FOR SPECIAL USE, WITH PRIOR APPROVAL OF CITY ONLY) SHEET 7 OF 21 SHEETS ) ( /-... -------.-.-;.-;.-;.-;.-__-P.I START CROSSING W Watch For Vehicles '\ I '/ DON'T START :�: Finish Crossing /HASHING, If Started ■TIME REMAINING TIMER To Fini sh Crossing � DON'T CROSS TO CROSS PUSH BUTTON • PO LARA iN23TN 1 Y STANDARD PEDESTRIAN STATION R10-3e L or R (9"x 1 5") WHEN MOUNTING (2) PEDESTRIAN PUSH BUTTON ASSEMBLIES ON A 4.5" O.D. PEDESTRIAN POLE, APPROVED STAND-OFF MOUNTING BRACKETS (POLARA iNPBF2S-4.5B OR EQUIVALENT) SHALL BE USED TO ACCOMMODATE THE 9"x15" PEDESTRIAN SIGNAGE TYPICAL PEDESTRIAN PUSH-BUTTON STATION AND SIGN SIGNS SHALL BE MOUNTED SQUARE TO POLE. � POST CAP ....----------=:: =i- 3" TO 4" - I j:(/) c.,::::, -a.. w I w c., wz::E 1-z 0 ::::, I- 0w ::E _J (D z <( 0 Cl::'. � �� PELCO COLLAR 4",8" (MIN.) \ HAND HOLE- I I I I 1 L,---PEDESTRIAN PUSH BUTTON AND SIGN " THREADED POLE � SCREWS INTO ALUMINUM BASE. 42" ' SQUARE = ALUMINUM /PELCO BASE. . PEDESTRIAN PUSH BUTTON POLE SHALL BE ALUMINUM (BLACK) ON PELCO BASE (BLACK) FINISH REQUIREMENTS ALL PEDESTRIAN PUSH BUTTON AND PEDESTAL POLES SHALL BE FACTORY FINISHED (BLACK) CLAMSHELL MOUNT WITH BAND-IT ATTACHMENT TO POLE c:: 4" NOMINAL SCHEDULE 80 � ( 4 1 /2"± O.D.) ALUM. POLE WITH A MINIMUMYIELD STRENGTH OF 35,000 PSI, BLACK IN COLOR PEDESTRIAN PUSH BUTTON I AND SIGN� I PELCO COLLAR \ 42" 4"x8" (MIN.) HANDHOLE- L., ' J= '• POST CAP 17' THREADED POLE SCREWS INTO ALUMINUM BASE. /PELCO SQUARE ALUMINUM BASE. TYPICAL PEDESTAL POLE DETAIL 1 / 4" SPLIT PIN SHALL BE INSTALLED IN THE UPPER PORTION OF THE ALUMINUM BASE AND SHALL COMPLETELY PENETRATE BASE AND POLE TO SECURE POLE TO PREVENT MOVEMENT OR TWISTING. PELCO COLLAR TO BE INSTALLED. SHALL BE ALUMINUM (BLACK) ON PELCO BASE (BLACK) FOOTING NOTES G)ANCHOR BOLTS (FURNISHED WITH POLE) PER MANUFACTURER'S TEMPLATE. @ THESE DESIGNS REQUIRE THAT THE FOOTING BE FOUNDED IN COMPACT SAND, CLAY OR SANDY CLAY, AND BE LOCATED ABOVE THE WATER TABLE. IF, BY VISUAL INSPECTION OF THE HOLE OTHER MATERIAL IS PRESENT, THE FOUNDATION DESIGN MAY NEED TO BE MODIFIED. @ 5/8"x8' COPPERWELD GROUND ROD THROUGH GROUND, OR DRIVEN IN ADJACENT PULL BOX AND BONDED TO POLE WITH UNDERGROUND STRAPPING. @) HANDHOLE SHALL BE PROVIDED. @ 3" MINIMUM CONDUIT HEIGHT ABOVE FOUNDATION. 5 © � 4" MIN. NON-SHRINKABLE GROUT OVER ROUGH FOUNDATION HEX NUTS·-� � r--7" UNDERGROUND STRAPPING, ATTACH TO POLE 8-#4 VERTICAL BA�S CLASS B CONCRETE hfln nfln ' 1'-6" MIN. 12" MIN. OVERLAP�rf' � □) 1 1/2" MIN. CLEARANCE 4'-o" ® I / GROUNDINGI/ROD TYPICAL PEDESTAL POLE FOOTING (CAST IN PLACE) w ..I 0 D. z 0 I-wI-..I::::, 0 m a. :z: ..Ien cc ::::, I-D.en w ZCI cc w - D. ai=Ien w Cl w D. SHEET Vl _J � <[ 1-w p _J <[ zL'.J � Vl p De'. <[ p z<[ IV) > Iz:::J □u Vl <[ _J L'.J :::J D p 9 OF 21 SHEETS 3/ 4" BANDING SIGNAL POLE f-__J I l-JI MOUNTING HARDWARE AS PROVIDED BY CABINET SUPPLIER 330 CABINET 7' MAX. LB CONDULET TYPICAL SIDE-OF-POLE MOUNTED CONTROLLER CABINET (FOR SPECIAL USE, WITH PRIOR APPROVAL OF COUNTY ONLY) ANTI GRAFFITI COATING� VENT WITH Fl LTER CONNECT GROUND ROD -- TO ANCHOR BOLT /CABINET\\ � AIR TIGHT SEAL ------. \ i---=�--=a�I t �--� " ' �1 =;= =l=l===�\ 3' \\, " --- _L ....-' � CLASS B / CONCRETE -___,, 18" RA[ IUS- -VARIES- 5/B"xB' COPPERWEL D_/ GROUND ROD DOOR SIDE \VENT CHAMFER 30 ,,A��/DGES � ,�, J_f--3' --l :: :: :: T "::"1 •�II :::+==== 4 II I II RAISED CONCRETE PAD IN UNPAVED AREAS� J LvARIES BASE MOUNTED CONTROLLER CABINET INSTALLATION AND CONCRETE FOUNDATION (FOR SPECIAL USE, WITH PRIOR APPROVAL OF COUNTY ONLY) CABINET TYPE f-------•f-------------< 1-¢1.0x2.0 66.8" 0 w D " " O--+-----• 21 .o" H " 25.0" 0 1111 67.2" 30.3" --24.2" -- ----4 8 . 5 " --------- =-F: T 11 .- 30.3" -.11 32.8" --37.4"---i SIDE 0 0 -+----------'- --39.3"---i i--48.5"--i B SE POLYMER CONCRETE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT PAD ---80"-------i [ 5 13/16" .------------II--\-" -----4----·75· =�·\ ·739 1/2" 50" '- _, J_L__-----+----+�-""====:::::,;,. "===. -===a::al=====/===:a-==:dl. 23 11/16"----32"---i-a-----+--23 11/16" t 5 3/16" -1 i--1 i-5 3/16" I l r 1< 11 STY_[ B SE ! TYPICAL BASE MOUNTED CONTROLLER CABINET INSTALLATION NOTE: FIBERGLASS BASE MAY BE SUBSTITUTED ONLY IF DIRECTED BY ENGINEER I-w z -z mo cc -u I-a=: cc w ..I ..I ..I ..I cc 0 I-a=: ,n I-!z 0 u SHEET 10 Vl _J <[ I- p _J <[ z Vl p <[ p z <[ I-Vl Vl <[ p OF 21 SHEETS SIGNAL BRACKET ARM �------- 1 ......... ... ... I ,,,, I ,,,, I ,-....._ ,,,, ------INSERT PLUG HIGH STRENGTH STEEL CABLE OR STRAP ,.,.,.................... ,� ', ' ...... CLAMPS WITH SET SCREWS AND .," \ .. ,, \ .. ,,,,-..... \ ..I ', \ 11 I \ 1 1 I I \ I 11 I I / 11 I \ / 1· I I / I \ .... . ,,,,,, ,=,-"'' I ,,A , , II \ .,.�, ..-1 .,, \ I '-"',,,.,,\ .,, r �, \ I ,,_ ...... '-' \ ,, I ' \ 11 I '\ I 11 I \ I I: I 11 / III I I I /I 11 \ .... ., ,, ' ... ,.... ,-" , ,, '.,',,1 ," \ ,, '-"' ,, ., I ,,,." \ 11 ,, r �., ' •• ,,,,,,_ ...... '-' \ ,, I ', I I I \ I 1II \ I lt--_::;,,--1 I /ir/ I \ / I I � / 11 \ .,, I .,A, ,, \ , 1 .,,. ' ,. ., ., ., ........ '-"' , I ., , V' STEEL CLAMP STRAPS ......... ..,--MAST ARM ......... _ ...... , / '\ I \ ............ f f ... I / ...... \ /,_ ..... ROTATABLE COUPLING ---SET SCREWS OR LOCKING BOLTS REQUIRED FOR TOP AND BOTTOM ARMS DETAIL OF MAST ARM MOUNTING ROTATABLE COUPLING CLAMPS WITH SET SCREWS AND STEEL CLAMP STRAPS -... ................................. - -------------MAST ARM__; ...... ._ HIGH STRENGTH STEEL CABLE OR STRAP -- FOR IN-LINE SIGNAL HEAD (3-SECTION, 4-SECTION OR 5-SECTION) -- ------INSERT PLUG II I .,......._ ........ --,, I .,.., ', ,"' ', I -� .... .,,. -'< \ ,........ .... \ 1 ... \ f ........ \ I ""I, ', \ I I ',"!11, I I ', .,, \ I ,, I I : I ,"" I J ) I , ,, I 1 y I I ., I I _/ ,,' I I - �, I 1,,' I ......... I I( ,..--, I I\"'' I I 1,,,' ' I ( ', ................ : ,.....l, \ ���, ... § ... ��· ��, -- � .............. \ ,'I I I-���;::::::;, ,, I I � .... ... ., I I I ... ,, I ......... ... , I I "( I 1 I I / I I ' I I ,< I r ,... ', , I I \... �... : \ I ', \ I ', ,...� I I ', .,,. " I II .......... I .,,'', I : ... �, I / ...... I I / : : .,,.,""' I r I I I I I ,,J ', I ,,, ........ , ,, SET SCREWS OR LOCKING BOLTS REQUIRED FOR TOP AND BOTTOM ARMS 188 COUNTDOWN R R y NOTES 1.ALL VEHICLE SIGNAL HEADS SHALL BE POLYCARBONATE AND BLACK IN COLOR WITH 12" SECTIONS AND TUNNEL VISORS. ALL SIGNAL FACESSHALL BE LED. 2.ALL OVERHEAD SIGNAL HEADS SHALL HAVE LOUVERED BACKPLATES WITH A 2" DIAMOND GRADE FLUORESCENT YELLOW RETROREFLECTIVEBORDER. 3.ALL PEDESTRIAN HEADS SHALL BE POLYCARBONATE AND BLACK INCOLOR. PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL FACES SHALL BE LED. 4.SIDE OF POLE MOUNT SHALL BE 90 ° MOUNT. NO "T"S ALLOWED . SEE "TYPICAL SIDE OF POLE SIGNAL MOUNTING" DRAWING. R R y y �R �Y \I G G R ' Y� tG G� DETAIL OF MAST ARM MOUNTING FOR DOGHOUSE SIGNAL HEAD (5-SECTION) TYPICAL PEDESTRIAN AND VEHICLE SIGNAL HEADS I I IV I' I I ' WIRING I 'v ---< I II I -I-' IN SPECTION PLATE WIRING DIAGRAM 3/ 4" STAINLESS STEEL STRAPS POLE PLATE TYPICAL SIDE OF POLE SIGNAL MOUNTING MOUNTING NOTES 1.PIPE COUPLINGS FOR SIGNAL BRACKETS SHALL BE EITHER 1-1 /2 OR 2 INCHDEPENDING UPON THE SIGNAL HEAD TO BE INSTALLED. SIGNAL BRACKETS SHALL BE FURNISHED BY THE MANUFACTURER OF THE SIGNAL HEADS. 2.UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, ALL TRAFFIC SIGNALS MOUNTED ABOVE THE ROADWAY SHALL BE APPROXIMATELY LEVEL WITH ONE ANOTHER AND HAVE A HEIGHT OF 17' TO 19' ABOVE THE PAVEMENT GRADE AT THE ROADWAY CENTER, ALL SIDE-OF-POLE MOUNTED TRAFFIC SIGNALS SHALL HAVE A HEIGHT OF 10' ABOVE GROUND LINE AND PEDESTRIAN SIGNALS SHALL HAVE A HEIGHT OF 8'ABOVE GROUND LINE AS MEASURED TO THE BOTTOM OF THE SIGNAL HEADHOUSING OR BRACKET. 3.MAST ARM MOUNTED SIGNAL HEADS SHALL USE ASTRO-TYPE MOUNTING BRACKETS.ALL SIGNAL HEADS SHALL BE MOUNTED IN SUCH A MANNER AS TO BE EASILYREMOVED FROM THEIR SUPPORTING STRUCTURE. 4.GASKET SEALING COMPOUND SHALL BE USED IN ADDITION TO ANY LEAD WASHERSREQUIRED FOR CREATING A WATER-TIGHT CONNECTION BETWEEN THE SIGNAL HEAD AND MOUNTING BRACKET. 5.SIGNAL HEADS SHALL BE SECURELY AFFIXED BY USE OF A SERRATED COUPLINGOR OTHER ACCESSORIES RECOMMENDED BY THE SIGNAL MANUFACTURER. 6.WIRING FROM INSIDE MAST ARM THROUGH A 1" FIELD DRILLED HOLE IN ARMSHALL BE BROUGHT THROUGH THE MOUNTING SUPPORT TUBE AND LOWER ARM (AS SHOWN). FIELD DRILLED HOLES SHALL HAVE RUBBER GROMMETS INSTALLED. SIGNAL HEAD MOUNTING GENERAL WIRING NOTES 1.TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONDUIT SHALL NOT CARRY WIRING OFOTHER UTILITIES. 2.ALL SPLICES SHALL BE IN HANDHOLES AT POLE BASES ANDNOT IN PULL BOXES. 3.PEDESTRIAN AND VEHICLE SIGNAL HEADS SHALL BE INDIVIDUALLYWIRED FROM THE POLE BASE TO THE SIGNAL HEAD. 4.CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE TWO WIRING DIAGRAMS OF THESIGNAL INSTALLATION TO THE COUNTY. 5.UNLESS ALLOWED BY THE ENGINEER, WIRE SHALL NOTOCCUPY MORE THAN 40% OF THE INSIDE AREA OF CONDUIT. C, z -ti)Vl I-w _J z I-<[ I-:, 0 p Oz _J :I: C, <[ z IClz Vl pz-cc ai:: <[p-z ti) == <[I-VlQ ..I >- ��:z: w Vl ..I z <[ cc w z C, p C, - ti) SHEET 11 OF 21 SHEETS TYPE IS IF IF2 II III VAULT DESCRIPTION LARGE 17x30x12 LARGE/DEEP 17x30x18 FOR FIBER OPTICS LARGE/XTRA DEEP 17x30x24 FOR FIBER OPTICS RUNS COVER SKID RESISTANT SURFACE BOX 3/8"-16NC ( HEX BOLT 0 W/ WASHER PULL SLOT F K J TABLE OF DIMENSIONS (MINIMUMS) DIMENSIONS (IN.) A B C D E F 30 1/2 17 1/2 2 32 1/4 19 1/4 12 26 30 1/2 17 1/2 2 32 1/4 19 1/4 18 26 30 1/2 17 1/2 2 32 1/4 19 1/4 24 26 G H 1/2 13 1/2 1/2 13 1/2 1/2 13 1/2 MEDIUM 13x24x12 23 1/4 13 3/4 2 25 15 1/2 12 19 1/4 9 3/4 SMALL 12x12x12-FOR DETECTORS 12 7/8 12 7/8 5/8 14 14 12 3/4 10 1/2 10 & ELECTRICAL SERVICE 30x48x18 47 5/8 30 1/8 3 49 5/8 32 1/8 18 45 5/8 28 FOR HOME RUN/FIBER SPLICE PERMANENT (PRECAST) PULL BOX (FOR USE WITH ALL OPERATIONAL SIGNALS) FIBERGLASS REINFORCED POLYMER CONCRETE DESIGNED FOR SERVICE LOAD (MINIMUM) OF 15,000 LBS. OVER A 1 O" SQUARE 1/2 1/8 J 1 .,,----CONDUITS TO EXTEND A MINIMUM OF 3" 18" MIN. ABOVE CRUSHED ROCK AND SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 3" BELOW THE COVER. r-7--t=i------F=t--�'7W�--2" CONDUIT FOR SIGN AL TYPICAL PULL BOX LOW VOLTAGE CABLES 2-3" CONDUIT FOR SIGNAL HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES K 12 GENERAL NOTES MIN. 3" BOX 1.PAVEMENT HOLE FOR PULL BOX SHALL BE SAWCUT TO FULL DEPTH, IN A RECTANGLE THAT EXTENDS 6" 18" RADIU ----SLOPED CONDUIT BEYOND THE EXPANSE OF THE CRUSHED ROCK�, PULL BOX. TWO BOXES AND EXTENSION (FOR MODIFICATIONS ONLY) COVER-COLORED OR PAINTED ORANGE F � PROVIDE METAL CAPS ON ALL CONDUIT, TO FACILITATE FUTURE LOCATING (D 3" MIN. ABOVE E CRUSHED ROCK @ 4" CRUSHED ROCK �-CONDUIT (TYPICAL) PULL BOX MEASUREMENTS (MINIMUM) A B C D E F G 1 1 " 1 1 " 1 2" 1 2" 1 3" 1 2" 1 2" TEMPORARY (PLASTIC) PULL BOX DETAIL (FOR USE WHEN APPROVED BY CITY FOR SPECIAL INSTALLATIONS) SHEET 12 Vl _J <[ 1-w p OF 21 SHEETS GENERAL NOTES SEE NOTE NO. 2�-- --SAWCUT FROM LOOP 1.PULL BOX (SPECIAL) SHALL BE A WATER VALVE STEM TYPE PULL BOX MADE OF CASTIRON OR STEEL. THE PULL BOX SHALL HAVE CAPABILITY OF ACCEPTING RISER RINGS FOR FUTURE OVERLAYS. THE LID SHALL HAVE THE WORD "TRAFFIC" PRINTED ON IT.�:::::-----+-----r) L ____ _ \(-- - - - -,, - - - I A L - CONDUIT- , , -,7��/ / /:://_I -TRENCH 12 € \/ ,1 -I I A � ---PATCH AREA '--------ROADWAY (SEE NOTE 6) (EXISTING) 2.PULL BOXES SHALL HAVE 3/ 4" TO 1" DIAMETER HOLES DRILLED OR TORCHED 3" FROM TOP TO ACCEPT A 4" TO 6" RUBBER TUBE (3/ 4" GARDEN HOSE). THE NUMBEROF HOLES SHALL BE AS PER PLANS OR AS DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER. 3.CARE SHALL BE TAKEN DURING BACKFILL COMPACTION TO PREVENT COLLAPSE OF THETUBES. 4.2' MINIMUM SLACK OF LOOP WIRES IS TO BE PROVIDED SO THAT ALL TESTING CANBE DONE OUTSIDE OF THE PULL BOX. SPLICE DETECTOR LEADS IN SIDE-OF-ROADPULL BOX, NOT IN PULL BOX SPECIAL. PULL BOX (SPECIAL)---5.PULL BOX IS TO BE LOCATED IN AN AREA OF THE STREET NOT HEAVILY TRAVELED. FOR EDGE-OF-ROAD LOCATIONS, MAINTAIN A MINIMUM OF 12" FROM CONCRETEGUTTER PAN. z SAWCUT- 0 0 L::,. 8" Ml 0 o · o_ ·· � -+----�-�"-I/I 0 n 1" MIN. CLEARANCE CO DUIT TO SIDE 0 0 TOP VIEW LID -4" TO 6" RUBBER TUBE 6"+ PATCH (SEE NOTE 6) o a 0 v • • 0• EXISTING 0 : c : :. PAVEMENTo VQ ,._ 0 "' .a • � o 7 WATERTIGHT SPLICES AND CONDUIT SEAL 1 8" RADIUS -TERMINATECONDUIT WITHIN3" OF BOTTOML::,. OTHER CONDUITS IN SAME TRENCH SECTION A-A PULL BOX (SPECIAL) PATCH 6.PAVEMENT HOLE FOR PULL BOX SHALL BE EITHER CORE DRILLED TO FULL DEPTH, OR SAW CUT TO FULL DEPTH IN 12"x12" SQUARE WITH NO OVERLAPPING CUTS. FORCORE DRILLING AND SAWCUT, GROUT PULL BOX IN PLACE. (SEE NOTE 6) I ,, SAWCUT-1 2 '!; I ------L D TOP RECESSED-------1/4" TO 1/2" 0 BASE 6"± SECTION B-B SIDE-OF-ROAD �PULL BOX -SPLICE LOOP AND LEAD-IN HERE __ _____... DETECTOR WIRE IN PAVEMENT CUT PULL BOX (SPECIAL) -- -., LI. " . ·.,,11· . : ..1· .. /• : ,..• SWEEPING "L", MIN. 12" RADIUS LOOP DETECTOR LEAD-IN CONDUIT z __, I ..I Cl ca: ca: -wu..Iw a= a. 0 !!.. I->< u owm t-w ..I Cl..I a. ::::, 0 a. 0 ..I SHEET 13 Vl _J <[ I- p _J <[ z Vl p <[ p z <[ I-Vl □ u Vl <[ p OF 21 SHEETS LEAVE ADEQUATE LEAD-IN SLACK TO REACH IN-STREET PULL BOX, BUT SPLICE IN OFF-ROAD PULL BOX� SIZE OF LOOP 6'x6' NO. OF TURNS 4 DETECTOR UNIT IN 2 1/4" X 4 1/2"(+) DRILLED HOLE, SEALED AS PER LOOP SAW CUT EDGE OF SHOULDER OR SIDEWALK--� PULL BOX PULL BOX (SPECIAL) --CENTER BUSHING MIC RO LOOP �=======o==::p:=::::::!::::::=� 3' x3' 4 LANE LINE IN LANES CONDUIT COUPLING 18" RADIUS A A TYPICAL 6'x6' LOOP A A TYPICAL 3'x3' LOOP LOOP TURNS NO. OF TURNS MAY BE ADJUSTED BY ENGINEER IN FIELD. WIRING CONNECTIONS TO BE FIELD DETERMINED. ,/7(, ,___ ____ , , _.......,.__ 1 8" RADIUS I 7 ---I L STOP LINE LOOP DETECTOR _____,. 1 o' 1 o• (TYP.) SAWCUTS TO MICRO LOOP DETECTORS, SEALED AS PER LOOP SAW CUT MICRO LOOP DETECTOR CON DU IT PLACEMENT UN DER PAVEMENT OR SIDEWALK G)MINIMUM CONDUIT DEPTH: NOTES UNDER UNDER PAVEMENT SIDEWALK 30" 24" @ ALL PVC CONDUIT SHALL BE SCHEDULE 80 6'X4O' QUADRAPOLE WIRING LEAVE ADEQUATE LEAD-IN SLACK TO REACH IN-STREET PULL BOX, BUT SPLICE IN OFF-ROAD PULL BOX IN-STREET PULL BOX FLEXIBLE DETECTOR LOOP SEALANT (NO USER MIXING), FLUSH WITH SURFACE (HOT SEALANT NOT 1 r3__l_/8" ALLOWED) LOOP OR LEAD___,,, 1" MIN. -IN WIRE SECTION A-A A ROUNDED OR DRILLED 1 1 /2" CORNER HOLE7,_ I7 � A .,. 40' TYPICAL 6'x4O' QUADRAPOLE LOOP ' 6' ' J_ LOOP SAW CUT AND INSTALLATION NOTES WHERE SAWCUT SPANS CONCRETE AND ASPHALT, CONTRACTOR SHALL DRILL 1 1 /2" HOLES �5" MAX. /EXISTING �--�'"---T""-+--7 PAVEMENT . z � :: 0 I'() L 1 ,, '-----+-{ 1 & ® .._______ 60-120 PSI CLSM CONCRETE �CONDUIT 6" EXISTING-� FABRIC ••••• REPLACEMENT FABRICPHILLIPS "PETROMAT" OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT 6" MAX. 6" 1 " TOP ASPHALT LIFT ---MAINTAIN EXISTING FABRIC INTEGRITY ---60-120 PSI CLSM CONCRETE CONDUIT (MIN. 30" BELOW PAVEMENT SURFACE) 1.ALL DETECTOR LOOP WIRE SHALL MEETIMSA SPECIFICATION 51.5, ENCASED INPVC OR POLYETHYLENE TUBING. 5.LOOP WIRE SHALL BE CONTINUOUS (NO SPLICES)FROM THE PULL BOX. SPLICES IN PULL BOXSHALL BE WATERPROOFED WITH SPLICE KIT.CONDUIT TRENCH DETAIL WITHOUT PAVEMENT FABRIC CONDUIT TRENCH DETAIL WITH PAVEMENT FABRIC 2.IMMEDIATELY BEFORE LAYING THE LOOPCABLE, THOROUGHLY CLEAN WITHWATER AND DRY SAW CUT WITH HIGHPRESSURE OIL-FREE COMPRESSED AIR. 3.LOOP WIRE IN ADJACENT LOOPS SHALLBE LAID UNIFORMLY IN EITHER ACLOCKWISE OR COUNTER-CLOCKWISEDIRECTION AND THE LOOP TAGGED TOINDICATE THE DIRECTION. 4.USE A BLUNT, NON-METALLICINSTRUMENT TO PUSH WIRE INTO SLOT.DO NOT COIL LEADS. 6.CONTINUITY TEST FOR EACH LOOP SHALL BE CONDUCTED 1) BEFORE ANY LOOP SEALER IS INSTALLED AND 2) AFTER LOOP SEALER ISINSTALLED AND LEAD-IN CABLE IS SPLICED ANDTRAINED TO THE CONTROLLER. "RESISTANCE-TO-GROUND" AND "INDUCTANCE"SHALL BE MEASURED AND RECORDED FOR EACHTEST. 7.DETECTOR WIRE ACROSS BRIDGE JOINTS SHALL BE ENCASED IN A 12" SECTION OF 3/ 4" PVCPIPE THAT SPANS THE JOINT AREA. NOTES G)HOT BITUMINOUS PAVEMENT (PATCHING) OR PORTLANDCEMENT CONCRETE PATCH, FULL DEPTH PLUS 1" (4" MIN). MATCH EXISTING PAVEMENT TYPE. @ FOR ASPHALT PATCH, 48 HOUR NOTICE TO THE ENGINEER REQUIRED PRIOR TO INSPECTION Vl I-_J <[ I- :, U) p Cz _J <[ Zo z 0-VluI-p U)cc <[pa:: ..I z <[0 ..I I-Vl I-cc >-u I-w U) I-!u Vl <[ w Q p SHEET 14 OF 21 SHEETS METER PEDESTAL DISCONNECT SEE NOTE 5 0 2" CONDUIT WITH TRAFFIC SIGNAL POWER CIRCUIT-#6 AWG OR LARGER, DEPENDING ON VOLTAGE DROP. PROVIDE: 1 -BLACK (HOT) WIRE 1 -WHITE (NEUTRAL) WIRE POWER SOURCE 2" CONDUIT WITH LUMINAIRE POWER CIRCUIT-#8 AWG OR LARGER, DEPENDING ON VOLTAGE DROP------- NOTES 1.FINAL LUMINAIRE WIRING TO BE COMPLETED BY UTILITY COMPANY OR AS SPECIFIED IN PLANS. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE LUMINAIRE WIRING, LEAVING 3' OF COILED WIRE AT LUMINAIRE ARM END. 2.CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE ALL WIRING UP TO POWER SOURCE.UTILITY COMPANY RESPONSIBLE FOR FINAL HOOK-UP AT POWERSOURCE. 3.INDIVIDUAL CIRCUIT WIRING SHALL BE TAGGED PER STANDARDSPECIFICATIONS. 4.IF POWER DOES NOT FEED DIRECTLY INTO CONTROLLER PULL BOX, PROVIDE A SEPARATE 2" CONDUIT FROM POWER SOURCE, THROUGH INTERMEDIATE PULL BOXES, TO CONTROLLER PULL BOX. 5.METER PEDESTAL/DISCONNECT NO FURTHER THAN 75 FT. FROM VAULT /CABINET /HOMERUN PULLBOX. 6.WHERE REQUIRED BY UTILITY COMPANY, CONTRACTOR SHALL BERESPONSIBLE FOR OBTAINING PERMIT AND INSPECTION FROMENGLEWOOD PUBLIC WORKS DIVISION. 7.CONTRACTOR SHALL STRICTLY ADHERE TO ENGLEWOODELECTRICAL INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS. CONTACT ENGLEWOODPUBLIC WORKS DIVISION AT 303-762-2300 FOR FURTHERINFORMATION. D O O R ----------- ' ' �---CONTROLLER CABINET 11 --30x48 VAULT r--..----SIGNAL POLE UNDERGROUND POWER SOURCE SCHEMATIC FOR SIGNALS (NO SCALE) 6" SAND - �6" MAX. � � � G) � 30" NOMINAL I iw�:::�:�:i:�::;:t ___L__�.:tt:::,:,�:J�t t 2'] � UNDER GRASS/GROUND • TRENCHING DETAIL NOTES G)BACKFILL AND TAMP WITH NATIVEMATERIAL TO MATCH COMPACTIONOF SURROUNDING GROUND.Cl) RESEED OR RESOD SURFACE AT DIRECTION OF THE ENGINEER. Qz D:: :,Vl W O _J <[ 1ffi I- p o-_J <[a.Cl) "z Q ..I z Vl z cC i p:, z u <[ p z 0 !:2 Z <[ I-D:: Cl) w Vl >- " I D:: I-D:: � I-w I-u Q cC Vl <[ Z:i: :, w p u Cl) SHEET 15 OF 21 SHEETS 18' MIN. 1 o'x5/8-" -- COPPERWELD GROUND ROD ------WOOD UTILITY POLE ------GALVANIZED STEEL WEATHERHEAD -6' OF WIRE COILED AT RISER WEATHERHEAD --1 1 /2" (MIN.) GRC CONDUIT RISER CONTROLLER OR SIGNAL POLE PULL BOX --- �-1 8 " RAD I U S i---------D ----------i I I WITH WOOD UTILITY POLE NOTES (D PROVIDE TYPE JII PULL BOX/GROUND ROD AND 2" PVC CONDUIT ONLY IF D EXCEEDS 10'. � PROVIDE 2" GRC CONDUIT WITHOUT PULL BOX/GROUND ROD IF D IS LESS THAN 1 O'. Q)MINIMUM CONDUIT DEPTHS: UNDER GROUND 30,, AND PAVEMENT @) CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR OBTAINING A PERMIT AND SCHEDULING ELECTRICAL INSPECTION FROM ENGLEWOOD PUBLIC WORKS, 303-762_2300. POLE HANDHOLE 1 o'x5/8"� -- COPPERWELD GROUND ROD I __ J I I WITH -NON-WOOD UTILITY POLE LEAVE EXTRA LENGTH OF WIRE COILED IN 1) PULL BOX, OR 2) POLE BASE IF NO PULL BOX. EXTRA LENGTH TO BE DETERMINED BY ENGINEER. CONTROLLER OR SIGNAL POLE PULL BOX NON-WOOD UTILITY POLE OVERHEAD POWER SCHEMATIC SIGNALS / ' GROUND TRENCHING UTILITY POLE TRAFFIC SIGNAL POLE �- ----6' OF WIRE COILED AT SERVICE POINT TYPICAL OVERHEAD POWER FEED FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL ASSEMBLIES VJ _J <[ 1-w e::l SHEET 16 OF 21 SHEETS FINISH REQUIREMENTS ALL PEDESTRIAN PUSH BUTTON AND PEDESTAL POLES SHALL BE FACTORY FINISHED (BLACK) FOOTING NOTES CD ANCHOR BOLTS (FURNISHED WITH POLE) PER MANUFACTURER'S TEMPLATE. U-BOLT CABINET-� MOUNT @ THESE DESIGNS REQUIRE THAT THE FOOTING BE FOUNDED IN COMPACT SAND, CLAY OR SANDY CLAY, AND BE LOCATED ABOVE THE WATER TABLE. IF, BY VISUAL INSPECTION OF THE HOLE OTHER MATERIAL IS PRESENT, THE FOUNDATION DESIGN MAY NEED TO BE MODIFIED. @ 5/8"x8' COPPERWELD GROUND ROD THROUGH GROUND OR DRIVEN IN ADJACENT PULL BOX AND BONDED TO POLE WITH UNDERGROUND STRAPPING. @) HANDHOLE SHALL BE PROVIDED. HEX NUTS 2-#4 STIRRUPS�� -4" MIN. NON-SHRINKABLE GROUT OVER ROUGH FOUNDATION 7" -UNDERGROUND STRAPPING, ATTACH TO POLE PULLBOX CAST OR POLISHED ALUMINUM CABINET WITH BUILT-IN LOCK, HOUSES FLASHERS, TIME SWITCH, BATTERY AND SOLAR CHARGER LB CONDULET DETAIL "A" NOTES (D POLE TOP SOLAR MOUNT WITH PANEL @ 4" NOMINAL SCHEDULE 80 ALUM. POLE WITH PELCO COLLAR AND BASE (BLACK) @ BONDING STRAP IN BACKFILL © PELCO COLLAR AND BASE (BLACK) 1 0' AT 6" + AROUND ANCHOR BOLTS SEE DE TA I L "A"--+---+-------' 8-#4 VERTICAL BARS CLASS B CONCRETE 1 2" M I N . 0 VER LAP 1'-6" MIN. 3" --------1 1 /2" MIN. CLEARANCE 4'-o"@ ,,-----GROUNDING ROD PAVEMENT . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. ,. . . . . .. . .. . 1 O'x5/8" COPPERWELD GROUND ROD FLASHING BEACONS ALL FLASHING BEACONS SHALL BE POLYCARBONATE WITH TUNNEL VISORS AND YELLOW HOUSINGS. SOLAR DESIGN VARIES. �-SOLAR PANEL y SCHOOL SPEED FINES DOUBLED (MIN. SOW) �-POLE TOP MOUNT �-PELCO RIGID SIDE OF POLE MOUNT, YELLOW, SEE DETAIL "B" � 12" YELLOW LED BEACON WITH ALTERNATING FLASHING '-----SPEED LIMIT MAY VARY DETAIL "B" OPPOSITE DIRECTION 8" FLASHER ,::::::::::::i;_, ___.,:==::{I I I I I I ..J ____ LJ ____ 7 (�---I I I I I I I FRONT! :I I I I I I l ____ I : _________ _J PELCO RIGID SIDE OF POLE MOUNT, YELLOW 8" YELLOW LED BEACON WITH SIMULTANEOUS 6' @ 12" YELLOW FLASHING W/ FRONT SIDE I I I I I I I I I I � LED BEACON �-6" DIRT BACKFILL CONCRETE FOUNDATION, SEE DETAIL AT LEFT 3" CRUSHED ROCK BEACON TYPICAL POLE FOOTING (CAST IN PLACE) SCHOOL FLASHING BEACON ASSEMBLY SIDE OF ROAD I fl)z Vl 0 _J u <[ I-cc p W Cl _J <[ m cc z C, 0 Vl z a= p <[ -LL,p z :z: 0 <[ I- fl) w Vl >-j Cl LL, -□ ..I fl) u Vl 0 <[ 0 :z: p u fl) SHEET 17 OF 21 SHEETS FOOTING NOTES CD ANCHOR BOLTS (FURNISHED WITH POLE) PER MANUFACTURER'S TEMPLATE. @ THESE DESIGNS REQUIRE THAT THE FOOTING BE FOUNDED IN COMPACT SAND, CLAY OR SANDY CLAY, AND BE LOCATED ABOVE THE WATER TABLE. IF, BY VISUAL INSPECTION OF THE HOLE OTHER MATERIAL IS PRESENT, THE FOUNDATION DESIGN MAY NEED TO BE MODIFIED. G)HANDHOLE SHALL BE PROVIDED. BEACON SIDE VIEW 12" YELLOW LED BEACON -WITH BLACK HOUSING (12" RED LED FOR STOP SIGN INSTALLATION) -PELCO RIGID SIDE OF POLE MOUNT, YELLOW TUNNEL VISOR FLASHER SHALL BE HOUSED WITHIN BEACON HEAD �-SOLAR PANEL (MIN. SOW) �-POLE TOP MOUNT 1 l------------i ·Y 1 2 VV RI\J II\IG OR �· E c·:· I L ·\-I r1 R."• ', ,,j M \...., ,( I I I�Ill 11 11111 2'x 1 0' BARS ON ARTERIALS AT TRAFFIC SIGNALS, ALL OTHERS TO BE 1 'x1 0' BARS CENTERED: -ON LANE OR CHANNELIZING LINES -BETWEEN LANE LINES -----� -ON FLOW LINE EXTENDED---------' NOTE: ALL LONGITUDINAL LINES TO BE 12" TO 24" SIDE (OR AS DIRECTED BY THE ENGLEWOOD ENGINEER) AND SPACED 12" TO 60" APART. CENTER CROSSWALKS ON CURB RAMPS. IF CURB RAMPS ARE NOT PRESENT, CENTER ON SIGNAL POLES, WHEREVER PRACTICAL. TYPICAL CROSSWALK MARKING (SEE APPENDIX G FOR COMPLETE SIGNING AND STRIPING STANDARDS) ® �4" MIN. NON-SHRINKABLE GROUT OVER ROUGH FOUNDATION SIGN (TYPIC U_Y CL.ASS l) HEX NUTS 2-#4 STIRRUPS-----,--- AT 6" + AROUND ANCHOR BOLTS 8-#4 VERTICAL CLASS B CONCRETE 12" MIN. OVERLAP 1'-6" MIN. 7" 4'-o" CI) 3" 1 1/2" MIN. CLEARANCE TYPICAL POLE FOOTING (CAST IN PLACE) 4" D. GALVANIZED STEEL POST (WGT. : 1 0.8 LB/FT€) PAVEMENT • • • • • • • • • • •• 'II • • • • • . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . . . .. . . ISUPPLEI\IEIJTAL SIGI 2 � I I I I 7' MIN. 6' MIN �5" DIRT BACKFILL NOTES (D POLE TOP SOLAR MOUNT WITH PANEL (1) 4" NOMINAL SCHEDULE 80 ALUM. POLE WITH PELCO COLLAR AND BASE (BLACK) @) PELCO COLLAR AND BASE (BLACK) OR BREAKAWAY SLIP BASE PER PLAN. CONCRETE FOUNDATION, SEE DETAIL AT LEFT 3" CRUSHED ROCK WARNING OR REGULA TORY SIGN FLASH I NG BEACON ASSEMBLY SHEET 18 OF 21 SHEETS CD PHOTOELECTRIC CELL ILLUMINATED--- ' I ' . SIGNAL MAST ARM ------ I _:_P-=.:E R-'-----=Ec:_:_N --=-:G I'-'--'N-=.:E E =-:_R-'------+---------i . (-_-.· DIRECTION CD ·• ,......, I'--� ----�--Sign Face 1 ;-DRIP L=========;====.J LOOP 1' UNLESS OTHERWISE APPROVED ILLUMINATED STREET NAME SIGN SIGNAL MAST ARM ---- NOTES ,✓-'i"-;' : :1 -· RETROREFLECTIVE-�---1 Street Name Sign 1' UNLESS OTHERWISE APPROVED -- STANDARD STREET NAME SIGN 1.FOR ILLUMINATED STREET NAME SIGN SPECIFICATIONS SEE APPENDIX F - TRAFFIC SIGNAL SPECIFICATIONS, SECTION 9.50. 2.FOR STANDARD STREET NAME SIGN SPECIFICATIONS SEE APPENDIX F - TRAFFIC SIGNAL SPECIFICATIONS, SECTION 14.40. 3" ST AN OARD Pl PE . ··• ... . ·· . . ··. ··• ... . ···• .... ··• .....·•··. · •· · ••·· · ••· · ••· ·· ... ·· .. ··. ··. ·· .. · ·. ··. ··· . . . -------------------------- -·•... ··• .... ··. ·· .. ··. ··. ·· .. 0 PELCO PART NO. AP-313O, AP-3O79 OR APPROVED EQUAL I I I I I ,, I VARIES FOR NORTH/SOUTH OR EAST/WEST STREET INCLUDE LETTER DESIGNATION (8" LETTER) BETWEEN LOGO AND STREET NAME -�e C __ 12" TYPICAL SIGN LAYOUT St ]s"24" UNLESS OTHERWISE APPROVED t U) z " - U) w :E cc z I-w w Di:: I-U) ,..,< rn '-'-z <O Vl �_J _J SHEET 19 OF 21 SHEETS NOTES 1.SIGN MAY BE SINGLE-SIDED OR DOUBLESIDED PER ENGINEER'S DIRECTION. 2.SIGN COLOR, LEGEND AND SIZEPER ENGINEER'S DIRECTION. SAMPLE LEGEND ___ ---.,--__ _ -;· .............. ·;-.. i--VARIES =I TYPICAL SIGN LAYOUT SUN HOOD�-- 1-- -LIGHTv....---� SOURCE SIGN FACE------� I',. 1-- VARIES SIDE VIEW GENERAL NOTES 1.SIGN FIXTURE AND PANELS SHALL WITHSTAND 90 MPH WINDLOADING, WITH STRUCTURAL REQUIREMENTS MEETING AASHTO "STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS FOR HIGHWAY SIGNS, LUMINAIRES AND TRAFFIC SIGNALS," LATESTEDITION. 2.HOUSING SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF ALUMINUM UNLESSOTHERWISE DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER. 3.NEOPRENE GASKETS SHALL BE INSTALLED BETWEEN THE SIGNPANEL AND FIXTURE HOUSING TO PREVENT WATER ENTRANCE.SCREENED WEEP HOLES SHALL BE PROVIDED ON HOUSINGBOTTOM FOR DRAINAGE. 4.BLANKO UT REGULATORY /WARNING SIGNS SHALL BE MOUNTED WITH ASTROTYPE MOUNTING BRACKETS. SEE "SIGNAL HEADS AND MOUNTING GENERAL WIRING NOTES" SHEET FORFURTHER DETAIL. 5.BLANKOUT SIGN SHALL BE WIRED AS SPECIFIED IN THEPLANS. NOTES 1.LIGHT SOURCE SHALL BE LIGHT-EMITTING DIODE (LED), PER DIRECTION OF THE ENGINEER. SIGN FACESHALL BE COMPLETELY DARK WHEN NOT ENERGIZED. 2.LIGHT SOURCE SHALL BE READILY ACCESSIBLETHROUGH HINGED DOORS OR SLIDING PANELS. 3.LED'S SHOULD BE WIRED TO INCORPORATE FAULTTOLERANCE OR BYPASS TO ISOLATE LED FAILURES OF A PARTICULAR LED ALLOWING REMAINING LED'S TO OPERATE NORMALLY. 4.HOUSING COLOR PER DIRECTION OF THE ENGINEER. z " Vl _J <[ " I- p z _J I- -<[ z ::::, z 0 a=Vl .c:c�! c:c a= ..I 0 m I-c:c ..I " a= SHEET 20 OF 21 SHEETS IF IF l'¼j J, I •. 0 20 �o Scale: 1 "=20' SIGNAL PHASING '& 2 IS MAIN PHASE MAIN PHASE IS NORTHBOUND '& 1 S/B LEFT TURN '& 2 N/B THROUGH '& 3 W /B LEFT TURN '& 4 E/B THROUGH '& 5 N/B LEFT TURN '& 6 S/B THROUGH '& 7 E/B LEFT TURN '& 8 W/B THROUGH MAIN PHASE IS EASTBOUND '& 1 W /B LEFT TURN '& 2 E/B THROUGH '& 3 N/B LEFT TURN '& 4 S/B THROUGH '& 5 E/B LEFT TURN '& 6 W /B THROUGH '& 7 S/B LEFT TURN '& 8 N/B THROUGH PHASING LAYOUT 7--' 4 ' �r LON MAJOR STREET MINOR STREET NOTES 1.ALL VEHICLE SIGNAL HEADS SHALL BE POLYCARBONATE WITH 12" SECTIONS AND TUNNE L VISORS. 2.ALL VEHICLE AND PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL HEADS SHALL BEBLACK IN COLOR. 3.BACKPLATES WHERE INDICATED SHALL BE LOUVERED TYPE, WITH 2" DIAMOND GRADE FLUORESCENT YELLOWRETROREFLECTIVE TAPE BORDER. R< .• !R\ · .. ·· .. \/ �R) '"-- . //y\ y \ ··• .. / .. / l:r-=i\ tR \ 1\R; ' ----- 1R\ �R )• .... _;··-· . //G\ G ·. . \ • ... J_/ /y\ l::y\,I\• .. /;I\ / ,.--. �y .' ( y� '. " . . -· ·-· . 188 I•· G \�G ' I\ '::./\ ·-· �G \ ( G� '' \ . ·-· ·-· COUNTDOWN SIGNAL HEADS ENGLEWOOD SIGNALIZED INTERSECTION STANDARD WIRING MAIN ::-.. I n.c.r. I MAIN STREET GREEN BALL MAIN STREET YELLOW BALL MAIN STREET RED BALL MAIN STREET LT GREEN ARROW MAIN STREET LT YELLOW ARROW MAIN STREET FLASHING YELLOW ARROW MAIN STREET LT RED ARROW MAIN STREET WALK MAIN STREET DON'T WALK SIDE STREET SIDE STREET GREEN BALL SIDE STREET YELLOW BALL SIDE STREET RED BALL SIDE STREET LT GREEN ARROW SIDE STREET LT YELLOW ARROW SIDE STREET FLASHING YELLOW ARROW SIDE STREET RED ARROW SIDE STREET WALK SIDE STREET DON'T WALK RIGHT TURN RIGHT TURN OL GREEN ARROW RIGHT TURN OL YELLOW ARROW AC-RETURN AC-RETURN AC-RETURN SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE CONDUCTOR COLOR CONDUCTOR II GREEN 4 ORANGE 5 RED 3 BLUE 6 BLACK 1 ORANGE/ GREEN 21 RED/ GREEN 20 GREEN / WHITE 14 RED /WHITE 13 GREEN / BLACK 9 ORANGE/ BLACK 10 RED/ BLACK 8 BLUE/ RED 19 ORANGE/ RED 18 BLACK/ RED 16 RED {2) 24 BLUE/WHITE 15 BLACK/ WHITE 12 BLUE/ BLACK 11 BLACK 121 22 WHITE 2 WHITE (2) 23 WHITE/ BLACK 7 WHITE/ RED 17 GREEN (2) 25 INTERSECTION APPROACH HAND HOLE AND PULLBOX TAPE COLOR WHITE YELLOW YELLOW YELLOW I NORTH EAST SOUTH WEST LEFT TURN PED INDICATION PED PUSH BUTTON RIGHT TURN SPARE 0 @ l J • I •� t> o------f) 1><1 �(D.q@ � ISN � BOR � BOW _i D □ ISi ® 1 :--S:: I I :40• I 30' r, L..J l>CJ IJli,III LEGEND TRAFFIC SIGNAL POLE SPAN WIRE POLE MAST ARM AND POLE TRAFFIC SIGNAL FACE TRAFFIC SIGNAL FACE WITH BACKPLATE TRAFFIC SIGNAL FACE FOR TURNING MOVEMENT PEDESTRIAN SIGNAL FACE PEDESTRIAN PUSH BUTTON & SIGN LUMINAIRE TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONTROLLER & CABINET MAST ARM, POLE MOUNTED SIGN W/IDENTIFIER ILLUMINATED STREET NAME SIGN BLANK-OUT REGULATORY SIGN BLANK-OUT WARNING SIGN METER PEDESTAL PULL BOX (TYPE I ) PULL BOX (TYPE Il) PULL BOX (TYPE III ) PULL BOX (SPECIAL) 30x48 VAULT LOOP DETECTOR (6'x40') LOOP DETECTOR (6'x30') LOOP DETECTOR (6'x6') CAMERA DETECTION RADAR DETECTION ----------• MICRO LOOP DETECTOR W/ SAW CUT LEAD --CONDUIT-SCHEDULE 80 PVC ♦OPTICOM DETECTOR 9 SF-X SCHOOL FLASHING BEACON (TYPE X) J WF WARNING FLASHING BEACON J RF REGULATORY FLASHING BEACON -++tt RADIO ANTENNA ■ • TRAVEL TIME DEVICE PTZ CAMERA <[ De'.<[ � ��s; �..., SHEET 21 OF 21 SHEETS SIGNAL PHASING/STANDARD INTERSECTION WIRING/TYPICAL LEGEND COUNCIL COMMUNICATION TO: Mayor and Council FROM: Will Charles DEPARTMENT: Community Development DATE: March 23, 2020 SUBJECT: Motion to Approve Findings of Fact in Case 2019-12, 3146 South Pennsylvania Street DESCRIPTION: Motion to Approve Findings of Fact in Case 2019-12, 3146 South Pennsylvania Street RECOMMENDATION: City Council is asked to affirm by regular motion the basis for their decision of January 21, 2020, as set forth in the Findings of Fact in Case 2019-12, 3146 South Pennsylvania Street, regarding urban lot development. PREVIOUS COUNCIL ACTION: City Council held a public hearing on the proposed development at 3146 South Pennsylvania Street on January 21, 2020. At that meeting City Council voted 5-2 to permit the construction of a one-unit dwelling on a vacant urban lot. SUMMARY: On October 22, 2019, the Planning and Zoning Commission unanimously approved Case 2019- 12 of onea construction permit to -South 3146 at lot urban vacant a dwelling unit on Pennsylvania Street. An appeal of this decision was then filed within the statutory time frame which led to a De Novo review by City Council. On January 21, 2020 after a public hearing, City Council voted 5-2 to permit construction of a one-unit dwelling on a vacant urban lot at 3146 South Pennsylvania Street based upon the criteria found within the Unified Development Code Section 16-9-4. Findings of Fact are a record of how and why the majority of City Council reached the final decision in a case. Conclusions drawn by the dissenting opinion are not incorporated into Findings of Fact. Therefore in this hearing, the Findings are written to demonstrate how each criteria listed within Section 16-9-4 of the Unified Development Code have been met. The Findings of Fact will be incorporated into the record and act as the facts and conclusions of Case 2019-12. ATTACHMENTS: Findings of Fact 1 CITY OF ENGLEWOOD CITY COUNCIL Council Members Present: Olson, Sierra, Anderson, Cuesta, Russell, Wink, Stone Council Members Absent: None This matter came before the Englewood City Council on January 21, 2020, in the City Council Chambers of the Englewood Civic Center upon an appeal, filed by Ellen Hertzman, of the Planning and Zoning Commission’s decision in Case #2019-02, 3146 South Pennsylvania Street, Urban Lot Development. Testimony was received from the applicant, Mark Swezy, staff and seven citizens Written information in the form of a Council Communication, Planning and Zoning Commission Findings of Fact, and supporting documentation were incorporated into the record. After considering the statements of the witnesses and reviewing the pertinent documents, members of the Englewood City Council made the following Findings and Conclusions. FINDINGS OF FACT 1. THAT the Public Hearing was initiated upon an appeal of the Planning and Zoning Commission’s decision in Case #2019-12, 3146 South Pennsylvania Street, Urban Lot Development filed by Ellen Hertzmann. 2. THAT notice of the Public Hearing was published on the official City of Englewood website from January 2, 2020 through January 21, 2020, and published in the Englewood Herald on January 9, 2020. 3. THAT Englewood City Council approved Ordinance 45, Series 2014 on September 2, 2014 amending the City’s Unified Development Code and establishing the Urban Lot designation. IN THE MATTER OF THE APPEAL OF CASE #2019-12 3146 SOUTH PENNSYLVANIA STREET, URBAN LOT DEVELOPMENT INITIATED BY: Ellen Hertzman 3140 South Pennsylvania Street Englewood, Colorado 80113 ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) FINDINGS OF FACT AND CONCLUSIONS OF THE CITY OF ENGLEWOOD CITY COUNCIL 2 4. THAT public testimony was received by staff, the applicant, and seven members of the public. 5. THAT the lot cannot otherwise be used for any purpose permitted within the zone district applicable to the property. The only use for the property is residential. The property meets the law established by the City of Englewood. 6. THAT the waiver, or modification, if granted, is necessary to afford relief with the least modification of the development or dimensional standards otherwise applicable to the property. There are no waivers or modifications requested. 7. THAT the proposed development is consistent with the spirit and intent of the Comprehensive Plan. It meets all aspects of the Comprehensive Plan. The Comprehensive Plan has balance. The proposed development helps people live and invest in order to stay in Englewood. 8. THAT the lot coverage, bulk plane, height, setbacks, and massing of the proposed development will not vary substantially from the surrounding properties or alter the essential character of the neighborhood. The proposed site plan and elevations comply with the lot coverage, height, bulk plane, and setbacks. The proposed development will improve a currently vacant lot in the neighborhood. 9. THAT the proposed development is compatible with the established development patterns and intent of the zone district. There is another property in the neighborhood that meets the bulk plane, maximum height, and lot width. The houses on the block are single-family homes, which binds them together as a neighborhood. CONCLUSION THAT a majority of City Council concurred with the Findings of the Planning and Zoning Commission in Case #2019-12, 3146 South Pennsylvania Street, Urban Lot Development, and voted approve the proposed development at 3146 South Pennsylvania Street. 3 DECISION MOTION: TO APPROVE THE PROPOSED DEVELOPMENT AT 3146 SOUTH PENNSYLVANIA Moved by Sierra; Seconded by Wink Vote: Motion passed (summary: Yes=5 No=2) Yes: Olson, Sierra, Anderson, Wink, Stone No: Cuesta, Russell Absent: None Abstain: None Motion passed. These decisions and Findings of Fact and Conclusion are effective as of January 21, 2020. BY ORDER OF THE ENGLEWOOD CITY COUNCIL Linda Olson, Mayor ATTEST: Stephanie Carlile, City Clerk COUNCIL COMMUNICATION TO: Mayor and Council FROM: Vance Fender DEPARTMENT: Police DATE: March 23, 2020 SUBJECT: CB #11 - 2nd IGA amendment between Arapahoe County 911 Authority and COE DESCRIPTION: CB #11 - 2nd IGA amendment between Arapahoe County 911 Authority and COE RECOMMENDATION: The Police Department is recommending that the City Council approve an ordinance authorizing a Second Amendment to an Intergovernmental Agreement between the Arapahoe County 911 Authority and the City of Englewood. PREVIOUS COUNCIL ACTION: The original Intergovernmental Agreement between the Arapahoe County 911 Authority and the City of Englewood was approved in 1988. The first amendment to this agreement was made in 2000. SUMMARY: The City of Englewood may, by ordinance, enter into cooperative agreements with other governmental bodies to furnish or receive governmental services The Arapahoe County 911 Authority is statutorily authorized to enter into agreements for the purpose of providing emergency telephone service, and emergency notification services and to impose municipal partner 19 are There emergency (the charge telephone an "ETC). corporations or special districts, including the City of Englewood, that are part of the Arapahoe County 911 Authority. The changes to the Intergovernmental Agreement established through this Second Amendment are outlined in the "Analysis" section. ANALYSIS: Background on the Authority and the 911 fee. The Authority is authorized by C.R.S. § 29-11-102 to impose an emergency telephone charge, commonly known as the “911 fee.” The 911 fee is imposed monthly on each wireless, wireline, and VoIP telephone line in the Authority’s service area. The 911 fee is currently set at $0.70 per telephone line. The Authority also collects a fee on the sale of prepaid wireless minutes pursuant to C.R.S. § 29-11-102.5. The Authority uses the revenue collected from the 911 fee and the prepaid wireless fee to help fund 911 service and emergency communications in Arapahoe County. 911 fee revenue may only be spent in accordance with C.R.S. § 29-11-104. C.R.S. § 29-11-102 allows the Authority to increase the 911 fee up to $0.70. To increase the 911 fee above $0.70, the Authority must file an application with the Colorado Public Utilities Commission (the “PUC”) and obtain the PUC’s approval for the higher rate. In its review of an application to increase the 911 fee, the PUC generally looks to ensure that an applicant’s use of the 911 fee revenue is consistent with C.R.S. § 29-11-104 and that proposed increase in the 911 fee is in the public interest. Members of the public have an opportunity to provide comments or intervene in the proceeding. The Authority is governed by a board of directors (the “Board”) comprised of five members. All five members are appointed by the Arapahoe County Board of County Commissioners (the “BOCC”), but they must appoint two members from a list of persons nominated by the fire departments in Arapahoe County and two members from a list of persons nominated by law enforcement agencies in Arapahoe County. The fifth member is appointed at the discretion of the BOCC. The Board hired an executive director to run the Authority’s day-to-day business. The proposed IGA The Authority’s current intergovernmental agreement is titled the First Amended Intergovernmental Agreement for the Establishment of an Emergency Communications Service Authority (the “First Amended IGA”) and was executed in the year 2000. A copy of the First Amended IGA is attached. The Authority proposes amending that intergovernmental agreement by adoption of a Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement (the “Second Amendment to the IGA”). A copy of the proposed Second Amendment to the IGA is attached. The Authority desires that the parties to the First Amended IGA approve and adopt the Second Amendment to the IGA. The Second Amendment to the IGA has several important changes. Increases to the 911 fee First and foremost, the Second Amendment to the IGA enables the Authority to seek a 911 fee in excess of $0.70 without obtaining the prior approval of the parties. Under the First Amended IGA, the Authority must obtain the approval of two-thirds (2/3) of the parties (see Section VIII of the First Amended IGA). This requirement is in addition to obtaining the approval of the PUC, which is required by statute. The Authority’s Board believes it is appropriate to eliminate the requirement of obtaining approval of the parties prior to increasing the 911 fee above $0.70. The Board is comprised of members appointed by the BOCC and largely nominated by first responders – so the Board is accountable to the Authority’s stakeholders. The Board is also advised by a technical committee comprised of persons responsible for 911 in their agencies. And any increase in the 911 fee above $0.70 must be approved by the PUC. Interested persons have the opportunity to have their voices heard before the PUC, and the PUC does a rigorous analysis of whether the proposed increase is warranted. Lobbying and legislation Second, the Second Amendment to the IGA allows the Authority to participate in political lobbying activities, which was prohibited by the First Amendment (see Section IX of the First Amendment to IGA). In the past several years, the state and federal legislatures have dealt with issues addressing 911 and emergency communications. Some of the bills considered – particularly at the state level – would have had a negative impact on the Authority and 911/emergency communications in Arapahoe County. The Authority was opposed to those bills but was concerned with how to express that concern given the prohibition on political lobbying activities. The Board believes it is vital that Arapahoe County is represented when the legislation is presented that might impact 911 in Arapahoe County. Removing the prohibition clarifies that the Authority can take positions on legislation and be involved in developing state and federal 911 policy. The Authority does not anticipate hiring a lobbyist, but the Authority believes that flexibility is important. Other 911 authorities across the state have discussed jointly hiring a lobbyist to represent the 911 community’s interests. If appropriate, the Authority might be interested in participating in such an effort, although there are no plans to do so at this time. In the past, the Authority has worked with lobbyists for the Colorado Municipal League, Colorado Association of Chiefs of Police, and the County Sheriffs of Colorado. However, those entities to do not represent 911 interests directly – so there is no replacement for the Authority being directly involved in these matters. Name Change The Authority proposes to change its name from the Arapahoe County E-911 Emergency Communications Service Authority to the Arapahoe County 911 Authority. Other Changes Minimal There are various other changes to the language of the intergovernmental agreement, but they are minor. The process for nominating and appointing directors will remain generally the same as it currently is. FINANCIAL IMPLICATIONS: There are no negative financial implications to the City. The Arapahoe County 911 Authority funds the equipment in the Englewood Police 911 Communications center. They also fund numerous projects to include the City's county wide common Computer Aided Dispatch ALTERNATIVES: The City Council may choose not to approve this amendment to the existing IGA. CONCLUSION: Staff recommends approving this second amendment to the original Intergovernmental Agreement. ATTACHMENTS: Council Bill #11 Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement -1- BY AUTHORITY ORDINANCE NO. COUNCIL BILL NO. 11 SERIES OF 2020 INTRODUCED BY COUNCIL MEMBER _______________ A BILL FOR AN ORDINANCE AUTHORIZING AN INTERGOVERNMENTAL AGREEMENT ENTITLED ”SECOND AMENDED INTERGOVERNMENTAL AGREEMENT FOR THE ESTABLISHMENT OF AN EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS SERVICE AUTHORITY” BETWEEN BENNETT FIRE PROTECTION DISTRICT, TOWN OF BOW MAR, BYERS FIRE PROTECTION DISTRICT, SOUTH METRO FIRE RESCUE, CITY OF CENTENNIAL, CITY OF CHERRY HILLS VILLAGE, TOWN OF COLUMBINE VALLEY, CUNNINGHAM FIRE PROTECTION DISTRICT, TOWN OF DEER TRAIL, DEER TRAIL FIRE PROTECTION DISTRICT, TOWN OF FOXFIELD, CITY OF GLENDALE, CITY OF GREENWOOD VILLAGE, CITY OF LITTLETON, SABLE-ALTURA FIRE PROTECTION DISTRICT, CITY OF SHERIDAN, STRASBURG FIRE PROTECTION DISTRICT AND THE CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO PERTAINING TO THE ARAPAHOE COUNTY E- 911 EMERGENCY TELEPHONE SERVICE AUTHORITY. WHEREAS, in 1988 the parties entered into an intergovernmental agreement (IGA) for the establishment of the Emergency Telephone Service Authority which established the Arapahoe County E-911 Emergency Telephone Service Authority; WHEREAS, in 1988 the IGA was entered into pursuant to the authority granted by Section 29- 1-203, C.R.S. and Section 29-11-104(1), C.R.S.; WHEREAS, in 2000 the parties entered into a First Amended Intergovernmental Agreement for the Establishment of an Emergency Communications Service Authority, which superseded the original 1988 IGA; WHEREAS, due to changes in fact, circumstances, technology and the law since the parties entered into the 2000 First Amended IGA, the parties to this intergovernmental agreement wish to amend the 2000 IGA to comport with Colorado law and carry out the purposes and intentions of the parties to the agreement; and WHEREAS, this Agreement establishes a separate legal entity known as the “Arapahoe County E-911 Emergency Service Authority” as an enterprise, the authority is exempt from all revenue and spending limits imposed by Amendment 1, and shall be responsible for administering the installation, operation, maintenance, upgrade and enhancement of emergency communications services to the parties of this agreement. -2- NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT ORDAINED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO, AS FOLLOWS: Section 1. The “Second Amended Intergovernmental Agreement For The Establishment Of An Emergency Communications Service Authority” attached hereto as “Exhibit A,” is hereby accepted and approved by the City Council of the City of Englewood, Colorado. Section 2. The Mayor is authorized to execute and the City Clerk to attest and seal the “Second Amended Intergovernmental Agreement For The Establishment Of An Emergency Communications Service Authority” for and on behalf of the City of Englewood, Colorado. Introduced, read in full, and passed on first reading on the 23rd day of March, 2020. Published by Title as a Bill for an Ordinance in the City's official newspaper on the 26th day of March, 2020. Published as a Bill for an Ordinance on the City's official website beginning, on the 25th day of March, 2020. Linda Olson, Mayor ATTEST: Stephanie Carlile, City Clerk I, Stephanie Carlile, City Clerk of the City of Englewood, Colorado, hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true copy of the Ordinance passed on first reading and published by title as Ordinance No. ___, Series of 2020. Stephanie Carlile Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement Effective March 1, 2020 i Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement Table of Contents Article 1. The Authority .................................................................................................................. 2 Section 1.01 Continuation of the Authority as a Separate Legal Entity ................................... 2 Section 1.02 Name of the Authority ......................................................................................... 2 Section 1.03 Status of the Authority ......................................................................................... 3 Section 1.04 Boundaries of the Authority ................................................................................. 3 Section 1.05 Purpose of the Authority ...................................................................................... 3 Section 1.06 Powers of the Authority ........................................................................................ 3 Section 1.07 Obligations of the Authority ................................................................................ 5 Section 1.08 Authority Assets .................................................................................................... 5 Section 1.09 Obligations of the Parties ..................................................................................... 5 Article 2. Board of Directors ........................................................................................................... 5 Section 2.01 Board of Directors ................................................................................................ 5 Section 2.02 General Standards of Conduct for Directors ....................................................... 6 Section 2.03 Number of Directors ............................................................................................ 6 Section 2.04 Appointment of Directors .................................................................................... 6 Section 2.05 Directors’ Terms ................................................................................................... 7 Section 2.06 Resignations, Removals, and Vacancies ............................................................... 7 Section 2.07 Officers of the Board ............................................................................................ 8 Section 2.08 Meetings................................................................................................................ 8 Section 2.09 Quorum and Voting ............................................................................................. 8 Section 2.10 Participation by Electronic Means ........................................................................ 8 Section 2.11 Compensation ...................................................................................................... 8 Section 2.12 Committees .......................................................................................................... 8 Article 3. Term and Termination of this Agreement ...................................................................... 8 Section 3.01 Term ..................................................................................................................... 8 Section 3.02 Termination .......................................................................................................... 8 Article 4. General Provisions ........................................................................................................... 9 Section 4.01 Parties ................................................................................................................... 9 Section 4.02 Amendments ...................................................................................................... 10 Table of Contents (continued) Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement ii Section 4.03 Further Assurances ............................................................................................. 10 Section 4.04 Notices ................................................................................................................ 10 Section 4.05 Governing Law ................................................................................................... 10 Section 4.06 Venue.................................................................................................................. 10 SECTION 4.07 WAIVER OF RIGHT TO JURY TRIAL ...................................................................... 10 Section 4.08 Relationship of the Parties ................................................................................. 10 Section 4.09 Force Majeure ..................................................................................................... 11 Section 4.10 Entire Agreement ............................................................................................... 11 Section 4.11 Waiver................................................................................................................. 11 Section 4.12 Severability .......................................................................................................... 11 Section 4.13 Third Party Beneficiaries .................................................................................... 11 Section 4.14 Counterparts ....................................................................................................... 11 Section 4.15 Rules of Construction ........................................................................................ 11 1 Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement This Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement (this “Agreement”) is effective March 1, 2020 (the “Effective Date”), by and among the following parties (each a “Party” and collectively the “Parties”): 1. Arapahoe County, a Colorado county (“Arapahoe County”) acting by and through its Board of County Commissioners (the “Arapahoe BOCC”); 2. Bennett Fire Protection District, a special district; 3. Town of Bow Mar, a municipal corporation; 4. Byers Fire Protection District, a special district; 5. South Metro Fire Rescue Fire Protection District, a special district; 6. City of Centennial, a municipal corporation; 7. City of Cherry Hills Village, a municipal corporation; 8. Town of Columbine Valley, a municipal corporation; 9. Cunningham Fire Protection District, a special district; 10. Town of Deer Trail, a municipal corporation; 11. Deer Trail Fire Protection District, a special district; 12. City of Englewood, a municipal corporation; 13. Town of Foxfield, a municipal corporation; 14. City of Glendale, a municipal corporation; 15. City of Greenwood Village, a municipal corporation; 16. City of Littleton, a municipal corporation; 17. Sable-Altura Fire Protection District, a special district; 18. City of Sheridan, a municipal corporation; and 19. Strasburg Fire Protection District, a special district. Capitalized terms are defined throughout this Agreement. Recitals A. The Parties are bodies politic and corporate located wholly or partially within Arapahoe County, Colorado. Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement 2 B. In 1988, certain of the Parties and others entered into that certain Intergovernmental Agreement for Establishment of the Emergency Telephone Service Authority (the “Original IGA”), which created the Arapahoe County E-911 Emergency Telephone Service Authority (the “Authority”). C. In 2000, certain of the Parties and others entered into that certain First Amended Intergovernmental Agreement for the Establishment of an Emergency Communications Service Authority (the “First Amended IGA”), which superseded the Original IGA. D. Pursuant to Part 1 of Article 11 of Title 29, C.R.S. (the “Emergency Telephone Service Law”), the Parties have the authority to enter into agreements for the purpose of providing emergency telephone service and emergency notification services and to impose an emergency telephone charge (the “ETC”). E. Part 2 of Article 1 of Title 29, C.R.S., encourages and authorizes governmental entities to make the most efficient and effective use of their powers and responsibilities by cooperating and contracting with other governmental entities. Specifically, C.R.S. § 29-1-103.5 authorizes the establishment of a separate legal entity for those purposes. F. The Parties desire to amend and restate the provisions of the Original IGA and the First Amended IGA as set forth herein. G. Article XVII of the First Amended IGA permits amendments upon the affirmative vote of at least two-thirds (2/3) of the parties to the First Amended IGA, provided that a majority of the population in the Authority’s jurisdiction reside within the jurisdictional boundaries of the parties that voted in favor of the amendment. H. This Agreement will become effective as of the Effective Date upon a resolution of the Authority’s board of directors (the “Board”) confirming that the parties to the First Amended IGA complied with Article XVII thereof. Agreement Now, therefore, in consideration of the recitals and the mutual promises set forth herein, the Parties agree as follows: Article 1. The Authority Section 1.01 Continuation of the Authority as a Separate Legal Entity. The Authority created under the Original IGA and continued under the First Amended IGA shall remain in existence and continue as a separate legal entity, subject to the provisions of this Agreement. Section 1.02 Name of the Authority. The name of the Authority shall be the Arapahoe County 911 Authority. Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement 3 Section 1.03 Status of the Authority. (a) Separate Legal Entity. The Authority is a separate legal entity established in accordance with C.R.S. § 29-1-203.5. As such, the Authority is a political subdivision and public corporation of the State of Colorado and is separate from the Parties. (b) Open Meetings. The Authority is a “local public body” under C.R.S. § 24-6-402 and the Authority’s meetings shall be conducted in accordance with the provisions thereof. (c) Governmental Immunity. The Authority is a “public entity” pursuant to the Colorado Governmental Immunity Act, Article 10 of Title 24, C.R.S. (“CGIA”), and shall be operated in accordance with the CGIA. (d) Open Records. As a political subdivision of the State of Colorado, the Authority is subject to the Colorado Open Records Act, Part 2 of Article 72, Title 24, C.R.S. (e) Default Contractual Provisions. As permitted by C.R.S. § 24-101-105(2), the Authority shall be deemed to have adopted, and shall be subject to (as if the Authority were the state), the provisions of C.R.S. § 24-106-109. Section 1.04 Boundaries of the Authority. The jurisdictional boundaries of the Authority shall be comprised of the following, as may be changed from time to time: (a) the unincorporated portions of Arapahoe County; (b) those portions of Arapahoe County which are incorporated into a Party’s jurisdiction; and (c) those portions of adjacent counties (i) that are incorporated into a Party’s jurisdiction and (ii) in which the Authority collects the ETC. Section 1.05 Purpose of the Authority. The purpose of the Authority is to support 9-1-1 service (including emergency telephone service, emergency notification service, and basic emergency service) in the Authority’s jurisdiction in accordance with the Emergency Telephone Service Law and other applicable law. “9-1-1” means a three-digit number to facilitate the reporting of an emergency requiring response by a public safety agency. Section 1.06 Powers of the Authority. (a) Emergency Telephone Service Law. (i) Generally. The Authority is a “governing body” under the Emergency Telephone Service Law. (ii) Emergency Telephone Charge. (1) Amount of the ETC. The Authority shall set the amount of the ETC pursuant to the Emergency Telephone Service Law, including C.R.S. § 29-11-102(2). (2) Annual Determination of ETC Rate. In accordance with the Emergency Telephone Service Law, including C.R.S. § 29-11-103(3), the Authority shall annually establish the amount of the ETC such that, together with any surplus revenues carried forward, the ETC will produce sufficient revenues to fund the Authority’s authorized expenditures. Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement 4 (3) Handling of ETC Revenue. Monies collected from the ETC (“ETC Funds”) shall be kept in accordance with the Emergency Telephone Service Law, including C.R.S. § 29-11-104(3). (4) Use of ETC Revenue. ETC Funds shall be spent solely as authorized by the Emergency Telephone Service Law, including C.R.S. § 29-11-104(2). (b) Additional Authority. In order to enable the Authority to exercise its rights and perform its obligations, and subject to and in accordance with applicable law, the Authority shall have the power and authority to do all of the following: (i) conduct its business and affairs for the benefit of the Parties and their residents; (ii) enter into, make, and perform contracts of every kind; (iii) adopt rules and regulations regarding the exercise of its powers and the carrying out of its purposes; (iv) incur debts, liabilities, and obligations; (v) borrow money and make, accept, endorse, execute, issue, and deliver notes and other obligations of the Authority for monies borrowed, or in payment for property acquired, or for any of the other purposes, services, or functions contemplated by this Agreement; (vi) secure the payment of any Authority obligation by mortgage, pledge, deed, indenture, agreement, or other collateral instrument, or by lien upon or assignment of all or any part of the properties, rights, assets, contract, easements, revenues, and privileges of the Authority; (vii) issue bonds, notes, or other obligations payable from the revenues derived or to be derived from the ETC; (viii) acquire, hold, lease (as lessor or lessee), sell, or otherwise dispose of any legal or equitable interest in real or personal property; (ix) apply for and receive grants in its own name; (x) engage, employ, or appoint agents or service providers, including accountants, architects, attorneys, consultants, employees, engineers, executive directors, and managers, and to pay the direct and indirect reasonable costs for services rendered to the Authority; (xi) purchase insurance; (xii) litigate, arbitrate, and / or mediate in its own name; (xiii) participate in administrative proceeding before the state or federal government and advocate for or against issues before legislative or administrative bodies; (xiv) receive contributions of gifts, grants, or services; and Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement 5 (xv) exercise any additional power or authority, not inconsistent with this Agreement, that is necessary or appropriate to carry out the intent of this Agreement. Section 1.07 Obligations of the Authority. (a) Annual Budget. Unless the financial activities of the Authority are fully reported in the budget of one of the Parties, the Authority shall annually prepare a budget in accordance with the Local Government Budget Law of Colorado, Part 1 of Article 1 of Title 29, C.R.S. (b) Distribution of Funds. The Board may establish policies and procedures for the distribution and expenditure of the Authority’s funds, including of ETC Funds. (c) Books and Records. The Authority shall maintain adequate and correct accounts of its funds, properties, and business transactions. The Authority’s accounts shall be open to inspection at any reasonable time by the Parties, their attorneys, and their authorized agents. (d) Audit. Unless the financial activities of the Authority are fully reported in the audit of one of the Parties, the Authority shall cause to be made an annual audit of the financial statements of the Authority for each fiscal year, which audit shall be conducted by an independent certified public accountant licensed to practice in the State of Colorado and which shall be conducted in accordance with the Colorado Local Government Audit Law, Part 6 of Article 1 of Title 29, C.R.S., and § 29-11-104(5), C.R.S. (e) Compliance with Law. The Authority shall comply with any applicable law or regulation. If the Authority’s performance of an obligation imposed by this Agreement would result in the Authority’s violation of an applicable law, the Authority shall take a course of action that, in its reasonable determination, would carry out the intent of this Agreement while not violating the law. Section 1.08 Authority Assets. Any assets, goods, or services received or purchased by the Authority shall be owned by the Authority, unless the Board determines otherwise. Section 1.09 Obligations of the Parties. If the Authority provides, makes available, or transfers ownership of assets, goods, or services purchased using ETC Funds (“ETC Assets”) or ETC Funds to a Party, the recipient-Party shall only use such ETC Assets or ETC Funds in accordance with: (a) any conditions imposed by the Authority; (b) any written policies of the Authority then in effect; (c) any agreements between the Authority and the Party; and (d) the Emergency Telephone Service Law. Article 2. Board of Directors Section 2.01 Board of Directors. All powers of the Authority shall be exercised by or under the authority of, and the business and affairs of the Authority shall be managed under the direction of, the Authority’s board of directors (the “Board”), in which all administrative and legislative power of the Authority is vested. Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement 6 Section 2.02 General Standards of Conduct for Directors. (a) Standard. Each director of the Board (a “Director”) shall discharge the Director’s duties as a Director: (i) in good faith; (ii) with the care an ordinarily prudent person in a like position should exercise under similar circumstances; (iii) in a manner the Director reasonably believes to be in the best interests of the Authority; and (iv) otherwise in accordance with applicable law. (b) Reliance on Experts. In discharging his or her duties, a Director is entitled to rely on information, opinions, reports, or statements, including financial statements and other financial data, if prepared or presented by one or more of the following persons or groups: (i) one or more employees of any Party whom the Director reasonably believes to be reliable and competent in the matters presented; and (ii) legal counsel, public accountant, or another person as to matters that the Director reasonably believes to be within such person’s professional or expert competence. (c) Knowledge. A Director is not acting in good faith if the Director has knowledge concerning the matter in question that makes reliance otherwise permitted by Section 2.02(b) unwarranted. (d) Liability for Actions. A Director shall not be liable as such to the Authority or any Party for any action taken, or omitted to be taken, as a Director performing the duties of the position in compliance with this Section 2.02. Nothing in this Section 2.02 shall modify or lessen any protection or limitation of liability afforded to Directors under applicable law. Section 2.03 Number of Directors. The Board shall be comprised of five Directors appointed as set forth in Section 2.04. Section 2.04 Appointment of Directors. (a) Law Enforcement Directors. The Arapahoe BOCC shall appoint two Directors (each, a “Law Enforcement Director”) from the nominees submitted by the Parties that operate law enforcement agencies, provided that each Party entitled to nominate a candidate for a Law Enforcement Director vacancy may only submit one nominee per vacancy. (b) Fire Protection Directors. The Arapahoe BOCC shall appoint two Directors (each, a “Fire Protection Director”) from the nominees submitted by the Parties that operate fire protection/fire rescue agencies, provided that each Party entitled to nominate a candidate for a Fire Protection Director vacancy may only submit one nominee per vacancy. (c) At-Large Director. The Arapahoe BOCC shall appoint one Director in its discretion (an “At-Large Director”). (d) Nomination Procedure. Each nomination for a Director candidate shall be in writing. The Board may specify reasonable deadlines for the submission of nominations. (e) Director Qualifications. A Director must be at least 18 years old and must either (i) reside in the Authority’s jurisdiction (as determined in Section 1.04) or (ii) be employed by a Party. Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement 7 (f) Existing Directors. The five existing Directors serving as of the Effective Date (the “Existing Directors”) shall remain as Directors immediately after the Effective Date to finish their Terms, provided that two Existing Directors’ Terms shall expire in 2020, two Existing Directors’ Terms shall expire in 2021, and the final Existing Director’s Term shall expire in 2022. The Board shall identify which Existing Director’s Term expires in which year. Section 2.05 Directors’ Terms. (a) Generally. Each Director may serve an unlimited number of three year terms (each, a “Term”). Each Term shall expire on the last day of February of the third year of the Term; provided, however, that a Director shall remain in office until his or her successor is appointed (unless the Director resigns or is removed pursuant to this Agreement). (b) Staggered Terms. (i) In 2020, one Law Enforcement Director and one Fire Protection Director shall be appointed. (ii) In 2021, one Law Enforcement Director and one Fire Protection Director shall be appointed. (iii) In 2022, one At-Large Director shall be appointed. Section 2.06 Resignations, Removals, and Vacancies. (a) Resignations of Directors. A Director may resign at any time by giving written notice to the Board Chair. Such resignation shall take effect at the time specified therein and, unless otherwise specified therein, the acceptance of such resignation shall not be necessary to make it effective. (b) Removal of Directors. (i) Removal by Board. A Director may be removed for cause (as determined in the reasonable discretion of the Board) by the unanimous affirmative vote of the remaining Directors (i.e., all the Directors except the Director being removed); provided, however, that the unanimous affirmative vote of the remaining Directors totals at least three Directors. A Director removed under this Section 2.06(b)(i) may not be reappointed as a Director. (ii) Removal by the Arapahoe BOCC. The Arapahoe BOCC may remove: (1) a Law Enforcement Director upon receipt of notice of the affirmative vote of a majority of the Parties that operate law enforcement agencies; and (2) a Fire Protection Director upon receipt of notice of the affirmative vote of a majority of the Parties that operate fire protection/fire rescue agencies. The Arapahoe BOCC may remove an At-Large Director in the Arapahoe BOCC’s discretion. (c) Vacancies on the Board. A vacancy occurring on the Board shall be filled in accordance with Section 2.04. Any person appointed to fill a vacancy shall complete the prior Director’s Term. Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement 8 Section 2.07 Officers of the Board. The Board shall annually elect one Director to each of the following officer positions: (a) chair of the Board (the “Board Chair”); (b) vice-chair of the Board; (c) secretary of the Board; and (d) treasurer of the Board. Each elected officer shall perform the duties incident to the office to which he or she was elected. A Director may serve in more than one officer position simultaneously. The Board may remove and replace an officer at any time for any reason. An officer may resign at any time. Section 2.08 Meetings. (a) Regular Meetings. The Authority shall hold at least two regular meetings per year. The Board may hold additional regular meetings as it deems necessary. (b) Special Meetings. Special meetings of the Board may be called by (i) the Board Chair or (ii) any three Directors. Section 2.09 Quorum and Voting. A quorum for the transaction of business shall be present if the number of Directors present at a meeting equals or exceeds the majority of the Directors in office immediately before the meeting, but in no case less than two Directors. The vote of a majority of the Directors present at a meeting at which a quorum is present shall be the act of the Board. No Director may vote or act by proxy at any meeting of the Board. Section 2.10 Participation by Electronic Means. Directors may participate in a meeting of the Board by means of telephone conference or similar communications equipment by which all persons participating in the meeting can hear each other at the same time. Such participation shall constitute presence at the meeting. Section 2.11 Compensation. Directors shall not receive compensation for their services as such, although the reasonable expenses incurred by a Director in performance of official duties may be paid or reimbursed by the Authority. Directors shall not be disqualified from receiving reasonable compensation for services rendered to or for the benefit of the Authority in any other capacity. Section 2.12 Committees. By one or more resolutions, the Board may establish one or more committees. The normal role of a committee is to consider matters of concern to the committee and to make recommendations thereon to the Board. A committee shall not have any authority to bind the Board or the Authority. The chair and membership of any such committee shall be appointed by the Board on an annual basis or as the Board deems advisable. Unless a future termination date is specified by resolution, a committee shall exist until disbanded by the resolution of the Board. There is no requirement that a Director serve on a committee. Article 3. Term and Termination of this Agreement Section 3.01 Term. This Agreement shall be in full force and effect from the Effective Date, subject to any amendments, until terminated as provided for herein. Section 3.02 Termination. (a) This Agreement may be terminated, and the Authority wound-up and dissolved, upon the affirmative written consent of at least two-thirds (2/3) of the Parties, provided that a Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement 9 majority of the population in the Authority’s jurisdiction also resides within the jurisdictional boundaries of the Parties consenting to the termination. The effective date of termination shall be one year after the affirmative written consent is signed by the requisite number of Parties. (b) Upon termination of this Agreement, (i) the Authority shall remain in existence to wind up its business affairs and then shall cease to exist, (ii) the Authority’s ETC Assets and ETC Funds, net of any of the Authority’s outstanding liabilities, shall be distributed to the Parties in a manner that is fair to all Parties and that preserves the provision of 9-1-1 service in the Authority’s jurisdiction, as determined by the Board in its reasonable discretion, and (iii) if a Party provided specific, identifiable property to the Authority and the Authority retains such property upon termination, the Authority shall return such property to the Party that provided it. Article 4. General Provisions Section 4.01 Parties. (a) Adding Additional Parties. A body politic and corporate within the State of Colorado may become a Party to this Agreement by (i) obtaining the approval of the Board and (ii) executing a signature page signifying its acceptance of all the provisions of this Agreement. Among other considerations, the Board shall consider the potential Party’s connection to 9-1-1 service in Arapahoe County. (b) Changes to the Parties. (i) Merger of Parties. If two Parties merge or combine, the surviving or new entity shall be deemed a Party to this Agreement without further action. (ii) Merger with Non-Party. If a Party merges or combines with a non-Party, the surviving or new entity may only become a Party in accordance with Section 4.01(a). (iii) Dissolution of a Party. A Party which dissolves or is wound up, whether due to merger or combination with another entity or otherwise, will no longer be considered a Party to this Agreement effective upon a resolution of the Board acknowledging the dissolution or winding up. (c) Withdrawal of a Party. (i) Right to Withdraw. A Party may withdraw from this Agreement by providing written notice to the Authority on or before May 1 of any year; notice provided after May 1 shall be deemed given the following year. A Party’s withdrawal shall be effective on December 31 of the year in which notice was given and, upon such date, the Party shall no longer be considered a Party to this Agreement. (ii) Treatment of ETC Assets and ETC Funds. The Authority may provide or make available assets or services purchased using ETC Funds to a withdrawing Party after the effective date of withdrawal in the Authority’s sole discretion. If the Authority provides or makes available ETC Assets to a withdrawing Party after withdrawal, the withdrawing Party shall continue to comply with Section 1.09 for so long as such ETC Assets are provided or made available. If the Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement 10 Authority transferred ownership of ETC Assets or ETC Funds to a Party and the Party subsequently withdraws, the Party shall retain ownership of such ETC Assets and ETC Funds and shall continue to comply with Section 1.09 after withdrawal. (iii) Treatment of Specific Property. If a withdrawing Party provided specific, identifiable property to the Authority and the Authority retains such property upon the Party’s withdrawal, the Authority shall return such property to the Party that provided it; provided that, if requested by the Authority before the effective date of withdrawal, the withdrawing Party shall make the property available for 9-1-1 or emergency communication related use by the Authority and/or the other Parties after withdrawal. Section 4.02 Amendments. Any amendment to this Agreement will be effective only if in writing and approved and signed by at least two-thirds (2/3) of the Parties, provided that a majority of the population in the Authority’s jurisdiction also resides within the jurisdictional boundaries of the Parties consenting to the amendment. Section 4.03 Further Assurances. Each Party shall execute all further documents and take all further acts reasonably necessary or appropriate to carrying out the intent of this Agreement. Section 4.04 Notices. Any notices given hereunder shall be in writing and deemed given (a) one business day after sent via email, (b) three business days after mailed, first class postage prepaid, or (c) immediately upon hand delivery. Notices shall be delivered to the chief law enforcement or fire protection officer of the Parties or, in the case of Arapahoe County, to the chairperson of the Arapahoe BOCC. Notices to the Authority shall be delivered to the Board Chair. Section 4.05 Governing Law. This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Colorado, without regard to such jurisdiction’s conflict of laws principles. Section 4.06 Venue. An action brought by any Party or the Authority to interpret or enforce any provision of this Agreement may be brought only in a state court located in Arapahoe County, Colorado. Each Party submits to the jurisdiction and venue of such courts and waives any objection to which it otherwise might be entitled regarding such jurisdiction or venue. Section 4.07 WAIVER OF RIGHT TO JURY TRIAL. EACH PARTY AND THE AUTHORITY HEREBY WAIVE ANY RIGHT IT HAS OR MAY HAVE TO A JURY TRIAL IN ANY ACTION, SUIT, OR PROCEEDING ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT. Section 4.08 Relationship of the Parties. (a) Nothing in this Agreement creates a joint venture or partnership between or among: (i) the Parties, or any of them; (ii) the Authority; and/or (iii) any third party. (b) Neither any Party nor the Authority: (i) will be liable for the debts, liabilities, or obligations of the others; (ii) is acting as the agent or partner of the others or will hold itself out as such; or (iii) has the authority to bind the others. Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement 11 Section 4.09 Force Majeure. Neither any Party nor the Authority will be considered in default under this Agreement to the extent that their performance is delayed or prevented by fire, flood, hurricane, tornado, earthquake, other natural disasters, riot, war, terrorism, labor disputes, civil strife, or other event outside the reasonable control of the performing Party or Authority. Section 4.10 Entire Agreement. This Agreement states the entire agreement among the Parties with respect to the subject matter of this Agreement and supersedes and replaces all previous discussions, negotiations, and agreements, including the Original IGA and the First Amended IGA. Section 4.11 Waiver. The failure of any Party or the Authority to insist upon the performance of any provision of this Agreement or to exercise any right or privilege granted to such Party or the Authority under this Agreement will not be construed as waiving such provision or any other provision of this Agreement. Section 4.12 Severability. If any provision of this Agreement is held to be invalid or unenforceable, then the provision shall, if practicable, be modified or amended by the court to render it enforceable to the maximum extent permitted; if modification or amendment is not practicable, then the provision shall be severed from this Agreement with no effect upon the remaining provisions of this Agreement. Section 4.13 Third Party Beneficiaries. No provision of this Agreement is intended, nor shall it be interpreted, to provide or create any third party beneficiary rights or any other rights of any kind in any person except the Parties and the Authority. Section 4.14 Counterparts. This Agreement may be executed and delivered in counterparts (including by means of electronic signatures), all of which taken together will constitute one and the same agreement. Section 4.15 Rules of Construction. (a) Numbered Sections. Unless otherwise stated, a reference to any section will be construed as a reference to the entire section identified, including any subsections thereof. (b) Headings. The headings in this Agreement are for convenience of reference only and will be ignored for purposes of construing and interpreting this Agreement. (c) Citations to Statutes. Any citation to one or more statutes in this Agreement shall be interpreted as a citation to those statutes as they may be amended from time to time. (d) Including. The words “including” and “includes” shall be interpreted to mean “including without limitation” and “includes without limitation.” [signature page follows] Signature Page to the Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement 12 In witness whereof, the Parties are executing this Agreement to signify their acceptance of all the provision set forth herein, to be effective as of the Effective Date regardless of the actual date of signature. Attest: Arapahoe County, acting by and through its Board of County Commissioners By: __________________________________ By: _________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Name: ______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Title: _______________________________ Date: ________________________________ Date: _______________________________ Signature Page to the Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement 13 Attest: Bennett Fire Protection District By: __________________________________ By: _________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Name: ______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Title: _______________________________ Date: ________________________________ Date: _______________________________ Approved as to legal form: By: __________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Date: ________________________________ Signature Page to the Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement 14 Attest: Town of Bow Mar By: __________________________________ By: _________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Name: ______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Title: _______________________________ Date: ________________________________ Date: _______________________________ Approved as to legal form: By: __________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Date: ________________________________ Signature Page to the Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement 15 Attest: Byers Fire Protection District By: __________________________________ By: _________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Name: ______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Title: _______________________________ Date: ________________________________ Date: _______________________________ Approved as to legal form: By: __________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Date: ________________________________ Signature Page to the Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement 16 Attest: South Metro Fire Rescue Fire Protection District By: __________________________________ By: _________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Name: ______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Title: _______________________________ Date: ________________________________ Date: _______________________________ Approved as to legal form: By: __________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Date: ________________________________ Signature Page to the Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement 17 Attest: City of Centennial By: __________________________________ By: _________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Name: ______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Title: _______________________________ Date: ________________________________ Date: _______________________________ Approved as to legal form: By: __________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Date: ________________________________ Signature Page to the Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement 18 Attest: City of Cherry Hills Village By: __________________________________ By: _________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Name: ______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Title: _______________________________ Date: ________________________________ Date: _______________________________ Approved as to legal form: By: __________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Date: ________________________________ Signature Page to the Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement 19 Attest: Town of Columbine Valley By: __________________________________ By: _________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Name: ______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Title: _______________________________ Date: ________________________________ Date: _______________________________ Approved as to legal form: By: __________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Date: ________________________________ Signature Page to the Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement 20 Attest: Cunningham Fire Protection District By: __________________________________ By: _________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Name: ______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Title: _______________________________ Date: ________________________________ Date: _______________________________ Approved as to legal form: By: __________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Date: ________________________________ Signature Page to the Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement 21 Attest: Town of Deer Trail By: __________________________________ By: _________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Name: ______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Title: _______________________________ Date: ________________________________ Date: _______________________________ Approved as to legal form: By: __________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Date: ________________________________ Signature Page to the Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement 22 Attest: Deer Trail Fire Protection District By: __________________________________ By: _________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Name: ______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Title: _______________________________ Date: ________________________________ Date: _______________________________ Approved as to legal form: By: __________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Date: ________________________________ Signature Page to the Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement 23 Attest: City of Englewood By: __________________________________ By: _________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Name: ______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Title: _______________________________ Date: ________________________________ Date: _______________________________ Approved as to legal form: By: __________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Date: ________________________________ Signature Page to the Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement 24 Attest: Town of Foxfield By: __________________________________ By: _________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Name: ______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Title: _______________________________ Date: ________________________________ Date: _______________________________ Approved as to legal form: By: __________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Date: ________________________________ Signature Page to the Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement 25 Attest: City of Glendale By: __________________________________ By: _________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Name: ______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Title: _______________________________ Date: ________________________________ Date: _______________________________ Approved as to legal form: By: __________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Date: ________________________________ Signature Page to the Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement 26 Attest: City of Greenwood Village By: __________________________________ By: _________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Name: ______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Title: _______________________________ Date: ________________________________ Date: _______________________________ Approved as to legal form: By: __________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Date: ________________________________ Signature Page to the Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement 27 Attest: City of Littleton By: __________________________________ By: _________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Name: ______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Title: _______________________________ Date: ________________________________ Date: _______________________________ Approved as to legal form: By: __________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Date: ________________________________ Signature Page to the Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement 28 Attest: Sable-Altura Fire Protection District By: __________________________________ By: _________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Name: ______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Title: _______________________________ Date: ________________________________ Date: _______________________________ Approved as to legal form: By: __________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Date: ________________________________ Signature Page to the Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement 29 Attest: City of Sheridan By: __________________________________ By: _________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Name: ______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Title: _______________________________ Date: ________________________________ Date: _______________________________ Approved as to legal form: By: __________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Date: ________________________________ Signature Page to the Second Amended and Restated Arapahoe County 911 Authority Intergovernmental Agreement 30 Attest: Strasburg Fire Protection District By: __________________________________ By: _________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Name: ______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Title: _______________________________ Date: ________________________________ Date: _______________________________ Approved as to legal form: By: __________________________________ Name: _______________________________ Title: ________________________________ Date: ________________________________ a COUNCIL COMMUNICATION TO: Mayor and Council FROM: Wade Burkholder DEPARTMENT: Community Development DATE: March 23, 2020 SUBJECT: Resolution to Establish Short Term Rental Fees DESCRIPTION: Resolution to Establish Short Term Rental Fees RECOMMENDATION: Staff recommends that City Council approve by Resolution the proposed short term rental fees. PREVIOUS COUNCIL ACTION: On February 18, 2020, City Council adopted Council Bills 47 and 04 establishing permitted zone districts and licensing regulations for short term rentals within the City Englewood. The effective date of the new regulations is April 1, 2020. SUMMARY: Sections 5-31-5 and 5-31-9 of the Englewood Municipal Code require fees be associated with the issuance of the Registration and Operating Permit and potential Board of Adjustment and Appeals Waiver for short term rentals. Fees are to be established by action of the Englewood City Council, and the fees will be set forth within the City's Fee and Rate Schedule upon approval of this Resolution. ANALYSIS: The Registration and Operating Permits associated with Business and Licensing regulations for short term rentals must incorporate the costs incurred by the following actions by the City of Englewood: 1. Cost of the private agency retained to monitor short term rental hosting platforms ($6,000/year), 2. Community Development Department staff tasked with reviewing and approving short term rental registrations, 3. Finance Department staff tasked with reviewing, approving, issuing and monitoring short term rental business permits, 4. Code Enforcement staff tasked with property inspections and regulation, and 5. Building Division and/or Fire staff tasked with property inspections and monitoring. Therefore, the recommended amendment to the Fee Schedule is for a Registration and Operating Permit fee of $300 per short term rental property, and an application fee for a waiver to the Board of Adjustment and Appeals (BOAA) in the amount of $150. The Registration and Operating Permit fee is proposed to be an annual fee, while the waiver fee is a one-time application fee to appear before the BOAA. FINANCIAL IMPLICATIONS: Based upon the number of estimated Registration and Operating Permits (75), the annual revenue generated with this fee at $300 is $22,500. By utilizing LodgingRevs for the past several months and prior to enforcement measures taken, the maximum number of properties with short term rental listings was 75; thus the rationale for the estimated annual revenue. Revenues generated through business licensing and taxes for short term rentals are estimated below. Please note: these are existing fees and are not proposed to change with the Resolution as presented. The following is informational only: • Hotel/Motel Lodging Business License: $100 per year ($7,500) • Tax License: $25 every other year ($1,875) • Lodging Sales Tax: 2%* • Standard Sales Tax: 3.5%* *Sales and lodging tax scenario based on $100 per night for 175 nights at 75 properties ($17,500 x 75 = 1,312,500 x .055) equates to $721,188 annually, plus the licensing fees of $9,375. In May, staff will request City Council to approve an additional 3% lodger's tax, increasing the current 2% rate to 5% based upon Council direction at the March 2, 2020 Study Session. The fee for the waiver request of $150 is consistent with application fees for variance requests that are heard by the Board of Adjustment and Appeals. For comparison purposes, fees for land development applications range from a Planned Unit Development (PUD) application of $1,500 to $100 for Property Combination Subdivisions. ATTACHMENTS: Resolution 1 RESOLUTION NO. ___ SERIES OF 2020 A RESOLUTION ADOPTING THE 2020 FEE AND UTILITY RATE SCHEDULE FOR THE CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO. WHEREAS, Englewood Municipal Code requires many service, license and permit fees to be set by Ordinance, Resolution or motion of the City Council; WHEREAS, the City Council of the City of Englewood regularly reviews, updates and approves the Service, License and Permit Fees and Utility Rates of the City of Englewood, Colorado; and WHEREAS, the City Council desires to incorporate all such established Fees and Rates into a single Fee Schedule which may be reviewed and/or updated on an annual, or as needed, basis. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO, THAT: SECTION 1. ADOPTION. The 2020 Schedule of Service, License and Permit Fees and Utility Rates (Schedule) is hereby approved for use within the corporate limits of the City of Englewood, Colorado. SECTION 2. INCORPORATION AS ATTACHMENT A. One (1) copy of the Schedule is attached hereto and incorporated herein. SECTION 3. PUBLIC RECORD. This schedule shall be open to inspection and available to the public at all reasonable hours. SECTION 4. INCORPORATION OF ADOPTED FEES. All Service, License and Permit Fees previously adopted by Ordinance, Resolution or regular motion of the Governing Body of the City of Englewood, not currently incorporated into Attachment A, and not in conflict with, amended or repealed by action of approval of Attachment A, shall be incorporated into the Schedule. SECTION 5. REPEAL. All Service, License and Permit Fees, or portions thereof, inconsistent or conflicting with this Schedule as set forth within Attachment A, which were set by Resolution or regular motion, are hereby repealed to the extent of such inconsistency or conflict. Utility rates, or any other costs, set by Ordinance are not affected by this Repealer Clause. ADOPTED AND APPROVED this 23rd day of March, 2020. Linda Olson, Mayor 2 Attest: Stephanie Carlile, City Clerk I, Stephanie Carlile, City Clerk for the City of Englewood, Colorado, hereby certify the above is a true copy of Resolution No. __, Series of 2020. ______________________________ Stephanie Carlile, City Clerk COUNCIL COMMUNICATION TO: Mayor and Council FROM: Maria D'Andrea DEPARTMENT: Public Works DATE: March 23, 2020 SUBJECT: 2020 Storm Water Drainage Utility Fund Budget Supplemental Appropriation DESCRIPTION: 2020 Storm Water Drainage Utility Fund Budget Supplemental Appropriation RECOMMENDATION: Staff recommends that the City Council approve the attached resolution for a 2020 budget supplemental appropriation in the amount of $77,831.00 for operational staffing needs within the Storm Water Drainage Utility Fund. PREVIOUS COUNCIL ACTION: The City Council adopted the 2020 budget for the Stormwater Fund, with the understanding that additional information would be forthcoming on staffing, program and project needs for 2020 and beyond. Staff presented the draft Stormwater Master Plan initially on February 10, 2020. As a part of that discussion, staff discussed the need for the two positions identified in this request. In a subsequent discussion with the City Council regarding the Stormwater Master Plan on March 9, 2020, a prioritized list of projects and programs that total more than $40 million over the next several years was presented. It is necessary to have staff commensurate with the level of programming & projects which will be undertaken. AN ALYSIS: Funds have been allocated in the annual Storm Water Program operating budget for a certain number of staff positions to assist in carrying out & overseeing the program. The Storm Water Master Plan identified a higher level of staffing than what is currently in the operating budget. At this time, staff is not recommending that those additional positions be implemented until further analysis on outsourcing those programs can be accomplished. However, when evaluating the overall staffing level & makeup of the Utilities Department, staff has determined that a net 1.75 additional positions be created. One position would be for a MS4 (Municipal Separated Storm Sewer System) Technician. This is a state-mandated permit/program that requires each municipality to establish and maintain a stormwater program focused on education & outreach, illicit discharge detection & elimination, post-construction stormwater management/water quality of development sites, and pollution prevention. Creating this position will allow for a "credit" of 0.5 of the existing Utilities Engineer position towards this new position. This will allow the newly created MS4 Technician position to fully carry out all aspects of the MS4 program and allow the Utilities Engineer to focus his duties on water & sanitary sewer projects. 75% of the Administrative Assistant position will be dedicated to contract administration & administrative assistance, given the impending project & program workload. These positions have been included in the rate study analysis as a part of the on-going, annual operating costs. The attached graphic shows the existing and requested, additional staffing within the Stormwater Division. FINANCIAL IMPLICATIONS: Position # of FTEs Total Cost General Fund Storm Water Fund Water Fund Sewer Fund MS4 Technician 1 $95,000.00 - 1 (0.25) (0.25) Admin. Assistant 1 $80,000.00 0.25 0.75 - - Total 2 $175,000.00 0.25 0.75 (0.25) (0.25) Net new positions = 1.75 Total Costs General Fund 2020 Public WorksBudget Storm Water Fund 2020 Budget Water Fund 2020 Budget Sewer Fund 2020 Budget Engineer IV (Current Employee) [A] $154,339.00 $77,169.00 $38,585.00 $38,585.00 Engineer IV (Current Employee) $0.00 ($77,169.00) $38,584.50 $38,584.50 MS4 Technician (New 1 FTE) [B] $95,000.00 $95,000.00 Admin. Assistant (New .75 FTE) [C] $80,000.00 $20.000.00 $60,000.00 $0.00 $0.00 Total 1=A+B+C $329,339.00 $20,000.00 $155,000.00 $77,169.50 $77,169.50 2020 Budget [D] $154,339.00 $77,169.00 $38,585.00 $38,585.00 Absorbed within 2020 Budget [E] $97,169.00 $20,000.00 $0.00 $38,584.50 $38,584.50 2020 Net Supplemental [F] $77,831.00 $0.00 $77,831.00 $0.00 $0.00 Total 2=D+E+F $329,339.00 $20,000.00 $155,000.00 $77,169.50 $77,169.50 The credits in 2020 from the Water & Sewer Funds will be costs to the Storm Water Drainage Utility Fund in 2021 & after. Source of Funds: General Fund-Public Works Administration expenditures $20,000.00 Water Fund-Credit for Partial FTE Expenditure-Funds Available Balance $38,584.50 Sewer Fund-Credit for Partial FTE Expenditure-Funds Available Balance $38,584.50 Storm Water Drainage Fund - Funds Available Balance $77,831.00 Total $175,000.00 Use of Funds: General Fund-Public Works Administration expenditures $20,000.00 Storm Water Drainage Fund - Expenditures $155,000.00 (1.75 full time storm water utility positions) ALTERNATIVES: Presenting supplemental requests for review and approval aligns to City past practices. These supplemental appropriations for 2020 are presented for Council's consideration at this time because the total expenditures for the year for these items were not known at the time of the 2020 budget was approved. CONCLUSION: Staff recommends appropriating $77,831.00 for these positions in accordance with the attached resolution. ATTACHMENTS: Resolution Stormwater Division Staffing MS4 Permit Fact Sheet 1 RESOLUTION NO. ____ SERIES OF 2020 A RESOLUTION APPROVING A SUPPLEMENTAL APPROPRIATION TO THE 2020 BUDGET WHEREAS, the City of Englewood is required by City Charter to ensure that expenditures do not exceed legally adopted appropriations; WHEREAS, the 2020 Budget was submitted and approved by the Englewood City Council on October 21, 2019; WHEREAS, the City’s professional staff has evaluated the staffing needs for the Storm Water Utility, the oversight for which was recently assigned to the Public Works Department, and recommends additional staffing to deliver the programs and projects for the utility at a net cost of $77,831.00. WHEREAS, the recent rate increase to the Storm Water Drainage Utility fund supports this appropriation. WHEREAS, re-appropriation of funds for 2020, including those listed above are hereby presented for the consideration and approval of City Council. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO, AS FOLLOWS: Section 1. The Budget for the City of Englewood, Colorado, is hereby amended for the year ending 2020, as follows: 2020 SUPPLEMENTAL APPROPRIATION SOURCES AND USES OF FUNDS: Source of Funds: General Fund - Public Works Administration Expenditures $20,000.00 Water Fund – Funds Available Balance $38,584.50 Sewer Fund – Funds Available Balance $38,584.50 Storm Water Drainage Fund – Funds Available Balance $77,831.00 Use of Funds: General Fund - Public Works Administration Expenditures $20,000.00 Storm Water Drainage Fund - Expenditures $155,000.00 (1.75 full time storm water utility positions) MS4 Technician – 1 FTE ($95,000) Administrative Assistant – 0.75 FTE ($60,000-Storm Water)* Remaining 0.25 FTE from General Fund Section 2. The City Manager and the Director of Finance are hereby authorized to make the above changes to the 2020 Budget for the City of Englewood. 2 ADOPTED AND APPROVED this _____ day of March, 2020. Linda Olson, Mayor ATTEST: _ Stephanie Carlile, City Clerk I, Stephanie Carlile, City Clerk for the City of Englewood, Colorado, hereby certify the above is a true copy of Resolution No. ____, Series of 2020. Stephanie Carlile, City Clerk Storm Water Program Staffing Position(s) in 2020 Budget # of Positions Maintenance Technician –small storm sewer cleaning 2.0 Project Engineer 1.0 Utility Locate Specialist 0.2 GIS Technician 0.2 Director 0.1 Total-Current 3.5 Additional Position Requests –2020 # of Positions MS4 Technician 1.0 Credit:Utilities Engineer (50% currently paid by Stormwater Fund)(0.5) Administrative Asst./Contract Administration*0.75 Total-Additional (Net)1.75 *0.25 of Admin. Asst. position will be paid for from the General Fund Stormwater runoff occurs when precipitation from rain or snowmelt flows over the ground. Impervious surfaces like driveways, sidewalks and streets prevent stormwater from naturally soaking into the ground. Stormwater can pick up debris, trash, chemicals, dirt, and other pollutants and flow into a storm sewer system or directly to a lake, stream, river or wetland. Municipal storm sewer systems are designed to drain excess stormwater or snow melt from streets, parking lots and sidewalks. Municipal storm sewer systems are made up of storm drains, usually cuts in curbs, which flow through underground pipes to a local waterway. Anything that enters the storm sewer system is discharged untreated into waterways used for swimming, Municipal separate storm sewer systems (MS4s) are systems of storm sewers, gutters, storm drain inlets and similar features that are owned by cities, counties and other governmental entities. They collect and discharge stormwater to local waterbodies. of pollution and need a permit. MS4 permits are issued by the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment, Water Quality Control Division. The division regulates point sources of pollution from pipes and drains that flow directly from municipalities to a state water. Permits expire every five years, but can be administratively extended. The MS4 permits authorize all discharges from the MS4 not just stormwater. The MS4 permits require MS4 permittees to develop and run a program to control stormwater discharges to the MS4. The permits do not typically set numeric limits for discharges from stormwater outfalls into state waters. Permits also include control measures for MS4 permittees that have a wasteload allocation in a total maximum daily load (TMDL). A TMDL is the maximum amount of a pollutant that can be received by a waterbody and still meet water quality standards. In other words, a TMDL is a pollution diet for a waterbody. What is stormwater? Why can it be a problem? fishing and providing drinking water. Municipal storm sewer systems in Colorado do not flow to sewage treatment plants. Polluted stormwater runoff can have adverse effects on plants, fish, animals and people. Sediment can cloud the water and make it difficult or impossible for aquatic plants to grow. Excess nutrients can cause algal blooms. Debris and trash can choke, suffocate, or disable aquatic life like ducks, fish, turtles and birds. Household hazardous wastes like insecticides, pesticides, paint, solvents, used motor oil and other auto fluids can poison aquatic life. Polluted stormwater can also affect drinking water sources, affecting human health and increasing drinking water treatment costs. Required control measures/best management practices (BMPs): Public education and outreach. Public involvement and participation. Illicit discharge detection and elimination. Construction sites. Post-construction stormwater management in new development and redevelopment. Pollution prevention/good housekeeping for municipal operations. Wet weather monitoring (applies to medium & large MS4s only). Industrial facilities. What is included in an MS4 permit? CONTACT Lisa Knerr, Permits Unit 1 303-692-3004 | lisa.knerr@state.co.us ONLINE INFORMATION www.colorado.gov/cdphe/wq-municipal-ms4-permits www.colorado.gov/cdphe/total-maximum-daily-loads-tmdls Municipal separate storm sewer system permits typically do not include numeric limits, but instead require municipalities to implement a stormwater program with practice-based limits also known as control measures (which includes BMPs) to control pollutants from getting into stormwater. Another unique feature of MS4 permits is the division’s use of the “maximum extent practicable” or MEP standard when setting permit requirements. The MEP standard is an iterative process meant to continually adapt to current conditions and BMP effectiveness while striving to attain water quality standards. In plain language, the division interprets the term “maximum extent” to mean that the standard was not intended to be the minimum, or the average, or a single maximum, but a maximum that can be achieved by permittees operating a compliant stormwater program. The MEP standard recognizes that there are municipalities that implement programs beyond the MEP standard. This is consistent with the goal of establishing a standard that all municipalities can and must implement. Permittees are not tasked with setting the MEP standard. The division sets the requirements of the MEP standard in permits. The division iteratively refines the MEP standard and updates permit requirements through the routine permit review and renewal process. The division considers applicable laws and regulations, audits and screenings of municipalities covered under MS4 permits, stakeholder input, MS4 permits in effect issued by other permitting authorities (states and EPA) and published studies (e.g., information on green infrastructure, etc.). The public is welcome and encouraged to comment on the draft permit when it is out for public notice. The public can also contact the permit writer during the permit renewal process to ask questions and/or provide additional information. How is an MS4 permit different from a traditional permit? How can you get involved? The process for writing permits includes these steps: 1. Draft the permit a. Receive the application and review for completeness. b. Contact the permittee to obtain updated information, obtain additional data and hold a meeting with permittee to address any major issues. c. Draft the permit and related documents. 2. Public Notice a. Send an official notice of the draft permit to the permittee and publish notice of the draft permit. b. Answer questions from the permittee and the public. c. Notice and hold a public meeting as required (or requested). 3. Permit Issuance a. Review and compile comments. b. Draft responses to comments and changes to permit documents. c. Issue permit. d. Allow 30 days for an appeal. e. Permit becomes effective 30 days after issuance. Public education and outreach The public education and outreach program should inform citizens and businesses about stormwater pollution and illicit discharges. The program should inform citizens of steps they can take to reduce stormwater pollution, such as properly disposing of trash as well as applying pesticides and fertilizers so that excess lawn care chemicals do not wash into local waterways during the next rainstorm. Public involvement and participation Permittees use this program to offer citizens an opportunity to comment on their municipalities ’ stormwater program and participate in its implementation. One example is a hotline that citizens can call if they see dirt on roadways from construction sites that may wash into a local stream. Illicit discharge detection and elimination Illicit discharges enter a MS4 through the curb and gutter system. Stormwater and all pollutants picked up in curbs and gutters flow directly to local waterways. Permittees use this program to respond to reports of illicit discharges and clean up potential pollutants such as used motor oil, grass clippings, leaves, grease from restaurants and dirty wash water from power washing sidewalks. Construction sites Discharges from construction sites can include pollutants such as sediment, fuel and oil, and trash and other solid wastes. Permittees use the construction sites component of their stormwater program to require construction sites that are one acre or more to install and maintain measures to control and reduce dirt and other pollutants from discharging to local waterways. Post-construction stormwater management in new development and redevelopment It is usually less expensive to remove pollutants from stormwater before it enters the MS4 rather than to treat polluted stormwater after it is discharged to a state water. The program requires a control measure to control stormwater pollution once construction is complete. The program applies to new development and redevelopment that is one acre or more. Slowing the stormwater flow allows dirt and other pollutants to settle out of stormwater before discharging the cleaner stormwater into local waterways. Pollution prevention and good housekeeping for municipal operations Most permittees have municipal yards where vehicles and materials, such as roadway salt and sand are stored. Uncontrolled stormwater flowing off of municipal yards can pick up dirt, salt and other chemicals and deposit the pollutants into a local waterway. Permittees use this component of their stormwater program to implement procedures to prevent/reduce the exposure of potential pollutants to stormwater. For example, permittees will cover salt and sand piles, conduct employee training on the proper operation and maintenance of the MS4, and sweep the yard of any trash or other potential pollutants and control illicit discharges. Wet weather monitoring Some MS4 permittees are required to monitor at least one stream during wet weather events. Industrial facilities Although the division permits stormwater discharges from industrial facilities directly, some MS4 permittees are required to conduct some activities for industrial facilities that they determine are adding a significant amount of pollutants to the MS4. Most programs include educating industrial facilities and reminding them not to pollute stormwater. COUNCIL COMMUNICATION TO: Mayor and Council FROM: Maria D'Andrea DEPARTMENT: Public Works DATE: March 23, 2020 SUBJECT: Formation of a Citizen Advisory Committee related to the Organized Garbage Collection Initiative DESCRIPTION: Formation of a Citizen Advisory Committee related to the Organized Garbage Collection Initiative RECOMMENDATION: Staff recommends that the City Council evaluate the attached list and select participants for the committee. PREVIOUS COUNCIL ACTION: On April 22, 2019, staff presented a Study Session item to the City Council on single source trash hauling. One of the recommended next steps was to form a citizen advisory group to further investigate hauler options and/or perform outreach in the form of a survey & neighborhood meetings to solicit input from the community on this topic. On June 24, 2019, staff presented a Study Session item to the City Council which recommended a strategy to solicit input from citizens, waste haulers, and the general public as well as obtain actual prices for providing various service options. This information was to then be presented to the City Council for consideration around December 2019. On January 6, 2020, the City Council directed staff to solicit citizens for a citizen's advisory committee which would be responsible for providing Council with recommendations regarding upcoming decisions about trash hauling services in the city. SUMMARY: The intent of this citizen's committee is to: • Assist staff with reviewing the proposals received from waste haulers in response to a formal Request for Proposals (RFP) for single trash hauling service within the city; and • Make recommendations to the City Council on next steps in the process The total commitment is approximately 4-5 meetings over a 2-3 month period. Nineteen citizens have applied to participate on the committee. ANALYSIS: The Communications Division solicited potential candidates for the committee via social media and information on the city's website. Nineteen (19) citizens have applied to participate on the committee, (see attached). When the committee was discussed at the January 6, 2020 Study Session, the Council desired a group of about 11 people. That number can be modified, as desired. Staff does not have a recommendation on selection of the committee members but would suggest selecting applicants that represent all four districts, at a minimum. FINANCIAL IMPLICATIONS: N/A CONCLUSION: Staff recommends that the City Council determine the makeup of the committee and direct staff to reach out to the participants regarding next steps. ATTACHMENTS: Citizen Applicant List #First Name Last Name Address Years in City District 1 Geoff Frazier 2898 S Grant St 3.5 1 2 Matt Adams 2831 S Logan St 7 1 3 Cheryl Stewart 3106 S Lincoln St 7 1 4 Christine Brinker 3046 S Washington St 9 1 5 Sara Harkness 163 E Dartmouth Ave 12 1 6 Marcy Brown 2980 S Sherman St 20 1 7 Carson Green 295 E Amherst Ave 20 1 8 Coween Dickerson 2835 S Pennsylvania St 22 1 9 Kanji Kawanabe 3240 S High St 3 2 10 Felicia Laib 3980 S Cherokee St 1.5 3 11 Keith Liao 1812 E Girard Pl 8 3 12 Brenda Hubka 3639 S Fox St 19 3 13 Debbie Waddill 4372 S Lincoln St Native 3 14 Amy deBruin 3365 W Chenango Ave 3 4 15 Patrick Lewis 3895 S Acoma St 3 4 16 Steve Ward 4620 S Delaware St 9 4 17 Dave Borman 4570 S Huron St 10 4 18 Chris Shure 4690 S Huron St 13 4 19 Hedy Anselman 4840 S Elati St 40 4 XI. EMERGENCY PREPAREDNESS/CITY COUNCIL MEETING PARTICIPATION A. PURPOSE The purpose of this City Council Policy is to specify the circumstances under which City Council may meet in whole, or in part, through electronic means during times of City identified emergency, crisis, or pandemic. The Mayor, or designee, in consultation with the City Manager, may declare a local health emergency. A health emergency shall be a condition arising from pandemic or extreme local contagion (as identified by the CDC, CDPHE, or TCHD), which immediately endangers the public health, and requires temporary emergency meeting protocols to be instituted. Upon declaration of a local health emergency the provisions of this policy shall be activated. This Policy shall remain in effect until rescinded, or otherwise modified, by the Mayor, or designee, in consultation with the City Manager. When a pandemic, health emergency, or potential health threat is recognized by the CDC, the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment (CDPHE), or the Tri-County Health Department (TCHD), one or more of those entities will issue guidance on how best to prepare and respond. The City Manager will consider this guidance when deciding whether to temporarily close public buildings, scale back City services, or cancel public meetings and events in order to lessen the spread of the illness. Other factors which may influence the City Manager’s decision include absenteeism rates for the City's internal workforce, and/or temporary closure of the Englewood schools. If City buildings or facilities are closed to the general public, City employees are still required to report to work unless directed to remain at home by the City Manager, or designee, or the employee’s Department Director. The City Manager, or designee, may designate one location with limited access to the general public so that essential City business can continue. B. POLICY In the event a quorum is unable to meet at the day, hour, and place fixed by the rules and procedures of the City Council because meeting in-person is not practical or prudent due to a health pandemic or emergency affecting the City, meetings may be conducted by telephone, electronically, or by other means of communication so as to provide maximum practical notice to the public. Meetings may be held by telephone, electronically, or by other means of communication if all of the following conditions are met: 1. The City Manager, or the Mayor, determines that meeting in person is not practical or prudent, because of a health pandemic or declaration of emergency affecting the City; 2. All members of the City Council can hear one another or otherwise communicate with one another, and can hear or read all discussion and testimony in a manner designed to provide maximum notice and participation; 3. Members of the public present at the regular meeting location can hear or read all discussion, testimony and votes, unless not feasible due to the pandemic or emergency; 4. At least one member of the City Council is present at the regular meeting location, unless not feasible due to the pandemic or emergency declaration; 5. All votes are conducted by roll call; 6. Minutes of the meeting are taken and promptly recorded, and such records are open to public inspection; 7. To the extent possible, full and timely notice is given to the public setting forth the time of the meeting, the fact that some members of the City Council may participate by telephone, and methods/means for the public to monitor the meeting either from another location, or electronically; 8. If a meeting can not be simultaneously monitored by members of the public the meeting agenda shall be limited to matters that are critical to the immediate functioning of the City; and 9. Quasi-judicial hearings shall not be conducted unless a full quorum, and all interested parties, are able to meet in person. C. Telephonic or electronic participation shall constitute actual attendance for purposes of establishing a quorum or for any other purpose. D. Electronic Participation by Non-Council Members. Employees of the City who are necessary to the meeting, but do not need to be on premises during the meeting, may participate in a meeting of the Council by telephone or other electronic means. For all other persons, telephonic or electronic participation shall be made available in association with City licensing authority.